JP6500858B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering a starting opening provided in the gaming board, and the lottery result is displayed by a symbol etc. It is known to notify in a notification mode to keep the fairness of the game.

JP 2012-147965 A

  In such a gaming machine, it is required to reduce the damage caused by illegal gaming.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing damage caused by illegal gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a launcher capable of launching game balls to the gaming area, and a launch intensity variable means capable of changing the launch intensity emitted by the launcher by the operation of the player. A first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a second flow path through which the game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, a ball entry means through which the game ball can enter , and the ball entry The judgment means capable of executing judgment when the game ball enters the means, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and the identification information on the display means Dynamic display means for dynamic display, dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the determination result specific to the display means When the identification information to indicate is stopped and displayed, Advantageously and the benefits game execution unit capable of executing the benefits game to become a person, specific to game balls flowing down the second flow path during a period in which the benefits game by the award game execution means is executed becomes possible ball entrance The ball entering means, the specific area where the game ball entered into the specific ball entering means can enter, and the bonus giving means for giving the player an advantageous advantage when the game ball enters the specific area And privilege type determination means for determining the type of the privilege to be awarded by the privilege giving means, and the game sphere being guided to the particular ball entry means at a position where the game ball can be guided to the particular ball entry means Adjustment means capable of reducing the amount of flow for a predetermined period, and until the specific entering means becomes enterable after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed Of the game ball to the second channel After firing fart said adjusting means are those constituted shorter than the period until reaching the specific ball entrance means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , there are provided a launcher capable of launching the gaming ball to the gaming area, a launch intensity variable unit capable of changing the launch intensity launched by the launcher by the operation of the player, The first flow path which can flow down, the second flow path where the gaming ball which has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, the ball entry means which can enter the game ball, and the ball is the ball entry means A determination means capable of performing a determination when entering a ball, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and a motion for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information Display means, dynamic display mode determination means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification for indicating the determination result specific to the display means When the information is stopped and displayed, it is advantageous for the player to And executable benefits game execution means a game, the specific ball entrance means a game ball flowing down the second flow path during a period in which the award game is running becomes possible ball entrance by the award game execution means, the A specific area where the game ball entered into the specific ball entry means can enter the ball, a benefit giving means for giving an advantageous advantage to the player when the game ball enters the specific area, and the benefit giving means Bonus type determination means for determining the type of the benefit provided by the game player, and the flow amount for a predetermined period of the game ball guided to the specific ball entry means at a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means comprising an adjusting unit capable of reducing the said period from said identification information to indicate a particular judgment result is displayed stopped until the specific ball entrance means allows ball entrance, the first After the game ball is fired to 2 channels Are those constituted shorter than the period until reaching the specific ball entrance means fart an integer unit.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the illegal game can be suppressed and the damage due to the illegal game can be reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 1st aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 2nd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in a 3rd aspect. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of a back base. It is a rear view of a front base and an irradiation unit. It is a rear view of a front base. FIG. 35 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base and the irradiation unit in the arrow XXXVI direction view of FIG. 34. It is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a slot formation member. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. (A) is a rear view of a projection unit, (b) is a partially expanded sectional view of the projection unit in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line | wire of FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partial enlarged sectional views of a projection unit. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. (A) is a top view of an irradiation unit, (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the arrow XLIVb direction view of Fig.44 (a). (A) is a back view of the irradiation unit in the arrow XLVa direction view of Fig.44 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the irradiation unit in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG.44 (b). (A) is a front view of the first block, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block taken along line XLVIb-XLVIb in FIG. 46 (a), (c) is a front view of the second block (D) is a cross-sectional view of the second block along the line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in a 1st position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in a 2nd position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the first position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in a 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the coupling member in the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the coupling member in the intermediate position, and (c) is the transmission in the second position It is a rear view of a gear and a connection member. (A) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connection member in the first drive range. (A) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the up-and-down displacement unit in the LIXa-LIXa line of FIG. 54, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the up-and-down displacement unit in the LIXb-LIXb line of FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional schematic view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56. FIG. 60 (a) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove forming member in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove along line LXb-LXb in FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. (A) is a front view of a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove forming member in the third embodiment, and (b) is a projection plate member, a gear member and a groove taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a formation member. (A) is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the arrow LXVa direction view of FIG. 64 (a), and (b) is a projection plate at line LXVb-LXVb of FIG. It is a sectional view of a member, a gear member, and a slot formation member, and (c) is a sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a slot formation member in the LXVc-LXVc line of Drawing 65 (a). (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (A) is a partial expansion schematic diagram of the projection unit in the 1st block vicinity, (b) is a partial expansion schematic diagram of the projection unit in the 2nd block vicinity. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a second state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a first state, and (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a third state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state which assembled the front base and the irradiation unit. (A) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (A) And (b) is a timing chart showing the gaming state and the contents of effects in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect contents of the jackpot effect 1 in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the effect contents of the jackpot middle effect 2 in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect contents of the jackpot effect 3 in the first control example, (b) is a timing chart showing another example of the effect contents of the jackpot middle effect 1 in the first control example It is. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of an effect for additionals displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example being started, (b) is a figure in the 1st control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of big hit continuation production among the effects for a top displayed by 3 symbol display devices. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the number of rounds is added among the effects for addition displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is the 1st It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of big hit continuation production among the additional effects displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in 1 control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of an ending screen of a big hit among the effects for superimposition displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a first control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when jackpot is complete | finished among the superposing effects displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in a. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the big hit end among the effects for superimposition displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of big hit continuation production among the additional effects displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the example of 1st control. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the special symbol high-speed fluctuation after the big hit end among the productions for usual hits displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) FIG. 6 is a view showing an example of a display mode when winning a big hit among the effects for a normal hit displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of battle mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the example of the 1st control. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode in battle mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the example of the 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of an effect before a battle among battle modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the example of the 1st control. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of battle reach among battle modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the example of the 1st control. (A) It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of battle reach among battle modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is a 3rd symbol display in the 1st control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of winning battle reach among battle modes displayed with an apparatus. (A) It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of pulling to battle reach among battle modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st example of control, and (b) is an example in the 1st example of control It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of losing to battle reach among battle modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display device. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the resurrection production of a battle reach among the battle modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the HP display area displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in precursory effects among the suggestion effects displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is the 3rd symbol in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of countdown production among the suggestion effects displayed with a display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the specific effect displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the timing chart which showed the flow of the suggestion production performed within 1 fluctuation among the suggestion production displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st example of control. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the suggestion production performed by two or more changes among the suggestion production displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the expectation degree suggestion effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of expectation degree suggestion production which is indicated with the 3rd design display device in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a main control apparatus in a 1st control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd per random-number table set to ROM of these. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st contact classification selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically illustrates the definition content of the jackpot variation pattern table It is the figure shown, (c) is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, (d) is the figure which specifies the prescription contents of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the special fluctuation pattern table among the fluctuation pattern selection tables set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the big hit shift setting table which is set to the ROM of the main control unit in the first control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the state transition table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 1st control example, (b) shows the prescription contents of the state transition 1 table typically (C) is a diagram schematically showing the definition content of the state transition 2 table, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing the definition content of the state transition 3 table (E) is a diagram schematically showing the definition content of the state transition 4 table, (f) is a diagram schematically showing the definition content of the state transition 5 table. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the state transition 6 table among the state transition tables set to ROM of the main control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is state transition 7 It is a figure which showed the prescription content of the table typically, (c) is a figure which represented the prescription content of the state transition 8 table typically, (d), the schema of the prescription content of the state transition 9 table FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in a 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example . (A) is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the special symbol retention ball number counter in the 1st control example, (b), the prescription contents of the reservation rank selection table in the 1st control example typically It is a figure shown, and (c) is a figure showing typically the contents of a prescription of a jackpot inside production selection table. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the number addition table in the 1st control example, and (b) is the figure which showed the prescription contents of the continuation presentation mode selection table typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the continuation value main selection table in the 1st example of control, (b) is the figure which showed the prescription contents of the 1st continuation value subselection table typically And (c) is a diagram schematically showing the definition content of the second continuation value subselection table. (A) is a figure which showed typically the definition content of the final mode selection table in the 1st control example, (b) is a figure explaining the content of the presentation set as a final mode. (A) is a figure which showed typically the definition content of the expectation degree selection table in a 1st control example, (b) is the figure which showed the definition content of the expectation degree presentation selection table typically. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining the image at the time of the power activation in the example of the 1st control. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation number subtraction process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize information command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot inside production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows processing under addition production performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the addition display process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot after-effect | action setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of a control. It is a flowchart which shows the extension management process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation production setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows countdown production setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the several fluctuation presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is a flowchart which shows stop classification command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a round performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example It is the flowchart which showed several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows a back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example Is a flowchart showing an error command process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the expectation degree presentation related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows countdown production related command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flow chart which showed the display setting processing performed by MPU in the display in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer renewal processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the feature presentation displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the presentation additional example of the 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of the character item effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (b) is an effect addition of the first control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which resets the title displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in an example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example, and (b) is the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the effect addition example of the first control example It is the block diagram which showed the structure of. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the transformation pattern table in the production additional example of the 1st control example, and (b) is the prescription of the title system selection table in the production additional example of the 1st control example It is the figure which showed the content typically, and (c) is the figure which showed typically the definition content of the title selection table in the presentation additional example of the 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing typically the contents of a rule of a character item operation level selection table in the effect addition example of the 1st control example, (b) is an effect setting group in the effect addition example of the 1st control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription content of. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the presentation additional example of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the presentation additional example of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the change process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the presentation additional example of the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the title setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the presentation additional example of the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is the specified content of the falling lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example (C) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the fall state transition table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, (d) Is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall for state transition 1 table of the fall for state transition table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (e) is a second control FIG. 7 is a view schematically showing the contents of the falling state transition 2 table in the falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main control apparatus in the example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) shows the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the additional example of the effect of the second control example It is a block diagram. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the continuation presentation mode selection 3 table in the 2nd control example, (b), the prescription contents of the final mode selection 3 table in the 2nd control example FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control apparatus in another example of the second control example, and (b) schematically illustrates the definition content of the post-fall fall variation pattern table FIG. It is a flow chart which shows countdown production setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in other production examples. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the other effect example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st contact classification selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main control device in the 3rd control example, (b) is the fluctuation pattern selection table in the 3rd control example Among the fluctuation pattern selection table in the third control example, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the definition content of the jackpot (probability change) fluctuation pattern table, the first out (probability change) fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern selection table It is a figure which showed the prescription content of the table typically, and (d) showed the prescription content of the 2nd deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table among the fluctuation pattern selection tables in the 3rd control example typically It is a figure and (e) is a figure showing typically the prescription contents of a special (probable variation) change pattern table among change pattern selection tables in the 3rd example of control. (A) is a figure which showed typically the definition content of the change scenario setting table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example, (b)-(d) is in the 3rd control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription content of the fluctuation scenarios 1-3 prescribed | regulated in the fluctuation scenario table, respectively. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the fluctuation scenarios 4-7 prescribed | regulated in the fluctuation scenario table in the 3rd control example, respectively. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the fluctuation scenarios 8-11 prescribed | regulated in the fluctuation scenario table in the 3rd control example, respectively. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 1st continuous value main selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the 2nd continuous value main selection table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the 3rd continuation value main selection table set to ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the continuation presentation mode selection 4 table set to ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. FIG. 21 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a third control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation number reduction process 4 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize information command processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation production setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation value related command process 4 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the final aspect command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 3rd control example. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example, and FIG. 30B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example It is. (A) is a figure which showed typically the definition content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main control unit in another control example of the 3rd control example, (b) is a 3rd control example It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the small hitting | classification selection table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in another control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the definition content of the variation scenario A1 defined in the variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example, (b ) Is a diagram schematically showing the definition contents of a small hitting and post fluctuation scenario defined in a fluctuation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main control device in another control example of the third control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production in another example of the suggestion production explained by the 1st example of control. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production in another example of the suggestion production explained by the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the countdown production setting processing 5 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in another example of suggestion production explained by the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in another example of the suggestion production demonstrated by the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd precursor production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the other example of suggestion production which is explained in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation display setting processing 6 in the additional explanation of the 1st example of control. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production in another example of the expectation degree suggestion production explained in the 1st example of control. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the display screen in another example of the expectation degree suggestion production demonstrated in the 1st example of control. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the display screen in another example of the expectation degree suggestion production demonstrated in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the countdown production setting processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in another example of an expectation degree suggestion production explained by the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation process 7 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in another example of the expectation degree suggestion production demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a A1 embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a A1 embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the V prize-winning apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the V prize-winning apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the model which showed the movable induction | guidance | derivation member in A1 embodiment typically. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect which does not become a pseudo | simulation run displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the change aspect which does not become a pseudo | simulation run displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of the pseudo ream 1 displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of the button production at the time of the pseudo | simulation continuous development displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the change aspect of the button effect at the time of the pseudo | simulation series development displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in A1 embodiment. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect at the time of a V attacker opening immediately after the symbol stop displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect at the time of a V attacker opening immediately after the symbol stop displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a special symbol 1 random number table in the A1 embodiment It is the figure which showed the prescription content typically, (c) is the figure which represented the prescription content of the special symbol 2 random number table in the A1 embodiment typically, (d) is the A1 embodiment It is the figure which showed typically the prescription content of the normal symbol random number table. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a special view 1 big hit type in the A1 embodiment It is the figure which showed the prescription content of the selection table typically, and (c) is the figure which showed the prescription content of the special figure 2 big hit classification selection table in A1 embodiment typically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a small hitting type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is a special figure 1 small hitting type in the A1 embodiment It is the figure which showed the prescription content of the selection table typically, and (c) is the figure which showed the prescription content of the special figure 2 small hitting classification selection table in A1 embodiment typically. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a definition content of a variation pattern table for normal use in the A1 embodiment Are schematically shown. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the variation pattern table for time shortening in A1 embodiment. It is a figure explaining each hit classification and operation contents of a hit game in A1 embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the jackpot scenario table in A1 embodiment, and (b) is the figure which showed the prescription contents of the small hitting scenario table in A1 embodiment typically. (C) is a figure showing typically an example of jackpot scenario a in the A1 embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically an example of hit scenario a in A1 embodiment typically, (b) is a figure which showed an example of hit scenario b in A1 embodiment typically. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the hit scenario c in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment . FIG. 18 is a schematic view schematically showing a game flow in the A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is the timing chart which showed the time of small hitting V passage in A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is the timing chart which showed the small hit V non-passage time in A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is the timing chart which showed the time of the jackpot V passage in A1 embodiment. (A)-(i) is the timing chart which showed the time of the jackpot V non-passage in A1 embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation in a A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting start setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit ending control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting ending control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and presentation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment It is a flowchart which shows stop classification command processing. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. And (c) is a flowchart showing chance eye command processing executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the A1 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing jackpot end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment It is a flowchart which shows small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing small hitting end command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment V entrance passing command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V production command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a A2 embodiment. It is the model which showed the distribution apparatus in A2 embodiment typically. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed typically the inside of distribution apparatus B700 in A2 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in A3 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the crew member in A3 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a A4 embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the flow-path unit in A4 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a roulette chance displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in a A4 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a roulette chance displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in a A4 embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a roulette chance displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in a A4 embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control unit in A4 embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing at the time of passing small hitting V in the A4 embodiment, (b) is the timing chart showing the timing of roulette at the time of passing large hitting V in the A4 embodiment It is. (A) is the timing chart which showed the roulette display timing at the time of small hitting V non-passing in A4 embodiment, (b) showed the roulette display timing at the time of jackpot V non-passing in A4 embodiment It is a timing chart. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in the A4 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the condition apparatus determination processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in A4 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the V prize-winning apparatus in A5 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in A5 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific big hit control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in A5 embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 1 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to Figs. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 2 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 2, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 4, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 4, a ball emitting unit 112 a (see FIG. 4) for emitting a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding the ball emitted from the ball emitting unit 112 a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 5c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with a top surface opened and projecting upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a display lamp 34 is provided which incorporates a light emitting means such as an LED and can display the payout of the prize ball and the occurrence of an error.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be viewed. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to create more refreshingness, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33.

  Below the window portion 5c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 76 and 77. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1) Mounted on the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with thin plate materials, and various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side are formed so as to be invisible to the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by tapping screw etc. from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5 c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 77, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 76 and the outer rails 77, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76, 77 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a winning opening etc. is provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. Rubber rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a certain amount of momentum hits the rubber pair 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed in the lower left side of the game area in the front view (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 has a winning. The pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful in the lottery (a jackpot lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (in a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 140 by increasing the probability of hitting a second symbol to be described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 140 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is normally medium is a gaming state (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased) which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction.

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the first motorized symbol 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, and it is longer than normal. The time is set. When the first motorized part 140a is in the open state (opened state), the second winning opening 140 is compared to the case where the first motorized part 140a is closed (closed state). It will be easy to win the ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 140 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition to changing the opening time of the first motorized symbol 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 or changing the opening time thereof during a definite change or during a time cut, a single hit is made. In this case, the number of times the first motorized prize 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than that in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during positive or negative, and the first motorized symbol 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and the first motorized symbol is held once At least one of the number of times of opening 140 a may be changed. In addition, during a definite change or during a short time, the first motorized symbol 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened, or the first motorized symbol 140a and the second motorized symbol 82 are opened at one time. The number of times it does not occur may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by a winning (start winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of symbols, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol using a passage of a ball of the first through gate 66 as a trigger And a second symbol display device (not shown).

  Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible from an opening opened at the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternates a symbol of “o” as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) and a symbol of “x” for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66 It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the first motorized symbol 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the first motorized prize 140a of the second winning opening 140 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the definite change and during the short hours.

  In addition, the second winning opening during positive or negative time by other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the first motorized part 140a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize at 140 and the third winning opening, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the first motorized steering wheel 140a with respect to the game player may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board among the balls launched to the game board. When the ball passes the first through gate 66, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Also in), it is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). . Further, the number of through gates assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 140 in which a ball can win is disposed. When the ball is won in the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. In FIG. 4, a jackpot lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 140 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 140 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball has won to the second prize opening 140 may be set to five.

  The second winning opening 140 is accompanied by a first motorized symbol 140a. The first motorized prize 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first motorized prize 140a is in the closed state (reduced state), and the ball is less likely to win the second prize opening 140. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first motorized symbol 140a is The ball is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to be awarded to the second winning opening 140.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first motorized accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during a definite change or during a short time, the time during which the first motor-operated part 140a is opened also becomes longer than normal. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win a prize at the second winning opening 140 as compared to normal time or during a definite change.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won the second winning opening 140 than in the case where the ball has won the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first motorized prize 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases where the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 140 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Launch the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and the winning of the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of opportunities for a big hit lottery and becomes a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at things.

  On the other hand, by passing the ball to the first through gate 66, the first motorized prize 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be in the open state during definite variation or time, and the second winning opening 140 is won. The ball is shot so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 140 (so-called “right-handed”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140 as well as opening the first motorized prize 140a.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (is it in the process of being changed, is in the middle of a short time, is in the normal state). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a big hit, the stop of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of a big hit is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning opening 64, for example, The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a seal paper stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball which flows down the game area and which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. Ru. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115 and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  Also, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply unit 115 even after the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on due to the power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. Other devices 228 include respective drive motors 481, 491, 661, 880.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. As shown in FIG. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  Note that, in FIG. 8, the slide unit in FIG. 8 is a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the retracted position. The left displacing member 420L, the right displacing member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacing member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the extended positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and the displacement unit 400, the projection unit 600, and the vertical displacement unit 800 are provided in the inner space of the rear case 300. In order to be accommodated.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edge of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 to the front, and the respective wall portions 301 and 302 It forms in the box shape which one side (front side) was open | released. In the bottom wall portion 301, an opening 301a in a front view rectangular shape is formed at the center thereof, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visible through the opening 301a. It is made possible.

  The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 in the form of a frame in a front view disposed on the bottom wall 301 of the rear case 300, and a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R disposed displaceably on the base member 410. A retracted position for retracting the left displacing member 420L, the right displacing member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the back side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device). 81) can be displaced between the overhanging position projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485), By selecting the drive means to drive, the displacement aspect of the displacement member can be made different (a plurality of types of displacement aspects are formed). Details of the structure will be described later.

  The projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 in a front view annular shape disposed on the front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and projection. And a plurality of LEDs 651 for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmitting material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 is made visible to the player, and when light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a design. That is, a pattern or a design can be raised (displayed) in front of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this case, the projection unit 600 adopts a structure that enhances the efficiency of light incident from the LED 651 on the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (pattern or pattern Can be made clear). In addition, a structure is adopted in which the workability at the time of assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is enhanced. Details of these structures will be described later.

  The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 disposed on the upper portion of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 rotatably supported at one end thereof on both base members 820 and 830. And displacing the other end of the displacing member 850 between a retracted position above the opening 301a of the back case 300 (ie, the third symbol display device 81) and an overhanging position projecting toward the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a biasing spring SP for biasing the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the biasing spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position. By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is caused to reciprocate (approximately single vibration) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, centering on the balancing position (predetermined position). The structure is adopted. Details of the structure will be described later.

  Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

  The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement) disposed displaceably on the base member 410. Member 420R) and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a drive force to the displacement member, and as described above, the lower drive When the displacement member is displaced by the drive of the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), the displacement member is displaced by the drive of the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive In the case of displacing the displacement member by driving both of the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), displacing the displacement member in a different manner It is formed so as to kill. Hereinafter, details of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

  First, the displacement members (left displacement member 420L and right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a back perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacing unit 400 includes a left displacing member 420L and a right displacing member 420R which are formed as displacing members for producing effects by displacement, and the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R are provided. The left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the carriage member 440, and the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

  The left displacing member 420L is a long member disposed in a vertical posture, and has a connecting shaft 421 projecting from the back, a connecting hole 422 drilled at the upper end, and a slide drilled at the lower end And a moving groove 423. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

  The connecting shaft 421 is set to have a length dimension such that the tip is protruded from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the tip of the protruding connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494c in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 ( 17 and 18) are slidably inserted. That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

  The connection hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one of the connection shafts 441 of the two connection shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 described later is rotatably inserted. That is, the left displacing member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative posture change (rotation around the axis of the connecting hole 422 as a rotation center) with respect to the carriage member 440L is permitted.

  The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a driving pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is inserted rotatably and slidably. . Therefore, when the lower left rack 488L is stopped, only when the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven or vice versa, the change (rotation) of the attitude of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410 Can be formed.

  The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being bridged between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L, and has a connection hole 431 drilled at one end (upper end). And a slide pin 432 protruding from the back.

  The connection hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connection shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The slide pin 432 is a pin (rod-like body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a slide groove 410 a drilled on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing the relative attitude with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

  The bogie member 440 rolls on a rolling surface extended along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It includes two connecting shafts 441 juxtaposed in parallel, and four rolling wheels 442 rotatably supported at both ends of the respective connecting shafts 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the carriage member 440 by rolling the rolling surface of each rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440. .

  The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and the rolling wheels 442 of the carriage member 440 are mounted on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacing member 420 is supported by being suspended from the surface to be rolled of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440.

  The upper left rack 450L slides a guide portion extending along the lateral direction (width direction) to the upper portion (upper middle portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is a long plate-like member, and two connection shafts 441 of the bogie member 440 are rotatably inserted in two connection holes 451 and cut in the longitudinal direction on the back of the upper left rack 450L. A rack gear 452 is provided.

  Here, the right displacing member 420R is formed to be substantially symmetrical with respect to the left displacing member 420L, the right driven member 430R to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R to the upper left rack 450L. Since the same configuration is substantially the same, the same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

  However, a rack gear 452 is engraved on the front of the upper right rack 450R. Further, the upper right rack 450R is disposed such that the formation portion of the connection hole 451 is offset to the front side and the position in the front-rear direction is different from that of the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are disposed to face each other at a predetermined interval. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 is engaged with both rack gears 452.

  Accordingly, along with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slided) in the left-right direction (width direction, FIG. 19 left-right direction) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. And, since the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of arranged pinion gears 459 between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (ie, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R The displacement directions can be opposite directions (directions in which each other approaches or separates). However, the number of arrangement of the pinion gear 459 may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same.

  Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIG. 13 to FIG.

  13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are back perspective views of the displacement unit 400. 13 and 14 show the state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show the state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Moreover, illustration of the raising cover 413 is abbreviate | omitted in FIGS. 13-16.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a drive in which the pinion gear 482 is engaged. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a projecting member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the back of the projecting member 485, and the rack gear 486 Mainly includes a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R engaged with the last gear 487e of the gear train (gears 487a to 487e).

  The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 projected from the back of the left front cover 411L. Ru. The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported at the back of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported at the front of the base member 410.

  The drive gear 483 is provided with an eccentric pin 483a positioned eccentrically from the rotation center and protruding from the rear surface. The drive arm 484 has a shaft support hole 484a in which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 484b in which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and the shafts A drive pin 484c is provided to project from the front at an end opposite to the side where the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

  Therefore, when the drive gear 483 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the drive force of the first drive motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 to the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484 The action of one or the other inner wall surface causes the drive arm 484 to rotate in the forward or reverse direction about the pivot hole 484a, and raises or lowers the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484.

  The projecting member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a through which the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is disposed on the front surface of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is disposed in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL includes a proximal end rail disposed on the front of the base member 410, a distal end rail disposed on the rear surface of the projecting member 485, and a proximal end interposed between the proximal end rail and the distal end rail. And an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the tip rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the slide groove 485a of the projecting member 485 is pushed up or pushed down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the projecting member 485 is the base The member 410 is vertically moved up and down.

  The rack gear 486 is engraved along the raising and lowering direction of the projecting member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) has the front gear 487a meshed with the rack gear 486. It is rotatably supported between the rear surface of the cover 411R and the rear surface. Therefore, by moving the projecting member 485 up and down, the linear movement of the rack gear 486 can be used to rotate the gear train (gears 487a to 487e).

  The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-like members, and a rack gear 488a engraved on the side along the longitudinal direction and a drive pin 488b projecting from the front at the longitudinal end And The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced in the vertical direction, and when the rack gears 488a are opposed to each other, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R face each other between the rear surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the rear cover 412 19 (left and right direction in FIG. 19) are held slidably.

  Incidentally, the gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d, and is projected to the rear side through the opening 410b drilled in the base member 410, whereby the lower left rack 488L and the lower right The respective rack gears 488a of the rack 488R are engaged. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the projecting member 485 moves up and down, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are mutually moved by the rotation of the gear 487a at the end. It can be linearly moved in the opposite direction (direction in which the two approach or separate).

  The drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is protruded to the front side through the linear insertion groove 410c drilled in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. And, it is rotatably and slidably inserted in the slide groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Therefore, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R.

  The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially in parallel with the rolling surface of the carriage member 440 on which the rolling wheel 442 rolls. That is, the direction of the linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

  Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 among the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIG. 17 and FIG.

  FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIGS. 17 and 18, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are illustrated between the upper middle portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, in order to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to a drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a drive in which the pinion gear 492 is engaged. A gear 493 and a drive arm 494 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493 are mainly included.

  The base member 410 is formed as a split structure in which the upper portion (upper side portion formed in a front view substantially frame shape) is sequentially superimposed on the front side with an upper back portion 410e, an upper middle portion 410f, and a front portion 410g. Be done.

  The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front of the upper projecting portion of the upper middle portion 410f, and a pinion gear is mounted on the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 projecting from the back of the projecting portion. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back of the upper middle portion 410f.

  The drive gear 493 is provided with an eccentric pin 493a which is located eccentrically from the rotation center and which is protruded from the rear surface. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper middle portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear sliding groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and A linear drive groove 494c is provided at the end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

  Therefore, when the drive gear 493 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the drive force of the second drive motor 491, the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 to the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 When the one or the other inner wall surface receives the action, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction with the shaft support hole 494a as the rotation center, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

  As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is supported by driving the drive arm 494 (rotation about the support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c displaced to the left and right to the connecting shaft 421. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced left and right.

  In this case, when the left displacing member 420L is displaced to the left and right, and the bogie member 440 (rolling wheel 442) rolls on the surface to be rolled, the upper left rack 450L is attached to the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. It is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the same, and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, thereby the right displacement member The 420R can be displaced. A rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 rolls is formed at an upper middle portion 410f and an upper front portion 410g.

  Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

  First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and projecting member 485). The first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS.

  19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first mode, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are views of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. It is a rear view.

  19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the projecting member 485 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 correspond to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. And the projecting member 485 corresponds to the state of being disposed at the overhanging position in the first aspect.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the outermost positions (positions most separated in the left-right direction) in the retracted position. The projecting member 485 is disposed at the lowermost position.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 in the lower drive mechanism 480 are driven from this state, after passing through the states shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, they are shown in FIGS. The left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R are displaced in directions approaching each other in the left-right direction (width direction) until the state (the overhanging position in the first aspect), and the projecting member 485 is raised. In the overhanging position in the first aspect, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are formed in a combined state (the side surfaces of the three members are in close contact with each other).

  Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484 c of the drive arm 484 is the sliding groove 485 a of the projecting member 485. The protruding member 485 is raised by pushing up the inner wall surface of (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

  When the projecting member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) through the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (FIGS. 15 and 16). 16), the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R acts on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, whereby the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linear movement) in the direction in which the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) approach each other along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410.

  On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. Acted at 421. Thereby, the bogie member 440 rolls on the surface to be rolled, and the upper end side (the bogie member 440) of the left displacing member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in the direction approaching the right displacing member 420R (FIG. 17 and FIG. 18).

  In addition, when the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the left displacing member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R through the pinion gear 459. The upper end side (the carriage member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  In the present embodiment, the amount of displacement of the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, FIG. 20 left-right direction) is smaller at the lower end than at the upper end ( That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (the extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (the extended length of the surface to be rolled).

  In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R start displacement substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhanging position in the first embodiment ( The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach substantially simultaneously (see FIGS. 23 and 24). That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (the carriage member 440) is made faster than the lower end side (the drive pin 488b).

  Thus, the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating the attitude instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction non-rotationally while maintaining the vertical attitude. That is, as described above, it is impossible to make the displacement while rotating the posture by the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the driving unit 1, and as in this embodiment, 2 It has become possible for the first time to use the driving means of

  In addition, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction of the upper end side (carriage member 440) differs from the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the carriage member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, it is possible to absorb a change in the distance between the two. That is, there is no need to provide a complicated mechanism, and it is sufficient to form the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b so as to be rotatable and slidable, thereby achieving reliability and durability of operation in addition to reduction of product cost. be able to.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 in the states shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 are driven in the opposite direction to that described above, FIGS. After passing through the state shown, the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R are displaced in a direction away from each other in the left-right direction (width direction) until the state (retracted position) shown in FIGS. Is lowered.

  Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (the first drive motor 481) is driven (ie, the upper drive mechanism 490 (the second drive motor 491) is kept in the non-driven state) to move the displacement member (left displacement member 420L, A second mode for displacing the right displacing member 420R and the projecting member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of the second aspect, FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

  25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second mode, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. FIGS. 25 and 26 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 are disposed at the overhanging position in the second mode.

  Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (in the retracted position), in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490, the left displacement member 420L rotates the upper end side (axial center of the connecting hole 422) It is placed in a posture that allows it to rotate as a center. That is, the connection shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

  Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (states shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pin of the diagram drive arm 484. As 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485, the projecting member 485 is raised, and the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end sides (the sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced (linear movement) in the direction in which they approach each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axial center of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

  Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (the second drive motor 491) is driven (ie, the lower drive mechanism 480 (the first drive motor 481) is kept in the non-driven state) to move the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and A third mode for displacing the right displacing member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third aspect, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. FIGS. 27 and 28 correspond to the state in which the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R are disposed at the overhanging position in the third embodiment.

  Here, the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R are formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing It is permitted that the member 420R is lifted upward.

  Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 (state arranged at the retracted position), as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 is acted on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear movement) in the direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. The displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the right displacing member 420R is displaced in the direction approaching the left displacing member 420L. (Linear motion).

  That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the rotation center. In the third aspect, only the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R can be displaced, and the projecting member 485 can be maintained in the stopped state.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended in the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed displaceable (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (the locus when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, it is difficult for the effect by the displacement of the displacing member to be one pattern, and it is difficult to achieve the effect of making the player's impression. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, driving motor) is strongly changed to provide a change, only the displacement speed of the displacement member increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (locus) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to produce an effect that brings the player's mind.

  On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of this embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state is selected (changed). Thus, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (a first aspect, a second aspect and a third aspect). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one way, the effect does not become one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that brings the player's mind.

  In particular, in the first aspect (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in translation (linear movement) while the second displacement In the third aspect (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), it is possible to cause the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform displacement only in rotation (rotational motion). You can As a result, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and the player can easily make an impression.

  In this case, in the conventional product, there is one that makes the displacement mode different by changing only the rotation direction while keeping the rotation center constant, but the second aspect and the third aspect in the present embodiment The same rotation center does not differ only in the rotation direction, and the rotation directions are different, and the rotation centers are also different (in the second mode, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third mode) In this case, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be made large, and the effect of making the player's impression can be made easy.

  In the first aspect, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a combination of rotation and parallel movement (linear motion), and the direction of such rotation is the third aspect. And the same direction as the direction of rotation. Therefore, in the initial stage of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can be made to visually recognize that the displacement members are displaced in the direction in which they approach each other. Can be difficult to On the other hand, in the first aspect, the projecting member 485 is lifted with the displacement of the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R in the approaching direction, while in the third aspect, the projecting member 485 is stopped. It can be maintained in the state. That is, in the initial stage where the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R are displaced in the direction in which the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R approach each other, when the projecting member 485 is lifted, Can be expected from the player.

  In the displacement unit 400, the carriage member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are arranged (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the carriage member 440 is provided with the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. And the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is connected to the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

  Thus, as described above, a structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform linear motion (first aspect) including rotational components and rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and displace the displacement member along the guide groove, but in the case of sliding displacement with such a curved track, a complicated structure is required ( That is, not only a mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the carriage member 440 and the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape as the curved trajectory, but also the members 440, The 488L and 488R need to be provided with a mechanism capable of continuously applying a driving force).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bogie member 440, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in the linear direction, and hence the bogie member 440 may be guided by the rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can utilize a rack and pinion mechanism, their structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability and the operation reliability as well as reducing the product cost.

  Further, according to the displacement unit 400, in any of the first aspect, the second aspect and the third aspect, the mechanism for guiding the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R is made common, specifically, The one end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by rolling the rolling surface of the bogie member 440, and the other end side (lower end side) is a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack The 488 R is guided by sliding (linear movement) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to individually provide different guiding mechanisms according to each aspect, and therefore, it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching different guiding mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, and the reliability and the durability of the operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46, the projection unit 600 will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 in a front view annular shape, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection thereof A plurality of irradiation units 650 disposed around the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a drive force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 620. And gear trains (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 610 includes an annular rear base 611 and an annular front base 612 disposed on the front of the rear base 611, and is formed between the opposed bases of the rear base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are accommodated in the internal space.

  In the area inside the inner peripheral edge in the front view of the front base 612 (hereinafter referred to as “display area”), the projection plate member 620 is visible from the player, and the area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 In other words, in the area shielded by the front base 612 (hereinafter referred to as “outside the display area”), the projection plate member 620 is made invisible from the player.

  The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmitting material and transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side to make the player visually recognize, and is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and is made visible to the player. That is, a pattern or a design can be raised (displayed) in front of the third symbol display device 81.

  A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are disposed on the back side and the front side, respectively, at the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape in a front view, and are disposed concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 has a plurality of teeth engraved along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is engaged. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a U-shaped guide groove 641 continuous with the projection plate member 620 in the circumferential direction, and has a plurality of collars rotatably supported on the base member 610. C is guided by the guide groove 641 so that the projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610. The detailed configurations of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

  The irradiation unit 650 is a unit provided with a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (facing the outer peripheral surface) Plural (five in the present embodiment) are disposed in posture. In detail, in the present embodiment, an extension line of the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is in a posture of passing the approximate center of the projection plate member 620. In addition, the detail of the attachment structure to the base member 610 of the irradiation unit 650 is mentioned later.

  The drive motor 661 is disposed on the back side of the back surface base 611, and the front gear 662 of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. Further, a gear member 630 disposed on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (the gears 662 to 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38, the holding structure of the projection plate member 620 will be described. FIG. 33 is a front view of the back base 611. FIG. FIG. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the back surface base 611 is an inner standing portion provided on the inner edge of the annular plate member and an outer standing erected on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An inner recessed groove in a region surrounded by the intermediate erected portion 611b erected from between the installation portion 611c, the inner erected portion 611a and the outer erected portion 611c, and the inner erected portion 611b and the inner erected portion 611a Mainly comprising 611 d, an outer concave portion 611 e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611 b and the outer standing portion 611 c, and a control projection 611 f protruding from the annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

  The inner standing portion 611a is provided on the front side (the front side in FIG. 33) from the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, and has a certain thickness in the radial direction.

  The outer standing portion 611c is provided on the front side (the front side in FIG. 33) from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member and has a certain thickness in the radial direction.

  The intermediate standing portion 611 b is provided at an intermediate position between the inner standing portion 611 a and the outer standing portion 611 b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611 b is formed to be divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end is connected to the outer standing portion 611 c.

  The inner recessed groove 611d is a region for disposing the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620 described later inside, and encloses three directions of the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a and the middle standing portion 611b. It is formed.

  The outer recessed groove 611e is a region for arranging the irradiation unit 650 described later inside, and is formed so as to surround three directions of the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611c and the middle standing portion 611b. Ru.

  The restricting projection 611 f is a projection that suppresses the rattling of the collar C supported on the front base 612, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened at the axial center of the collar C. It is projected on the front side. In the present embodiment, the restriction protrusions 611f are formed at six places at predetermined intervals.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back of the front base 612, the inside of the back of the back base 611 corresponds to the inside standing corresponding to the inside standing portion 611a, the middle standing portion 611b, the outside standing portion 611c and the restriction protrusion 611f. The setting portion 612a, the intermediate standing portion 612b, the outer standing portion 612c, and the shaft portion 612f are set upright. That is, in a state where the base member 610 is assembled, the front end faces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are respectively superimposed on the front end faces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back surface base 611. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the restricting protrusion 611f.

  A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the rear surface of the front base 612 and in the region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pin 612g is an axial state of circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

  As described above, the irradiation unit 650 includes the plurality of LEDs 651 and is a unit for causing the light irradiated from the respective LEDs 651 to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. It is arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by the plurality of irradiation units 650.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back of the front base 612 in the region between the intermediate erected portion 611 b and the outer erected portion 612 c, and the front of the back base 611 is superimposed on the back of the front base 612. Thus, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612.

  FIG. 36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of the arrow XXXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular notch 612b1 is formed in the middle standing portion 612b of the front base 612 at the leading end side of the standing portion. Similarly, a substantially semicircular cutaway portion 611b1 is cut out at a position in the same phase as the cutaway portion 612b1 on the standing front end side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back surface base 611 (FIG. 33) reference).

  That is, in the state where the standing front end faces of the middle standing portions 611b and 612b are overlapped (that is, the assembled state of the base member 610), the notches 611b1 and 612b2 form a substantially circular opening in a front view. Ru. These circular openings are respectively formed at positions (positions having the same phase) facing the respective LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650.

  Therefore, the light irradiated from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular opening formed by the notches 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate erected portions 611b and 612b, and enters the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Be done. In addition, a circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emission part of LED651.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. FIG. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of projection plate member 620, gear member 630 and groove forming member 640 taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII of FIG. In FIG. 38, the virtual line M indicates the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body circular in a front view. The projection plate member 620 includes a notch 621 at a part of the outer edge, and a reflector 622 for diffusely reflecting light.

  The notched portion 621 is a portion for facilitating disposition of the collar C on the restricting protrusion 611f of the back surface base 611, and is formed by notching a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a linear shape in a direction orthogonal to the radial direction. Be done.

  The reflecting portion 622 is a portion where the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a pattern over the entire area of the projection plate member 620 in a front view. Thereby, when the light which injected into the inside of the projection board member 620 is irradiated to the reflection part 622, it is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the reflection part 622, and it radiate | emits from the surface side of a game board.

  As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the diffusely reflected light, and can visually recognize the shape of the reflection portion 622. That is, when the light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflection part 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 is made of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620 and is formed of an annular plate member in a front view, and the outer diameter dimension is larger than the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 It is set large and disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (ie, disposed on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is disposed on the back side (the rear side in the plane of FIG. 37) of the projection plate member 620, and the axis thereof is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 is inclined toward the front side from the end of the tooth portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the rear surface portion 632 of the rear surface side, and the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the rear surface portion 632. And an inclined surface portion 633.

  The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface on which the gear 664 is meshed as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

  The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface which is provided continuously from the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and which is inclined to the front side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 to the front side is a virtual angle in which the crossing angle θ1 of the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 with the back portion 632 extends the back portion 632 to the inner peripheral side The intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 is set to be approximately the same (θ1 = θ2).

  The groove forming member 640 is made of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and is formed in a shape in which a cross section is bent into a substantially L shape. It is disposed on the projection plate member 620 side. Further, the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and the axis thereof is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The groove forming member 640 has a side surface portion 641a of one surface of an inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, an abutting surface 641b of the other surface of the inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface of the front side. A front surface portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from the end portion on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 to the back surface side are provided.

  The side surface portion 641a is a surface sandwiching the collar C between facing the side surface on the front surface side (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and a constant facing distance around the plane and axis of the front surface side of the projection plate member 620 It is formed apart.

  The contact surface 641b is a surface that contacts the collar C disposed between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 so as to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and the cross section is orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a It is formed circularly around the axis.

  Therefore, the side surface portion 641 a and the contact surface 641 b can be formed on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

  The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface which is continuously provided from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and is inclined to the rear surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 to the back side is a virtual angle in which the intersection angle θ3 of the front line 642 with the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end 644 extends the front surface 642 to the inner peripheral side It is set to be substantially the same as the crossing angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3 = θ4).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be described. 39 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39 (a). 40 (a) to 40 (c) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. FIG. FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (c) illustrate transition states when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. 39 and 40 show the projection unit 600 with the back base 611 removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), in the state where the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the projecting portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. It is disposed between the facing side (guide groove 641) of the side surface 39 (b) on the lower side and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640.

  Further, the distance dimension L1 between the tip end surface of the projecting portion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is greater than the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

  Therefore, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged with a predetermined gap therebetween in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, the projection plate member 620 has the vertical and horizontal directions Even if it is shifted, the contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the projection C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the projection C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

  Next, the attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (a) to FIG. 40 (c).

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 40 (a), when the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is disposed on the front base 612.

  Here, the arrangement of the projection plate member 620 on the front base 612 is performed by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner recessed groove 612 d of the front base 612. That is, the distance dimension in the radial direction of the inner recessed groove 612d is formed larger than the distance dimension in the radial direction of the groove forming member 640, and by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner recessed groove 612d The member 620 can be positioned and positioned.

  Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft 612 f on which the collar C is disposed. That is, by aligning the position of the notch 621 with the shaft 612f, the collar C can be disposed on the front base 612 in a state in which the projection plate member 620 is disposed.

  Next, with respect to the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f, the axis of the collar C is on the inner peripheral side (upper side in FIG. 40A) with respect to the axis of the shaft portion 612f (left side in FIG. 40A). It takes place in a state of being In this state, the axis of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the projection C1 located inside with respect to the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the inside of the notch 621 and the guide groove 641.

  From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (the lower side in FIG. 40 (b)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis of the collar C can be arranged concentric with the axis of the shaft portion 612f.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the collar C is displaced to the front side (the lower side in FIG. 40 (c)) so that the end face of the protrusion C1 of the collar C abuts on the groove forming member 640. It is arranged at the position where it faces the face. Thereafter, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be disposed inside the guide groove 641.

  Here, a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotation member, and the plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, and the rotation member is lifted (operated) to arrange the collar. There is a problem that it is necessary to arrange the collar and the efficiency of the assembly is poor because both hands are used for the assembly.

  On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, as described above, the projection plate member 620 needs to be lifted (operated) when arranging the collar C by forming the notch 621 in the projection plate member 620. Absent. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

  The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the back base 611 from the back side to the projection unit 600 assembled in this manner.

  Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  41 (a) to 43 (b) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), illustration of a cross-sectional line is abbreviate | omitted in order to understand easily.

  Further, in FIGS. 41 (b), 42 (b) and 43 (b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is Though not considered to affect the invention, the light incident from the light source A to the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is illustrated in an orthogonal manner. Furthermore, in FIG. 41 to FIG. 43, the boundary between the display area described above and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, light of the irradiation angle α irradiating the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 has its outer edge on the projection plate member 620. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surface on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 620. Thus, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated to the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflection part 622, and is emitted to the front side of the game machine (upper side in FIG. 41B).

  In this case, when light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is irradiated to the front or back of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light traveling from the inside of the projection plate member 620 to the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the side surface of the front surface or the rear surface of the projection plate member 620 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light transmitting material amount of the projection plate member 620. The light traveling through the member 620 is also directed to the front of the projection plate member 620 or when the light is directed to the front or back of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent. It can be totally reflected by the side of the back. Thus, reduction in the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  That is, when the light passing through the high refractive index medium travels to the low refractive index medium, it is totally reflected without being incident on the low refractive index medium when the incident angle is increased. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed into a plate-like body, and light is incident from its end face (edge), so the incident angle of light is made sufficiently large. Accordingly, light is not incident from the projection plate member 620 to the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Similarly, in the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and the air, since the refractive index of air is a value (refractive index 1) sufficiently smaller than the amount of the permeable material, it travels inside the projection plate member 620. Light does not enter the air (in the air) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, reduction in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light at the irradiation angle β for irradiating the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. Be done.

  The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel to the axial center side of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (face), the light reflected in the inside of the groove forming member 640 can be made incident to the projection plate member 620 side. .

  That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in an aspect adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, it is formed of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmitting material amount of the projection plate member 620. Light may be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel as well as the light of the irradiation angle α. In addition, since the reason is the same as that of the case of the said irradiation angle (alpha), detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also be made to pass through the projection plate member 620, be irregularly reflected by the reflection part 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the thickness (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. it can.

  That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 may not only be incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 but also the light irradiated to the groove forming member 640 be incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 Therefore, the light collection efficiency of light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light reaching the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, and thus the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 By increasing the amount of, the pattern or pattern can be clearly displayed (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the heat generation amount can be reduced to suppress the thermal influence on other members and devices.

  In addition, since the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 640. It is possible to suppress deterioration.

  Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above, in the groove forming member 640 facing the light source A in the front direction (FIG. 42A). The incident angle of the light when the light is irradiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 becomes smaller, because the position is shifted in the direction. Although this makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 by the inner side surface, at least part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

  In addition, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle β and reflected to the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 is formed such that the intersection angle θ4 thereof is the same as the intersection angle θ3 of the imaginary line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). (See Reference), so that after the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) is reflected toward the end 644, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 643 and the light at the irradiation angle β is projected plate member The area reflected to the side 620 can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected to the side of the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 so as to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light which injects into the side end surface of the projection board member 620 can be raised that much.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b), of the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, light of the irradiation angle γ for irradiating the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

  The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels to the axial center side of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (face), light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is in a state of being adjacent to air (contacts with the atmosphere). be able to. On the other hand, when the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmissive material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and travels to the axial center side of the projection plate member 620, similarly to the light of the irradiation angle α. In addition, since the reason is the same as that of the case of the said irradiation angle (alpha), detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is irregularly reflected by the reflection part 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the thickness of the projection plate member 620 can be changed, or the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without increasing the amount (light amount) of light of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

  That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 can not only be incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 but also the light emitted on the gear member 630 can be incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be enhanced. Therefore, among the light emitted from the light source A, the light reaching the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so the amount of light reflected by the reflection part and emitted from the front of the light transmission member Can be made to clearly show up (display) a pattern or a pattern. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the heat generation amount can be reduced to suppress the thermal influence on other members and devices.

  In addition, since the gear member 630 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the gear. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the light incident from the light source A to the gear member 630 is lower than the light incident from the light source A to the light source A (the downward direction in FIG. 43A) compared to the light incident to the projection plate member 620 The incident angle at the time of irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the position where it is shifted. As a result, it becomes difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 at its side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the state described above A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630 can be formed.

  Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated to the irradiation angle γ and reflected to the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 is formed such that the intersection angle θ2 thereof is the same as the intersection angle θ1 of the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 with the back portion 632 (FIG. 38). Since the light emitted from the LED 651 (the light source A) is reflected toward the end portion 634, the light can travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted at the irradiation angle γ is The area to be reflected to the projection plate member 620 can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected to the side of the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be reflected by the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 to be easily incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light which injects into the side end surface of the projection board member 620 can be raised that much.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and the attachment structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIG. 44 to FIG.

  Fig.44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, FIG.44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 in the arrow XLIVb direction view of Fig.44 (a). 45 (a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44 (a), and FIG. 45 (b) is an irradiation unit 650 at line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 44 (b). FIG. In FIGS. 44 and 45, the state (that is, the state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed) before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of (eight in the present embodiment) LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two each in the present embodiment) first block 653 and second block 654 disposed are provided.

  The substrate member 652 is formed of an elastically deformable material in a band shape long in a front view. As described above, the LEDs 651 are light emitting means for emitting light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of the LED 651 are directed in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 They are arranged at equal intervals along (the left and right direction in FIG. 44 (b)).

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are disposed on the central side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 In addition, second blocks 654 are disposed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are difficult to elastically deform) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of attachment to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between the adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Fig.46 (a) is a front view of the 1st block 653, FIG.46 (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st block 653 in the XLVIb-XLVIb line of Fig.46 (a). Also, FIG. 46 (c) is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 taken along line XLVId-XLVId of FIG. 46 (c).

  The first block 653 includes a bottom wall portion 653a having a rectangular shape in a front view and a side wall portion 653b erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side (see FIG. 46 (a) The front side is formed in an open box shape.

  A fastening hole h is recessed in an end face on the front side of the opposite side wall portion 653b of the four side wall portions 653b (provided to stand from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a), and the screw S1 can be tightened It is assumed. Further, the side wall portions 653b other than the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are recessed are connected by the connecting wall 653c, and a protrusion 653c1 is provided so as to project from the front end face of the connecting wall 653c.

  The second block 654 includes a bottom wall portion 654a having a rectangular shape in a front view and a side wall portion 654b erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. Side is formed in an open box shape. In the bottom wall portion 654a, an opening 654a1 having a rectangular shape in a front view is bored, and an electrical connection line can be inserted therethrough.

  A fastening hole h is recessed in an end face on the front side of the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a among the four side wall portions 654b, and the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected by the connecting wall 654c, and a fastening hole h is recessed in the end face on the front side of the connecting wall 654c. Can be concluded.

  In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are drilled at two positions of side wall portions 653b and 654b erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (A) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pins 612g of the front base 612 are inserted through the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. Thereby, positioning of the arrangement position of both blocks 653 and 654 to front base 612 can be performed, and holding in the arrangement position can be performed.

  The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane (that is, a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 46A). And, it is formed to be symmetrical with respect to a second virtual plane passing through the center in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 46A) and perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

  Therefore, in the irradiation unit 650 in which two first blocks 653 are provided for one substrate member 620, the first blocks 653 can be made common, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can. Further, when assembling the first block 653 to the substrate member 620, since the first block 653 has no directivity in the vertical direction and the longitudinal direction with respect to the substrate member 620, the workability at the time of assembling operation is improved. Can be

  Similarly, the second block 654 corresponds to a first virtual plane passing through the center in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 46C) (ie, a virtual plane including axes of two fastening holes h) It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

  Therefore, since the second block 654 can be made common in the irradiation unit 650 in which two second blocks 654 are disposed for one substrate member 620, the number of parts can be reduced and product cost can be reduced. Can. In addition, when assembling the second block 654 to the substrate member 620, since the second block 654 does not have the directivity in the vertical direction with respect to the substrate member 620, it is possible to improve the workability at the time of assembly work. Can.

  Referring back to FIGS. 44 and 45, description will be made. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal direction along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and with a predetermined space between adjacent ones. Ru.

  More specifically, the first block 653 and the second block 654 have their front surfaces superimposed on the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screw S1 inserted from the insertion hole drilled in the substrate member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. As a result, it is fastened and fixed to the back side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 is protruded to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652.

  Only the LED 651 is disposed (mounted) on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are disposed (mounted) on the back surface of the substrate member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in the form of a box whose front is open, and the opened side is disposed overlapping the back of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 653 and 654 have a recess on the surface on the side to be superimposed (disposed) on the substrate member 652, the electronic components and connectors mounted on the substrate member 652 in the recess (internal space) Can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic component and the connector can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to suppress damage to the electronic component and the connector due to the abutting member (for example, the projection plate member 620) being abutted. it can.

  Also, the circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, such a circuit can be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, so that it is possible to prevent the circuit from being broken (broken) due to a member (e.g., the projection plate member 620) which is displaced around it being abutted. it can. In addition, portions of the substrate member 652 where both blocks 653 and 654 are not disposed are elastically deformed (curved) into a curved shape that is convex toward the back side (see FIG. 34), so the circuit is projected that much It can be separated from the plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being broken (broken) even in a portion where both the blocks 653 and 654 are not provided.

  A method of arranging the irradiation unit 650 configured as described above on the base member 610 (assembly method) will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 and in the region between the intermediate standing portion 611 b and the outer standing portion 612 c. In this case, while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652, the holding pins 612g erected from the back surface of the front base 612 are inserted through the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654. .

  As a result, both blocks 653 and 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) are held on the back of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). Thereafter, the front surface of the back surface base 611 is superimposed on the back surface of the front surface base 612, so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611, 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (assembled) on the base member 610.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are disposed on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, as described above. That is, not only the circumferential intervals of the LEDs 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential intervals of the LEDs 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 are the same as the other intervals. Be done.

  Here, the projection unit 600 causes the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. The arrangement (attachment) of the LEDs 651 is, in addition to the large number thereof, the arrangement of each LED 651 by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 65 to a posture directed to the center of the projection plate member 620. Need to be done, which increases the time and effort of the installation work.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of (eight in the present embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed to be elastically deformable, so that one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650) By disposing (attaching) the front base 612 (base member 610) to the front base 612 (base member 610), the operation of arranging a plurality of (eight in the present embodiment) LEDs 651 can be completed at one time (see FIG. 34). Therefore, the effort of the arrangement | positioning operation | work of LED651 can be suppressed by that much.

  Further, by inserting the holding pins 612g of the back surface base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. The direction of the irradiated surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble the plurality of LEDs 651 to the rear surface base 612 while adjusting their irradiation surfaces individually, and only by inserting the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654, each LED 651 Since the posture (irradiation direction) of can be set (adjusted), it is possible to suppress the time and labor of the operation (installation) of the LED 651 also from this point.

  In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 which are formed to be higher in rigidity than the substrate member 652 and both the blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back base 612. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined to a desired posture by suppressing the warpage and the bending of the substrate member 652 accompanying the external force input or correcting the warpage and the bending of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the attitude of each of the LEDs 651 can be prevented from being affected by the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each of the LEDs 651 can be directed to an appropriate direction and the direction can be easily maintained.

  In particular, each LED 651 is disposed in the area where the first block 653 or the second block 654 of the substrate member 652 is provided (ie, inside the area surrounded by the four side wall portions 653 b and 654 b in front view) It will be set up. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 accompanying the input of an external force such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 itself, so the posture of the substrate member 652 becomes a desired posture. It can be easy to specify. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed to an appropriate direction and the direction is further maintained. It can be easy.

  Further, each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the substrate member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back surface of the substrate member 652, so The LED 651 can be made closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

  Here, the LEDs 651 are disposed at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (the left and right direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, one of the fastening holes h formed in two places in the second block 654 is formed in the connecting wall 654c, so the longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 is correspondingly Can be shortened. The second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 in a posture in which the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed is on the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653 b in which the fastening holes h are not formed are positioned on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652.

  Thereby, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of the light to be incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured, while the longitudinal direction of the irradiation unit 650 (FIGS. ) Can be made short and spaced between adjacent irradiation units 650 (to provide a space). In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be disposed by utilizing such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily made closer.

  On the other hand, in the first block 653, both of the fastening holes h formed in two places are formed in the connection wall 654c, so the distance between the fastening holes h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position of fastening and fixing of the substrate member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be made close to the LED 651. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to cause the LED 651 to be affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 caused by external force input such as vibration, and to easily correct the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 itself in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warpage or deflection of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed to an appropriate direction and the direction is further maintained. It can be easy.

  In this case, in the first block 653, the distance between the fastening holes h formed in two places becomes large, and thus there is a possibility that the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the two fastening holes h becomes weak. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are formed, and the projection 653c1 protruding from the connecting wall 653c is inserted in the substrate member 652 Insert through the hole. Therefore, the engagement of the projection 653c1 and the insertion hole makes it easy to suppress the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 accompanying the input of an external force such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping or bending of the substrate member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily defined as the desired posture. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide the screw S1, and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed to an appropriate direction while the product cost is reduced. It can be easier to maintain.

  The longitudinal ends (the outermost sides in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45B) of the substrate member 652 are free ends (that is, they are not restrained by the second block 654). The attitudes of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may be unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent in a direction where the arc center is located on the front side). (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can be exerted as a force in the direction of pressing the back surfaces of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 to the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the postures of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a back base 830 having a rectangular shape in a front view, a front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the back base 830, and a back side of the back base 830. A drive motor 880 arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated relative to the back surface base 830 and the front base 820 by the drive force of the drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850 860, a connecting member 870 for connecting the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 disposed in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

  The back surface base 830 protrudes in the respective axial centers of an opening 831 formed to have a size capable of inserting the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. Mainly provided are shaft portions 832 and 833 to be formed, and a back side restricting portion 834 which is provided on the front side so as to protrude and extend in a curved shape.

  The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the back surface side of the back surface base 830 is inserted through the opening 831. Thus, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 disposed on the front side of the rear surface base 830.

  The opening 831 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. Thus, when the transmission gear 861 is broken, the transmission gear 861 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the rear base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the work process of component replacement when the transmission gear 861 is broken.

  The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts on which transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860, which will be described later, are respectively supported and rotatably held, and are cylindrically protruded from the back surface base 830 to the front side.

  The back side restricting portion 834 is a projection which restricts the displacement of the back surface direction (the back direction in FIG. 47) of the connection member 870 described later, and is provided on the front side of the back surface base 830. It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

  The front base 820 is formed in a front view horizontally long rectangular shape having an outer shape slightly larger than the rear base 830. The front base 820 has a support portion 821 recessed from the front to the back (from the front to the back in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 erected at the edge on the back, and a protrusion on the back , And a bulging portion 825 projecting to the rear surface side.

  The pivot portion 821 is an axial hole into which one end of a pin member 890 to be described later is inserted, and is recessed downward on the right side of the front base 820 in a front view.

  Side wall 822 is a wall for forming a gap between rear base 830 and front base 820 for arranging transmission mechanism 860 and connection member 870 described later, and a thickness in the front-rear direction of transmission mechanism 860 and connection member 870 It is erected on the front base 820 and on the left and right (other than the lower end) edges with dimensions larger than the dimensions. As a result, when the front base 820 and the rear base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be disposed so as to be displaceable therebetween.

  The protrusion 823 is a protrusion engaged with one end side (the upper side in FIG. 48) of the biasing spring SP described later, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is formed to protrude on the back side of the front base 820.

  The front side regulation portion 824 is a projection which regulates the displacement of the connection member 870 in the front direction (the front direction in FIG. 47), and is provided on the back side of the front base 820 and along the displacement of the connection member 870. Extending in a curved shape.

  The bulging portion 825 is a protruding wall which is disposed laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP described later at a predetermined distance, and is formed so as to protrude from the lower end portion of the front base 820 toward the back surface.

  The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train configured by transmission gears 861 to 863, and by mutually meshing in series, the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted via the transmission gears 861 and 862 to the transmission gear 863. It is transmitted to.

  The transmission gear 863 has a tooth portion 863a meshing with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b connected to the connecting member 870, a projecting portion 863c projecting in an arc shape centered on the axis, and a rotational position thereof And a plate-like sensor detection plate 863 d for detecting the

  The toothed portion 863a is a toothed surface formed on about two thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863. Thus, the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

  The shaft portion 863 b is a shaft connected to the connecting member 870, and protrudes cylindrically on the back side, and the shaft is disposed at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

  The projecting portion 863 c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, and is formed to project from the outer edge portion of the transmission gear 863 on the back side, and centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is curved and formed in a circular shape.

  The sensor detection plate 863 d is a plate that blocks a detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and is formed with the tooth portion 863 a of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to project radially outward on the side which is not formed.

  The connection member 870 is a member for transmitting the driving force of the rotation of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, is formed to be curved in a substantially C shape in a front view, and is formed longitudinally at one end (upper end in FIG. 48) of the curved shape. A gear-side connection hole 871 formed through the opening, a displacement-side connection hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (the lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and an abutment protruding upward from the outside of the curved portion And a unit 873.

  The gear side connection hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863 b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863 b. Thus, the transmission gear 863 and the coupling member 870 can be coupled, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the coupling member 870.

  The displacement side connection hole 872 is a through hole into which a shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. Thus, the connection member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connection member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

  The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip end thereof is disposed between the back side restriction portion 834 of the back surface base 830 and the front side restriction portion 824 of the front base 820 Be done.

  Further, the contact portion 873 has a width slightly smaller than the distance between the back side regulation portion 834 of the back surface base 830 and the front side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connection member 870 is displaced, the resistance at the time of displacement of the connection member 870 is large by displacing the contact portion 873 with the gap between the back side regulation portion 834 and the front side regulation portion 824. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by abutting on the front base 820 or the rear base 830.

  The cover member 840 is a member for holding one end side (right end in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and is fastened to the front base 820 with the pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . Further, in the cover member 840, a pivot portion 841 recessed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side is formed.

  The pivot portion 841 is a groove for holding (pivoting) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and a position facing the pivot portion 821 of the front base 820. Is formed. Thus, since the pin member 890 is disposed between the pivoting portion 821 of the front base 820 and the pivoting portion 841 of the cover member 840, the pin member 890 can be prevented from coming off the vertical displacement unit 800.

  The displacement member 850 is a member decorated on the front side, and one end side (right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and the other end side (left side in FIG. 47) is formed in circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 is formed to include an axial hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the biasing spring SP is coupled, and a shaft portion 853 that transmits the driving force of the coupling member 870.

  As described above, the shaft hole 851 is a through hole into which the pin member 890 is inserted, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at one end side end portion of the displacement member, and the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890 Is also formed large. Therefore, in the state where the pin member 890 is inserted into the shaft hole 851, the displacement member 850 is disposed between the bearing portion 821 of the front base 820 and the bearing portion 841 of the cover member 840. The displacement member 850 can be disposed in front of the front base 820 so as to be rotatable about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

  The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (the lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and is formed so as to protrude from the back side of the displacement member 850. Further, the projection 852 is formed at a position projecting from the lower side to the back side of the projection 823 of the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is disposed on the front base 820, and the projection distance thereof is the front side of the back base. It is formed to a position substantially coinciding with the side surface of. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the gravity direction. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 820 in the direction of gravity.

  As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870, and is lower than the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is disposed on the front base 820 (see FIG. The lower side is formed projecting. Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connection member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connection member 870.

  As described above, the pin member 890 is an axis inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed of a metal rod having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. Thereby, when a force is applied to the rotation shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced, breakage of the rotation shaft can be suppressed.

  Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates, the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates relative to the respective shaft support portions 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistance can be divided into two, it is possible to suppress the breakage of the component by increasing the resistance at one place.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. It is.

  54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the middle position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. It is. In FIGS. 54 to 56, a state in which the back surface base 830 is removed is illustrated in order to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 54, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is disposed in the ascent state (first position), the shaft 863b of the transmission gear 863 is disposed upward. A connection member 870 connected to the shaft 863 b is disposed at the top. As a result, since the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side coupling hole 872 of the coupling member 870 is disposed upward, the posture in which the displacement member 850 is lifted upward is set.

  In the first position, a straight line connecting the axial center of the transmission gear 863 and the axial center of the shaft 863 b is connected with the axial center of the projecting portion 863 c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 The straight line is disposed on the same straight line.

  Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (i.e., a dead point) in which no force component in a direction to push and pull the coupling member 870 and rotate the transmission gear 863 is generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the first position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

  When power is supplied to the drive motor 880 from the states shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, the drive motor 880 is rotationally driven, and the transmission gears 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are rotated, The shaft 863 b is displaced downward. Thus, the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft 863 b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward with the rotation of the shaft 863 b. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side (the lower side in FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 to rotate the displacement member 850.

  In this case, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft 863b, the axis of the projection 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side of the connecting member 870 A state of being in tolerance with a straight line connecting the connecting holes 872 is made. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can release the state (that is, the dead point) in which no force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the coupling member 870 and rotating the transmission gear 863 is generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotational direction (right rotation in FIG. 54) for displacing the displacement member 850, the force by which the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780 is pulled by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is , And can be applied in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when it is displaced from the first position.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, power is supplied to drive motor 880 after displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (ie, the state located at the dead center). Explain the case of turning off.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, in a state where power supply to drive motor 880 is turned off after displacement from the first position, the shaft center (rotation center) of transmission gear 863 and the shaft of transmission gear 863 Of gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP at a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 are substantially orthogonal The force is balanced (intermediate position).

  Therefore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off, so that the displacing member 850 is centered on the middle position (the balancing position). The displacement member 850 can be reciprocated by the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. That is, since the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be regarded as the movement of the orthogonal projection of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, it is possible to make the displacement member perform interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if electric power is supplied to drive motor 880 and drive force is applied from transfer mechanism 860 to displacement member 850 via connection member 870, it is different from the above-mentioned displacement (movement of orthographic projection of constant velocity circular motion). In an aspect, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and variations in displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, the variation of the displacement can be increased simply by switching on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850. Since there is no need to increase the complexity, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

  Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is canceled, and the action of gravity of the displacement member 850 is performed. When making the displacement member 850 reciprocate displacement due to the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP, displacement of the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not only linear movement in the vertical direction. The rotational motion with the shaft hole 851 as the center of rotation can also be combined displacement. As a result, the displacement member 850 can perform an attractive displacement.

  In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacing member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) along with the displacement of the displacing member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863, and the transmission gear is transmitted along with the pushing and pulling. Since the attitude of 863 is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the component of the force in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the pushing and pulling direction. That is, when the displacing member 850 is reciprocated, the amount of resistance that the displacing member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, it is possible to apply a change to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacing member 850, and to cause the displacing member to perform interesting displacement.

  Furthermore, as described above, in a state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft 863 b of the transmission gear 863 The straight line connecting the axial centers and the straight line connecting the axial center of the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 and the axial center of the displacement side connecting hole 872 are substantially orthogonal to each other. The magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotation of the transmission gear 863 can be maximized at the balancing position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced when going from the balancing position to either direction of push or pull . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocated, the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transfer mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 can be changed approximately symmetrically with respect to the balance position. Makes it easy to continue

  When power is supplied to the drive motor 880 from the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55 and the transmission gears 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are further rotated, the shaft 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced. Accordingly, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft 863 b is further pushed downward as the shaft 863 b is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement side coupling hole 872 formed on the other end side of the coupling member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 to rotate the displacement member 850.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is disposed at the lowered position (second position), the shaft 863b of the transmission gear 863 is disposed downward. The connection member 870 connected to the shaft 863 b is disposed below. Thus, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is disposed downward, so that the displacement member 850 can be in a posture of being pushed downward.

  In the second position, a straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the projection 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 The straight line connecting the axial centers of the holes 872 is arranged at the same straight line length.

  Therefore, in the second position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (i.e., a dead point) in which no force component in a direction to push and pull the coupling member 870 and rotate the transmission gear 863 is generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the second position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed, and durability can be improved.

  Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the intermediate position. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. 57A to 57C, a part of the transmission gear 863 (a projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 57A, in the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is disposed at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the back surface base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back surface base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

  Therefore, in the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, in the first position, it is preferable to stop the displacement member 850 in order to form the retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 can be viewed from the player by arranging the displacement member 850 upward. However, the resistance for driving the displacement member 850 can be increased to easily maintain the stopped state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), a state where power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more (the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 In the state of driving the drive range θ6), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863 c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a predetermined amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connection member 870 disposed between the transmission gear 863 and the back surface base 830 can be increased, so that resistance when displacing the connection member 870 Can be made smaller.

  Therefore, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance for displacing the connecting member 870 is reduced. The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57C, in the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connection member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

  Here, when the displacement member which is displaced up and down is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertia force at the time of stopping, so that the displacement member can not be stopped quickly. was there.

  On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connection member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863, so displacement of the displacement member 850 is achieved. Of the force at which the connecting member 870 is brought into contact with the transmission gear 863 and the force at which the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (the driving of the drive motor 880) is stopped. Can be distributed in As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when being displaced from the first position will be described. 58 (a) to 58 (c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. In FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), transition states from the first position are illustrated. In FIGS. 58A to 58C, a part of the transmission gear 863 (a projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connection member 870) is illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 58A to FIG. 58C, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range θ5, the second position from the first position As the position is displaced, the portion of the transmission gear 863 where the projecting portion 863c and the coupling member 870 are opposed can be reduced.

  Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced along with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

  Further, when displacing the displacing member 850 from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacing member 850 can be increased while displacing it to the first position of the retracted position. The displacement member 850 can be quickly brought to a stop state when it is displaced to a position and stopped.

  That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stopped state by the inertia force that stops the operation, but the resistance of the displacement member 850 at the time of stopping can be increased. can do.

  On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range θ6, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at the position facing in the front-rear direction Thus, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft 863 b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be displaced quickly, and the rendering effect by the projecting operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

  Also, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released to make the displacement member 850 reciprocate about the middle position (the balance position), the protrusion is provided. Reciprocation displacement of the displacement member 850 can be smoothly performed while avoiding the generation of resistance by the portion 863c.

  Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c). 59 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXc-LIXc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front side regulation portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side regulation portion 834 of the back base 830. Will be placed.

  That is, the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. Thereby, the displacement of the connection member 870 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

  Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement side connection hole 872, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 tilt in the front-rear direction by the gravity of the displacement member 850 by the gap between the shaft and the hole. As a result, there is a problem that the displacement side connection hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

  On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is prevented from being inclined in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59C, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the position where the back side restricting portion 834 of the back surface base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in the state where it is not arranged.

  Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 and the front base 820 and the back base 830 in the second position can be increased. As a result, the resistance at the time of displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

  Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 is a substantially straight line in which the contact portion 873 connects the shaft center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the shaft center of the gear side connecting hole of the connecting member 870. It is disposed on the opposite side of the axial center of the axial hole 851 of the displacement member 850 with respect to the axial center of the gear side coupling hole of the coupling member 870 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is abutted against the front base 820 and the back base 830, the shaft of the transmission gear 863 The inclination of the gear side connecting hole 871 of the portion 863 b and the connecting member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the coupling member 870.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set smaller than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is The outer diameter dimensions of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are set to be the same.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  60 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is a projection on the line LXb-LXb in FIG. 60 (a). FIG. 21 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are respectively disposed on the back side and the front side at the outer peripheral edge portion of the projection plate member 2620. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a plate-like body circular in a front view, and the outer diameter of the projection plate member 2620 is equal to the outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. In addition, the projection plate member 2620 is provided with a notch 621 in a part of the outer edge, and a reflection part 622 for irregularly reflecting light.

  The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620 and is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and is formed in a U shape in which the cross section is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. A guide groove 2641 is provided. The groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the front side (upper side in FIG. 60B) of the projection plate member 2620, and the axis thereof is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Furthermore, the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612).

  The guide groove 2641 is a groove for guiding the collar C to the inside, and the recess width is formed larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 being guided by the guide groove 2641.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. 63, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described.

  61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. In FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b) and 63 (b), illustration of cross-sectional lines is omitted to facilitate understanding.

  Also, in FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b) and 63 (b), the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 as in the first embodiment. The angle of refraction at that time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and the light incident from the light source A to the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640 is illustrated in an orthogonal manner. Furthermore, in FIG. 61 to FIG. 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, light of the irradiation angle α2 irradiating the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 has its outer edge on the projection plate member 620. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surface on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 2620. Thus, light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axial center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated to the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflection part 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

  In this case, the dimension of the outer shape of the projection plate member 2620 is larger than that of the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge of the projection plate member 2620 can be disposed near the LED 651 (the light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount (light quantity) of light projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the irradiation for irradiating the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side in FIG. 62 (a)) The light of angle β 2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light irradiated to the range of the irradiation angle β 2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels to the axial center side of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, as in the first embodiment, when the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (face), the light irradiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is projected plate member 2620 It can be made incident.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the groove forming member 2640 on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 62 (a)) of the guide groove 641 is irradiated. The light of the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the edge on the back side of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light irradiated to the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and is reflected. The reflected light can be made incident on the projection plate member 2620 by being irradiated to the side surface of the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (faced).

  That is, by recessing the guide groove 2641 on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is the side surface of the guide groove 2641. The light can be reflected to be incident on the projection plate member 2620.

  Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, it is possible to combine the role of holding the color C with the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620. .

  Further, compared to the first embodiment, the amount (light amount) of light incident from the groove forming member 2640 to the projection plate member 2620 can be increased by the addition of the irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the groove forming member 2640. It is possible to suppress deterioration.

  In addition, about the light which irradiates the gear member 630 among the lights irradiated from the light source A of LED651, since it is the same as that of 1st Embodiment, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64 to FIG. In the first embodiment, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are in contact with the entire periphery of the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620. However, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment , A surface floating relative to the projection plate member 3620.

  First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a projection at a line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64 (a). 15 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630, and a groove forming member 640. FIG.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the arrow LXVa direction view of FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 65 (b) is a view of FIG. FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 taken along line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. 65 (c) is a projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. And a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed in a plate-like body having a circular front view, and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 are on the back side and the front side It is arranged on the side respectively. The projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 projecting to the front side and the rear side is formed at the outer edge.

  The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular shape in cross section that protrudes on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 64 (b)) or the back side (the lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) toward the outer edge. Further, the protrusion 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the line of an imaginary line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end of the recessed groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later Be done. On the other hand, the protrusion 3623 protruding to the back side is set on the line of an imaginary line G, the tip of which connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the recessed groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. Ru.

  The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate shape in a front view, and is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. In addition, the gear member 3630 is screwed so as to pass through at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction and a recessed groove 3635 which is recessed at a predetermined interval on the side surface on the front side (upper side in FIG. 64). And a retaining hole 636 for

  The recessed grooves 3635 are grooves which are recessed in the radial direction, and are formed on both circumferential sides of each locking hole 636. Thus, when the gear member 3630 is disposed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64B).

  The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate-like body in an annular shape in a front view, and is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed penetrating at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction and a recessed groove 3645 which is recessed at a predetermined interval on the side surface on the back surface side (the lower side in FIG. 64B). And an opening 646 for screwing.

  The recessed groove 3645 is a groove which is recessed in the radial direction, and is formed at a position opposed to the recessed groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thus, when the groove forming member 3640 is disposed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

  In this case, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are grounded is, as shown in FIG. 65, an opening 646 into which a bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 is inserted. It is considered as a surface that overlaps in the radial direction. Thereby, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a reduction in the holding force. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 may be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. As a result, it is possible to secure a holding surface for holding the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640.

  Next, light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG.

  66A and 66B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In FIG. 66 (b), illustration of the cross-sectional line is omitted to facilitate understanding.

  Further, in FIG. 66 (b), as in the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 affects the present invention. The light incident from the light source A to the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 is illustrated in an orthogonal manner. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

  Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the light at the irradiation angle α3 irradiating the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620 It is incident from the side.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the side surface on the front side and the back side of the projection plate member 3620. Thus, light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axial center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated to the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is irregularly reflected by the reflection part 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

  In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622 It is easy to get to As a result, light incident from the side end face of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily made to reach the reflection portion 622, so the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened to And you can make the pattern come up clearly.

  On the other hand, light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member are disposed with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is the first embodiment. As in the embodiment, the light is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side.

  Therefore, the light from the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is projected to the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 so that the light from the light source other than the light source A is projected. Can be suppressed. Thereby, it can suppress that the display given to the reflection part 622 of the projection board member 3620 floats up (displays) with lights other than LED651.

  Further, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between projection plate member 3620, groove forming member 3640 and gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps with opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65C). A place where light does not enter can be used as a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outer side in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflective portion 622 side. Therefore, it can suppress reliably that the light which injected into the groove | channel formation member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from LED651 injects into the projection board member 3620 side.

  Further, in this case, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between projection plate member 3620, groove forming member 3640 and gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping with opening 646 in the radial direction. Misalignment of the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 with respect to the plate member 3620 can be suppressed.

  Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted from the gap to the axial center side of the projection plate member 3620, There is a risk that light may leak from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

  On the other hand, since the projection 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light of the light source A of the LED 651 is made up of the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630. It is not irradiated to the gap. Thus, light can be suppressed from leaking from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

  Further, since the dimension of the side surface of the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 66A) can be increased by the projection 3623, the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts as those in the above embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Fig.67 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in 4th Embodiment, FIG.67 (b) is sectional drawing of the irradiation unit 4650. FIG. 68 (a) is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68 (b) is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). Also, in FIG. 68, the state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is disposed on the base member 610 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 by the screw S2. In this case, the height dimension (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 67) of the head of the screw S2 is set to be larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the protrusion amount of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is larger than the protrusion amount of the LED 651.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is the same as that of the projection plate member 620 on the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface is in contact (outside contact), the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is set to a size that can not be in contact with the LED 651 disposed between the two screws S2.

  Thereby, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when it is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 by radial rattling based on dimensional tolerance or assembly tolerance, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, breakage of the LED 651 can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed of a metal material. Therefore, when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction, the LED 651 is protected. Can increase the effect of When the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn, so that the projection plate member 620 is sagged in the radial direction. Also, the LED 651 can be prevented from being abutted.

  As described above, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since the complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back surface base 611 and the front surface base 612 can be simplified, and the formability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

  In addition, the ability to protect the LED 651 by using the screw S2 can loose the allowance of radial rattling due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of parts, thereby enhancing design freedom. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be made closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76, a projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disk shape in a front view and is rotated about the center of the circle. However, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 has a longitudinally long rectangular shape in a front view The case where it is formed in and is slid in one direction will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a front view of a projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. In FIG. 72, a state in which the back surface base 5611 is removed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, projection unit 5600 is formed slidably in a base member 5610 which is formed in a circular shape in a front view and whose central portion is open, and in the open portion of base member 5610. Projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 for causing light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 A gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmission to the 5620 is mainly provided.

  The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and is disposed on the front of the back base 5611 whose center portion is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape and on the front of the back base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the back base 5611 The projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665, and 6565) are provided in an internal space formed between the facing surfaces of the back base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

  As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape in a front view, and has an outer standing portion 612c erected on the outer edge on the back side and an opening in a horizontally long rectangular in a central portion. A central opening 5612h, an inner standing portion 612a erected on the rear side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i projecting from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h; It is mainly provided with two shaft parts 5612k which are formed on the back side from between the pair of holding parts 5612i, and a sliding projection 5612m which is formed to project from the lower side to the rear side of central opening 5612h. Ru.

  The central opening 5612 h is opened in a laterally long rectangular shape at the center of the front surface 5612 in a front view. The player can visually recognize the patterns and symbols of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612 h.

  The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding a rod member 5625 described later, and is formed to protrude from the upper ends of the central opening 5612h to the back side (the front side in FIG. 71) of the front base 5612. Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a concave groove 5612i1 which is concave in a manner to be concave on the front side (the rear side in the drawing of FIG. 71) on the projecting surface thereof.

  The recessed groove 5612i1 is recessed in a circular arc shape in cross section from the center to the end side in the left-right direction (left and right direction in FIG. 71) of the front base 5612, and the inner diameter of the recessed groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of a bar member 5625 described later It is formed larger than. The pair of recessed grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the end portions in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625 It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after the bar member 5625 is disposed on the inner peripheral surface of the recessed groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the bar member 5625 at a position facing the recessed groove 5612i1 from the back surface side (front side in FIG. 71). The bar members 5625 can be disposed on the front base 5612 by disposing the holding portion covers 5628 provided at both ends (see FIG. 72).

  The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion serving as a rotation axis of a rotating member 5670 described later, and is disposed at a symmetrical position with respect to a vertical line passing the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening 5612h.

  The sliding projection 5612m is a projection for guiding the displacement of the rack 5627 to be described later, and is formed so as to project from the lower side of the central opening 5612h to the rear side. Further, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are disposed at symmetrical positions with respect to a perpendicular passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

  The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light transmitting material, and when the display of the third symbol display device 81 is made visible to the player, when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a design. That is, a pattern or a design can be raised (displayed) in front of the third symbol display device 81.

  The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at an end portion on the lower side, and a reflecting portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is disposed below the opening in the central portion of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612 h of the front base 5612), and is disposed at a position not visible from the front side of the projection unit 5600 in the assembled state. Also, the rack 5627 is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72) of the projection plate member 5620. Thus, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

  In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a engaged with a gear 5668 is engraved on its lower surface, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the central portion.

  The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). And is formed on the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627.

  The sliding groove 5627 b is a groove for suppressing the inclination of the rack 5627 when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left and right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, and is opened long in the left and right direction. The pair of sliding protrusions 5612 m of the base 5612 is inserted. Thereby, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the back surface base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated, and the rack 5627 is slidingly displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

  At the upper side on the back side of the projection plate member 5620, a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (left and right direction in FIG. 72) and a position opposite to the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 interposed therebetween And a front cover 5626 of a shape is disposed.

  The rod member 5625 is formed longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and is formed shorter than the outer diameter of the back surface base 5611. It is disposed on the projection plate member 5620 so as to be sandwiched therebetween.

  The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. It is disposed on the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 sandwiched between the member 5620 and the member 5620.

  The front cover 5626 is provided with a groove 5626a which is recessed on the front side (the rear side in the drawing of FIG. 72) on the side facing the projection plate member 5620 and which is recessed in the left-right direction. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is disposed inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recessed dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625 Be done.

  Thus, the rod member 5625 can be disposed inside the groove 5626a. As a result, the projection plate member 5620 can be slidably displaced in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the rod member 5625.

  Further, the rod member 5625 is disposed on the rear side of the front side surface of the front cover 5626. That is, since the rod member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be disposed on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion in the projection plate member 5620.

  Here, in the state where the rod member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the back side of the projection plate member 5620. However, while the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits light incident on the inside from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, a groove is formed in the projection plate member 5620 When the thickness dimension is partially reduced, it is difficult for the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 to advance as the thickness dimension is reduced, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed on the front cover 5626 in a state in which the rod member 5625 is disposed inside without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difficulty of advancing the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 and to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620.

  Further, as described above, since the rod member 5625 is disposed so that its both ends can not be detached from the front base 5612, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. It is held. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended and disposed on the rod member 5625 in such a manner that the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 72).

  Therefore, when the driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slidingly displaced in the left-right direction. . When the rack 5627 is slidingly displaced in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

  In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is disposed substantially linearly along the upper end face of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 disposed in front of the first block is the upper end face of the projection plate member 5620 It is arranged at the opposite position. Thereby, the light irradiated from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be made incident from the upper end face of the projection plate member 5620, and the pattern or pattern of the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be raised.

  Further, on the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed, a bulging portion 5612 n is formed on the back side (the front side in FIG. The bulging portion 5612 n is a portion for raising the first block 653 to the back side, and the raising dimension thereof is set to be larger than the plate thickness of a rotating member 5670 described later. Thus, a rotation member 5670 described later can be disposed in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

  Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the projection 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and holding it by the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

  A rotating member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 disposed at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

  The rotating member 5670 is a plate member bent in an L-shape in a front view, and is disposed on the front base 5612 with the bent portion positioned at the center in the left-right direction, and has an irradiation unit on one longitudinal side. The 650 second block 654 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 which is penetrated in the front-rear direction is formed in a bent portion of the rotation member 5670.

  The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotation member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612, the rotation member 5670 can rotate around the shaft 5612k with respect to the front base 5612.

  Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced. That is, by displacing the rotation member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent to displace the second block 654 with respect to the first block 653.

  The rotating member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in such a direction as to displace the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k. It is disposed at 5612. Further, on the lower side of the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 where the rotating member 5670 is disposed, a displacement restricting protrusion 5612j that protrudes to the back side is formed.

  The displacement restricting projection 5612 j is a member that restricts the downward displacement of the one end side of the rotating member 5670, and the rear end (the back surface 5611 side) of the rotating member 5670 whose protruding end is disposed on the front base 5612. While being located, it is located in the front side (front base 5612 side) rather than LED651 of irradiation unit 650 attached to rotation member 5670, and is formed. Thus, the displacement of the one end side of the rotating member 5670 is controlled by the displacement restricting projection 5612 j of the rotating member 5670 and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 toward the projection plate member 5620 is a displacement restricting projection Interception by the 5612 j can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described. FIG. 73 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

  FIG. 75 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76, a state in which the back surface base 5611 is removed is illustrated. Further, the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation and the displacement direction reversed from the first state to the second state, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed substantially at the central portion in the lateral direction of the central opening 5612h, the rotation disposed on both sides in the lateral direction The member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) so that one end is displaced downward. Thereby, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed in the rotating member 5670 can be displaced relative to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is It can be tilted toward the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be incident from the side surfaces on the left and right sides (the left and right sides in FIG. 74A) of the projection plate member 5620. The amount of light emitted from the front of the projector can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), the driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, and the driving force is transmitted via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) to the rack 5627. When slidingly displaced in the front view right direction (the right direction in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slidingly displaced in the right direction (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (b)). ). Thus, a second state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the right side in a front view with respect to the central opening 5612 h is formed.

  In this case, the front cover 5626 disposed on the front side of the upper end portion of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface of the other end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 disposed in the sliding direction. Thus, a rotational moment in the direction of pushing one end upward can be applied to the rotation member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612 k serving as the rotation axis. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 disposed on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74) (B) It is displaced to the position where the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are on substantially the same straight line.

  Accordingly, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is displaced according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  In addition, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the light amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 It can be changed. That is, it is possible to change the mode of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is easy to give the player an interest.

  Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the amount of light of the projection plate member is kept constant by lighting the LEDs arranged at different positions in accordance with the displacement. Along with this, it is necessary to control the lighting or extinguishing of the LED, and as the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LED becomes more complicated, and the reliability of the product decreases. Furthermore, there is a problem that the cost of the product increases because the LED is disposed at another position.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, since the direction in which the LED 651 irradiates can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and disposed at another position. Since it is not necessary to control to turn on or turn off the LED, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and an increase in the product cost can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in order to irradiate light to the to-be-irradiated body (projecting plate member) to be displaced, if a plurality of fixed illuminators (LEDs) are disposed around the irradiated body, the irradiation range of each irradiator There is a problem in that there is a portion with a weak light amount between them, and when the object to be irradiated is displaced, light and dark are produced, which lowers the interest of the player. Here, it may be considered to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the problem that the product cost increases because the number of irradiators to be arranged increases. There was a point.

  However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced according to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be projected stably regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the loss of the player's interest by suppressing the possibility of light and dark due to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to increase the number of the LEDs 651, the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the driving force of the drive motor 661 can be adjusted for the projection plate member 5620. It can be used for both the drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654, and it becomes unnecessary to newly provide driving means for displacing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the product.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed of an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, there is no need to form the second block 654 to be displaced by a separate member. Therefore, by arranging the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit on the front base 5612 and connecting the wiring, the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base, so the process in assembling can be simplified.

  On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position of the central opening 5612 h in the left-right direction by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Accordingly, the projection plate member 5620 coupled to the rack 5627 is also slide-displaced to form the first state.

  In this case, the rotary member 5670 on the side (left side in FIG. 74 (b)) whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state is a projection plate by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between As the member 5620 is slidingly displaced to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shape in a front view of the rotary member 5670 is pushed downward, and the shaft portion 5612k is rotated about the axis. Further, as described above, the rotation member 5670, which is displaced downward, abuts on the displacement restricting projection 5612j, whereby the rotation range is restricted.

  The displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is, as described above, only because the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are horizontally reversed. The description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the left side in a front view with respect to the center opening 5612 h (see FIGS. 75B and 76B).

  Next, a projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always arranged so as to be visible from the player. However, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. Arranged as possible.

  First, the overall configuration of projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a front view of a projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of projection unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 is a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape in a front view, and a projection plate member arranged so as to be partially visible from an opening formed in the base member 6610 6620, an irradiation unit 650 for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 to the projection plate member 6620 And gear trains (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 6610 is provided with an annular rear base 611 and an annular front base 6612 disposed on the front of the rear base 611, and is formed on the opposing base of the rear base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are accommodated in the internal space.

  In the front base 6612, a shielding member 6612r in a front view annular shape is formed at the inner edge portion of the annular front base 612 in the first embodiment, and an opening which is fanned in a longitudinal direction in a part of the shielding member 6612r. Portion 6612 p is formed.

  The opening 6612 p is an opening for visualizing the projection plate member 6620 disposed on the rear side from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in a front view annular shape, The shield member 6612r is formed to have a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference of the shield member 6612r, and is formed on the right side in front view.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 6612 in the region between the intermediate erected portion 612 b and the outer erected portion 612 c of the outer edge of the opening 6612 p. By overlapping the front faces of the two, they are accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612.

  The projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and the inner diameter thereof is formed larger than the inner diameter of the front base 6612 in an annular shape. In addition, the projection plate member 6620 is disposed coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, in a state where projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge portion of projection plate member 6620 is arranged so as not to be visible to the player.

  In addition, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 disposed in the projection plate member 6620 are disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612 (the shielding member 612r) Since it is provided, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

  The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light transmitting material, transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side, and is viewed by the player through the opening 6612 p of the front base 6612. When the light irradiated from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and the front base 6612 The player is made to visually recognize through the opening 6612 p of the That is, a pattern or a design can be raised (displayed) in the internal space of the opening 6612 p of the front base 6612.

  In addition, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflection unit 6622 for irregularly reflecting light inside. The reflective portion 6622 is a portion whose inside is roughened by laser processing or the like, and a plurality of patterns, designs and the like are divided in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 in the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in front view Ru. In the present embodiment, the pattern of the reflective portion 6622 and the shape of the pattern or the like are divided into six in the circumferential direction, and reflective regions 6622a to 6622f such as six patterns of pattern or pattern are formed (see FIG. 80). .

  Further, in the projection plate member 6620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are respectively disposed on the back side and the front side at the outer peripheral edge. Accordingly, as in the first embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated by transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described. FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c) are rear views of the projection unit 6600. FIG. In FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), the transition state of the projection plate member 6620 is illustrated. Moreover, in FIG. 80, a state in which the back surface base 611 is removed is illustrated. Further, the opening 6612 p of the front base 6612 and the reflection part 6622 (reflection areas 6622 a to 6622 f) of the projection plate member 6620 are illustrated by a dashed line.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in a state where the projection plate member 6620 is disposed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is provided inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in front view (view from the back of the drawing to the front). A reflective area 6622a is disposed. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is made incident from the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 6620, it is possible to display the pattern or pattern of the reflective region 6622a inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize a pattern or a pattern that floats up inside the opening 6612 p.

  In this case, although the light of the LED 651 is also irradiated to the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection area 6622a, since the front base 6612 is disposed on the front of the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f, the player reflects It is not possible to visually recognize the display of the regions 6622 b and 6622 f. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or design of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612 p, the player can not visually recognize the display other than the display surface, and the player's interest can be lost by visualizing other areas. Can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) and 80 (c), when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, as described above, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664). The light is transmitted to the plate member, and the projection plate member 6620 is rotated. The rotation of the projection plate member 6620 switches the design and pattern of the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f disposed inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in front view. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns or designs can be displayed inside the opening 6612 p.

  Here, if a pattern or design is printed on the front surface of the irradiated object (projection plate member 6620) and the irradiated object is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible region of the irradiated object (the opening portion From 6612 p), the pattern or pattern of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can know which display is to be displayed next before the pattern or pattern is completely switched, so that the player can see the irradiated object. There is a problem that the displacement can not be enjoyed until the end.

  In addition, even if the power of the light source (LED 651) for irradiating light to the irradiated object is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated object, the irradiated object is illuminated by the light of the fluorescent lamp in another device or store. By the irradiation, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the pattern and the pattern of the irradiated object.

  In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed of a light transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 6620 is less visible and transparent. be able to. Therefore, when the projection plate member 6620 is rotated, turning off the irradiation of the LED 651 makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern or the pattern of the projection plate member 6620. The 6620 displacement can be enjoyed to the end.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and is rotated with the center as a rotation axis, so that the front base is compared with the case where the projection plate member 6620 slides. While securing the number of patterns and symbols visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612 p 6612, the space required for the arrangement of the projection plate member 6620 can be reduced.

  That is, in the case where the projection plate member 6620 slides, the installation space in the left and right or up and down directions is limited, and it is difficult to secure the pattern of the projection plate member 6620 and the number on the drawing side. Thus, the space required for the arrangement of the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and designs.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the embodiments described above, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced or combined with part or all of one or more other embodiments to constitute a gaming machine.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are disposed on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described, but it is not always necessary to There is no limitation, and the total number of first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 may be three or less, or five or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is disposed on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back surface has been described. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653 and the second block 654 may be disposed in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in the front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is made incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

  Although the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed of the light transmitting material has been described in the first and second embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. 630 and groove forming members 640, 2640 may be formed from two layers of a light transmitting material and a non-transmitting material.

  For example, the rear surface portion 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a layer of impermeable material, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 sides of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, the layer of the non-transmissive material can suppress light emitted from another device in the game area from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, light emitted by a device that is not the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transmissive material.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when the light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or the pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the other units It is possible to suppress that light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  Also, in this case, the layer formed of the non-transmissive material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or flexible material, or between the layer of the non-transmissive material and the layer of the transmissive material It is preferable to interpose a highly reflective metallic material or a flexible material. Accordingly, light incident from the LED 651 to the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 can be more easily reflected by the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, it is possible to intensify the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620, and to make the pattern or the design clearly appear.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere). For example, a seal of a member (for example, silver foil, aluminum, etc.) having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or You may print (for example, white etc.).

  In this case, light emitted from another device in the game area can be suppressed from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by sealing or printing. That is, light emitted from a device that is not the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by sealing or printing.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when the light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and the pattern or the pattern is not displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the other units It is possible to suppress that light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  Furthermore, the light incident from the LED 651 to the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 can be more easily reflected to the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by sealing or printing. As a result, it is possible to intensify the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620, and to make the pattern or the design clearly appear.

  In the case of attaching a seal, the seal may be attached in a mode in which the seal is projected to the outer edge side from the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming member 640, 2640. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and expanding in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily condensed on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  In the third embodiment, the air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 instead of the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. You may intervene.

  In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 may be totally totally reflected by the plate member of non-reflecting material with high reflectance and may be advanced from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (light amount) of the light irradiated at the irradiation angle α3, and intensify the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620, It is possible to make the pattern and the design appear clearly.

  In addition, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the other device in the game area from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 by the plate member of the non-transmissive material having high reflectance. That is, the light emitted from the device that is not the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member made of a highly reflective non-transmissive material.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or pattern is displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620), the light from the other device is the projection plate It can be suppressed that a pattern or a design is displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620 by being incident on the member 3620.

  In the first embodiment, although the case where the means for biasing the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and an elastic body of a rubber-like body, a torsion spring, It may be a leaf spring. The mounting method is exemplified by an aspect in which the projection 852 and the projection 823 are connected and attached, or an aspect in which the projection is attached between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the pivot portion 821 of the base member 820.

  Although the case where the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved about the shaft hole 851 formed at one end has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement member A reference numeral 850 may slide and displace a guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, as long as both end portions of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravity direction is performed as in the first embodiment. Since it is possible to make the movement of the regular projection of the constant velocity circular movement and change the displacement speed, it is possible to make the displacement member 850 perform interesting displacement.

  In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed at a position facing the side end surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 has been described. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be disposed at a position facing the side end surface of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

  Also in this case, as in the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is made incident from the side end surface of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate A pattern or design can be displayed on the surface of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

  In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 does not face the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (i.e., the light irradiation of the LED 651). Side of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 in the front-rear direction) The parts may be arranged to be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

  In this case, the light is irradiated obliquely from the irradiated surface of the LED 651 while the other non-irradiated member different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 is irradiated with light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiated surface of the LED 651. A portion of the light can be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, it is possible to cause the LED 651 to share the light that causes the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 to display a pattern or a pattern, and the light that causes the other irradiated object to be irradiated.

  In the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are disposed in parallel is described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620.

  Specifically, the irradiation surface of the light of the LED 651 is directed to the back side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is projected on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be irradiated with light. In this case, when a pattern or a design is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks from the inner edge of the front base 612, 6612 formed in a front view annular shape. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the irradiation surface of the light of the LED 651 is directed to the front side, and the light irradiated in the direction perpendicular to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It may be a position irradiated to the side end face.

  Further, the light emitting surface of the LED 651 is disposed in a state of being inclined with respect to the side end face of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 with the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 facing back or front. The light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface may be irradiated to the side end faces of the groove forming members 640 2640 and 3640 or the side end faces of the gear members 630 and 3630.

  In addition, while the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is directed to the back side or the front side with respect to the side end face of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 and inclined, The light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be irradiated to the front surface portion 632 of the groove forming members 640 2640 and 3640 or the back surface portion 632 of the gear members 630 and 3630.

  In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 is made incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620 from the front of the projection plate member 5620 Although the case of increasing the amount of light emitted has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the left and right of the projection plate member 5620 It may be different from the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the upper end face of 5620.

  That is, by forming an air layer or a non-light transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the area of the reflective portion 622 (for example, by dividing it into three areas), the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed. The light incident from the light source is emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the first area, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the second area, from the right side surface The incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the third region. As a result, a plurality of patterns or patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be formed, and loss of the player's interest can be suppressed.

  In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620) to irradiate the first to third regions (for example, in the upper part) The arranged light source causes light to be incident from the upper end to illuminate the first area, and the light source arranged on the left side to be incident from the left end surface to illuminate the second area, and the light source arranged on the right is the right end Although it is possible to make the light incident from the surface and irradiate the third region), it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light sources, and there is a problem that the product cost is increased.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is rotated relative to the first block 653 by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 so that the second block Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front can be changed, two areas of the case of irradiating the second or third area and the case of irradiating the first area may be irradiated. Since the number of LEDs 651 can be reduced, the number of LEDs 651 can be reduced, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is changed according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, the rotation member 5670 may be connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor to be newly disposed and rotated.

  In this case, since the rotation member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654, the projection plate member 5620 The amount of light emitted from the front of can be partially increased or decreased. That is, the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced to change the shading of the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 or the display of the pattern.

  In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 for irradiating the projection plate member 620, and the gear for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 661 between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. Although the case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are disposed as one unit has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described unit (projection may be provided between facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611). The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be disposed in the form of two or more stacked in the front-rear direction.

  In this case, by displaying a pattern or a pattern on each of the projection plate members 620, it is possible for the player to visually recognize in a state where the patterns of the respective projection plate members 620 and the display of the patterns are combined. As a result, by changing the rotational position of each of the projection plate members 620, it is possible to form a display pattern of a plurality of patterns or patterns, and it is possible to suppress loss of the player's interest.

  Although the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

  In the third embodiment, the case where the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is disposed has been described. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel), and light projected on the side surface thereof may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light irradiated from the LED 651 can be easily condensed on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

  In addition, a plurality of bolts T are provided at regular intervals, and a portion where no pattern or design is displayed (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620. The display may be separated.

  Further, as described above, the ground contact surface of the fastening portion between projection plate member 3620, groove forming member 3640 and gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps with opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65C). A place where light does not enter can be used as a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outer side in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflective portion 622 side. Therefore, it can suppress reliably that the light which injected into the groove | channel formation member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from LED651 injects into the projection board member 3620 side.

  In this case, it is possible to make the player visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated) by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light of the LED 651 disposed in the irradiation unit 650. .

  The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be slide displacement or rotational displacement, and displaces the irradiation directions of the respective LEDs 651 disposed in the first block 653 and the second block 654 in different directions. It may be something.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example, an effect (a variation effect) for indicating a lottery result of a special symbol executed in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 or an effect (for showing that a jackpot game is being executed ( The jackpot effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, as a jackpot game effect, when a jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, a jackpot effect (continuous jackpot effect) across the plurality of jackpot games is executed It is configured as follows. Specifically, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, the ball entry information can be stored so that it can be stored, and when a big hit game is executed, the stored entry If it is determined whether there is ball entry information winning in a big hit in the ball information, and if it is determined that there is ball entry information winning in a big hit, a plurality of big hit games will be straddled The jackpot effect is executed continuously.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player the game result after the end of the jackpot game currently being executed, depending on the contents of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game, to the player. You can be interested in the jackpot production.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the contents of the jackpot effect may be varied based on not only the ball entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, but also the ball entry information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured to be able to. By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball entry information, to make it possible to easily execute the continuous jackpot effect, and to make the player interested in the jackpot effect.

  In addition, in this control example, it is configured to be able to vary the content of the jackpot effect based on the number of stored ball information (number of reserved memories) of the ball entry information at the time the jackpot game is executed as a jackpot continuous effect. ing.

  Also, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no power support) (probable change state (high probability, power support), short time state (low probability, power support) When it becomes), it is set as the composition by which the production (battle production) for showing that the game state is continuing is performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily notify the player that the gaming state advantageous to the player is continuing.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned battle effect is based on an effect (battle reach) indicating whether the gaming state advantageous to the player is ended and an effect (pre-battle effect) for determining an effect mode of the battle reach. Configured. By configuring in this way, when the gaming state advantageous to the player is actually ended, for example, the battle effect is continued in a period other than the case where the gaming state is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot is won. Can be executed, so that the player continues with a sense of anticipation that the gaming state advantageous to the player is continuing, and an uneasy feeling that the player thinks that the gaming state advantageous to the player has ended. You can play the game while entertaining.

  Further, in this control example, a plurality of effects with different jackpot expectation degrees are executed as effects for suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel different from the player's expectation of the jackpot depending on which rendering is performed. Furthermore, a plurality of expected degree suggestion modes capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot can be displayed stepwise in one variation production, and the expected degree suggestion mode is variable during one variation production .

  In addition, in the present control example, it is configured such that the expectation degree variable suggestion effect suggested to the player is executed by adding up the amount in which the plurality of expectation degree suggestion modes change step by step during one time of the change effect. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while predicting which degree of expectation degree suggestion mode is variable to the player who grasped the effect contents of the expectation degree variable suggestion effect, and the effect is produced Can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in this control example, a specific effect (PUSH display effect) is suggested as a suggestion effect that suggests a timing at which a specific effect (for example, a PUSH display effect for operating the frame button 22) performed during one variation effect is performed. Is configured to execute a countdown effect for specifically notifying the timing at which) is executed, and a precursor effect for notifying that the countdown effect is performed. Then, during one variation production, the start timing of the aura production mentioned above, the execution timing of the specific production, and the period of the countdown production can be configured to be determinable from a plurality, and based on the contents determined respectively It is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of a production | presentation aspect and countdown production | presentation may be set.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in setting the suggested effect, and to enhance the effect, as compared with the configuration in which the suggested effect is performed for a predetermined fixed period.

  First, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of ten main symbols imitating the numbers from "0" to "9". . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 to be described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned (for example, "777") variation display is performed, A jackpot is generated after the variable display ends. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the effective line by the combination of the big hit symbols (in the first control example, the combination of the same main symbols), the big hit moving image is displayed as the big hit.

  In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, and the number of the symbol rows, the direction of the fluctuation display of the symbols in the symbol rows, each symbol The number of symbols in a row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol obtained by combining an image such as a figure or character and a numeral may be configured as a third symbol. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be variable. For example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variation display area of the third symbol is displayed. Makes it difficult for the player to see if the third symbol is changing by reducing the size or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen). You may do it. Also, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), and may be changed again.

  A small display area Dn1 is formed on the upper left of the main display area Dm in a front view. In this small display area Dn1, a guidance display mode for guiding a direction (game direction) in which the player is allowed to shoot a ball is displayed (see FIG. 85A). That is, in this control example, the small display area Dn1 is used as the guidance display area Dn1. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board the ball should be launched toward by simply viewing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dn1. Thus, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  A small display area Dn2 is formed on the upper right of the main display area Dm in a front view. The small display area Dn2 is configured to be able to easily display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, when performing variable display in the small display area Dn2, for example, in the main display area Dm, display effects such as an effect that a predetermined character takes an action or an effect that urges the frame button 22 to be pressed are performed. Is the case. By displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm while the display effect is being performed, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand. In addition, it is easy for the player that the fluctuation display of the third symbol is continued by simply displaying the fluctuation display of the third symbol in the small display area Dn2 during the execution of the display effect. Can be understood.

  As shown in FIG. 81A, the sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this sub display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times. The holding symbol displayed for the sub display area Ds is displayed in the same number as the held number of ball entry. In the first control example, since the maximum value of the number of holding balls is set to four, a maximum of four holding symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the present control example, the number of holding symbols is made to correspond to the number of holding balls, but the method of displaying the number of holding balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of holding balls may be displayed in numbers.

  Furthermore, in this control example, a game result suggestion mode for suggesting a game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and contents of effect display being executed in the main display area Dm are additionally provided. In the sub display area Ds, the effect explanation mode for explaining, the frame button related display mode for showing the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and the information regarding the big hit game is displayed It is configured to be displayed, and the ratio of the display area of the main display area Dm to that of the sub display area Ds is set to be different depending on the contents to be displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is the combination which corresponds to the disassembly and there is a holding ball, the fluctuation display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after 1 second of stop display . In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in the state where the holding ball is not present, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. There is a rare situation where there is no ball entry in either of the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 140, despite the fact that the player has been firing the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) continuously. In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play a game at all because the player quits playing the game. caused by.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance is selected. Variation display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the spheres entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140, the spheres for which the variation is unexecuted ( It is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of holding balls). Although the details will be described later, the sub display area Ds is divided into a first display area Ds1 and a second display area Ds2 for displaying game contents and effect contents to the player (see FIG. 102 (see FIG. a) see). In the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds, when the variation display in progress is ended and the next variation is started, the reserved symbol corresponding to the next variation (front view of FIG. 81 (b) The left symbol is displayed on the left and the remaining symbol is displayed shifted to the left.

  Here, the symbol corresponding to the variable display under execution (the reserved symbol displayed at the leftmost during the previous fluctuation) is the symbol display area under execution (the area in which the expectation degree display mode Dk1 of FIG. 102 is displayed) Is displayed on). As a result, it is possible to inform the player as to which reserved symbol the variable display being executed is the variable display.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and the left end (outside the effective line) of the main display area Dm, three parts of the main symbol and the sub symbol of the third symbol are displayed respectively.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81, or when the ball enters the second ball entrance 140, the number of times the ball is entered Is held up to four times each, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this control example, the ball entering into the first ball entrance 64 and the ball entering into the second ball entrance 140 are configured to be able to be held up to 4 times each, but the upper limit value of the number of balls held is The number of times is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, the upper limit value of the number of holding balls for entering the first ball entrance 64 and the upper limit value of the number of holding balls for entering the second ball entrance 140 are not limited to the same. The upper limit of the number of holding balls for entering the first entrance 64 may be larger than the upper limit of the number of holding balls for entering the second entrance 140, or vice versa. Good. In addition, instead of the display of the holding symbol in the sub display area Ds, the number of holding balls is a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number, or the area divided into four is different by the number of holding balls (( For example, it may be displayed in color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b), the flow of each effect performed in the first control example will be roughly described. FIGS. 82 (a) and 82 (b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the contents of the effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), in this control example, different effects are executed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state is "normal", that is, when the gaming state is not a big hit during a big hit, a definite change state or a time reduction state, a normal effect is executed, and a game state is a "big hit" "If it is, the jackpot during the effect is executed, if the gaming state is" probable change or short time ", that is, if the gaming state is a positive change state or short time state, during the positive change (prolonged change state or short time state Medium) Reproduction is executed.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily grasp the currently set gaming state only by looking at the effect being executed, and it is possible to provide an easily understandable gaming machine. In this control example, although each effect is configured to be executed in association with the gaming state, for example, a common effect that may be executed when a plurality of gaming states are set may be provided. . As a result, by visually recognizing the effect being executed, it is possible to make the player predict the gaming state currently set, and while expecting that the gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the game Can play a game.

  Moreover, although FIG. 82 explains that the effect content (display content) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differs depending on the gaming state, the aspect included in the effect content is the third symbol The display mode is not limited to the display mode displayed on the display device 81. For example, the output mode of the sound output by the audio output device 226 and the light emission mode of the lamp executed by the lamp display device 227 are naturally included, for example. is there.

  First, the effects to be executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. First, in the present control example, the number of special symbol holding balls at the time when the jackpot game is executed and the contents of the ball entry information stored on hold (for example, determination whether or not there is ball entry information winning a hit) Based on the result), the contents of the effect to be executed during the jackpot game are set.

  Specifically, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed consecutively, an effect (for example, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed to partially notify the contents of the previous jackpot game (first jackpot game) In the case of playing, the effect of notifying the number of rounds for 5 rounds) is continuously performed across a plurality of jackpots, and a jackpot effect 1 for producing a plurality of jackpot games to be continued and executed. , The effect corresponding to each jackpot game is executed, and during the plurality of jackpot games (during the special symbol fluctuation period to be performed until the next jackpot game is completed and the next jackpot game is executed) The jackpot game effect 2 and the jackpot game ahead are real, as the plural jackpot games are continuously executed by continuously displaying the ending effect of the jackpot game of At the time of the, it notifies that the following big hit game is executed, and the effect of jackpots 3 to perform the effect of continued is configured to be set for a plurality of jackpot gaming.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 83 (a), the contents of the above-mentioned big hit medium effect 1 will be described. FIG. 83A is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot effect 1. In this jackpot effect 1, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), at the time of jackpot game (jackpot 1), the number of holding balls is "3" (a state in which a new holding ball can be acquired during the jackpot game) And, it is a jackpot effect that can be set when the ball winning information that has been won is included in the already acquired holding balls.

  When jackpot effect 1 is set, when the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, first, part of the number of rounds of jackpot 1 (five rounds (R The jackpot game effect (5R effect) indicating) is executed, and then the 5R effect is continuously executed until the next jackpot game (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) is completed, and the total It is set so that the jackpot game effect for 25R minutes is executed.

  That is, instead of setting the effect content (rendering scenario) to be executed during one jackpot game as a series of effect contents (rendering scenario), it is configured to be set in units of predetermined periods (for example, five rounds) The new effect content (scenario) is configured to be set based on the ball entry information that is pending storage at that time.

  Specifically explaining with reference to FIG. 83 (a), when the jackpot 1 (15R) is started, the 5R effect 1 (see FIG. 85 (a)) is executed. When this 5R effect is started, an effect (confirmed number of rounds notification) of notifying the player that the jackpot game continues for at least five rounds is executed. Then, when the jackpot game progresses to the 4Rth, the suggestion effect (see FIG. 85 (b)) indicating whether or not the next 5R effect is executed is executed, and the 5R effect is then executed in the 5Rs. The notification effect (see FIG. 86 (a)) for notifying the result of whether or not to

  In the example shown in FIG. 83A, since the jackpot of 15 rounds is set as the first jackpot, 5R effects are executed three times. Here, the 5R effect (5R effect 3) to be executed for the third time is the period until the second jackpot to be executed next is started, that is, the ending period for the first jackpot, and the first jackpot It is set to be executed also during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation executed after the end (see FIGS. 87 (a) and 88 (a)). Then, with the start of the second jackpot (the start of the opening period of the second jackpot), the 5R effect 4 is executed.

  As a result, when a new hold storage occurs during the jackpot game and the hold storage includes ball entry information corresponding to the big hit of the special symbol, based on the ball entry information (for example, the number of rounds) It is possible to set a new effect (display of the number of added rounds). Therefore, compared to the configuration in which the contents of the jackpot effect to be executed during the jackpot at the start of the jackpot are set as a series of effect scenarios, the effect (display of the number of added rounds) performed during the jackpot can be easily varied. .

  In addition, although the example which made the period of 5 rounds into one production unit during a big hit game is shown by FIG. 83 (a), you may comprise so that the contents of an effect may be set for every 1 round. In addition, a discrimination management process of discriminating the contents of the ball entry information may be performed for each round, and the effect contents may be set for each predetermined round (for example, every five rounds). Also, when new entry information is generated, the content of the entry information is determined, and information (presence or absence of the big hit, the number of rounds) to be used when setting the effect contents during the big hit is stored in the storage area You may configure it.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the processing load is temporarily increased at the timing of setting the effect contents during the big hit game (every 5 rounds in FIG. 83A).

  Here, the display contents of the jackpot effect 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 85 to FIG. FIG. 85 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the big hit medium effect 1 is executed, and FIG. 85 (b) is executed at the big hit medium effect 1 86A is a schematic view schematically showing an example of effect display for indicating whether or not the 5R effect continues, and FIG. 86 (a) is an effect display for indicating that a new 5R effect is to be executed. 86 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display screen in the first round before the big hit 1 ends, and FIG. 87 (a) is FIG. 87 (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen showing that the jackpot will continue during the jackpot 1 ending period, and FIG. 87 (b) is a display showing that the jackpot is ended during the jackpot 1 ending period. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the screen, 8 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen in the special symbol variation after jackpot 1 ends.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the jackpot effect 1 is executed, the characters “jackpot” indicating that the jackpot has been made and “777” indicating that the jackpot was won in the special symbol lottery The third symbol stopped and displayed at is displayed in the main display area Dm. And in the small display area (guidance display area) Dn1 of the main display area Dm, the character of "right-handed" is displayed to guide the ball to be fired to the right-handed area, and the front view of the main display area Dm On the upper right, it is decided that the number-of-roundings display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds currently being executed will be executed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm2 for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the jackpot game. A finalized round number display mode Dm4 indicating the number of finalized rounds is displayed.

  In this control example, a five-round (R) effect for notifying the player in advance that the jackpot game for at least five rounds is executed is executed as the jackpot effect 1, as shown in FIG. Thus, “5” is displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4.

  Then, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game (Round display mode Dm3 under execution) becomes “4”, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the additional effect (figure in the fifth round) is executed (figure A presentation (big hit continuation presentation) indicating the content of 86 (a) is executed. In this control example, selected images Dm5 to Dm7 imitating a "treasure box" as display modes selectable by the player as a jackpot continuation effect are displayed, and a selected image Dm8 imitating an "arrow" is an image to be selected dm5 It is displayed to correspond to each of Dm7. The player selects one “treasure box” among the three “treasure boxes” displayed by selecting one of the selection images Dm 8 displayed so as to correspond to each of the selection images Dm 5 to Dm 7. Select a treasure box.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, the display mode of one “arrow” of the three “arrows” which are the selected image Dm 8 is displayed so as to be regularly changed. The selected images Dm5 to Dm7 corresponding to the changed display mode (variable display mode Dm9) become the selected image selected by the player, and the player changes the arbitrary display mode to the variable display mode Dm9. In this case, by operating the frame button 22, an arbitrary selected image is selected.

  Note that the method for the player to select an arbitrary selected image is not limited to the above-described content, and other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured to be selectable by touching the display area of any selected image among the selected images Dm5 to Dm7 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the player may By operating the button 22, the selected image Dm8 to be the variable display mode Dm9 may be selected.

  Furthermore, although the same display mode is displayed as the display mode of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7 in the present control example, different display modes may be displayed for each of the selected images. In this case, when a selected image having a display mode different from the normal mode is displayed, the next 5R effect may be easily performed. As a result, the sense of expectation that the jackpot game will continue can be enhanced at the stage when the selected image is displayed, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

  When the number of rounds of the jackpot game enters the fifth round while the selected image Dm5 is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 86A is displayed. In FIG. 86 (a), only the "treasure box" (selected image Dm5) selected in the jackpot continuation effect executed in the fourth round of the jackpot game is displayed, and the number of confirmed rounds is displayed out of the "treasure box". “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 to be added to the mode Dm4, and an additional effect in which the value of the finalized round number display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from “5” to “10” is displayed.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game continues for at least five more rounds. Although FIG. 86 (a) shows the display screen when “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10, the selected image selected in the jackpot continuation effect (see FIG. 85 (b)) The contents of the number-of-round-up display mode Dm10 are set to differ depending on the situation. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the jackpot continuation effect.

  Further, in the present control example, the finalized round number display mode Dm4 is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the number of rounds, but the number of rounds to be displayed on the display screen among the remaining number of rounds of the jackpot game internally set The display mode may be any display mode that can be changed correspondingly to the above, and a display mode using an abstract expression such as the motion, color and size of the character may be used. By using the abstract display mode as the finalized round number display mode Dm4 as described above, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of making the player predict the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game.

  In addition, since the player who has played for a long time can grasp the regularity of the display mode using the abstract expression, it becomes easier to grasp the contents of the jackpot game than other players, Satisfaction can be increased. In addition, as a content of the jackpot game in this case, in the jackpot during the execution where the first jackpot and the second jackpot are continuously executed such that the effect is executed, the number of rounds of each jackpot game is displayed It is good to be able to grasp by the regularity of the aspect.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to predict whether or not a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the second jackpot game is over, particularly by the number of rounds of the second jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide game information which is more advantageous to the player who is playing a game for a long time than other players, and it is possible to increase the motivation to play the game continuously for a long time.

  Incidentally, in FIG. 86 (a), while the fifth round game is being executed, "+5" is displayed as the number-of-addition-round display mode Dm10 to be added to the final round number display mode Dm4, and the final number of final rounds is determined. An example is shown in which the value of the display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from “5” to “10”, but the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed is the timing other than during round game, ie, 5 rounds The contents of the effect may be set to be an interval period between rounds which is between the end of the round game of the eyes and the start of the round game of the sixth round.

  Further, a means is provided for determining the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the jackpot continuation effect shown in FIG. 85 (b), and the operation timing is for a predetermined period (for example, after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes valid. If it is within 3 seconds, the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed during the round game of the fifth round, and the operation timing is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective) If it exceeds or is not operated, the additional round number display mode Dm10 may be displayed in the inter-round interval period after the end of the fifth round.

  In this manner, the player actively participates in the effect by changing the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode Dm10 based on the timing of the player operating the frame button 22 and the presence or absence of the operation. This can enhance the presentation effect. It should be noted that any configuration may be adopted as long as the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm 10 is displayed is different based on the timing of operation and the operation. A determination means may be provided to determine whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 during a specific one second), and the timing for displaying the number-of-round-up display mode Dm10 may be varied based on the determination result. . In addition, the number of added rounds display mode Dm10 only when the operation content on the frame button 22 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated during a specific one second in the round game of the fourth round). The values displayed in may be configured to be different.

  Next, effect contents for making it appear that plural (two) jackpot games are continuously executed, that is, specials from the end of the first jackpot game to the start of the second jackpot game The contents of effects during the symbol fluctuation period will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 (b) and 87 (a).

  First, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the jackpot continuation effect is executed based on the start of the first round (14th round) of the final round of the first jackpot game. In (b) of FIG. 86, an effect mode different from the jackpot continuation effect shown in (b) of FIG. 85 is shown, and the number of selected images displayed on the display screen is different from the display mode. Specifically, the number of selected images is changed from three to two, and a display mode more luxurious than usual is set as the display mode of the selected image Dm5. As described above, by varying the effect mode of the jackpot continuation effect, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is continued by the effect mode of the jackpot continuation effect to be executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the contents of the effect, and the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 86 (b) shows an effect mode different from that of FIG. 85 (b) in order to explain variations of the big hit continuous effects, but the big hit continuous effects (14 corresponding to the final round of the first big hit game) As a jackpot continuation effect to be executed in the round, the same effect mode as that in FIG. 85 (b) is also set to be naturally executed. In this way, by using the same effect mode in the jackpot continuation effect executed in the middle of the first jackpot game and the jackpot continuation effect executed at the end of the first jackpot game, the first time at any timing It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot game of has ended (how many rounds the jackpot was the first jackpot).

  In addition to the setting method of the jackpot continuation production mentioned above, for example, according to the selected image (“treasure box”) selected in the jackpot continuation presentation, the present jackpot continuation presentation is executed in the final round of the jackpot game The game may be configured to indicate to the player that the jackpot effect is continuous.

  When a transition is made to the final round (15th round) in a state where the selected image Dm5 is selected in the big hit continuous effect shown in FIG. 86 (b), the same display as the additional effect shown in FIG. 86 (a) is executed The display is continuously displayed during the ending period after the final round as shown in FIG. 87 (a). Then, when the ending period of the jackpot ends (the jackpot ends) and the variation of the special symbol is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 88A is displayed.

  This FIG. 88 (a) is an example of a display screen in the period when the first jackpot game is over and the special symbol is fluctuating. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), also after the first jackpot game is ended (after the change of the special symbol is started), the display of the additional effect is continuously executed. In the small display area Dn2, the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Then, when the variation of the special symbol winning the big hit is stopped, the combination of symbols (for example, "777") for indicating that the big hit is won is displayed in the small display area Dn2 and the additional effect display is executed. The next jackpot game is started while maintaining the condition.

  In the present control example, when the effect for addition is set as the effect during the jackpot, the number of rounds set for the jackpot under execution and the next jackpot that is to be held on hold (the held jackpot is stored Since it is possible to set the display mode of the additional effect by adding up the number of rounds set in), it is possible to set the display mode of the additional effect before starting the next jackpot to be held on hold, ie, 1 It is possible to display the number-of-round-up display mode Dm10 including the number of rounds set as the next jackpot during the round jackpot.

  In the above-mentioned example, the period from the final round of the big hit to the next big hit (the next big hit is won, and the opening period of the big hit is passed and the first round game is executed). Although an example of an effect for continuously displaying the additional effect during the period) is shown, other effects may be used, for example, the additional effect is completed in the final round (15th round), and the ending period (figure) 87 (see (a)) and during the special symbol change period (see (a) in FIG. 88) may perform a blessing effect to celebrate that the number of rounds has been added. During the special symbol change period (see FIG. 88 (a)), the number of rounds was added during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88 (a)). In the final round (15th round), the jackpot continuation presentation (see FIG. 86 (b)) to be executed in the 14th round is continuously displayed and the ending is performed. During the period (see FIG. 87 (a)) and during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88 (a)), the additional effect may be executed.

  When executing the above-mentioned blessing effect, the next round of the round in which the additional effect (for example, the additional effect performed in the fifth round (see FIG. 86 (a)) is performed during one jackpot) For example, it may be configured to execute the same blessing effect in the sixth round). In this way, it is difficult for the player to grasp how many jackpots have been won while the extra production is being performed, that is, an effect mode of the extra production to be executed during one jackpot, and 2 It is possible to make the effect mode of the additional effect to be executed between two jackpots identical (the same except for an error which is difficult for the player to distinguish).

  On the other hand, when there is no round number to be added by the addition effect, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), “+0” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10, and the value of the determined round number display mode Dm4 is “15”. The comment “Sorry, jackpot end” is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the jackpot ends.

  In addition, although this control example is configured such that a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as an interval period (inter-round interval period) between round games to be executed during the jackpot game, it is other than that For example, even if the number of jackpot rounds is the same depending on the type of jackpot won, the period between rounds may be configured to be different. In this case, an inter-round interval before the end of a multiple of five (for example, an inter-round interval set between 5 and 6 rounds) is set to 5 as an inter-round interval set during one jackpot. A jackpot type in which the second inter-round interval is set to 2 seconds, and the second previous inter-round interval (for example, rounds set between three and four rounds) when multiple rounds of 5 are started The interval interval may be 5 seconds, and the other round interval interval may be set to 2 seconds to provide a jackpot type.

  Further, as described above, in the case of using the jackpot type in which the inter-round intervals are different, it is preferable to configure the jackpot effect to be switched at the timing at which the long inter-round interval is set. Furthermore, in the case of executing a jackpot during a predetermined period (five rounds) as one unit as in this control example, from the start of the jackpot (the start of the jackpot opening period or the start of the first round) Since the interval until the long-term inter-round interval is set first (for example, the end of the third round) is less than one unit of the effect during the big hit, the configuration other than the additional effect is executed Good.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, although a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as the ending period of the large jack regardless of the type of large jack, the large jack is also set for the ending period. It may be configured to be different for each type, or may be configured to be different for each set jackpot type for the opening period of the jackpot.

  In this way, the content of the jackpot game (the number of rounds for the jackpot game) is the same, but the opening period, the inter-round interval period, and the ending period set for the jackpot may be different according to the jackpot type set. And by setting the jackpot effect to straddle a plurality of jackpot games, how many times the jackpot was won for the player while one jackpot effect was being executed for the player Can be difficult to grasp.

  In addition, when the period until the next jackpot is won after the previous jackpot is different, that is, after the previous jackpot is finished, when the next jackpot is won in the special symbol fluctuation of the first turn And, even if the special symbol variation period to be executed during the big hit is different between when winning the next big hit in the special symbol variation of the third turn, the opening period set to the big hit, the interval period between rounds, By configuring the ending period to be different according to the set jackpot type, the jackpot effect can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Next, returning to FIG. 83 (b), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot middle effect 2 will be described. FIG. 83 (b) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot effect 2. In this jackpot effect 2, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), at the time of jackpot game (jackpot 1), the number of holding balls is "2" (a state in which a new holding ball can be acquired during the jackpot game) And, it is a jackpot effect that can be set when the ball entry information that has been won is not included in the already acquired holding balls.

  When jackpot effect 2 is set, if the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 round (R))) is executed, the jackpot game effect (15R showing that the present jackpot is 15R After the jackpot 1 is finished, the next jackpot (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) is executed after the jackpot 1 is finished. The execution is continued (extended) until it is executed, and when the jackpot 2 is executed, the presentation content switches from the ending production to the 10R presentation.

  In this jackpot effect 2, a plurality of jackpot games which are continuously executed are continuously executed when the ball entry information corresponding to the hit is newly included in the holding ball newly acquired during the jackpot game. To produce That is, the jackpot game effect corresponding to the jackpot 1 is a normal jackpot game effect (15R effect), and it is continuous only by changing the content of the ending effect based on the ball entry information of the holding ball newly acquired during the jackpot game. A plurality of jackpot games to be executed can be produced so as to be continuously executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to set effects (continuous jackpot effects) in which a plurality of jackpot gaming machines are continuously executed based on the holding balls acquired during the jackpot game, so continuous jackpot effects It can be made easy to carry out, and the rendering effect can be enhanced. In addition, even if the normal jackpot game effect is executed, the jackpot game can be played while expecting the player to shift to the continuous jackpot effect.

  Here, the contents of the effect displayed between the two jackpots in the jackpot middle effect 2 (see FIG. 83 (b)) will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (b) to 89 (b). FIG. 88 (b) is a view schematically showing the ending display displayed during the first hitting period of the big hit, and FIG. 89 (a) is where the first hit of the big hit is finished, and the variation of the special symbol starts FIG. 89 (b) is a view schematically showing a display screen in the state of being won by the jackpot of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the ending display displayed during the first ending of the big hit, information for indicating the number of rounds of the present big hit and the number of balls acquired in the big hit in the main display area Dm. (Acquisition points) are displayed. Then, when the jackpot game is over and the change of the special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), the ending display is continuously displayed and the player is suggested the number of rounds of the jackpot game. The number-of-rounds display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds currently being executed and the determined number-of-rounds display mode Dm4 indicating the number of decided rounds determined to be executed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm2 It will be displayed continuously as well. In addition, the small display area Dn2 displaying the variation of the third symbol, the holding execution area Dn3, and the holding symbol display area Dn4 are displayed. In FIG. 89 (a), the second reserved symbol from the left in the reserved symbol display area Dn4 (the reserved symbol with 3 being added to the circle that is displayed fluctuatingly one after another) wins the big hit Show the condition.

  Then, if the special symbol is won (when the fluctuation display of the holding symbol with 3 is put in the circle is stopped), as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the big display continues in the main display area Dm ( While the comment of "the jackpot still continues" is displayed to inform that a new jackpot is started, and the second round number of the jackpot "10" to indicate the number of rounds display mode Dm4 The value is variably displayed from "15" to "25". In addition, the combination “777” of the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed in the small display area Dn2 in a stopped state.

  As mentioned above, although the content of the presentation performed in the jackpot middle presentation 2 was explained, you may use the same presentation for the jackpot middle presentation 1. That is, in the jackpot middle effect 1 described above, since the effect using a plurality of rounds is executed as the jackpot continuation effect, for example, during the ending round of the first round of the jackpot or the ending period after the last round, the jackpot In the case of acquiring a new holding ball including information on winning the ball, it was difficult to execute a jackpot effect to straddle a plurality of jackpots. In such a case, by executing the same effect as the above-described large hit medium effect 2, it is possible to smoothly perform the large hit medium effect so as to straddle a plurality of large hits.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84 (a), the contents of the above-mentioned jackpot middle effect 3 will be described. FIG. 84 (a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the jackpot effect 3. In this jackpot effect 3, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), at the time of jackpot game (jackpot 1) execution, the number of holding balls is "4" (a state where it is impossible to acquire a new holding ball during jackpot game) And a jackpot effect that can be set when the winning ball already acquired has included ball entry information winning.

  When the jackpot effect 3 is set, the previous jackpot game (jackpot 1 ((15 round (R))) is executed, the next jackpot game (jackpot 2 (10 round (R))) A big hit game rendition (25 R rendition) in which the contents of the game are integrated is executed.

  This jackpot effect 3 is a state where it is not possible to newly acquire the holding ball during the jackpot game, that is, it is possible to determine whether or not to continuously win the jackpot at the timing when the jackpot 1 is executed. Is an effect to be performed in When the jackpot effect 3 is executed, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has been won consecutively continuously, giving a sense of security to the player, and holding a new jackpot during the jackpot game. In the state where the ball can not be acquired, the above-mentioned jackpot effect 2 is executed, and it is possible to suppress the player from expecting too much for winning the jackpot continuously.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the jackpot is won continuously in a predetermined period (within the suspension storage), the jackpot for making it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed in the present control example. A plurality of middle effects are prepared, and a jackpot middle effect to be executed is set based on the number of special symbol holding balls at the time when the previous big hit game is executed, and the judgment result of the entering information stored on hold. doing.

  Furthermore, in the plurality of jackpot middle effects, the timing at which the player is notified that the jackpot has been won consecutively is made different from each other. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game to the end while expecting that the jackpot has been won consecutively.

  This control example corresponds to the jackpot of the special symbol during the jackpot game when the jackpot game is executed in a state where there is a vacancy in the number of reserved memories of the special symbol (the state of being able to hold newly stored during the jackpot game). Even if the holding symbol is held and stored, since a jackpot effect can be executed to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously performed, it is held and stored at the time the jackpot game is executed. Based on the information, compared to the case of determining the jackpot middle effect, the jackpot middle effect for making it appear that the plurality of jackpot games are continuously performed can be more easily performed, and the stage effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the number of rounds to be executed in the previous jackpot game can be divided into a plurality of times and the player can be partially notified as a plurality of jackpot middle effects, the present jackpot middle effect is once. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the effect has been executed in the jackpot game or the effect executed across multiple jackpot games. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the jackpot game to continue for a long time.

  In this control example, during the special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the big hit game, the small display area Dn2 displaying the fluctuation of the third symbol, the hold execution area Dn3, and the like during the normal special symbol fluctuation period, Although the configuration for displaying the reserved symbol display area Dn4 on the third symbol display device 81 is used, other configurations may be used, for example, the condition for executing the jackpot continuation effect during the special symbol variation period is satisfied There is a means to determine whether you are doing, if it is determined that the conditions under which the jackpot continuation effect is executed is determined by that means, during the special symbol change period, the variation display of the third symbol and the above-mentioned reserved symbol It is good to execute processing that does not perform related display, or to execute processing that displays in a mode in which it is difficult for the player to grasp the contents (for example, reduction display or movement of display area)

  By configuring in this manner, based on the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can grasp the end timing of the first jackpot game and the start timing of the second jackpot game for the player. It can be hard to do.

  In addition, during the interval between rounds in the first jackpot game, the pseudo ending display, the pseudo variation display that changes the pseudo symbol imitating the third symbol, and the pseudo symbol that stops the pseudo symbol during the change in combination corresponding to the big hit A pseudo game execution means for executing a pseudo jackpot start display after the stop display and the pseudo stop display is provided, and while one jackpot game is being executed, a plurality of jackpots are simulated as if being carried out. You may comprise so that presentation may be performed. By configuring in this manner, the special symbol (this symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b at the time when the first jackpot is won is a special symbol (this symbol) that corresponds to the number of rounds of the jackpot game It can be made difficult for the player to grasp whether the Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the rendering effect of the jackpot middle effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, another example of the jackpot middle effect 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 (b) is a timing chart showing the contents of another example of the jackpot effect 1. In this example, the content of the effect for addition is changed from the 5R effect to the 10R effect as compared with the content shown in FIG. 83 (a), and the winning prize at the start of the big hit (the winning information storage area 223a The difference is that the presence or absence of the winning information (indicating winning) is different.

  Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 84 (b), jackpot 1 (15R) is started in a state in which the number of balls held for special symbol (number of balls held for special symbol 2) is “1” and there is no winning. , 10R effect 1 is executed as the first additional effect. Then, while the 10R effect 1 is being executed, a new holding ball is acquired that includes the ball entry information winning in the winning (the number of holding balls becomes “2”), and the 10R effect 1 In the jackpot continuation effect, an effect is executed that indicates that 10R effect 2 is executed using the number of rounds obtained by adding the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot 2.

  By performing such an effect, one additional effect is performed across a plurality of jackpots (one additional effect is performed in a period from 11R of jackpot 1 to 5R of jackpot 2) Because of this, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds set for one jackpot. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 84 (b), since the effects for 10R are executed as the effects for addition to be executed so as to straddle a plurality of jackpots, the 10R effects 1 and 10R effect 2 are executed. Later, the same 5R effect 5 as in FIG. 83 (a) described above can be executed, and data used for additional effect can be made common.

  In addition, FIG. 83 (a) or FIG. 84 (b) shows an example of the effect for addition, and the effect for addition other than the contents exemplified above is also executed. Specifically, in addition to the 5R effect using a period of 5 rounds and the 10R effect using a period of 10 rounds, the additional effect for 7R effects and 8 rounds using a period of 7 rounds The 8R effect etc. which used the period are comprised so that execution is possible.

  As described above, by using a plurality of effects corresponding to different round numbers as the additional effects, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds executed during one jackpot, and for the player The game can be played in anticipation of continuing for a long time, while predicting how long the jackpot of this time will continue (up to how many rounds).

  In addition, the gaming state set at the end of the jackpot middle effect 1 to be executed corresponding to one or more jackpots, ie, the jackpot type of jackpot to be executed last corresponding to the jackpot middle effect 1 (probable variation jackpot Usually, it may be configured to vary the extra effect to be executed based on the large jack), for example, when it is determined that the gaming state set at the time when the jackpot middle effect 1 is over is a definite change state To make it easy to set up additional effects (for example, 10R effects) corresponding to the number of long rounds as additional effects to be executed in the beginning of the big hit medium effect 1, or when the big hit medium effect 1 is finished It is good even if it is configured to execute an additional effect (for example, 7R effect) which is executed only when the gaming state to be set is a definite change state. .

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player predict both the number of rounds to be executed during the big hit and the gaming state to be set after the big hit by the additional effect to be executed, and the effect Can be enhanced.

  Referring back to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. In this control example, when the gaming state becomes a gaming state (a positive change state or a short time state) advantageous to the player, a specific effect (a positive change effect or a short time return (hereinafter referred to as a high probability medium effect) ) Is performed. The period during which the high-proficiency effect is being executed is a period during which a predetermined effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, and whether or not the gaming state advantageous to the player is ended based on the result of the battle effect An effect of notifying the player of is performed.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97, the contents of the high-proficiency middle effect (continuous effect) will be described in detail. FIG. 90 shows the flow of high-profid middle effects (continuation effects) executed when the gaming state is in an advantageous state (probable change state or short time state), which is continuously performed until the jackpot is won It is the timing chart which showed production (continuation production). As shown in FIG. 90, the battle effect is configured to be repeatedly executed during the high probability medium effect (continuous effect). The battle effect is a battle reach (see FIGS. 93 to 96) in which an effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state (probable state or short time state) is ended is executed in a period corresponding to one special rotation. The effect for changing the display mode when the battle reach is executed is configured from the pre-battle effect (see FIGS. 91 and 92) performed in the period of the special figure fluctuation plural rotations.

  The details of the effects will be described later, but in battle reach, effects (attack effects) are executed multiple times (three times) to reduce the HP value (continuation value) of one's own character and the other's character to each other. When the HP value (continuation value) of is 0 (in the case of a battle reach with a defeat pattern), the condition for ending the advantageous state (the jackpot for which the advantageous state ends) or the number of times the variation of the special symbol is set If the HP value (continuation value) of the other character is "0" (in the case of battle reach of the victory pattern), it indicates that the jackpot for which the advantageous state continues is won, If the mutual HP value (continuation value) does not become “0” (in the case of the battle reach of the draw pattern), it indicates that the high-proficiency middle effect is continued.

  Further, in the pre-battle effect, an effect of increasing or decreasing the HP value (continuation value) of the character of the opponent at the start of the battle reach is executed. This pre-battle effect is configured such that the effect mode is set based on the pre-reading result of the holding symbol or the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set, and based on the effect mode, a plurality of special symbol variations are The HP management used is performed.

  FIG. 91 (a) is a schematic view showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when the battle effect is started as the high probability effect (continuous effect). When the battle effect is started, first, a pre- battle effect which is a first half part of the battle effect is executed. In this pre-battle rendering, a rendering for increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent of battle reach, which is the second half part of the battle rendering, is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the pre-battle effect is executed, the boy character Dm11 is displayed on the center left side of the main display area Dm, and an opponent for selecting an opponent candidate for battle reach The selection mode is displayed. In this opponent selection mode, selection parts Dm13 to Dm16 corresponding to four kinds of characters A to D are displayed as opponent candidates to be battle opponents of battle reach, and one of the selection parts is selected. FIG. 91 (a) shows a state in which the selection portion Dm13 corresponding to the character A is selected.

  Further, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, an HP display area Dm17 indicating a continuation value (HP value) corresponding to each of the four types of characters A to D is displayed. The HP display area Dm17 is formed of a display section indicating an HP value with a horizontally long gauge and a display section (Dm18) indicating a numerical value. The value (display mode) displayed in the HP display area Dm 17 is variably displayed so as to be variable (decreased) in accordance with the attack on the opponent during the pre-battle rendering.

  In the pre-battle effect, when the opponent to be played is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 92A is displayed next, an effect to decrease the HP value of the opponent is executed, and the HP display area Dm17 is selectively displayed. A display (circled on the character A) for identifying the HP display corresponding to the partner character is made. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp how much the HP value of the currently selected opponent character is.

  Further, during this pre-battle effect, only the effect of decreasing the HP value of the opponent character is executed, and the HP value of the player (character Dm11) never decreases. As a result, since the HP value of the player does not decrease as a result of directing to attack the opponent until battle reach is executed, it is expected that many directings to attack the opponent will be executed. You can play while playing. In addition, since the HP value of the player (character Dm11) is not displayed on the screen during the pre-battle effect, the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy that the HP value of the player is reduced as a result of the executed effect. can do.

  In addition, the presentation mode of the pre-battle presentation is not limited to the above-described content, and it may be possible to display the HP value of the player and execute the effect of reducing the HP value of the player, or the HP value of the player or the opponent. The effect of increasing the HP value of may be executed. In addition, in the pre-battle production which is the first half part of the battle production, the HP value of the opponent is decreased until it becomes “0”, and the big hit without execution of the battle reach which is the second half part of the battle production , And may be configured to execute a jackpot) to which a short time state is given.

  In FIG. 92 (a), since the attack (main attack rendition) for reducing HP by "200" is performed on the character ADm13, the display unit Dm18a corresponding to the character A in the HP display area Dm17 corresponds to the main display area Dm. It is variably displayed on "800" corresponding to the contents of the effect.

  On the other hand, in the display example shown in FIG. 92 (b), the cat character Dm20 appears in addition to the effect (main attack effect) in which the self (character Dm11) attacks, and an effect in which an additional attack (sub attack effect) is performed. Is also performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), an attack to reduce HP by "230" is performed on the character ADm13, and the display unit Dm18c corresponding to the character C in the HP display area Dm17 is the main display area Dm. It is variably displayed on "770" corresponding to the contents of the effect of.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (b), during this pre-battle production, the opponent may be changed halfway, and if the opponent is changed, the present opponent can be identified. The display of the HP display area Dm 18 (a circle on the character A) is made.

  Here, the method of setting the value of HP which decreases due to the attack effect will be briefly described. In this control example, based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the pre-decision result (pre-reading result) of the ball entry information stored on hold, the result of battle rendition by the continuation value management means or rough effect contents (HP value The reduction value (the order of 100) and the main attack rendition are configured to be determined. Then, with respect to the effect contents (decreasing value of the HP value and the main attack effect) determined by the continuous value managing means, the effect setting means is used to select the lottery result or the prefetch result for the purpose of diversifying the effect types. It is configured such that detailed effect contents (decrement value of HP value (10's rank) and side attack effect) are determined without being affected.

  Then, the continuation value (HP value) determined by the continuation value management means is stored, and the continuation value (HP value) is increased or decreased with respect to the stored continuation value (HP value) using the continuation value management means. Configured.

  Specifically, in FIG. 92 (a) described above, the effect (main attack effect) for decreasing the continuation value (HP value) by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the effect setting means is for the continuation value (HP value). A display example is shown in the case where the content is not set to increase or decrease the value, and a main attack effect (attack effect of character Dm11) is executed to decrease the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 200 as a pre-battle effect. There is.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 92 (b) described above, the effect (main attack effect) to decrease the continuation value (HP value) by 200 is set by the continuation value management means, and the effect setting means sets the continuation value (HP value) to 20. The display example when the effect to be decreased (sub-attack effect) is set is shown, and in addition to the main attack effect (attack effect of the character Dm11) for reducing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm200 by 200, the opponent character Sub-attack effect (Attack effect of the cat character Dm20) to decrease the continuation value (HP value) of ADm13 by 30 is executed, and the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 is reduced by 230 as a pre-battle effect in total Is running.

  By configuring in this manner, the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased relative to the number of effects set by the continuation value management means. In other words, the number of effects managed to continuously increase or decrease the continuation value (HP value) can be reduced with respect to the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The burden of control can be reduced.

  In addition, when the opponent in the production before one battle is changed, the HP value of the opponent character before the change is continuously displayed as it is. Therefore, when the opponent is changed and the same opponent character is selected again, the effect can be continuously performed from the previous HP value. As described above, by gradually reducing the HP of the opponent character that can be the opponent of the battle reach during the pre-battle production and then executing the battle reach, the battle reach is frequently performed in the high-reliability production. Even without generation, a series of effects can be performed.

  In addition, during the pre-battle production, if the decrease in the HPs of the plurality of opponent candidates is biased, the player pays attention to the production while expecting battle reach to be performed with the opponent whose HP value is as small as possible. be able to.

  When the pre-battle production, which is the first half of the battle production, is finished, battle reach is then performed to battle with a specific opponent. If the player has won this battle reach (the opponent's HP has been set to “0”), it indicates that the player has won the jackpot in which an advantageous gaming state is set, and is defeated (the own HP is “0”. In this case, it indicates that the player has won the win when a disadvantageous gaming state (normal state) is set. In addition, when the battle reach is executed at a timing when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a hit, it becomes a draw (both the own and the other party HP does not become “0”), and the high probability medium effect is continued.

  In this battle reach, if a large hit is won during high probability (probability change, time reduction), or if a predetermined condition is established during high probability (for example, when the number of times of special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number, a battle When the result of battle reach is a draw, it transfers to the pre-battle effect again. In this case, all the HP values of the other character are set to initial values. That is, since the effect to reduce the HP value of the opponent character is executed before the battle, for example, if the period in which the special symbol is not won during the definite change state continues for a long time, the battle is in effect In order to prevent the other character's HP from becoming "0", it is necessary to make it difficult for the effect (attack effect) to reduce the other character's HP to be executed, and there is a risk of reducing the effect of the pre-battle effect. there were.

  In this control example, a battle reach is generated other than when the special symbol is won, and a "draw" is provided as a result of the battle reach, and when it becomes a "draw" in the battle reach, the opponent character The problem is that the effect of the pre-battle presentation will be reduced by performing the pre-battle production for a long period of time since the pre-battle production is resumed by returning the value of the HP to the initial value. Can be solved. In addition, by providing “draw” in the result of battle reach, the possibility of “draw” can be left even when an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed during battle reach.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 93 (a)-FIG. 96 (b), the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 displayed during battle reach is demonstrated. First, FIG. 93 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen immediately after the battle reach is started. Here, the contents of the battle reach presentation will be described. In the battle reach of this control example, the attack of oneself or the other party is executed a total of three times, and the effect that the result is displayed by the value of the final HP is executed. There are three types of attacks, "strong attack", "medium attack" and "weak attack", and the value of HP to be decreased is set to be different.

  When battle reach is started, the letters "Battle start" and the letter "First time" indicating the number of battles of the battle reach are displayed at the top of the main display area Dm on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Be done. On the lower side, an HP gauge Dm 21 indicating the value of its own HP and an HP gauge Dm 22 indicating the value of the other party's HP are displayed. The HP gauge Dm21 displays the upper limit value "1000", and the HP gauge Dm22 displays the value "500" reduced by the pre-battle effect.

  A storage gauge Dm23 is displayed below the HP gauge Dm21. A value is accumulated based on the fact that the storage gauge Dm 23 is attacked by the opponent, and when the accumulated value reaches “MAX”, the reverse presentation is executed and the presentation to win the battle reach is executed. By making this reverse presentation possible, even during the battle reach in which three battles are unfolded, even if the other party's dominant presentation is performed, it is possible to have the expectation of the jackpot until the end.

  Then, a progress display area Dm 24 for indicating the progress of the battle reach is formed below the main display area Dm, and a history of attack effects during the battle reach is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93 (b), the display content in the case where the first attack during battle reach is the own will be described. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), an effect is performed in which the character (boy's character) Dm11 of its own character attacks the character Dm15 of the opponent (weak attack) in the main display area Dm, and the value of the HP gauge Dm22 is " Decrease from 500 "to" 300 ". Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "circle" indicating that the first battle is an attack of itself is displayed.

  When the second production of the battle is executed following the first production of the battle shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second production of the battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (a). Here, in FIG. 94 (a), an effect in which the character Dm15 of the other party attacks is executed as the second effect of the battle, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value (HP value) of the character Dm11 of its own is “1000 And the effect that the value of the storage gauge Dm 23 is stored by half (50) is displayed. Then, in the progress display area Dm 24, a “cross mark” indicating that the second battle is an attack of the opponent is displayed.

  Next, when the effect of the third battle (the last battle) is executed, the effect of the third battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 94 (b). Here, in FIG. 94 (b), an effect in which the character (boy's character) Dm11 attacks the other character Dm15 (middle attack) is executed in the main display area Dm as the third battle effect, and the HP gauge is displayed. The value of Dm 22 is decreased from “300” to “0”, and it is informed that it is a battle reach showing that the current battle reach has been won by the jackpot in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. Then, in the small display area Dn2, "777" is displayed as a combination display of the third symbol for indicating that the lottery of the special symbol this time is a big hit.

  As described above, the battle reach in the present control example is provided with a draw pattern and a defeat pattern as described above in addition to the battle reach (win pattern) shown in FIG. 94 (b), and the battle reach of the draw pattern is set. If it is, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 95 (a) is displayed instead of the effect of the third battle shown in FIG. 94 (b). In the display example shown in FIG. 95 (a), an effect in which the character Dm15 of the other party attacks is executed as the effect of the third battle. In the case of the battle reach of the draw pattern, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of its own character Dm11 does not decrease to 0 (decreases to 500), and the battle reach ends without the continuation value (HP value) of itself or the opponent becoming 0. Do. In this case, a new battle effect is performed, and a pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91) is performed again.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), even if the final attack of the battle reach (the third attack) is the opponent's attack, create a draw pattern that does not reduce its own continuity value (HP value) to 0. So, the player can be expected until the end of the battle reach. In FIG. 95 (a), a pattern in which the opponent performs the third attack as the battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player is either defeated in the current battle reach or a draw. In the example shown in the figure, the player is given a pattern in which the third attack is made as the draw reach of the battle, that is, the player has won or won the battle reach at the time of the third attack. An effect that seems to be any pattern of a draw is also executed. In this case, since the player is not defeated in the current battle reach when the third attack is performed, the player can be relieved.

  Further, when the battle reach of the defeat pattern is set, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 95 (b) is displayed instead of the effect of the third battle shown in FIG. 94 (b). In the display example shown in FIG. 95 (b), an effect in which the other character Dm15 attacks is executed as the third battle effect, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of its own character Dm11 decreases to 0, and the accumulation gauge Dm23 The battle reach ends without the value of being accumulated up to the upper limit (MAX).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), even if the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the character Dm11 of its own has decreased to 0, when the value of the storage gauge Dm23 reaches the upper limit (MAX), the main The character of "resurrection" is displayed in the upper center of the display area Dm, and the character Dm11 of its own stands up, and as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the resurrection effect of defeating the other character Dm15 is executed.

  As described above, in the battle reach effect in this control example, in addition to the decrease in the HP gauge Dm21 of the character Dm11 of its own and the HP gauge Dm22 of the other character Dm15, the effect result is also variable by the value of the accumulation gauge Dm23. Because it is configured, the jackpot can have expectations until the end of the battle reach.

  Further, in the first control example, the content (render mode) of the pre-battle effect is based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, and the storage symbol information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the battle effect setting time. It is configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area Dm 17 is variable.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (d) show the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, and the HP display area Dm17 variably set based on the suspension storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the battle effect setting time. It is a figure showing a display mode.

  FIG. 97 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and is a schematic view showing the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 of a pattern in which the opponent's character is not replaced during the battle effect. It is. As shown in FIG. 97 (a), in the HP display area Dm17, only the same partner character (character ADm13) makes the continuation value (HP value) different (four steps of "700" to "1000") It is displayed. When such an HP display area Dm17 is displayed, the character ADm13 is always set as the opponent of the pre-battle effect, and the attack of itself performed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 92 (a)). By this, an effect is performed in which all the HP values displayed in the HP display area Dm 17 decrease.

  By using such a display mode, since a plurality of HP values will be reduced at one time, it is possible to flash the effect to be performed. In addition, since the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) is made different even in the same character ADm13, it is expected that the character ADm13 of a low continuation value (HP value) is selected at the time of battle reach development. You can play while playing Also, by making the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) different for the same character ADm13, it is possible to set a plurality of expectations for a big hit for the same character ADm13, so for example, a big hit expectation The types of image data for displaying a character can be reduced as compared with the case of setting a different opponent character for each degree.

  Next, the schematic view shown in FIG. 97 (b) has a display mode in which the display order of each of the characters A to D is different from that of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). It is a schematic diagram shown. In the case of using such a display mode, for example, in the case where the selection degree as the opponent character is made different depending on the position displayed in the HP display area Dm17 during the battle effect, the opponent easily selected during the battle effect Characters can be varied. Furthermore, the display order of the characters A to D displayed in the HP display area Dm 17 may be changed while the battle effect is being executed.

  FIG. 97 (c) is a schematic view showing a display mode in which a partner character different from the display mode (see FIG. 91) of the normal HP display area Dm17 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 97 (c), in the main display mode in which the opponent characters E and F are displayed, the opponent character as a special opponent character whose initial value of the continuation value (HP value) is lower than that of the normal opponent characters A and B. E and F are displayed in a selectable manner. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player expect to win the battle reach in the current battle production.

  Further, FIG. 97 (d) is a schematic view showing a display mode in which the number of selectable partner characters is reduced with respect to the display mode (see FIG. 91) of the normal HP display area Dm17. In order to reduce the choice of the opponent character selected in the pre-battle production by using such a display mode, the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character at the time of battle reach development is reduced in advance (during the pre-battle production) It can be made easy.

  As described above, in the present control example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is based on the number of times that the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the suspension storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the battle effect setting time. By variably setting, the variation of the battle effect is increased and the effect is enhanced, but, for example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm 17 suggests the game result to the player in the future. It may be configured to

  For example, when the special opponent character E described above with reference to FIG. 97 (c) is selected as the battle reach opponent, it is preferable that the defeat reach is not executed. As a result, in addition to the effect of reducing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character in the pre-battle effect, the player can be made interested in the opponent character selected in the battle reach. Further, in the case where the opponent character E is set instead of the opponent character A in the display mode shown in FIG. 97 (a), the battle reach of the defeat pattern during the current battle effect period at the timing when the battle effect is executed. Can be executed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, when the ball storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of battle production setting includes the ball entry information in which the battle reach of the victory pattern is executed, the battle reach of the victory pattern is selected by being selected. A display mode may be displayed that includes the specific opponent character on which the is executed.

  Further, the display mode of the HP display area Dm 17 may be variably set based on the operation result on the frame button 22 which the player can operate. In this case, the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 shown in FIG. 91 is displayed until an operation of the frame button 22 is received, and an operation effect for operating the frame button 22 during the battle pre-effect is executed. It is preferable to change the display mode of the HP display area Dm 17 to the display mode described above with reference to FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (d), based on the operation result for.

  In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (d), even if different continuous values (HP values) are set, the length of the HP gauge is configured to be constant. Therefore, for example, when decreasing the continuation value (HP value) by "100", the reduction rate of the HP value gauge is variably displayed according to the set continuation value (HP value), but The HP gauge may be displayed in a length corresponding to the set continuation value (HP value) without being limited to the above display mode. Also, in order to make it easy to grasp the remaining continuation value (HP value) by the length of the HP gauge, the display mode (for example, color) of the HP value gauge is configured to be variable according to the length of the HP gauge. You may.

  By configuring as described above, even if the battle effect is repeatedly executed for the player, the effect mode can be made different, and the player gets bored with the effect contents early It is possible to suppress the In this control example, the production mode of the pre-battle production based on the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed, and the storage symbol (ball entry information) of the special symbol at the time of the battle production setting (at the pre-battle production setting). Is set to be variably set, but the production mode may be variably set using other conditions, for example, the first gaming state (for example, a probability change state) as a gaming state capable of executing battle rendition And a second gaming state (for example, a time saving state) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state at the time of battle effect setting (at the time of battle before effect setting) is The presentation mode may be set based on the result of determining whether it is in the first gaming state or the second gaming state, or the ball entry information stored on hold at the time of battle effect setting (at the time of pre-battle effect setting) To determine As a determination result, the gaming state may set the representation embodiment based on the first to the playing state whether there is ball entrance information indicating that the shift to the second game state determination result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. 101, a suggested effect that is an effect executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state will be described. This suggestion effect game that the special effect for showing the height of the jackpot expectation degree is executed by the fluctuation effect which is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol It is an effect for suggesting to the person in advance, and an effect including an indication effect of the first half part and a countdown effect of the second half part.

  First, with reference to FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, the content displayed on the display screen of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 during suggestion production is demonstrated. FIG. 98 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen at the time when the pro-end effect, which is the first half part of the suggested effect, is started, and FIG. 98 (b) is the end of the pro-end effect which is the first half part. FIG. 99 is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen at the time when the countdown effect which is the second half part is started, and FIG. 99 is a display screen at the time when the specific effect is started when the suggestion effect (countdown effect) is ended. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the suggestion effect is started, the indication effect is executed in the sub display area Ds. In the example shown in FIG. 98 (a), a dynamic effect in which a character Dc1 imitating a "car" advances from left to right is executed, and an arrival point Dc3 at which a character of "goal" is displayed for the character Dc1. By arriving at, the effect is executed so as to switch to the countdown effect.

  Then, one of a first route Dc2a indicating a straight route and a second route Dc2b indicating a meandering route is set as a moving route when the character Dc1 moves to the arrival point Dc3. In the example shown in FIG. 98 (a), the second path Dc2b is selected, and a dynamic effect of moving the character Dc1 along a meandering path is executed.

  Here, although the detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 100, in the first control example, the start timing of the prognostic effect which is the first half part of the suggested effects can be selected from a plurality of points, Since the period in which the precursor effect is performed is indeterminate, the path of the character Dc1 is selected in accordance with the length of the period in which the effect is performed. This makes it possible to visually grasp the timing at which the countdown effect starts when the indication effect is performed.

  In FIG. 98 (a), a production that indicates the timing at which the countdown production is started is used as the prognostic production, but other productions may be used as the prognostic production, for example, the countdown production is performed. It is also possible to use an effect that suggests to the player, an effect that suggests a period of a countdown effect, or an effect that suggests the type of a specific effect that is the object of the countdown effect. That is, any effect may be used as long as information relating to the effect to be executed in the future as the suggested effect is notified in advance.

  When the omen effect is over, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), a comment of “countdown start” is displayed above the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character Dc1 arrives at the arrival point Dc3 and the countdown The character "3" indicating that the period is 3 seconds is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4. In this way, it is possible to specifically inform the player of the fact that the current countdown effect starts from "3" and the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 98 (b), the countdown period is 3 seconds, but in the first control example, another countdown period (for example, 7 seconds) is set. There is also a countdown effect, and the longer the countdown period is, the higher the jackpot expectation rate is set. By configuring in this manner, the countdown effect in which a long countdown period is set is executed while predicting the timing at which the countdown effect is started and the current variation pattern during the precursor effect which is the first half part of the suggested effect. Can be expected to

  When the countdown effect shown in FIG. 98 (b) is finished, as shown in FIG. 99, the character “0” indicating that the countdown period is over is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 of the sub display area Ds, and the main display In the area Dm, an operation effect is performed in which an image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed as a specific effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, a flow for setting a pro-end effect and a count-down effect to be executed as the suggested effect of the first control example will be described. In the first control example, the suggestion effect is executed to notify the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and in the countdown effect executed in the second half of the suggestion effect, the execution timing of the specific effect to be targeted An effect (see FIG. 98 (b)) for accurately (concretely) notifying the player (see FIG. 98 (b)) is executed, and in the precursor effect performed in the first half part, an effect that directly or indirectly suggests that a specific effect is performed. (See FIG. 98 (a)) is executed.

  Here, in the variable effect conventionally executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the suggested effect for informing (informing) the player that the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing is predetermined. A configuration for performing for a predetermined period has been used. As described above, if the period in which the suggested effect is executed is determined in advance, the execution period overlaps with other effects (for example, effects that indicate a higher expectation of hitting than the suggested effect) performed in the variable effect. In some cases, there is a case where a prohibition process is performed to prevent the suggestion effect from being executed. In addition, there is a problem that it is not possible to execute the suggested effect with respect to the specific effect performed at the timing when the period for which the suggested effect is performed can not be secured.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, if a plurality of suggested effect data having different predetermined predetermined periods are prepared, the storage capacity increases, and the process for setting the variable effect is complicated. New problems occur.

  Therefore, in the present control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately, and the period in which the suggestion effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing (end timing of the countdown effect which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggested performance, and the start timing of the suggested performance (the first half part is the precursor The start timing of the effect can be set from a plurality of points.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect without setting the period to be executed in advance. Further, since the start timing of the suggestion effect can be set from a plurality of points, for example, the period in which the suggestion effect is executed is variable based on the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, when winning a big hit) It is possible to set a long period during which the suggested effect is performed or to change the start timing of the suggested effect according to the execution timing of another effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in setting the suggested effect can be increased.

  FIG. 100 (a) is a timing chart showing a flow of executing the suggestion effect in the fluctuation effect in which the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set. In the example shown in FIG. 100 (a), the timing at which the suggestion effect can be started 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the change is set, and "PUSH effect" which is a specific effect is performed 33 seconds after the start of the change Is set as. Then, the countdown period (30 to 33 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is set such that the countdown effect (execution period 3 seconds) ends at the timing (33 seconds after the start of fluctuation) at which the specific effect is performed. And since it is a case where the present fluctuation is won by a big hit, the timing (the timing of 10 seconds after the change start) which can set a suggestion production period longer among a plurality of start timings is a start timing of a suggestion production. Set as.

  Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 100 (a), after the precursor effect (rendering period 20 seconds) is executed 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation (after 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation), the countdown effect (rendering period 3 seconds) ) Is executed. Then, the specific effect (“PUSH effect”) is executed at the end timing of the effect period of the countdown effect. In addition, when the present fluctuation has not been won by the big hit, the timing (the timing after 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the antecedent effect). .

  As described above, when the suggestion effect is performed on the specific effect to be executed at the specific timing of the predetermined change effect, it is possible to set the start timing of the suggestion effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. The length of the suggestion effect period can be varied based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the player can be made aware of the length of the effect period. Therefore, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, even when changing the length of the suggested effect period, the countdown effect period, which is the second half part of the suggested effect, that is, the period for executing the effect to notify the execution timing of the specific effect specifically (correctly) Since the setting is made based on the execution timing of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the effect of the suggested effect.

  That is, in the case of varying the length of the suggestion effect period, only the period in which the prognostic effect, which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is performed is variable. The precursor effect directly or indirectly suggests that the specific effect is to be executed as described above, and even if the length of the effect period is changed, it is executed in the second half of the suggested effect. The player can be reliably notified of the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the countdown effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 100 (b), the flow of the suggestion effect performed in the change effect B different from the change effect A described above with reference to FIG. 100 (a) will be described. FIG. 100 (b) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect performed in the fluctuation effect B.

  The variation effect B shown in FIG. 100 (b) is a variation effect in which a plurality of specific effects that can be targets of the suggestion effect are set, unlike the variation effect A described above. The setting method of the fluctuation production performed by this fluctuation production B is explained focusing on the point which differs from the fluctuation production A mentioned above. In the change effect B, a timing at which the suggestion effect can be started is set 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the change, and a timing in which the specific effect can be performed 26 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the change is set.

  In the fluctuation effect B, as a specific effect that can be performed 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, a “cut-in effect” (not shown) in which the boy's character is largely displayed so as to cover the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 "PUSH effect" (see FIG. 99) can be set as a specific effect that can be performed 30 seconds after the start of the change. In these two specific effects, the jackpot expectation is set to be the same, and the specific effect corresponding to the indicated effect to be set is executed.

  In the variation effect shown in FIG. 100 (b), as in the case of FIG. 100 (a) described above, a period in which the suggestion effect is executed is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the special symbol When the lottery result is a big hit, the timing after 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation as the start timing of the suggestion effect is configured so that "PUSH effect" to be executed 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation is easily set as the specific effect. doing.

  More specifically, in the descending order of the jackpot expectation, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation, and then the timing after 17 seconds from the start of fluctuation is set as the start timing of the suggestion effect, The pattern to set "PUSH effect" as the specific effect, the timing to set the timing of 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation as the start timing of the suggested effect, the pattern to set "cut-in effect" as the specific effect, the timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation Is set as the start timing of the suggested effect, and the suggested effect is set corresponding to the jackpot expectation in the order of the patterns in which the “cut-in effect” is set as the specific effect.

  Further, in the fluctuation effect B shown in FIG. 100 (b), the start timing of the countdown effect (the length of the countdown period) is also variably set according to the length of the set suggested effect period, When the effect pattern having a high hit probability is set, the start timing of the countdown effect is set 7 seconds before the specific effect is executed, and immediately after the countdown effect is started, the secondary of the third symbol display device 81 is The countdown effect of displaying the character "7" in the countdown display area Dc4 (see FIG. 98 (b)) of the display area Ds is executed.

  Further, in the first control example, it is possible to execute suggestion effects across a plurality of variation effects. A flow of suggestion effects performed across a plurality of variation effects will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of effects in the case where the suggested effects are set across the fluctuation effects corresponding to two consecutive special symbol fluctuations.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the present control example, when a new pending storage is obtained during the execution of the change effect, information (such as a result of determination of a success or failure, a variation pattern, etc.) included in the newly obtained pending storage Based on the determination result, it is possible to set an effect mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed prior to the fluctuation effect corresponding to the corresponding pending storage.

  Specifically, the fluctuation of the fluctuation effect C (the fluctuation time of 30 seconds) is started in a state where there is no suspension storage, and at the timing 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (the remaining period of the fluctuation effect C is 15 seconds), When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 and a new holding memory (holding memory corresponding to the next fluctuation effect) is acquired, based on the information included in the new holding memory , It is determined whether or not to execute a suggested effect.

  Here, if it is determined that the next change effect is the change effect for executing the suggested effect, it is determined whether the remaining period of the current change effect is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) or more. In the example shown in FIG. 101, since the timing at which the new holding memory has been acquired is 15 seconds for the remaining period of the fluctuation effect C, it is determined that the remaining period of the current fluctuation effect is equal to or longer than the predetermined period. The start timing of the suggestion effect is set at a predetermined timing (the timing after 20 seconds has passed from the start of fluctuation) in the fluctuation effect of, and the specific effect (specification) to be executed 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation A countdown effect (effect period of 3 seconds) is set for the effect C).

  As described above, by setting the start timing of the suggested effect and the end timing of the suggested effect (start timing of the specific effect) across the fluctuation effects (variation effects C and D) which are continuously executed, the fluctuation effect C is set. When 20 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, the prognostic effect which is the first half part of the suggested effect is executed for a period (10 seconds) until the end of the fluctuation effect C. And a period (2 seconds) until the countdown effect is executed from the fluctuation start timing of the fluctuation effect D is continuously executed as a precursor effect, and after that (after 2 seconds from the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation effect D), the countdown effect is After being executed for 3 seconds, a bonus effect C is executed.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 101, since it is possible to execute the suggested effect in the change effect performed before the change effect in which the specific effect is performed, the beginning of the change effect (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the change) The suggested effect can also be performed for the specific effect performed in step b. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of the suggested effect.

  Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 101, when the remaining period of the fluctuation effect C is less than the predetermined period (less than 10 seconds) (for example, the timing of the additional winning B shown in FIG. 101). In the case (a), since it is not possible to secure a period for executing the suggested effect for the specific effect C of the fluctuation effect D, the suggested effect for the specific effect C is not set.

  In the example described above, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion effect for the specific effect to be executed in the fluctuation effect after the next time based on the timing when the additional prize is won (the timing when the new holding memory is acquired). Although the configuration is used, other configurations may be used. For example, based on the timing at which the additional prize is won (the timing at which the new pending storage is acquired), the timing at which the specific effect is performed in the next and subsequent fluctuation effects It may be configured to be variable.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily set a suggested effect to be executed across a plurality of change effects, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In FIG. 101, as an example of the suggestion effect executed across a plurality of change effects, the flow of the indication effect in the case where the start condition of the next change effect is established during the change effect execution is described. Suggested effects may be executed across a plurality of variation effects under other conditions.

  For example, in a state where the start condition of the next change effect is satisfied, when the start condition of the next change effect is satisfied, any timing within the next change effect is set as the execution timing of the specific effect. The timing to execute the suggested effect may be set to any timing of the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the period during which the next variable effect is performed.

  In this case, the content of the effect to be executed in the variation effect currently being executed and the content of the effect to be executed during the next variation effect are determined, and the result of the determination and the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the next-following variation effect It is good to constitute so that a start timing of suggestion production may be set based on a result. By configuring in this way, for example, when a continuous effect is set in which a change effect in the current change and the next change effect are set as a series of effects, a suggestive effect is set for the next-following change effect. If it is set that the special effect is to be executed at the end timing of the fluctuation effect in the current fluctuation, that is, the start timing of the next fluctuation effect, without performing it, the suggested effect within the next fluctuation effect period Set the start timing of the current fluctuation, and if there is no factor to prohibit the setting of the suggested effect in the next fluctuation production, the remaining period of the fluctuation performance currently in fluctuation, or the next fluctuation The start timing of the suggested effect can be set to any of the periods of the effect.

  In addition, when the start condition of the next (following) fluctuation production is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation production is a fluctuation corresponding to a big hit, and the start timing of the suggested performance is being executed based on the judgment result It may be set to either the remaining period of the fluctuation effect of or the execution period of the next (next time) fluctuation effect. This makes it possible to easily set a suggested effect period longer than one fluctuation effect period.

  In the first control example, the suggested effect is executed for one specific effect, but the suggested effect may be executed for a plurality of specific effects. In this case, it may be configured to set a precursor period in which the common precursor effect is performed and a countdown period in which the countdown effect is performed corresponding to each of the plurality of specific effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while predicting how many specific effects are performed on the suggested effects, and it is possible to enhance the effects of the effects.

  In addition, while the precursor effect is being performed, a pseudo-countdown effect (pseudo-counting effect) not intended for the specific effect may be performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the specific effect to be performed is the suggested effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 to FIG. 104, an expectation degree indication effect which is an effect executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state will be described. This expectation degree suggestion effect changes the display mode of expectation degree display production which displays a plurality of expectation degree display modes in which the jackpot expectation degree of jackpot can be notified in stages and the expectation degree display mode (the jackpot expectation degree of jackpot) Is an effect composed of an expectation increase effect for changing the display mode to a high display mode.

  First, with reference to FIG. 102 (a), an expectation degree display mode used for the expectation degree suggestion effect of the first control example will be described. FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the expected degree display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), in this control example, a plurality of expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed.

  The expected degree display mode Dk1 indicates the jackpot expected degree using the in-progress display indicating the information corresponding to the change effect being executed, and in FIG. 102 (a), “LV2 indicating the jackpot expected degree "Is displayed. Although this expectation degree display mode Dk1 will be described later in detail, it is displayed 10 seconds after the start of the change production, and is displayed on the display screen earliest among the plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3. Ru.

  The expectation display mode Dk2 indicates the jackpot expectation using the character appearing during the change effect, and in FIG. 102 (a), “LV1” indicating the jackpot expectation is displayed. Although this expectation degree display mode Dk2 will be described in detail later, it is displayed 24 seconds after the change effect is started.

  The expected degree display mode Dk3 indicates the jackpot expected degree using the dialogue display indicating the content of the change production and the progress information, and in FIG. 102 (a), “LV2” indicating the jackpot expected degree is displayed It is done. Although this expectation degree display mode Dk3 will be described later in detail, it is displayed 36 seconds after the change effect is started.

  In FIG. 102 (a), each expectation degree display mode is shown by LV display showing step by step, but it may be any mode that can notify the jackpot expectation degree stepwise, for example, it corresponds to the jackpot expectation degree It is also possible to use a configuration in which the color of each display mode, the speed of the dynamic effect, the volume of the sound to be output, and the magnitude of the light quantity are changed stepwise. In addition, a configuration may be used in which the presentation mode indicating the growth process or transformation process is gradually changed toward the final mode.

  In addition, for the display under execution displayed in the expectation degree display mode Dk1, for example, the display mode of the holding symbol display displayed in the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds is continuously displayed It is also good. Thereby, when the effect of changing the display mode of the held symbol (displayed symbol advance notice effect) is executed during the held symbol display, the display mode of the changed held symbol may be continuously used as a display under execution Since it is possible, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the relationship between the currently displayed variable display and the reserved symbol display.

  When the expectation degree suggestion effect is executed, in addition to the expectation degree display effect in which the expectation degree display manners Dk1 to Dk3 shown in FIG. 102 (a) are displayed, the display manners of the expectation degree display manners Dk1 to Dk3 are changed (increased (D) (see FIG. 102 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 102 (b), when an expectation increase (addition) effect is executed, first, a display having selection regions Dk4a to Dk4c in which different increase (addition) values are displayed as an expectation setting effect. The mode (roulette) Dk4 is rotated and displayed, and when the roulette Dk4 is stopped, a rising (overlaying) value displayed in the selection area designated by the arrow Dk5 is set.

  This rise (overlay) value indicates a variable amount that changes the display mode of each expectation degree display mode displayed during the expectation degree suggestion effect, and when “1 UP” is set as the rise (overlay) value The effect that the jackpot expectation is changed into the display mode which is gradually higher by one than the display mode currently displayed is executed for any one of the respective expectation display modes. It shows.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to notify only the variable amount of each expectation degree display mode displayed during the expectation degree suggestion effect of this time by the expectation degree increase (addition) effect being executed . Therefore, the player can enjoy the expectation increase effect (superimposed effect) while expecting that the expectation degree of the expectation degree display manner in which the display manner corresponding to the high jackpot expectation degree is already displayed is further changed (increased). Can.

  In this control example, as the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) effect, each expectation change (increase) while the expectation increase (addition) effect of this time is being performed A value obtained by adding together variable amounts of display modes is set. Thus, for example, when "3 UP" is set as the increase (overlay) value, whether the display mode of one expected degree display mode is variable by three steps, or the three expected degree display modes are variable by one step each It can be made difficult for the player to grasp whether to Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the effect result of the expectation degree suggestive effect at an early stage, and to improve the effect.

  next. The effect contents in the case where “3 UP” is set as the increase (overlay) value with reference to FIG. 103 (a) will be described. FIG. 103 (a) is a schematic view showing an example in the case where the display mode of each expected degree display mode is changed (increased) using the set increase (overlay) value.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 103 (a), “3 UP” is set as the increase (overlay), and each of the expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is It is displayed variably by one step. Specifically, the display mode of the expectation degree display mode Dk1 is changed from "LV2" to "LV3", and the display mode of the expectation degree display mode Dk2 is changed from "LV1" to "LV2", and the expectation degree display mode Dk3 The display mode of is changed from "LV2" to "LV3".

  Although FIG. 103 (a) exemplifies a pattern in which the display modes of all the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are simultaneously changed, the display modes of the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are different at different timings. It may be configured to be variable. In this case, a value corresponding to a variable amount obtained by changing the display mode of any of the expected degree display modes is increased by subtracting the increased (superimposed) value set in the expected degree increased (superimposed) effect ) The value is displayed on the display screen as remaining increase (overlay). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to specifically predict the rendering result based on the remaining increase (overlay) value displayed on the display screen and the expected degree display mode in which the display mode is not changed, The effect can be enhanced. Furthermore, with respect to the same expected degree display mode, an arrangement may be made such that an expectation degree increase (addition) effect is performed so as to change the display mode a plurality of times with different timings. By doing this, it is possible to execute unexpected effects for the player.

  Further, in this control example, display is performed as shown in FIG. 103A by continuously displaying each of the plurality of expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed at different timings in one variation production. Although it is configured to be simultaneously displayed on the screen, it is not necessary to provide a period during which each of the expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is simultaneously displayed, and among the display timings of a plurality of expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3. , And at least a part of display timing may be set at the same time.

  Further, in the expectation degree increase (addition) effect, the player may be notified of the expectation degree display mode to be set as the increase (addition) value (see FIG. 103B). In this case, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), a comment "I will raise the boy's level" is displayed above the main display area Dm, which indicates the target expectation degree display mode. By this comment being displayed, the player can grasp what the expected degree display mode to be the target of the expected degree suggested effect of this time is, and enjoys playing while predicting the progress of the produced in the future It can be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the flow of expectation degree display effect performed in the present control example will be described. FIG. 104 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of expected degree display effect. As shown in FIG. 104, in one variation pattern (super reach 60 seconds), expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 indicating the degree of expectation of the big hit in stages are displayed with different timings. Specifically, the expected degree display mode Dk1 (expected degree 1 display) is displayed 12 seconds after the change start, and the expected degree display mode Dk2 (expected degree 2 display) is displayed 24 seconds after the change start, and the expected degree display The mode Dk3 (display of expectation 3) is displayed 36 seconds after the start of the change.

  And an expectation degree rise production (expected degree addition display) which raises the display mode of each expectation degree display mode Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at any one timing of 5 seconds, 17 seconds, and 29 seconds from the start of fluctuation. . Here, the expectation degree increase effect (the expectation degree addition display) is configured such that the expectation degree display mode to be the target of raising the expectation degree differs according to the timing at which it is displayed (executed). It is configured such that the expectation degree display mode displayed after the degree rising effect (the expectation degree addition display) is performed is targeted.

  Specifically, in the case where the expectation increase effect (the expectation addition display) is displayed 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation, all the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are targeted, and the expectation increases 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation. Expectation degree display mode Dk2 and Dk3 are targeted when the effect (expected degree addition display) is displayed, and expectation degree rising effect (expected degree addition display) is displayed 29 seconds after the change start, the expectation degree An effect directed only to the display mode Dk3 is performed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to differ the effect contents of the expectation degree increase effect which is the same effect mode, only by changing the display timing (execution timing). In addition, since the expectation increase effect is executed for a plurality of expectation degree display modes, the player is asked how much the expectation degree of the expectation degree display manner is increased by the expectation degree reported in the expectation degree increase production. You can play the game while expecting to

  In this control example, as described above, the target of the expectation increase effect (the expectation addition display) is the expectation display mode in which the display timing is set later, but other configurations may be used. For example, the expectation degree display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the expectation degree increase effect (the expectation degree addition display) is executed may be a target, or the above-described expectation degree display manner You may target the combination of By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which display mode of the expected degree display mode is variable (the expected degree is increased) by the expected degree rising effect (the expected degree added display). , Can enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in order to enhance the effect of the expectation increase effect (the expectation addition display), the selection means by which the player can select at least one of the plurality of expectation degree display modes and the expectation selected by the selection means Target discrimination means for discriminating whether the degree display mode is a target whose display mode is varied by the expectation degree rising effect (expected degree addition display), and the expectation degree display mode selected by the selection means is expected degree increase effect ( Variable control means for changing the display mode according to the expectation increase effect (the expectation degree additional display) when it is determined by the object determination means that the display mode is to be changed according to the expectation degree addition display). Also good. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a player participation type effect, and it is possible to participate in the game eagerly.

  In this case, for example, in a period prior to a period in which the player selects the expected degree display mode by the selection means, a suggestion notification suggesting the expected degree display mode to be an object of the expected degree rising effect (expected expected addition display). It is preferable to provide suggestion notification means to be executed. As a result, the target range to be selected by the selection means can be limited for the player, and the probability that the expectation degree increase effect (expected degree addition display) is performed can be increased.

  In addition, when the expected degree display mode selected by the selection unit is determined by the target determination unit not to be a target whose display mode is changed by the expected degree increase effect (expected degree addition display), It is good to comprise the production | presentation switching means which performs the different production | presentation using the raise (addition) value set by the expectation degree rise production (the expectation degree addition display). As a result, it is possible to take advantage of the player's sense of incongruity as to the increase (addition) value already displayed on the display screen.

  As the different effects described above, for example, effects for informing the player in advance of the contents of the prize information stored on hold, values that the player has accumulated for obtaining benefits (for example, game level and experience It may be an effect that is advantageous to the player such as an effect for raising the value), or it may be disadvantageous to the player such as an effect (expected degree decrease effect) to vary the effect mode so that the expectation degree of the expectation degree display mode decreases. It may be a production.

  In addition, a means is provided which is configured to vary the display mode of the effect switched by the effect switching means in accordance with the increase (superimposed) value set in the expectation increased effect (the expectation added display). Also good. Furthermore, when the player does not select the expectation increase mode by the selection means, the expected degree display manner that is not the target may be automatically selected. May be selected automatically. In the case where the target degree of expectation display mode is selected automatically, an effect is executed such that it is advantageous for the player to select the expected degree display mode not to be targeted by the selection means. Good. As a result, the player can be made to actively select the expected degree display mode by the selection means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 125. FIG. First, the details of the main controller 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 113) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 113, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display result of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. Used in

  For the setting of the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for lottery of the jackpot and the first used for selection of jackpot type (jackpot symbol) Per-type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3 used to select the out-of-stop type in the special symbol, fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern, and initial setting of the first per-random number counter C1 And the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 136) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a where the counter value is stored for winning for the first ball entrance 64 and in the RAM 203 for the winning for the second ball inlet 140. The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is provided. As described above, in the present control example, up to four holding balls are respectively provided for the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140. For this reason, each counter value is special when the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when it is possible to draw a special symbol such as when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable display or when the jackpot of the special symbol is not being played. If the ball is stored in the symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and a ball is won in any of the second entrances 140, the respective counter values are stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, among the counter values stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the oldest counter value in time is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processing for fluctuating display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 are executed.

  On the other hand, during a period when lottery of special symbol 1 is not possible such as during special symbol variation display or during a big hit game etc., the ball wins the first ball entry 64 or the second ball entry 140 and enters the prize When the number of holding balls corresponding to the ball mouth is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball It is stored in the storage area 203b. In addition, when the corresponding hold number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in the present control example), acquisition of each counter value etc. is not performed, but only the prize balls (three prize balls in the present embodiment) Is treated as an invalid ball to be paid out to the player.

  In the present control example, although the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140, it is not limited to this, and is less than four (for example, 3) or more than 4 (e.g. 8). Further, the upper limit value of the number of holding balls may be made different between the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140, or the upper limit may not be provided. Furthermore, the holding ball storage area may be provided only for one of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140 so that only one of the holding balls can be stored.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 238), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 238 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 238) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 238, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 Are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number used as the big hit of the special symbol is specified in the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 106A) provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the value of the jackpot random number defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (a). The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the drawing of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the gaming state is the low probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 Is determined to be "7", and if "7", it is determined to be a jackpot. If the gaming state is the high probability gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is within the range of "5 to 9" in the drawing of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 If it is within the range of "5 to 9", it is determined to be a jackpot.

  Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number that provides a big win for the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is special It becomes the thing of the jackpot of the design. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 that is the big hit of the special symbol, and the random number "7" is the first hit random number table as described above It is stored in 202a. As described above, since the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1 among the total number of random numbers 239, the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/239". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are five values of the first random number counter C1 per jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "5 to 9" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Thus, since the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10 while the total number of random numbers is 239, the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1 / 47.8".

  Referring back to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. The value of the first collision type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107), any of the big hit A to K The jackpot type will be selected.

  Here, the details of the first hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107, in the first hit type selection table 202c, jackpot types to be selected are defined in association with each value range of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. The jackpot A "is defined in association with it. The "big hit A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the special variation state regardless of the playing state at the time of the big hit. Since the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probability change state that is advantageous to the player, “jackpot A” is the jackpot type that is the most advantageous to the player. Among the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since 20 random numbers are selected for “big hit A”, “big hit A if big win in the special symbol lottery” The rate at which “is selected is 10%.

  In addition, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the "big hit B" is specified in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 79". . The "big hit B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the special variation state regardless of the playing state at the time of the big hit. Since the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot is less than the "big hit A" but the gaming state after the big hit is set to a positive change state advantageous to the player, the "big hit B" is a big hit type advantageous to the player. It is. Among the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since 60 random number values are selected for "big hit B", "big hit B when it is a big hit in the special symbol lottery The rate at which “is selected is 30%.

  The corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the "big hit C" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 114". The "big hit C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 and the time saving state is set 100 times as the gaming state after the big hit regardless of the playing state at the time of the big hit. Among the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since 35 random numbers are selected for “big hit C”, “big hit C if the big win in the special symbol lottery” The rate at which “is selected is 17.5%.

  In addition, the corresponding symbol type is special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the “big hit D” is defined in association with the range of “115 to 164” for the value of the first hit type counter C2. . The "big hit D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is five and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the special variation state regardless of the playing state at the time of the big hit. Among the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, since 50 random numbers are selected for "big hit D", "big hit D when it becomes a big hit in the special symbol lottery The rate at which “is selected is 25%.

  And the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), and the "big hit E" is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "165 to 199". . In this "big hit E", when the number of rounds is 5 rounds and the gaming state at the time of big hit is in a low probability state and not in a time saving state (in the normal state), the gaming state after the big hit ends normally. Is set, and when the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), it is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is set 100 times as the gaming state after the big hitting end. Among the 200 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, 35 random numbers are selected for "big hit E", so when it is a big hit in the special symbol lottery, "big hit E The rate at which “is selected is 17.5%.

  Next, in the case where the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special figure 2), similarly to the case of the special figure 2 described above, "big hit F based on the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202c "To jackpot K" is selected. In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2 is the jackpot type selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1 It is set (selection ratio is 80%) so that the ratio in which the number of rounds of 15 rounds of jackpots ("big hit F") is selected is high with respect to (first hit type). As a result, if a jackpot in which a player can obtain a large number of balls in one jackpot when a jackpot of a special symbol is won, the jackpot in the special figure 2 becomes higher than the special figure 1 because it is higher. The degree of advantage of the player can be made different between the drawing of the special drawing 1 and the drawing of the special drawing 2.

  On the other hand, when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2, the jackpot type (first hit type) that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1 May be selected. Specifically, when “big hit I” to “big hit K” are selected, two rounds less than five rounds which is the smallest number of rounds among the jackpot types selected in the case of special figure 1 It is set.

  In addition, as the gaming state after the end of the big hit, when the big hit type "big hit H", "big hit J" and "big hit K" are selected, the corresponding symbol type is special figure. In the jackpot type (first hit type) selected in case 1 as the gaming state after the jackpot end, the number of times (100 times) less than the number of times set when the time saving state is granted (100 times) 50 times and 25 times) are set.

  As described above, the contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed and the jackpot game are set after the jackpot game is executed depending on whether the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won or the jackpot of the special figure 2 is hit. By making different game states different from each other, it is possible to make the game complicated and to suppress the player from always giving an excess bonus.

  Furthermore, based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the gaming state set after the jackpot is configured to be different, so in the game aiming for the jackpot of the special symbol, be aware of the gaming state set While playing a game. Specifically, even in the gaming state where the jackpot lottery is performed with the same probability (for example, the low probability state), the gaming state set after the jackpot is different depending on whether it is a time saving state or a normal state. Differently, a gaming state is set in which the player is more advantageous in the case of the time saving state. In this way, it is possible to play the game while strongly expecting to win the jackpot of the special symbol during the specific period (during the middle of the day).

  In this control example, the ratio of setting the high probability state in which the jackpot probability is improved after the jackpot end is the same between when the jackpot is won in the special view 1 and when the jackpot is won in the special view 2 As described above, the first hit type selection table 202c is defined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio of setting the high probability state may be made different. Also, by selecting the jackpot type (first punch type) based on the first hit type selection table 202c and passing the ball to the specific area during the jackpot, a probability change state (high probability state) is given after the jackpot end. In the gaming machine, the passing of the ball to the above-mentioned specific area in the big hit game executed when winning a big hit in Special Figure 1 and the big hit game played when winning a big hit in Special Figure 2 It may be configured to make the ease of making different. As a result, it is possible to make the bonus given to the player different depending on the special symbol winning the jackpot.

  Furthermore, as a method of making the bonus given to the player different depending on the special symbol that has won the jackpot, for example, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 (refer to FIG. Depending on the type of jackpot, the variable winning device 65 may be configured to be able to win a ball during the jackpot game. In this case, the ease of winning a ball to a plurality of variable winning devices 65, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins, the ending condition (number of balls or time limit) for terminating one opening operation Should be different. As a result, it is possible to make the bonus given to the player different depending on the special symbol winning the jackpot.

  Referring back to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of detachment, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in this control example, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 Are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into high probability for special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, a range of random number values set for each type of stoppage of deviation Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “back and forth reach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109). In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to the game state are set, and variation pattern tables are set for each of the success / failure determination results. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the ball is either left or right ordinary entry (through gate) 66, 67 It is acquired when it is detected that it has passed (hereinafter referred to as a normal ball entry (through gate) 67), and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  The value of the random number corresponding to the normal symbol is specified in the second random number table 202b (see FIG. 106 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes a hit specified in the second hit random number table 202b, it is determined that the hit is the normal symbol (the second symbol). The details of the second random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 106 (b).

  FIG. 106 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202b. In this second pattern per random number table 202b, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are two random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range becomes "5 to 6" There is. Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 2 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the probability to be hit of a normal symbol is “1/120”.

  When the ball passes through the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The symbol change display is usually performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “○” is displayed as lit), and the motorized accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol (during the time reduction state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 200 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the probability to be hit by a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2" .

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “○” is displayed as lit), and the electric symbol 140a attached to the second entrance 140 is opened “one second × two times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the normal symbol's low probability, and further, the open period of the electric symbol 140a is Since it becomes very long, “0.2 second × one time → one second × two times”, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 140. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, the electric role object 140a is configured to be opened only for “one second × 2 times”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The details will be described later with reference to the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132) described later, but in this control example, the state (low probability or high probability) of the normal symbol at the time of lottery of the normal symbol According to), the variation display time of the normal symbol is determined, and it is awarded when the normal symbol wins according to the state (low probability or high probability) of the normal symbol at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops. It is configured such that the content of the special benefit, that is, the content of the opening operation of the motorized steering part 140a is determined.

  That is, if the variation of the normal symbol is started during the high probability of the normal symbol (during the short time state), the short variation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and When the state of the symbol shifts to the low probability state (when the short shift state shifts to the normal state), even if the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed after the short fluctuation end, the motorized prize 140a is the normal symbol An open operation (for example, “0.2 seconds × 1 time”) is performed during a low probability of (normal state).

  By configuring in this way, it is a pachinko machine 10 in which the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the normal symbol are executed separately and independently, and based on the gaming state which can be varied by the lottery result of the special symbol or the number of lotterys. If the variation time of the normal symbol or the bonus content at the time of winning is determined, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the gaming state at the time of lottery of the regular symbol, and the bonus content at the time of winning of the regular symbol Since it can be determined based on the gaming state at the time of the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol (at the time of opening operation of the electric character object 140a), the situation where the operation content of the normal symbol and the gaming state set are different It can suppress that it occurs.

  The variation control of the normal symbol is not limited to the content of the above-described control example, and other controls may of course be used. For example, based on the gaming state at the time of the lottery of the normal symbol, the variation time and You may make it set the content of a privilege (The open operation content of the electrically-driven combination thing 140a). In addition, only when the random symbol drawing time of the normal symbol and the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol (during the opening operation of the electric character 140a) are both the high probability state of the normal symbol (short time state), the special symbol winning bonus A bonus (for example, “1 second × 2 times”) advantageous to the player may be set (the content of the opening operation of the motorized part 140a), or the lottery of the normal symbol and the variation stop of the normal symbol Only when both are in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol (at the time of the opening operation of the motorized role 140a), the bonus (for example, 0.2 seconds “× 1 time” may be set.

  Further, a plurality of setting methods described above may be switched and executed. For example, a combination that is most advantageous to the player during a probability change state that is a high probability state of a normal symbol (during lottery of a normal symbol) And when the fluctuation stop of the normal symbol (when the opening operation of the electric character 140a) is both low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol All combinations that give the advantage advantageous to the player) During the short time state that is a high probability state of the normal symbol, the combination that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the definite change state (during the variation stop of the normal symbol (during the opening operation of the electric symbol 140a) is the high probability state of the normal symbol) In this case, it may be configured to set a combination that provides the player with advantageous benefits. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to further set advantages and disadvantages in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and to enhance the interest of the game.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 136).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (a). As shown in FIG. 105 (a), the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, the first random number table 202a, the second random number table 202b, and the first type selection table 202c. The variation pattern selection table 202d, the jackpot transition setting table 202e, and the state transition table 202f are at least stored.

  The first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106A) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first random number counter C1 is stored as described above. The second collision random number table 202b (see FIG. 106B) is a data table in which the collision judgment value of the second collision random number counter C4 is stored as described above. The first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and as described above, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each large hit It is specified in association with the type. Each of these tables has already been described in detail along with the explanation of the various counters, so the explanation will be omitted here.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display pattern. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

  FIG. 108 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used to select a fluctuation pattern when a jackpot is won regardless of the gaming state. , A game state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol), and it is used for selecting a fluctuation pattern when winning out of the game (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 And a game state other than the normal state (a positive change state or a short time state), which is used for selecting a change pattern when winning in a release, and a change pattern table 202d3 for lottery and a drawing of a special symbol A special variation pattern table used to select a variation pattern when a special condition is established regardless of the result. And Bull 202d4, is constructed from.

  First, the details of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (b). As shown in FIG. 108 (b), in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, the range of values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), various types of normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds are defined in association with the range of “0 to 50” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, “50 to 179” The range of variation time per 60 seconds is associated with various super reach categories, and the value of variation type counter CS1 is defined as a range of “180 to 198” with various range of 90 seconds of variation time. ing. As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is set to one of the fluctuation patterns of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern By transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is 60 seconds (about 55% selection ratio), 30 seconds (about 25% selection ratio) , 90 seconds (about 20% of selection ratio) in order to be easy to select. This is related to the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol to be described later is out, and the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit The percentage and the percentage of variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out can indicate the jackpot expectation when the particular variation time (variation pattern) is selected. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot is won according to the selected fluctuation time (variation pattern).

  In this control example, the variation pattern table 202d1 for big hit is used regardless of the big hit type won, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the big hit type showing the big hit type and the big hit usually It is good also as composition using a different change pattern table by the case where it is a jackpot type which shows. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time which is shorter in the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the large jackpot is won is selected than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type showing the probability variation jackpot is won. It is good to be configured to be easy to do. As a result, since the longer the fluctuation time set to the fluctuation pattern to be executed can be expected for the game result to be advantageous to the player, the player is made to be interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

  In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected in the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the large jackpot is won normally than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the probability variation jackpot is won It may be configured as described above, whereby a player can be provided with surprising game results when winning a big hit in a short fluctuation time, even if a short fluctuation time is selected. , Can be expected to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108 (c), the details of the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 108 (c), the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 includes the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern when the stop type is “completely out” and “reach common”. Are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the stop type is “completely out”, and the value of the change type counter CS1 is within the range of “0 to 98”. It is defined in association with a range of "99 to 198" in which a variation time of 10 seconds is associated. In the case where "complete removal" is selected as the stop type, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state.

  In addition, various types of normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds are defined in association with the range of “0 to 149” in which the stop type is “reach common” and the value of the change type counter CS1 is in the range of “149 to 197” Various super reach various fluctuation time is 60 seconds to be specified to be specified, in the range of 198 various special reach various control time is specified to be associated with 90 seconds.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108 (d), the details of the out-of-order (probable variation) change pattern table 202d3 will be described. The out-of-order (probable change) change pattern table 202d3 is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is out and the gaming state is the positive change state (time reduction state). In this out-of-order (probable change) change pattern table 202d3, similarly to the above-described out-of-order (normal) change pattern table 202d2, the value of the change type counter CS1 when the stop type is “completely out” and “reach common” The range and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), the stop type is “completely out” and the value of the change type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 190” and the change time is 3 seconds out of the short range. Are defined in association with each other, and a short deviation of 5 seconds is defined in association with the range of "191 to 198".

  Further, various types of normal reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds are defined in association with the range of “0 to 190” where the stop type is “reach common” and the value of the change type counter CS1 is in the range of “191 to 198” Various super reach various fluctuation time is defined in association with 60 seconds. That is, in the case where the gaming state is a definite change state (time reduction state), it is specified that a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is not selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. Therefore, in the case where the variation state (variation pattern) of 90 seconds is selected as the probability change state (time reduction state) of the gaming state, only when the jackpot of the special symbol is won is selected. In this case, in the third symbol display device 81, a bonus effect for congratulating the jackpot is executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from dissatisfaction by being notified of the removal of the special symbol after a long variation pattern has been executed during a probability change state (time reduction state) which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Can.

  As described above, when the probability change state (time reduction state) is set as the gaming state, and the release (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is used, the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the release state (normal ) Since the variation time of the special symbol is set to be shorter than when the variation pattern table 202d 2 is used, the drawing of the special symbol during the probability changing state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player is made. It can be done efficiently. In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, when the definite change state (time saving state) is set as the game state, the stop type is reach when the special symbol is detached than when the normal state is set. It is set so that the rate of falling off is low. Therefore, while the gaming state is a definite change state (time reduction state), the appearance frequency of the reach loss decreases (due to the fact that a long change time is difficult to execute), a definite change state (a game state advantageous to the player) The lottery of the special symbol in the time saving state can be performed more efficiently.

  Next, the details of the special variation pattern table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. The special variation pattern table 202d4 is a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern for four special rotations when the gaming state after the big hit is in a definite variation state or a short time state, and the above-mentioned continuous big hit effect It is referred when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation (see FIG. 89 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 109, in the special variation pattern table 202d4, a variation pattern is defined in association with the number of special symbol (special figure) variations after the end of the big hit, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Specifically, in the first to third special symbol changes after the big hit end, the variation time is 0.5 seconds, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the change type counter CS1. Per short) is defined.

  In the fourth special symbol change after the end of the big hit, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1, the ultrashort deviation of 0.5 seconds is specified, and the special symbol If the lottery result is a hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 179" and the fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is specified in the range of "0 to 179", and the fluctuation time of 32 to the range of "180 to 198" A special hit of .5 seconds is specified.

  By configuring in this manner, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit is a definite change state or a short time state, it is possible to immediately execute the fluctuation for the special symbol 4 rotation. Thereby, when performing a series of big hit effects using a plurality of big hit games like the continuous big hit effects mentioned above, the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed between the big hit games can be shortened, The effect can be enhanced.

  Further, although details will be described later, in this control example, in a state where a probability change state or a time reduction state is set as a gaming state (during a continuous mode), a jackpot in which a probability change state or a time reduction state is set again after the end When winning, the variation pattern is configured to be selected using the special variation pattern table 202d4. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to shorten the special symbol fluctuation time for a predetermined number of times (four times) after the big hit end only in a state where the definite change state (time saving state) is continuously executed.

  Thereby, for example, in a state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, when winning in a jackpot (for example, jackpot A to jackpot D) in which a definite change state or time saving state is set after jackpot end, that is, jackpot end Since there is a reserve memory of special symbol 1 and there is no reserve memory of special symbol 2 later, in a state where symbol variation of special symbol 1 becomes easy to be executed, for jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 or for removal (probability change) The variation pattern is set with reference to the variation pattern table 202d3.

  On the other hand, in a state where a definite change state (time reduction state) is set, when winning a large change (for example, a large change F to a large change K) in which a positive change state or a time reduction state is set after the big hit ends, that is, after the big hit ends In the state where there is a reserved memory of the special symbol 2 and the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 becomes easy to be executed, the special variation pattern and the special symbol variation thereof are set to the ultrashort variation of 0.5 seconds.

  Furthermore, as shown in the special variation pattern table 202d4 of FIG. 109, in this control example, the variation pattern corresponding to the special winning at the ratio of a part (about 10%) in the case of winning in the fourth rotation after the big hit end. (Variation time 32.5 seconds) is configured to be selected.

  By configuring in this manner, when a jackpot is won in a state where the fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4, a series of jackpot effects (continuous jackpot effects) continued from the previous jackpot game is Apart from that, it is possible to carry out a special rendition that congratulates you for winning the jackpot in succession. Therefore, various jackpot effects can be provided to the player, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In this control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined such that the special hitting variation (32.5 seconds) is selected in part of the fourth variation count after the big hit ends, but is limited to this It is also possible to select the special hit fluctuation (32.5 seconds) even when the number of changes after the end of the big hit is a part of the first to third times. In addition, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that a variation pattern (for example, variation time 10 seconds) in which a variation time other than 0.5 seconds is set is selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. It is also good. By configuring in this manner, the player is expected to have a jackpot winning expectation if a fluctuation of 0.5 seconds or more is executed before the number of times of fluctuation after the jackpot end reaches 4 times. Because it is possible, it is possible to play the game conscious of the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

  Next, the details of the jackpot migration setting table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot transition setting table 202e is a table for defining the gaming state set after the jackpot is completed, and the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot K) selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202c. A state transition status (state transition 1 to state transition 9) is defined in association with the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  The jackpot transition setting table 202e is referred to (S1213) when the jackpot control process (see FIG. 134) described later determines that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1213), and the state transition status selected Thus, the gaming state is set in accordance with the prescribed contents defined in the state transition table 202f described later.

  The contents of the jackpot migration setting table 202e will be specifically described. The jackpot type is any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, jackpot F, jackpot G, and jackpot H. If the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (high probability time short)" (ST2), or " In the case of the time saving state (with low probability and time short) (ST3), "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status.

  When "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, the gaming state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 1 table 202f1 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) described later, and "state transition" When 2 "is set, the gaming state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 2 table 202f2.

  Next, if the jackpot type is "big hit C" and the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 3" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (high In the case of probability time short) (ST2) or "time short state (low probability time short) (ST3)", "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is "big hit E" If the gaming state at the time of the jackpot win is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (with high probability time short) (ST2)" or "time reduction state In the case of (there is a low probability time short) (ST3), "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status.

  Furthermore, if the jackpot type is "big hit H" or "big hit J" and the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status, and " In the case of a probability change state (with high probability and short) (ST2) or "time-shortened state (with low probability and short) (ST3)", "State transition 7" is set as the state transition status, and the jackpot type is "big hit K If the gaming state at the time of the jackpot win is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status, and "probability change state (high probability time short)" (ST2), Alternatively, in the case of "time saving state (low probability time having short) (ST3)", "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status.

  When any one of "state transition 3" to "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status, of the state transition 3 table 202f3 to the state transition 9 table 202f9 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) described later. The gaming state is set based on the contents defined in the corresponding table.

  Here, the contents of the state transition table 202f will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 111 (a). The state transition table 202f is a table used to shift the state status such as the gaming state and the variation pattern table based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and the prescribed number counter 203j stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. The status status is transitioned based on the value of. The state transition table 202f is referred to when acquiring the specified number counter 203j (S1214) when it is determined that the ending effect is the end timing in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: Yes). When it is determined that the value of the specified number counter 203j is 0 in the variation count subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S409: Yes), reference is made to set the next status (S410).

  FIG. 111 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table 202f in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 111 (a), the state transition table 202f in the first control example is a state transition status ("state transition 1" to "state transition 9") set using the above-described big hit transition setting table 202e. And a state transition table ("state transition 1 table 202f1" to "state transition 9 table 202f9") corresponding to.

  First, the details of the state transition 1 table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (b). The state transition 1 table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 1” is set as the state transition status, and a state status “ST2 (probable change state) is set to“ 0 ”as the value of the prescribed number counter 203j. Is specified. That is, in the state where the state transition 1 table 202f1 is used (the state where “state transition 1” is set), the probability change state is continuously set until the next jackpot is won.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111 (c), the details of the state transition 2 table 202f2 will be described. The state transition 2 table 202 f 2 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 2” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 2 table 202f2, a state status “ST2a (probable change state)” in which “4” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j and a state status in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j "ST2 (Positive variation state)" is defined. That is, after the big hit is finished, "ST2a" is set as the status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0", and then "ST2" is set as the status.

  Here, when “ST2a” is set as the status, the special variation pattern table 202d4 of the variation pattern selection table 202d is set to be used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to set in advance a rule for selecting a variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 only during a specific period in a state where the same gaming state (probable variation state) is continuously set. This can reduce the processing load on the main control unit 110.

  FIG. 111 (d) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 3 table 202f3. The state transition 3 table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 3” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 3 table 202f3, a state status "ST3 (short time state)" in which "100" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and a state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j. "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, "ST3" is set as the status status until the value of the prescribed count counter 203j becomes "0" after the big hit is finished (time saving status is set until the number of times of special symbol variation is 100 in time saving status) After that, “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the state status.

  FIG. 111E is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 4 table 202f4. The state transition 4 table 202 f 4 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 4” is set as the state transition status. In this status transition 4 table 202f4, the status status "ST3a (short time status)" in which "4" is set as the value of the prescribed number counter 203j, and the status status in which "96" is set as the value of the prescribed number counter 203j. “ST3 (time saving state)” and a status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203 j are defined. That is, after the big hit is finished, "ST3a" is set as the status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol changes 4 times), and then the special symbol changes 96 times "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the status status, and then "ST1 (normal status)" is set as the status status. Thereby, when the time saving state (100 times) is set after the big hit end, it is possible to select the variation pattern with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol variation which is initially executed four times.

  FIG. 111 (f) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 5 table 202f5. The state transition 5 table 202f5 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 5” is set as the state transition status. In the state transition 5 table 202f5, a state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is defined. That is, the normal state is set without setting the gaming state (probable change state, time saving state) advantageous to the player after the big hit ends.

  FIG. 112 (a) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 6 table 202f6. The state transition 6 table 202 f 6 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 6” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 6 table 202f6, a state status "ST3 (short time state)" in which "50" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and a state status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j. "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, "ST3" is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" after the big hit is finished (time saving status is set until the number of times of variation of the special symbol becomes 50 in time saving status) After that, “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the state status.

  FIG. 112 (b) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 7 table 202f7. The state transition 7 table 202f7 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 7” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 7 table 202f7, the status status "ST3a (short time status)" in which "4" is set as the value of the prescribed count counter 203j, and the status status in which "46" is set as the value of the prescribed count counter 203j. “ST3 (time saving state)” and a status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203 j are defined. That is, after the big hit is finished, "ST3a" is set as the status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol changes 4 times), and then the special symbol changes 46 times "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the status status, and then "ST1 (normal status)" is set as the status status. Thereby, when the time saving state (50 times) is set after the big hit end, it is possible to select the variation pattern with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol variation which is initially executed four times.

  FIG. 112C is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 8 table 202f8. The state transition 8 table 202f8 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 8” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 8 table 202f8, the status status "ST3 (short time status)" in which "25" is set as the value of the prescribed count counter 203j, and the status status in which "0" is set as the value of the prescribed count counter 203j. "ST1 (normal state)" is defined. That is, "ST3" is set as the status status until the value of the prescribed count counter 203j becomes "0" after the big hit is finished (time saving status is set until the number of times of variation of the special symbol becomes 25 in time saving status) After that, “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the state status.

  FIG. 112 (d) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the state transition 9 table 202f9. The state transition 9 table 202f9 is a table that is referred to when “state transition 9” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 9 table 202f9, the status status "ST3a (short time status)" in which "4" is set as the value of the prescribed number counter 203j, and the status status in which "21" is set as the value of the prescribed number counter 203j. “ST3 (time saving state)” and a status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203 j are defined. That is, after the big hit is finished, “ST3a” is set as the status until the value of the specified number counter 203 j becomes “0” (until the special symbol changes 4 times), and then the special symbol changes 21 times "ST3 (time saving state)" is set as the status status, and then "ST1 (normal status)" is set as the status status. Thereby, when the time saving state (25 times) is set after the big hit end, it is possible to select the variation pattern with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol variation which is initially executed four times.

  As described above, in the first control example, in the case of winning the jackpot of the special symbol, based on the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot in the special symbol. It is possible to make the fluctuation pattern table used to select the game state set after the big hit end and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol after the big hit end different. Thereby, the contents of the game can be further complicated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this control example, the period for selecting the variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 is the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotation after the big hit, but other configurations may be used, for example, The special variation pattern table 202d4 may be used at the 11th to 14th rotations after the big hit ends, not the special symbol variation executed immediately after the big hit end. When configured in this way, the status transition table is set to the status status “ST3 (short time status)” in which “10” is set as the value of the prescribed number counter 203j and “4” as the value of the prescribed number counter 203j. The status status "ST3a (time saving status)", the status status "ST3 (time saving status)" in which "46" is set as the value of the prescribed count counter 203j, and "0" as the value of the prescribed count counter 203j It is good to comprise so that "ST1 (normal state)" which was carried out may be prescribed. With this configuration, it is possible to select a variation pattern of 11th to 14th rotations after the end of the big hit using the special variation pattern table.

  As described above, by using the configuration of the state transition table described above, the state status set with the end of the jackpot as the starting point is set in association with the number of fluctuations (prescribed number of times) of the special symbol that the state status continues. Only by doing this, game specifications can be easily set, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. Further, even when the game specification is changed, the contents of the state transition table may be changed, so that the game specification can be easily changed.

  Furthermore, in the first control example, when the normal state is set as the gaming state (when ST1 is set as the state status), "0" is set as the value of the prescribed number counter 203j, and always Although the same variation pattern table (the variation pattern table for big hit 202d1 or the variation pattern table 202d2 for disconnection) is referred to, the variation pattern table that can be referred to when the gaming state is the normal state is A plurality of the variable pattern tables may be provided corresponding to the value of the specified number counter 203 j to be referred to. In this case, for example, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaches 50 times) and the gaming state shifts to the normal state. (When the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes “0” in the state transition 6 table 202f6), the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to “10” corresponding to the status status ST1.

  Then, when the value of the prescribed number counter 203 j is larger than “0” while the status status ST 1 is set, the variation pattern may be selected with reference to the special variation (ordinary) pattern table. By configuring in this way, immediately after the gaming state shifts from the short time state to the normal state, a variation pattern different from usual can be selected, so that the gaming state is advantageous to the player for the player. It can be considered as still continuing.

  In the state where the normal state is set as the gaming state, the period during which the special fluctuation pattern table is referred to is outputted from the effect mode of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sound output device 226 It is preferable that the voice mode and the light emission mode output from the lamp display device 227 be a special mode corresponding to the period. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with a more special feeling. Further, even when the jackpot is won during the period in which the special variation pattern table is referred to, it is preferable to execute a special effect mode different from the effect during the normal jackpot. As a result, it is possible to make the player realize that he has won the jackpot during the special period, and the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

  In the first control example, the state transition table is provided corresponding to each state transition status, but a common state transition table may be used for a portion where setting contents of the state transition table are common. By configuring in this manner, the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the first control example, the variation pattern table to be referred to is switched by changing the state status based on the value of the prescribed number counter 203j, but the state status is used for other elements. May be made variable. For example, in a state where the state transition 6 table 202f6 is referred to, the state status ST3 is set, and when the value of the prescribed number counter 203j is "40", the lottery result of the special symbol is out, but a small amount of benefit When winning the lottery result (so-called small hit) that can be awarded (a benefit of opening the variable winning device 65 for a short time (for example, 3 seconds)), the status is changed from ST3 to ST3b, and the value of the prescribed number counter 203j Is set to “4”, the status status ST 3 b is set, and when the value of the specified number counter 203 j is larger than “0” (in the case of “1” to “4”), the variation pattern table for small hit only Refer to The variation pattern table to be referred to may be switched. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to select a dedicated variation pattern only during a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol changes four times) after winning a small hit.

  When the value of the prescribed count counter 203j becomes "0" while the status status ST3b is set, the status status ST3 is set again, and as the value of the prescribed count counter 203j, the status status ST3b is set. By configuring to set "35" which is subtracted by the value counted while is set, the period in which the time saving state is set as the gaming state (period until the special symbol changes 50 times) is set. It is possible to select and execute a dedicated fluctuation pattern for a predetermined period (period until the special symbol fluctuates 4 times) based on the small winnings won during the short state without changing.

  In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 129, although the value of the specified number counter 203 j is subtracted when the variation of the special symbol is executed, other configurations may be used. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a small hit described above as the lottery result of the special symbol, the value of the specified number counter 203 j may be subtracted based on the number of times the small hit is won. In this way, by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to (based on the number of times the special symbol lottery result has become the predetermined lottery result) based on the lottery result of the special symbol instead of the variation number of the special symbol Since the variation pattern table to be referred to can be changed at a timing different from the transition of the variation number of the special symbol in the state, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 105 (b). FIG. 105 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. 105 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, Normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time-shortening counter 203h, status status storage area 203i, specified number counter 203j, and other memory area 203z have.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter C1 and a first type counter The values of C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entry slot 64, and the acquired data includes four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when the lottery of the special symbol is performed, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a are executed Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 which are shifted (moved) to the area and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the original special symbol Aside from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3 and CS1. As described above, before the drawing of the original special symbol is performed, various kinds of information obtained when the original drawing is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning combination. The prediction of the information will be described later, when the lottery result of the special symbol is read ahead. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to save the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas (holding first area to holding 4 area). In the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning to the second entrance 140 is stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67, and the acquired data has four holding areas (the first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to a winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first area for holding to the execution area, the first area for holding becomes empty, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed to pack winning data stored in the hold area of 1 into the hold area with a smaller area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) (in the third symbol display device 81 It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of variation display to be performed up to 4 times. The initial value of the value N1 of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of holding balls of the special symbol 1 increases, One is added to the maximum value 4 (see S504 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 127).

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the second entrance 140 (a variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 ) Is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (waiting count) up to four times. The initial value of the value N2 of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set to zero as in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and the ball enters the second entrance ball hole 140 and the special ball is special Every time the number of balls held for symbol 2 increases, 1 is added to the maximum value 4 (see S510 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 127).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of variable display in special symbol 1) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of variable display in special symbol 2) are holding balls The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a few commands (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 127 and S505 and S511 in FIG. 130). Hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e are changed Command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 performs main control by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110 each time the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e are changed. It is possible to obtain the values of the special symbol 1 held by the device 110 and the number of balls in the variable display of the special symbol 2 itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b 1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b 2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise and the like Even if the number of balls stored in the actual variable display has deviated, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the holding symbol in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number notified by the display holding ball number command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a holding ball number of the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (waiting Is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S804 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

  If the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right normal entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. (S803 of FIG. 133: No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state (high probability state of the special symbol) of the special symbol, and if the value of the probability change flag 203g is in the on state, the pachinko machine 10 is Indicates that the special symbol is in a definite variation state. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203g is in the OFF state, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (the low probability state of the special symbol). The probability change flag 203g is set to be off at the initial state, and is set to on each time the "big hit A, B, D, F, G, I" end timing (see big hit control processing (see FIG. 137). ) S1212). On the other hand, the probability change flag 203g is turned off each time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off or the start of the jackpot is set (S218 in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127)).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) is executed by the MPU 201, a lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability change flag 203g is referred to, and if the state is ON, the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203g is off, the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 128).

  In this control example, the time saving state of the normal symbol is also set while the probability changing state is set as the gaming state. For this reason, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the time reduction counter 203h are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the time symbol is a normal symbol. Specifically, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, or if the probability change flag 203g is on (if it is a time reduction state or a probability change state), it is determined that the time symbol state of the normal symbol is The lottery of the normal symbols is performed based on the random number per random symbol table for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is off (if it is neither a time reduction state nor a probability change state), then based on the random number per symbol table for low probability time, A lottery is performed (see S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

  The hour reduction counter 203h is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction state of the normal symbol if the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more. If the value of the time counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203h is set to 0, and the main controller 110 wins the jackpot of the special symbol, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot (S1212 in FIG. 137). ). Specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit C", "100" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203h at the end of the big hit, and in the case of "big hit H, J", at the end of the big hit. "50" is set as the value of the hour / minute counter 203h, and "25" is set as the value of the hour / minute counter 203h at the end of the jackpot in the case of "big hit K".

  If the jackpot type is "big hit E", the value of the time counter 203h set at the end of the big hit is set to be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, and when the big hit is won If the gaming state is a short time state (low probability time short) or a definite change state (high probability time short), "100" is set as the value of the time reduction counter 203h, and the gaming state at the time of winning a big hit is normal state ( If the low probability time is not), then the value of the time reduction middle counter 203h is not set.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is finished until the value of the hour / hour counter 203h becomes 0 (S402 in FIG. 129). Further, even if the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 1 or more, when the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0 (S218 in FIG. 127).

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is to be made, the value of the time reduction counter 203h is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for a normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol table for high probability time. Is performed, and if the value of the time counter 203h is 0 and the probability change flag 203g described later is off, the drawing of the normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per symbol table for low probability. (See S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

  The status status storage area 203i is a storage area for storing information on the current status status (ST) set by the status transition table 202f. In this status status storage area 203i, when it is determined that the ending effect is the end timing in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: Yes), that is, the status status acquired at the end of the jackpot is It is newly set when it is stored and thereafter the value of the prescribed number counter 203 j which is subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuates in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) becomes 0 (S409: Yes) State status is stored.

  The prescribed number counter 203 j is a counter for measuring that the variation number of the special symbol has reached the prescribed number. The specified number counter 203 j corresponds to the specified number of times acquired at the end of the jackpot (S1211: Yes) when it is determined in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) that it is the ending timing of the ending effect. A value is set (S1213), and thereafter, it is subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuates in the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) (S407). When the value of the specified number counter 203 j changes from “1” to “0”, a new state status is set based on the contents defined in the corresponding state transition table 202 f.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119. FIG. FIG. 114 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the ROM 222 continues the variation pattern table 222a, the hold rank selection table 222b, the large hit medium effect selection table 222c, the number-of-additions selection table 222d, the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, and the like. It has at least a value main selection table 222f, a continuation value subselection table 222g, a final mode selection table 222h, an expectation degree selection table 222i, and an expectation degree presentation selection table 222j.

  The variation pattern table 222a is referred to select a detailed aspect of the variation presentation (variation display) based on the aspect of the rough variation presentation (variation display) notified from the main controller 110 by the variation pattern command. It is a table. The display variation pattern command is set based on the aspect of the variation effect selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S3812 in FIG. 147).

  The holding rank selection table 222b is a table for selecting a holding rank based on the holding status of the special symbol, and the jackpot effect is determined based on the selected holding rank. Here, the details of the pending rank selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 115 (b).

  FIG. 115 (b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the pending rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 115 (b), in this reserve rank selection table 222b, is whether the number of reserve balls of special symbol 2 (number of reserve balls of special symbol) and the prize balls of special symbol 2 have winning information indicating a big hit The pending rank is defined in association with the determination result of whether or not it is not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the effect to be performed during the jackpot based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol (special symbol 2) to be executed after the end of the jackpot.

  Here, in the present control example, in the case where both the holding ball of the special symbol 1 and the holding ball of the special symbol 2 are present, a process of preferentially digesting the holding ball of the special symbol 2 is executed (see FIG. 127) ) Is configured. That is, the timing at which the holding ball of the special symbol 1 is digested becomes indefinite.

  Therefore, in this control example, based on winning information included in the holding ball of the special symbol 2 which changes preferentially after the big hit end (the holding ball whose change order after the big hit end is fixed) and the holding ball of the special symbol 2 The reserve rank is selected to be selected, and the jackpot effect based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol executed after the jackpot end can be performed.

  In addition, when both the holding ball of the special symbol 1 and the holding ball of the special symbol 2 exist, the holding ball is placed in the held order (the order in which the first ball entry 64 and the second ball entry 140 are entered) If it is a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration (so-called, winning combination digestion) that digests the total number of holding balls, not the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 4) It may be configured to select a pending rank as a target. Thereby, it is possible to execute the jackpot effect based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot.

  The contents of the reserve rank selection table 222b will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 115 (b). The number of reserve balls of the special symbol (special symbol 2) is “1 to 3” and indicates a hit therein. If the winning information is "present", the holding rank "3" is selected, and if the winning information indicating the winning is "no", the holding rank "2" is selected.

  In addition, when the number of reservations for the special symbol (special symbol 2) is "4" and the winning information indicating "hit" is "there", the holding rank "4" is selected, and the winning information indicating the winning is "no In the case, the pending rank "1" is selected. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special symbol (special symbol 2) is "0", the holding rank "1" is selected without using the holding rank selection table 222b.

  The pending rank selected with reference to the pending rank selection table 222b is referred to in the jackpot middle effect selection table 222c described later. Next, with reference to FIG. 115 (c), the jackpot effect effect selection table 222c will be described. The jackpot effect selection table 222c is a table for selecting an effect to be executed during the jackpot, and receives an opening command in the hit related command processing (see FIG. 142) (S3301: Yes), the jackpot effect is displayed It is referred to when performing setting processing (see FIG. 143) (S3406).

  In the big hit medium effect selection table 222c, a large hit medium effect is defined in association with the hold rank selected in the hold rank selection table 222b and the first effect counter 223y1. Specifically, "normal winning effect" is defined in a range in which the pending rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "0 to 99". The “normal hit effect” is an effect (see FIG. 83 (b)) completed during one jackpot game, and an effect corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot to be executed is executed.

  In the range in which the holding rank is “1” and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is “100 to 149”, “effect for addition” is defined. As described above with reference to FIG. 83 (a), this "effect for addition" partially displays the number of round games to be executed in one jackpot (for example, in the case of 15 rounds, It is an effect of displaying the number of remaining rounds (the number of rounds for undisplayed) by the five rounds display) and the jackpot game proceeding.

  If the "superimposed effect" is executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot, and to be able to focus on the presentation during the jackpot game . Furthermore, in the “effect for addition” in the first control example, when a plurality of jackpots are won in a short period of time (the next jackpot is included in the winning information (hold symbol) acquired at the end of the previous jackpot) In the case where the number of rounds of the next jackpot is added to the number of rounds of the previous jackpot, it is configured to execute across multiple jackpots.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many times the jackpot was won while the “effect for addition” is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while enjoying how many rounds of display are displayed in total by the “effect for addition”.

  Furthermore, in the “effect for additional use” in this control example, the number of rounds executed in one jackpot can be divided and displayed, and the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpots can be added and displayed As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of jackpots won during the execution of one “superimposed effect” and the number of rounds executed in each jackpot. Thus, for example, when the number of rounds executed during one jackpot is 15 rounds, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change state is always set as the gaming state after the jackpot end, winning 15 jackpots is won The game can be played while making it difficult to understand and predicting which gaming state will be set after the big hit ends.

  In addition, in the case of using an effect that indicates the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot as an effect to be carried out during the jackpot, it is carried out during a single jackpot before the result of the effect is displayed. By grasping the number of rounds, it is possible to suppress a situation where the gaming state set after the big hit is specified and the rendering effect is reduced.

  Next, in the range of “0 to 49” in which the pending rank is “2” and the value of the first effect counter 223 y 1 is “a normal hit effect”, the value of the first effect counter 223 y 1 is In the range of "50 to 149", "effect for additional use" is defined. In the range of "0 to 49" in which the holding rank is "3" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "a normal hit effect", the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "50 to 50". In the range of 99 "," effect for addition "is defined, and in the range of" 100 to 149 "of the value of the first effect counter 223y1," effect for continuous hit "is defined.

  This “performing for continuous hit” is, as described above with reference to FIG. 84, an effect (in which the player is notified of winning of a plurality of jackpots when the first (first) jackpot game is started. See FIG. 84). Here, for example, a value (for example, 25) obtained by adding the number of rounds of the first jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) and the number of rounds of the second jackpot (for example, 10 rounds) to be executed here. An effect is performed in which the round) is notified when one jackpot game is started (the first round of the first jackpot is started).

  Thus, by executing the "performing for continuous hit", it is possible to early notify the player that a plurality of jackpots have been won, and perform the jackpot game in peace while giving the player a sense of superiority. You can

  In the range where the reserve rank is "4" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "0 to 49", "normal winning effect" is defined, and in the range of "50 to 149", "Continuous hit effect" is specified.

  As described above, in the present control example, different effects (big hit middle hit effects) are configured to be performed during a big hit based on the selected hold rank and the value of the acquired first effect counter 223y1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the effect to be executed during the big hit.

  Furthermore, since the timing for notifying the player that the next jackpot is included in the hold is made different by the jackpot effect selected, for example, the next jackpot timing at the end of the previous jackpot game. Like a pachinko machine that reports the presence or absence of a hold symbol winning in a big hit (presence or absence of a hold in a row), compared to when notifying the presence or absence of a hold in a row only at a specific timing, for the next big hit The jackpot game can be executed while giving expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since the content and the ratio of the jackpot effect selected to be selected according to the holding rank are made different, it is suppressed that the player has an excessive expectation, and the second ball entry during the jackpot game It is possible to execute an effect capable of taking into consideration the pre-reading result of the ball that has won in 140, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Specifically, if the pending rank is “1”, that is, if the number of pending symbols is the upper limit when the jackpot is won, and there is no winning information corresponding to the big hit in the pending symbols, the pending party reams It is defined that either the normal winning effect or the additional effect is selected, and the selection ratio is defined so that the normal winning effect can be easily selected. In other words, if the hold rank is “1” when the jackpot is won, the “normal hitting effect” or the current Any of the "superior effects" is performed, which makes it difficult to determine how many rounds the jackpot is.

  If the reserve rank is "2", that is, if the number of reserve symbols is not the upper limit at the time of jackpot win, and if there is no winning information corresponding to the big hit in the reserve symbols, the reserve rank is different from "1", There is a possibility of acquiring a new holding symbol during the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the pending Uranso is not decided at the time of the big hit, in order to cope with the case where the pending Uranso is decided during the big hit game, "for additional use" than when the pending rank is "1". The rate at which the effect is selected is set high. As a result, when the player holds a holding symbol to be won in the jackpot during the jackpot game, the player can be notified of that by the "effect for addition".

  If the reserve rank is "3", that is, the number of reserve symbols is not the upper limit at the time of jackpot winning, and if there is winning information corresponding to the big hit in the reserve symbol, that is, the reserve symbol is not the upper limit but in reserve. When a jackpot game is executed in a state in which the consecutive villas have been determined, in addition to the above-mentioned "performing for normal hit" and the "effect for addition", it is possible to early notify that the pending internal consecutive villas have been determined "Continuous hit for effect" is made selectable, and when the holding rank is "4", that is, when the holding symbol is the upper limit and there is the winning information corresponding to the big hit in the holding symbol, "the normal hitting It is specified that either “for presentation effect” or “consecutive hit presentation effect” is selected.

  That is, in the holding ranks "3" and "4" for which the holding inner ring is already fixed, the holding rank "3" is in a state capable of acquiring a new holding ball (winning information) during the jackpot game From the above, it is possible to make the player think that the player has won the next jackpot by holding balls (winning information) acquired during the jackpot game by making the “effect for addition” selectable.

  On the other hand, in the case of the reserve rank "4", a new reserve ball (winning information) can not be acquired during the big hit game, and the next big hit is not won during the big hit game, so "for additional use The effect is not selected, and the effect by the “continuous hit effect” is executed. By configuring in this way, it is determined whether or not the number of holding balls at the time of winning the jackpot is the upper limit, and in other cases, that is, it is possible to acquire a new holding ball during the jackpot game. By making the option of the effect performed during the jackpot different based on the basis, it can be suppressed that the effect having a sense of incongruity with the actual holding situation is performed.

  Note that, in this control example, "normal winning effect" is selected regardless of which pending rank is selected, so "normal hitting effect" is executed. Even if there is, you can leave the possibility of pending Uranso. Therefore, it is possible to execute the jackpot middle game while causing the player to expect the pending reservation to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116 (a), the addition number selection table 222d will be described. In this additional number selection table 222d, the final round number display mode Dm4 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when "superimposing effect" is selected as the effect to be executed during a big hit. It is a table for selecting the value (number of additional rounds) to be added to (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  The additional number selection table 222 d is a case where a new round number command is received (S 3304: Yes) in the winning related command processing (see FIG. 142), and the additional effect flag 223 h is set to ON ( It is referred to in a partial process of the processing during the additional effect (see FIG. 144) executed in S3306: Yes) (S3506). The selected number of additions is stored in the display round number storage area 223g in the area for storing the value to be added to the determined number of rounds display mode Dm4 (S3506).

  Then, the value displayed in the number of running rounds display mode Dm3 (the number of big hit rounds currently being executed) and the value displayed in the determined number of rounds display mode Dm4 (the number of rounds determined to be run) are If the numbers become the same, the number of additions stored in the display round number storage area 223g is displayed in the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), the additional number selection table 222d includes the number of remaining rounds of the big hit, the presence or absence of a winning (whether or not the pending inside row has been determined), and the second effect counter 223y2. The number of additions is specified in association with. Specifically, when the value of the remaining number of rounds is "5", "5" is selected as the number of additions regardless of the presence or absence of a winning and the value of the second effect counter 223y2.

  In the first control example, the number of rounds of all the jackpots (the number of rounds of jackpots for which the jackpot effect is executed) is set to a multiple of 5 (5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), and the remaining number of rounds is 5 In the case of rounds, it is necessary to display the number of remaining rounds in the determined number of rounds display mode Dm4 at this timing.

  If the value of the number of remaining rounds is "10, 15", the winning is "Available", and the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is "0 to 49", the number of additions "5" is "50 to 99". In the range, the number of additions “10” is specified, and the number of additions “15” is specified in the range of “100 to 149”, the value of the remaining number of rounds is “10, 15”, and the winning prize is “none”, the second The effect counter 223y2 has an add-on number "5" in the range of "0 to 49", an add-on number "15" in the range of "50-99", and an add-on number "100-149". 10 "is defined.

  As described above, in the case where the number of remaining rounds is the same (for example, “15”), it is defined that the ratio of the selected number of extras differs depending on the presence or absence of the winning. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict the presence or absence of the pending reservation on the basis of the value added during the “effect for addition”, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  When the value of the number of remaining rounds is “20”, the winning is “Available” and the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is “0 to 49”, the number of additions “5” is in the range of “50 to 99” The number of additions “10” is defined in the table, and the number of additions “15” is specified in the range of “100 to 149”. In the first control example, since the maximum value of the jackpot round number executed in one jackpot game is set to "15 rounds", the value of the remaining round number is "20", There is no chance that the win will be "none". Therefore, if the value of the remaining round number is "20" and the winning is "none", the additional number "-" is defined, and if it is selected, an error command is set. .

  Here, when the error command is set, that is, when the remaining number of rounds actually executed is different from the remaining number of rounds managed by the audio lamp control device 113, the effect for additional is continued. Since there is a high possibility that a presentation giving a sense of discomfort to the player is likely to be performed, the execution of the additional presentation is stopped, and based on the information received from the main control device 110 for the jackpot currently being executed. It may be configured to start the execution of the effect of displaying the number of rounds currently set to the jackpot currently being executed and the number of rounds currently being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the jackpot effect is continuously executed which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

  Next, the continuous effect mode selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 116 (b). FIG. 116 (b) schematically shows the content of the continuous effect mode selection table 222 e. In the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, among the positive effects of the pachinko machine 10 of this control example and the battle effects (see FIG. 90) executed during a short time, the effect mode (a final mode) until the battle reach (final mode) is executed. It is a table for selecting the continuation effect mode for setting the effect mode of the effect before battle, and is referred to in the continuation effect setting process (S3806) of the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) (S4005 of FIG. 149) And the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m (S4006). Then, based on the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m, the effect mode of the effect before battle is set.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the continuation effect mode selection table 222e, the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q, which will be described later, and the presence or absence of a winning prize (whether or not a pending internal link has been decided), Different continuous effect modes are defined in association with the value of the third effect counter 223y3.

  Here, the continuous effect setting counter 223 q is a counter for counting the number of times the continuous effect is set in one definite variation state or in a short time state, and the battle is performed by continuing the positive or negative state for a long time. It is used to determine that the effect has been performed multiple times. The detailed contents of the continuation effect setting counter 223q will be described later with reference to FIG. 114 (b).

  The contents defined in the continuation effect mode selection table 222e will be specifically described. In the case where the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q is "1" and the hit information (winning information) is set to "present". There is a continuation effect mode “1” defined in the range of “0 to 99” of the value of the third effect counter 223 y 3, and a continuation effect mode “2” defined in the range of “100 to 149”. There is.

  On the other hand, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223 q is “1” and the hold information (winning information) is “Yes”, the continuous effect mode “5” is displayed regardless of the value of the third effect counter 223 y 3. It is prescribed. The pattern corresponding to the continuous effect mode "5" is a case in which the first rotation in which the battle effect is executed first after the end of the jackpot is won for the jackpot, in order to provide the player with a special feeling. A dedicated continuous rendering mode is set.

  Next, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223 q is “2 to 5” and the hit information (winning information) is “none”, the value of the third effect counter 223 y 3 is in the range of “0 to 99”. The continuation effect mode “2” is defined, and the continuation effect mode “3” is defined in the range of “100 to 149”, and the third effect counter 223 y 3 when the hit information (presence information) is “Yes”. The continuous effect mode "2" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "1" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

  Then, when the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223 q is “6 or more” and the hit information (winning information) is “none”, the value of the third effect counter 223 y 3 is within the range of “0 to 99”. The mode "3" is defined, the continuation effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and the value of the third effect counter 223y3 when the hit information (presence information) is "present". The continuous effect mode "4" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

  In this control example, the production mode of the pre-battle production is set based on the continuous production mode selected with reference to the continuous production mode selection table 222e, and, for example, the pre-battle production (see FIG. 91). ), The type of the player's own character, the type and arrangement of the opponent characters displayed in a selectable manner, the type of the opponent character actually selected, the presentation mode related to the display mode during battle reach development, etc. Based on the continuous rendering mode, a rendering mode that is not related to the display mode at the time of battle reach development, such as the type and color of the background displayed during the pre-battle production and the attack pattern to the opponent character, is selected.

  For example, when the continuation effect mode “5” is selected (ie, when the first battle effect is executed, when there is a winning in the hold), the player is notified that the jackpot will be won soon. An effect mode for setting is set. Specifically, if there is winning information to be won in the jackpot in the hold is set as the character of the player itself or the other party as a character of the other party or a specific value as an initial value or an intermediate progress value of the HP value of the other party character (For example, "777" or "333") is displayed, or the same character is displayed as a combination of selectable opponent characters. By performing such a display, it is possible to indicate to the player that a jackpot will be won using a plurality of fluctuation periods.

  Next, the contents of the continuation value main selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 117 (a). FIG. 117 (a) schematically shows the content of the continuation value main selection table 222f. Here, the continuation value in the present control example will be described. In this control example, in a state where a gaming state (a probability change state or a time reduction state) advantageous to the player is set, a battle effect is executed as a continuous effect to indicate that the game state is continuing. Be done.

  In this battle rendition, a battle reach (final mode) rendition for indicating whether or not the advantageous gaming state is ended, and a pre-battle rendition which is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed are executed. As a result of the battle reach effect, when the advantageous gaming state does not end, the pre-battle effect is executed again.

  During the pre-battle production, as described above with reference to FIG. 92, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect of decreasing the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent. Based on the continuation value decreased during the pre-battle presentation, the battle reach presentation mode (HP (continuation value) of the opponent at the start of the battle reach) is determined.

  In the first control example, the continuation value to be decreased during this pre-battle production is obtained by adding up the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f and the value selected by the continuation value subselection table 222g. It is configured to be calculated. By setting the continuation value to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining a plurality of values in this manner, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the case of increasing the variation of the continuation value.

  Referring back to FIG. 117 (a), the description will be continued. In the continuation value main selection table 222f, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is displayed as a result of determining the number of remaining variations until the variation of the special symbol winning in the big hit is executed. The continuity value to be selected in association with the continuity value is defined.

  That is, in the continuation value main selection table 222f, it is specified that the continuation value is selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort when executing the battle reach effect by taking over the HP (continuation value) of the opponent that is changed during the pre-battle effect.

  Here, if the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f are set more complicated to enrich the variation display of the continuous value executed during the pre-battle production, for example, one hundred in this control example The management of the continuation value is performed in units of, but the management of the continuation value is performed in units (ten units) smaller than that, or the lottery result of the special symbol is further subdivided, and each subdivided lottery result is In the case where the continuation value is defined in association with one another, there is a problem that the processing load for selecting the continuation value becomes high. However, it is necessary to increase the variation display of the continuation value in order to enhance the staging effect of the pre-battle presentation.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the continuation value is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value main selection table 222g which is an independent table from the continuation value main selection table 222f is used. The continuation value selected in the selection table 222 f is further varied. Thereby, the variation of the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

  Further, although the details will be described later, in the first control example, the continuation value is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the difference value of the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f. It is configured that the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) for reducing (HP value) is set. Then, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value subselection table 222g is displayed as a continuation value after reduction (after updating) It is configured as follows.

  Then, the attack effect managed with the value (continuity value) selected with reference to the continuity value main selection table 222f, and the continuity value set with reference to the continuity value main selection table 222f and the continuity value subselection table 222g The range of values to be selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is set so that there is no difference with the difference value of the HP value).

  By configuring in this manner, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) for reducing the continuation value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is selected in the continuation value main selection table 222 f Even if management is performed using only rough continuation values, effects can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Specifically, the attack effect set based on the difference value of the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222 f is “weak attack” if the difference value is “0 to 200” (FIG. 92 (FIG. 92) (Refer to (a)), if it is "201 to 400", it is set so that the effect corresponding to "strong attack (refer to FIG. 92 (b))" will be executed if it is "middle attack" and if "401 or more". Ru.

  Thereby, for example, although the difference value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is the range (for example, 300) of the "middle attack", the difference value of the displayed continuation value is "weak" It becomes a range (for example, 200) of "attack", and it can suppress that the range of the continuation value based on the lottery of a special symbol differs from the range of the continuation value actually displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), in the continuation value main selection table 222f, the number of remaining fluctuations up to the hit fluctuation and the previously selected continuation value (of the currently displayed continuation values, the continuation value main selection table 222f The continuity value is defined in association with the value selected in (1). Specifically, if the value of the remaining fluctuation counter 222t is "3" and the previously selected continuation value is "1000", "800" is selected, and if "900", "700" is selected. As described above, a value having a difference value of "200" is selected. Hereinafter, similarly, when the continuation value selected last time is “400” to “800”, values for which the difference value is “200” are respectively selected. If the previously selected continuation value is "300", "200" is selected (difference value "100"), and if the previously selected continuation value is "100" or "200", the difference value is "0." A value of 0 "is selected.

  Next, when the value of the remaining fluctuation counter 222t is "2", if the continuation value selected last time is "300" to "700", the value for which the difference value is "100" is respectively selected, and the last time When the selected continuation value is "100" or "200", a value for which the difference value is "0" is selected. When the value of the remaining fluctuation counter 222 t is “1”, that is, when the next fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, the difference value is “200” when the continuation value selected last time is “300” to “700”. If the value selected is and the previously selected value is "200", the value ("200") at which the difference value is "0" is selected, and if the previously selected value is "100" The value “0” is selected so that the difference value is “100”.

  As described above, in the present control example, among the continuation values (HP values) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the present control example, the rough ((HP value) Since it is configured to select the value of one hundred) and the effect mode of the attack effect is set based on the difference value, the continuation value displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (HP value), that is, a value to be referred to rather than setting an effect mode of the attack presentation based on the continuation value (HP value) selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value subselection table 222g The pattern can be reduced, and the processing load when setting an effect can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 used as the continuation value subselection table 222g will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 (b) and (c). FIG. 117 (b) schematically shows the contents of the first continuation value subselection table 222g1, and FIG. 117 (c) schematically shows the contents of the second continuation value subselection table 222g2. FIG.

  As described above, the continuation value subselection table 222g is used to increase the variable pattern of the continuation value during the continuation effect, and is referred to after the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. Table. In this control example, the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is added by adding the value selected in the continuation value subselection table 222g to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f. (Continuation value on presentation) is set.

  In this control example, it is determined whether or not the continuation value selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or less, and different continuation value subselection tables 222g are selected based on the determination result. When the continuation value selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200), the first continuation value sub shown in FIG. 117 (b) is selected. The selection table 222g1 is referred to, and if it is smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 shown in FIG. 117 (c) is referred to.

  In the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117 (b), a continuation value is defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuation value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 79", the continuation value "-10" is selected, In the range of "80 to 119", the continuation value "-20" is selected, and in the range of "120 to 149", the continuation value "+20" is selected.

  Thus, the continuation value selected using the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 is added to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f to increase the type of the continuation value on the display. Can. Specifically, referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f, when decreasing (updating) the continuation value from "1000" to "800", the selected continuation value ("800") is a predetermined value For example, since it is 200) or more, the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 is referred to. When the value of "+20" is selected in the first continuation value sub selection table 222g1, "820" is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as a continuation value (HP value) ( See FIG. 92 (a)). On the other hand, when the value "-20" is selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, "780" is displayed as the continuation value (HP value).

  Thus, the continuation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 by adding the value selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g to the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f Variations of values (HP values) can be increased.

  Here, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the continuation value on the display is referred to with reference to the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 described above. When the HP value is set, the value “+20” is selected in the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 in a state where “0” is selected as the continuation value in the continuation value main selection table 222f. In contrast to the attack effect in which the HP value of the opponent character is set to "0" as the attack effect, there is a problem that the continuation value (HP value) on the display is "20".

  Therefore, in the present control example, it is determined whether or not the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200), and when it is determined that it is less than or equal to the predetermined value The sub selection table 222g2 is referred to. In the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2, as shown in FIG. 117 (c), the range of "-20" to "0" is defined as the value to be selected.

  In the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117 (b), a continuation value is defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, when the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 is in the range of "0 to 39", the continuation value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 99", the continuation value "-5" is selected, In the range of "100 to 149", the continuation value "-10" is selected.

  Here, the difference between the above-described first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 will be described. The first continuation value subselection table 222g1 has a value ("+20") to which the continuation value (e.g., 500) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is added as a selectable value ("+20") and a value to be subtracted ("- Both 10 "and" -20 "are configured to be selectable. On the other hand, the second continuation value sub selection table 222 g 2 is a value (“−5”, “−10”) by which the continuation value (for example, 100) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222 f is subtracted as a selectable value. ) Is configured to be selected only.

  By configuring in this way, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the range of the displayed continuation value (HP value) should be set widely. If the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set in a range that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, variations of the effect can be increased within a range not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In addition to the contents of the first control example described above, storage means for storing the value selected by the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and whether the value stored in the storage means is a positive value or a negative value Determining means for determining a value to be selected using the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 based on the determination result of the determination means; May be provided. Thus, it is possible to suppress that the value selected by the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is biased in the positive direction or the negative direction.

  As described above, in the first control example, the configuration for selecting the attack presentation mode based on the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is used, but another configuration may be used. For example, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the continuation value (HP value) actually displayed on the display screen and the continuation value main selection table 222f And calculation means for calculating a difference value between the continuation value (HP value) set based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g and selection for selecting an attack presentation mode based on the difference value calculated by the calculation means A configuration using means may be used.

  In the first control example, although the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to have the continuation value sub selection table 222g, other configurations may be used. For example, in the voice lamp control device 113, the continuation value main selection table Alternatively, only the 222 f may be provided, and the continuation value sub selection table 222 g may be provided on the display control device 114 side, or the display control device 114 may be configured to perform a process of selecting an attack presentation mode. By configuring in this manner, the voice lamp control device 113 may perform only update management of the continuation value using the continuation value main selection table 222 f, and the processing load can be further reduced.

  In the first control example, the continuation value main selection table 222f or the continuation value subselection table 222g described above is executed when there is winning information corresponding to a big hit as a pre-reading result of the reserved symbol. In addition to the setting, that is, even when there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot as a pre-reading result of the reserved symbol, a process of changing the continuation value is performed. Although detailed description is omitted for the continuation value variable processing on this effect, it is variable depending on the period in which the continuation effect (pre-battle effect) is continuously executed or the type of the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 The later continuation value is configured to be selected.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to frequently perform the effect of decreasing the continuation value while the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is being executed, and to suppress the player from being bored with the content of the effect can do.

  Further, in the first control example, continuous values of four bodies (A to D) are displayed as opponent candidates that can be played during battle reach as continuous effects (effect before battle) (see FIG. 91A). For example, even if the continuation value (HP) of a specific opponent is greatly reduced in a presentation effect (pre battle presentation), the continuation presentation (pre battle presentation) is continued by selecting another opponent. Can be run.

  By configuring in this manner, only the continuation value continues to decrease when the continuation effect (pre-battle effect) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when not winning in a probability change). It can suppress that the production mode of battle reach production becomes scarce.

  Further, in the first control example, in order to suppress the continuation of the effects before the battle for a long time, even if the special symbol is not won in the winning, a predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol is 10 The battle reach is configured to be executed when the pre-battle rendition continues while fluctuating more than the number of times and the case of 60 seconds outlier variation pattern as the lottery result of the special symbol is satisfied). As a result of the above, when the win is not won, the continuous effect (second time) is configured to be executed again, and the continuous value is initialized. As a result, when the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is executed over a long period of time (for example, when not winning in a hit during a definite change), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It can suppress that the production mode of battle reach production becomes scarce.

  Next, the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (a). The final mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting a production mode of battle reach to be executed during the above-described continuous production, and the fifth graphic is a result of judging whether or not special symbol variation is executed for which battle reach is performed. A different final mode is defined in association with the value of the counter 223y5.

  Specifically, when the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the gaming state (probable change state or time saving state) advantageous to the player is given after the big hit, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is The final aspect "1" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", the final aspect "2" in the range of "50 to 129", and the final aspect "3" in the range of "130 to 149".

  When the success or failure judgment result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the gaming state advantageous to the player is not given after the big hit, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is in the range of "0 to 129" and the final aspect "4". However, if the final aspect “5” is defined in the range of “130 to 149” and the result of the determination of the special symbol is out, the value of the fifth effect counter 223 y 5 is in the range of “0 to 129”. The final aspect "7" is defined in the range of "130" to "6" and "130".

  In addition, in the case of the special figure fluctuation where the success / failure judgment result of the special symbol is out and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the final aspect “4” is in the range of “0 to 129” of the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5, The final aspect “5” is defined in the range of “130 to 149”.

  Here, the contents of the effects of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (b). FIG. 118 (b) is a diagram for explaining the contents of the effect of each final mode selected using the final mode selection table 222 h. In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. 96 as the final aspect (battle reach) of the battle effect, an effect is executed in which either the main character or the other character attacks three times in total Different attack patterns are selected according to the selected final aspect.

  Specifically, in the final modes “1” to “3”, an attack pattern in which a winning battle in which the character of the main character wins is executed is selected, and in the case of the final mode “1”, all three chances of attack The attack pattern in which the character of the main character attacks in the attack pattern is selected in the case of the final mode "2", the main character attacks at the first and third attack opportunities, and the other character attacks at the second attack opportunity The attack pattern to be performed is selected. In the case of the final mode “3”, after the opponent character attacks at all of the three attack opportunities, an attack pattern (resurrection effect (see FIG. 96)) is selected in which the main character revives and defeats the opponent character. Be done.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the final mode selection table 222h is provided for each fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation effect to be executed, for example, three times in the fluctuation pattern of 60 seconds of fluctuation time The final aspect (final aspects “1” and “2”) completed by the attack is easily selected and defined, and in the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds, the resurrection effect is easily selected and defined. Here, in the resurrection effect in which the fluctuation time is executed with the fluctuation pattern of 90 seconds, the same as the effect data of the fluctuation pattern with the fluctuation time of 60 seconds (final aspect “5”) as the effect data of the first three attacks. Is used. As a result, sharing of the effect data is attempted to reduce the data capacity, and the first half of the effect where the winning battle is executed (the first half of the final aspect “3”) and the effect where the defeat battle is executed (the final aspect “5 By executing the same effect with “)”, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the player is grasped the effect result during the effect.

  Referring back to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the final modes “4” and “5”, an attack pattern in which a defeat battle in which the character of the main character is defeated is executed is selected. In this defeat battle, an effect is executed in which the HP gauge Dm 21 indicating the continuation value (HP) of the main character finally becomes 0 as a result of battle reach. In the case of the final aspect "4", an attack pattern in which the character of the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the other character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities is selected, and the final aspect "5" In the case of, an attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks is selected at all of the three attack opportunities. Thus, in the attack pattern of the defeat battle set in the present control example, until the last attack (third attack) is executed, the other battles (winning battle, drawn battle to be described later) are performed. Since the same effect is executed, it is possible to reliably suppress a situation in which the effect of the effect is grasped in the middle of the effect for the player.

  In the final modes “6” and “7”, an attack pattern is selected in which a drawn battle is executed in which neither the HP gauge Dm 21 indicating the continuation value of the main character nor the HP gauge Dm 22 indicating the continuation value of the other character becomes zero. When this draw battle is executed, battle reach ends and the next pre-battle rendering is executed. In the case of the final mode "6", an attack pattern in which the character of the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the other character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities is selected, and the final mode "7" In the case of, an attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks is selected at all of the three attack opportunities. As described above, in the attack pattern of the draw battle set in the present control example, the same effect as the other battle (defeated battle) is executed as the attack pattern, and therefore not only the attack pattern for the player, It can be made to pay attention to the decrease condition of HP gauge, and it can control certainly the situation where a presentation result is grasped in the middle of presentation.

  In this control example, as an attack pattern executed during a draw battle, an effect in which the same attack pattern as the defeat battle is executed is selected, but the same as the other battles (win battle). You may comprise so that the presentation in which an attack pattern is performed may be selected. Thereby, when the third battle is executed, the attack pattern executed at each attack opportunity (first to third attack opportunity) causes either the current battle reach to be a winning battle or a drawn battle (i.e. The player can be made to grasp that the battle is not defeated), and the effect (battle reach) can be seen without worrying that the gaming state shifts to the normal state.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 (b). FIG. 114 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a state storage area 223e, a big hit information storage area 223f, and a display round number storage Area 223g, addition effect flag 223h, display extension flag 223i, variation count counter 223j, elapsed time counter 223k, continuation effect mode storage area 223m, continuation value storage area 223n, duration counter 223p, continuation The effect setting counter 223 q, the continuation effect flag 223 r, the precursor setting flag 223 t, the effect counter group 223 y, and other memory areas 223 z are provided at least.

  The prize information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas (first to fourth areas) corresponding to the special symbol 1, and four areas (first to fourth areas corresponding to the special symbol 2). And the winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning combination for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 is detected in the main control unit 110, the first collision random number counter C1 acquired according to the starting entry is detected. The various information obtained when the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed from the respective values of the first hit type counter C2 and the change type counter CS1 (hit, big hit type in the case of big hit, change pattern Is predicted (estimated) in the main control unit 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (the jackpot type in the case of a hit or a big hit, a fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, Are stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the four areas (first area to ...) corresponding to the type (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140) of the entrance where the extracted winning information has detected entry. Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  In the first control example, the main control unit 110 determines various information (a big hit type in the case of a hit or a big hit, a variation pattern) obtained when a lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed. Although the configuration for setting the winning information command and notifying the sound lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

  For example, when a starting winning combination occurs, various information which is predicted corresponding to the starting winning combination is already stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. In addition to the setting means for setting a prize information command, and when the prize information command is received, it is included in various information (prize information) already stored in the prize information storage area 223a and the received prize information command It is good also as composition provided with a judgment means which judges whether various information (winning information) agrees. As a result, it is possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is appropriately stored.

  Also, in the first control example, a winning information command is set when a new start winning occurs, and the configuration is used to notify the voice lamp control device 113, but the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). For example, storage means for temporarily storing the winning information command is provided, and in addition to the start winning timing, (For example, every 5 seconds), when gaming conditions are variable (for example, when the gaming state shifts from the short-time state to the normal state, or when the big hit game starts or ends), or the variation start of the special symbol (or At the time of stop), a configuration may be used to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of a winning information command stored in the storage means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called, pre-reading effect) using the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a.

  In this control example, setting of a presentation mode such as a jackpot effect, a battle effect, an expectation degree display effect, or the like is executed as a preread effect based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. As described above, by executing various effects (pre-reading effects) based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the player can be notified to each holding ball before the variable display is started. We can have a sense of expectation to be a big hit. In addition, it is also possible to perform long-term effects using a plurality of variable display periods.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b counts the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 for counting the holding ball number of the special symbol 1 and the holding ball number of the special symbol 2 And has a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b 2 for the value of each counter according to the timing when the number of holding balls increases or decreases, for example, when a winning information command is received or when a variation pattern command is received. Update

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b 1 is a variation display of the special symbol 1 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the special symbol 1 reserved in the main control device 110 It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation production of up to 4 times for every kind of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b 2 is a variation display of the special symbol 2 performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is held in the main control device 110 It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of standby times) of the fluctuation effect of special symbol 2 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol.

  As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 You can not get the value. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 The number of holding balls is to be managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the start winning combination is detected and the number of holding balls in the variable display is added, or in main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of held balls is subtracted When being, it sends to the voice lamp control device 113 a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball reception is used from the holding ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 (see S3208 in FIG. 140). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b 1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b 2 according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, The values can be updated while being synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b 1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b 2 are used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b 1 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b 2 in response to the reception of the holding ball number command. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b after storing, the display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b 1 of the audio lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 holding The drawing of the image is controlled to display the number-of-holding balls number pattern corresponding to the value of the number-of-balls counter 223 b 2 in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 is the main While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Accordingly, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol 1 or the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol 2 transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S3202 in FIG. 140), and the third symbol display device It is turned off when the setting of the variable display at 81 is made (see S3802 in FIG. 147). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 140), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set Is turned off (see S3814 in FIG. 147). When the type-of-stop selection flag 223d is turned on, the type of stop is determined based on the type of stop (or the type of jackpot in the case of jackpot) extracted from the received command for stop type.

  The jackpot information storage area 223f is an area for storing information on the jackpot to be executed, and the main controller It is an area for storing when received from 110. In this control example, the aspect of the effect to be executed during the jackpot is set based on the information stored in the jackpot information storage area 223f.

  The display round number storage area 223 g is an area for storing information on the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot. In the present control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 85 (a), the number-of-roundings display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds being executed when the effect for superimposition is executed during the jackpot, and internally The main display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information on the number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g and the number of decided rounds display mode Dm4 in which the set number of rounds is partially determined and displayed It is configured to be displayed on Dm.

  In the display round number storage area 223g, 0 is stored as an initial value, and the round number command among the win related commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S3304 in FIG. 142: Yes), and the additional effect flag In the processing during addition effect (see FIG. 143) executed when 223h is set to ON (S3306 in FIG. 142), internally set with reference to the stored value (the number of rounds) The difference between the determined number of rounds and the number of determined rounds is calculated, and the value (number of rounds) of the number of determined rounds newly determined based on the difference value is stored.

  When the number of rounds is a predetermined number of rounds (number of rounds n) in the additional display processing (see FIG. 145), the number of rounds stored here is an additional display for display so as to be displayed as the finalized round number display mode Dm4 It is used when setting a display command (see S3604 in FIG. 145). Then, when the effect for addition is finished, the stored value is initialized.

  Thus, in the present control example, the processing during addition effect (see FIG. 144) is executed when a new round is started, and the number of confirmed rounds stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223g is updated to a predetermined number. When a round (a multiple of 5 in this control example) is started, display processing for updating the display mode of the finalized round number display mode Dm 4 is executed. Therefore, since the determined number of rounds is updated constantly (every round), a condition for updating the display mode of the determined number of rounds display mode Dm4 is added or the display of the decided round number display mode Dm4 is performed based on the player's operation. By selecting whether or not to update the mode, even when the display timing of the number of decided rounds is changed, it is possible to correspond surely.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, when the additional prize generated during the jackpot is won by the jackpot, the number of rounds is identified in advance based on the prize information corresponding to the additional prize, and the preliminary identification result indicates The number of display rounds is configured to be set by the total number of rounds including the number of rounds.

  The additional effect flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the additional effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the additional effect is selected as the jackpot effect. This additional effect flag 223h is set to ON when the additional effect for readout is read out as a large hit during effect setting process (see FIG. 143) (see S3408 in FIG. 143), and the win related command process (FIG. 142) When the round number command is received in (1) (S3304 in FIG. 142), the setting state is determined (S3306 in FIG. 142). Then, when it is determined that there is no on-hold on-hold unit (S3703 in FIG. 146: No), the jackpot is set to off in the jackpot post-effect setting process (see FIG. 146).

  The display extension flag 223i is a flag for indicating a state in which the effect during the big hit (the ending display of the big hit) is extended and displayed during the variation period of the special symbol executed after the big hit, and the effect during the big hit It is set to ON when extending and displaying the ending display of the jackpot. If a new jackpot is won while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, that is, while executing a jackpot effect (displaying a jackpot ending), information on the jackpot (acquired ball The number and the number of rounds are displayed in the display mode continued from the information on the previous jackpot (the number of obtained balls and the number of rounds).

  This display extension flag 223i is a jackpot effect executed this time in the jackpot after effect setting process (see FIG. 146), when the jackpot effect executed this time is a jackpot effect, and the gaming state after the jackpot is a definite change state or a time saving state S3709 of FIG. 146: Yes), it is set to on (S3710 of FIG. 146). Then, when the special symbol changes four times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3904 in FIG. 148: Yes), or when the elapsed time becomes 4 seconds (S5103 in FIG. 154: Yes) , And off (S3905 in FIG. 148, S5104 in FIG. 154).

  As described above, in this control example, since the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the variation number of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (four times), or a predetermined time (four seconds) elapses. Is set to be off when the above is established. This is a period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON is a period during which the jackpot effect is continuously executed, and when the jackpot is won during that period, the jackpot effect is displayed. It is because it is a period which continues (it carries out the last big hit production continuously).

  Explaining in detail, when only setting that the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) is set as a condition to set the display extension flag 223i off, the special symbol is suspended at the jackpot end time The value of the number of balls (the sum of the number of balls reserved for special symbol 1 and the number of balls reserved for special symbol 2) is less than the predetermined number of times (4 times) described above, and the player interrupts the ball launch after the big hit If it does, the game will be interrupted without the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol reaching the predetermined number of times (4 times) after the big hit ends, there is a possibility that the situation where the production during the big hit continues for a long time may occur. is there. Furthermore, if the player has stopped playing the game in such a state, the effect during the jackpot will be displayed despite the fact that no one is playing a game, so a new player is There is a problem that the player is hesitated to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced.

  Therefore, in this control example, in addition to the number of times of variation of the special symbol, time lapse (4 seconds) is also provided as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to OFF. As a result, it is possible to set a period in which the jackpot effect is continuously displayed, and a period in which the effects across a plurality of jackpots can be performed can be set as a limited period. Thus, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with enthusiasm, in order to win the jackpot in the limited period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

  The variation number counter 223 j is a counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol in a period in which the display extension flag 223 i is set to ON. The variation count counter 223 j executes the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) with the display extension flag 223 i set to ON, and “5” when the extension management process (see FIG. 148) is executed. Value is set (see S3902 in FIG. 148).

  The elapsed time counter 223k counts an elapsed time in a period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. When the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000 (equivalent to 4 seconds)" as the counter value (see FIG. 146). The counter value is decremented by one each time the effect updating process (S3112) of the main process (see FIG. 139) of the audio lamp control device 113 executed every one millisecond is executed (see S3711) (FIG. 154). See S5102).

  Then, in the effect update process (see FIG. 154), when the count value of the elapsed time counter 223k becomes "0", the display extension flag 223i is set to off (see S5104 in FIG. 154). By configuring in this way, when the elapsed time after the big hit ends the predetermined time (4 seconds), it is possible to end the effect during the big hit and execute the normal effect corresponding to each gaming state The player can play a game eagerly to win a jackpot in a limited period.

  In this control example, "4000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k, but the time to be set is not limited to this, for example, even if it is 3 seconds Alternatively, each time the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, one of a plurality of times may be selected, and the period may be set. Moreover, as a value set to the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k, it is good to set it longer than the total of the fluctuation period for 4 rotations of the special symbol 2 performed after the big hit end. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the variation for the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 that is preferentially digested during the jackpot, while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

  The continuous effect mode storage area 223 m is a storage area for storing the continuous effect mode selected when the continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed when the display extension flag 223i is set to off in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147), and it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state or the probability changing state. In the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), the continuous effect mode selected by the continuous effect mode selection table 222e is stored, and until the Qing-Autumn mode is selected by the final mode selection table (battle reach is executed Effect) (pre-battle effect effect) corresponding to the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223 m.

  The continuation value storage area 223n is a storage area for storing the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f among the continuation values (HP values) which are increased or decreased during the continuation effect executed in the present control example. The updating (increase / decrease) processing of the continuation value (HP value) during the continuation effect is executed based on the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223 n.

  In this control example, the continuation value (HP value) is roughly selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the detailed value of the continuation value (HP value) is selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222g. By configuring as above, the increase / decrease pattern of the continuation value displayed during the continuation effect is increased, but the management of the continuation value (HP value) in the audio lamp control device 113 is the continuation value main selection table 222f. Since the system is configured to execute only with the continuation value selected based on the type of the continuation value (HP value) to be managed, the kind of the continuation value (HP value) displayed during the continuation effect Can be reduced.

  The continuation period counter 223p is a counter for measuring a period during which the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, in order to prevent the final aspect (battle reach) from being frequently executed in the continuation effect. , Is a counter used.

  The duration counter 223p is continued each time the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed in a state where the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, that is, whenever the variation of the special symbol is executed. One is added in the effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4009 in FIG. 149). Then, in the continuation effect setting process (see FIG. 149), when it is determined that the counter value is less than “6” (S4003 in FIG. 149: No), the final mode (battle reach) is not selected. Configured. By configuring in this way, the selection of the final aspect (battle reach) is suppressed until the value of the duration counter is 6 or more, that is, until the variation of the special symbol is performed six times after the pre-battle rendering is performed. Be done.

  The continuation effect setting counter 223 q is a counter for measuring the number of times that the battle effect is repeatedly set (the number of times the continuation effect flag 223 r is set to ON) while the gaming state is set to the definite change state or the time reduction state. Yes, and different continuous effect modes are set to be easily selected based on the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223 q. Thereby, in the case where the continuous effect is executed for a long time and the battle effect is repeatedly set, it can be suppressed that the battle effect of the same mode is frequently executed. Also, by setting the continuation effect mode that is executed only when the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223 q is a specific value (for example, 1), it is possible to provide the player with an effect with a scarcity value.

  The continuation effect setting counter 223 q is referred to when selecting a new continuation effect mode in the continuation effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4005 in FIG. 149), and is incremented by one when the continuation effect mode is selected. (See S4007 in FIG. 149). Then, when the continuation effect is finished (when the gaming state shifts to the normal state, or when the jackpot is won), the counter value is cleared to zero.

  The continuation effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the continuation effect mode is selected (the pre-battle effect is being executed) during the execution of the continuation effect, and when the continuation effect mode is selected. Set to on. While the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON, the pre-battle effect is executed in the same continuous effect mode without selecting a new continuous effect mode.

  The continuation effect flag 223r is initially set to off when the continuation effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed, and is set to on when the continuation effect mode is selected (see S4008 in FIG. 149). While it is set to ON, the processing for selecting the continuous rendering mode is skipped (S4004 in FIG. 149: Yes). Then, when the final mode is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (that is, when the battle reach is selected and the pre-battle effect is finished), it is set to OFF (see FIG. 149: S4015).

  The precursor setting flag 223t is a flag that is used when the countdown effect is executed across a plurality of changes (see FIG. 101), and is set to ON when the fluctuation display changes during the precursor effect period. When the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON, in the case of setting a new change effect in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) executed in the change display setting process (see FIG. 147), It is controlled such that the antecedent effect of the front fluctuation is continuously executed from the start of the fluctuation.

  This precursor setting flag 223t has a countdown effect having a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) as prefetching information in the winning information command process (see FIG. 141) (see S3232 and S3233 in FIG. 141), and the variation currently being executed. If it is determined that the remaining fluctuation period of display is 10 seconds or more (S3234 in FIG. 141: Yes), it is set to ON (see S3236 in FIG. 141).

  Then, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), it is referred to when setting the effect mode (see S4301 in FIG. 152), and it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233 m is set on in the process of S4301. In the plural variation effect setting process (refer to FIG. 153) to be executed, the effect mode is set and then set to OFF (refer to S4405 in FIG. 153).

  The effect counter group 223y is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter group 223 y has at least a first effect counter 223 y 1 to a sixth effect counter 223 y 6, and any counter is an IC for random number generation electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113. A random value in the range of 0 to 198 obtained from (not shown) is stored. The operation clock (operation frequency) of the IC for random number generation is an IC operable with an operation clock (for example, 1 MHz) to such an extent that determination can be performed by updating different random numbers to at least each of the effect counters. Is adopted. The value of the effect counter group 223y is used when performing various determinations to be executed by the sound lamp control device 113, such as whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be performed, or the notice type of the normal depression effect is determined.

  The other memory area 223z is provided with flags other than the above flags for setting areas and states for storing data other than the above data, and temporarily stores other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. It is an area for memorizing. Specifically, for example, a power-off flag used to determine whether or not there is a momentary power failure is provided. The power-off flag receives a power-off command from the main control unit 110, and is set to ON before the power-off process is performed. After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if the power-off flag is on (3008 in FIG. 138: Yes) in the startup processing (see FIG. 138) of the audio lamp control device 113, a predetermined time (100) is set after the power-off flag is set to on. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the millisecond), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information which is incomplete because only a part of the information is erased) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S3009 in FIG. 138). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, generally, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is configured to read the control program directly from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes because the speed associated with the reading is slow, the instruction for the control program can be read. It sometimes takes time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory 234a is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily enlarged. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is a NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 125) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance is started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image which displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by fluctuation effect when entry to the mouth 140 is detected. The power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 155).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to generate the main power-on time shown in FIG. 121 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 22 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on as shown in Fig. 22 (c), The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 121 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when it is “big hit of the special symbol”, and it is shown in FIG. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player starts the game, and the ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 In the case where the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the images shown in FIGS. 121 (b) and (c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 1640 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display It can be displayed on 81 immediately.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can confirm the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81. Can. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation is stopped while being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. it can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the range of the rear surface image and the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c in the rear surface image will be described. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the ranges of four types of back images and the back images stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. FIG. 122 (b) is shown for the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” while the back surface A corresponds to the “sand beach stage”.

  As the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, as shown in FIG. 122, images longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  In each of the images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “image for scrolling”), the images are configured such that the back surface image is continuous at the position a and the position c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the change of the back surface type is determined, and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the position between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 122 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the "sand beach stage" which is the initial stage, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sand beach stage" By making all the data resident in the rear image area 235 c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is a partial area of the back surface, that is, only image data corresponding to an image between position a and position b It is stored in the rear image area 235 c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to change the back image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but if doing so, the resident video RAM 235 As a very large amount of RAM must be used, this may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range in FIG. 122 (a), (b) Image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b)) including its initial position, the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 is determined when the change of the stage is determined by the lottery at the start of the change. Using the image data resident in the image area 235c, immediately display the initial position of the back surface B on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, as for the back surface B, only the image data corresponding to the partial image range is stored, so that the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  In the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 120) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described nine main symbols (see FIG. 81 (b)) with the numerals "0" to "9" being the third symbol are resident Ru. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 occurs, in the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the change effect is not immediately started at 81.

  In the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to sub-symbols not numbered are also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a sub-symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "woman" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are resident in the character pattern area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but the character of the resident video RAM 235 The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading out the image data previously resident in the symbol area 235e. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a total value storage area 233k, and a precursor effect flag 233m.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a large hit, middle effect, ending effect, demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  In this control example, the display type variation pattern command corresponding to the period during which the voice lamp control device 113 performs one special symbol variation (variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main control device 110) Although the command is output along with the command, and the effect mode corresponding to each command received by the display control unit 114 is set, other configurations may be used, for example, the sound lamp control unit 113 The display control device 114 divides the display change pattern command corresponding to one special symbol change period (for example, 60 seconds) into a plurality of parts (for example, the first half change pattern (30 seconds) and the second half change pattern (30 seconds) In this configuration, the game content generated during the period in which the first half fluctuation pattern is being executed (for example, That the operation with respect to the frame button 22, it is possible to set the display variation pattern command corresponding to the second half of the variation pattern based on the acquisition of a new ball entrance information).

  In addition, when the additional display variation pattern command is received after outputting the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period of one special symbol variation by using the above-described configuration, the additional display variation There is no need to perform processing for rewriting the contents of rendering in response to the pattern command, and the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to a period (for example, 60 seconds) corresponding to one special symbol variation (for example, the first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half When a fluctuation pattern (30 seconds) is to be output to the display control device 114, it is preferable to output a display stop type command in addition to the display fluctuation pattern command that is initially output.

  Further, in this control example, a display effect command for executing a continuous effect (see FIG. 96) continuously executed when the gaming state is in the advantageous state advantageous to the player, and the continuous effect are ended. The voice lamp control device 113 is a display final mode command for executing an effect (battle reach) for notifying whether or not, and various other commands for increasing the expectation of winning a jackpot to the player. Are output from the control unit 12. When various commands are received, effects corresponding to the various commands are displayed.

  Furthermore, even if the effect content is already set based on the reception of the predetermined display command, if the additional display command is received after that, the additional display command is supported. It is configured to overwrite the effect content on the content. Thus, based on the reception of the display variation pattern command, the effect corresponding to the predetermined period (the variation period of the special symbol) is preset (created) for a period corresponding to the predetermined period (additional period during the period) When a display command (for example, an operation on the frame button 22 by the player, a display command for indicating acquisition of new ball entry information) is received, the display content of the effect can be smoothly changed.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special game state from now on and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect is now It is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next fluctuation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one fluctuation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the sub-symbols not numbered "1" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example) is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect representing insertion of a character, characters used for various effects such as images of young people and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type is to display any of back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of “morning stage”, “evening stage”, and “night stage”) selected by the player, or back surface A ̃ Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying that a rear surface image (special rear surface A to C, etc.) different from the rear surface A to C is displayed, information on the rear surface type to be displayed is also described. .

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to a stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present control example, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 75). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 124 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 124).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 124, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233 c is executed by the MPU 231 after image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235 a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b of the resident video RAM It is set to ON in the process (see FIG. 155) (see S6005 in FIG. 155). Then, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process. , And off (see S8005 in FIG. 170 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 157 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 157 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 157 (b) (see S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 157 to 169) are performed.

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 of FIG. 170 (a)), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 170B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) of transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 125) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later (see FIG. 125) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process of one frame (FIG. 167 (b In step S6303), pointer update processing (see S7305 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 125, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 125, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol ) Describes the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 157 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7607 in FIG. 167). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231 It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed Processing is performed each time drawing processing (see S6306 in FIG. 157 (b)) is performed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The total value storage area 233 k is an area for storing (storing) a history displayed (displayed as a total value) as a continuous value (HP value) variably displayed in the above-described continuous effect (see FIG. 91). Based on the difference between the value (total value) stored (stored) in the total value storage area 233 k and the newly received continuation value (HP value), the display contents in the continuation effect (for example, FIG. 92A) The display mode of the reduction value Dm12 and the HP display area Dm17 and the presentation mode of the attack presentation shown are determined and displayed.

  That is, in the present control example, the voice lamp control device 113 side is provided with means (total value storage area 233 k) for storing the previously set summation value in the display control device 114 side without storing the previously set summation value. The display control device 114 is configured to calculate the difference between the previous summation value and the current summation value, and to display a display mode based on the calculation result. Thereby, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

  In this control example, means for setting an effect value for increasing the display variation of the continuation value (HP value) on the audio lamp control device 113 side (continuation value sub selection table 222g, and S4105 to S4107 of FIG. 150). However, the display control device 114 may be provided with means for setting this effect value. With this configuration, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 can be simplified, and the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

  The precursor effect flag 233 m is a flag for determining whether the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. If this precursor effect flag 233m is on, it means that the precursor effect is executed across multiple special figure fluctuations, and if off, the precursor effect is executed across multiple special picture fluctuations Means not being The precursor effect flag 233 m is set to ON when the additional display precursor command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S 7505 in FIG. 166). Also, this precursor effect flag 233 m is referred to in the fluctuation pattern small processing (see S6501 in FIG. 159), and after setting the display data table corresponding to the precursor effect executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations , And off (see S6503 in FIG. 159). In this way, it is possible to execute the precursor effect across a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

  Although detailed description is omitted, when the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations, the time point of the execution data among the effect data and the effect data of the precursor effect executed in the previous special figure fluctuation Storage means for storing the image, and when setting an effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of this time (S6502 in FIG. 159), referring to the effect data stored in the memory means described above, The precursor effect performed in the special figure fluctuation of is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the prognostic effects executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Further, in this control example, the precursor effect is set based on the reception of the display variation pattern command (that is, the precursor effect is executed as a part of the variation pattern), but Without being limited to this, when a display command indicating execution of a prognostic effect is received, regardless of the fluctuation display content, for a display indicating a stop of the accompaniment effect during the period indicated by that command or It may be configured to display until the command is received.

<About control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 126 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum (in this control example, When reaching 238, 199, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process of setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing the processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 (S104) is performed. A start-up winning process is executed along with the winning on the entrance 64 (start winning) (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131.

  After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal ball entrance 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, referring to FIG. 127, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the present is in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) A holding ball number command (special figure 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b 1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b 2 are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d Is acquired (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210) A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  As described above, in this control example, when executing the process of starting the variation of the special symbol, first, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter is acquired, and the special symbol 2 holding ball is obtained If the value (N2) of the number counter is 0, that is, if the number of balls reserved for special symbol 2 is 0, then it is configured to acquire the value (N1) for the number symbol counter for number one special . By comprising in this way, the variation of the special symbol 2 can be executed with priority.

  In addition, as processing which starts change of a special symbol, it is not restricted to composition of this control example, for example, it may be constituted so that change of special symbol 1 may be given priority, and it may be special symbol 1 And, the priority may not be set to the special symbol 2, and for example, the variation of the special symbol may be executed according to the order in which the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. In this case, a memory area is stored to store the order in which the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, and the special symbol 1 is arranged according to the order stored in the storage area. The value of the holding ball number counter or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter may be acquired, or the common symbol holding ball number counter may be used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 .

  Furthermore, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to independently and simultaneously change. In this case, if it is determined that one of the special symbols is in a big hit, the other special symbol's fluctuation is stopped (subtraction of the fluctuation time is stopped until one big hit ends) or the other It is good to constitute so that a change of a special symbol of may be discarded (even if it is in a state where the change time has not passed, the lottery result is rewritten and the force is stopped) or the like. By configuring in this manner, in the configuration in which a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, when one is in a state advantageous to the player, playing a game without worrying about the variation of the other special symbol it can.

  Referring back to FIG. 127, the description will be continued. In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If S has not passed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is determined, and if it is the jackpot of the special symbol, the type of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol The jackpot type (jackpot A to K) is determined according to the symbol 2) and the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In this control example, by making the lighting patterns of the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37 different corresponding to the big hit type (big hit A to K), the winning big hit type can be identified. Specifically, a plurality of lighting patterns are configured by turning on or off each of the plurality of LEDs (for example, seven) provided in the first symbol display device 37. In addition, as a lighting pattern of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37, you may comprise so that lighting color may be varied. Furthermore, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to notify the outside that the special symbol is changing by blinking at least one of the plurality of LEDs, and is used in this blinking display The lighting period (lighting period to indicate the stop state of the special symbol) will be longer than the lighting period of the LED, which will be displayed until the next special symbol variation is executed after the special symbol stops. It is composed of As a result, it is possible to make the player understand whether the special symbol is in a changing state or in a stopped state.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), an open scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type (S217). Thereafter, the probability change flag 203g is reset to OFF, and the value of the time counter 203h is reset to 0 (S218), and the start of the jackpot is set (S219). When the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the processing of S219, when the jackpot control processing (S1104) of the main processing (see FIG. 136) is executed, the processing branches to S1201: Yes and the opening command is set Be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  Then, when the process of S219 is finished, next, a stop command for notifying the information on the stop symbol to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S220), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out (S216: No), the variation count subtraction process is executed (S221). The variation count subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the above-described S220 process, and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, the first random number counter stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b) The respective values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and when the probability change flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, and the probability change If the flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol.

  If the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation status of the special symbol, so the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the number for high probability Based on the per-random number table, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 10 random values stored in the first random number table for high probability. As described above, five "5 to 9" are set as random number values for the big win of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, the judgment value for making a big hit is common to the drawing of the special symbol 1 and the drawing of the special symbol 2, but depending on whether the drawing of the special symbol 1 or the drawing of the special symbol 2 is made. The judgment value to be the jackpot may be made different. By configuring in this manner, a random number value that is determined to be out of place in the special symbol 1 is configured to be determined to be a win in the special symbol 2, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Also, in this control, the same number of judgment values as the jackpot is set for the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery, but the special symbol 1 lottery and the special symbol 2 lottery The number of judgment values to be the jackpot may be made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player makes a jackpot. Can be expected to

  On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203g is off in the process of S302 (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability state) of the special symbol, so the first random number acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. As a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol, only "7" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first match with "7", it is determined that the big hit of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the process of S305, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes And a display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202c, and the big hit of the two types of special symbols (big hit Of A to K), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special figure 1) and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, the jackpot A (the number of rounds is In 15 rounds, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state after the jackpot is the jackpot type to be set to the probability variation state of the special symbol) (see FIG. 107) If it is in the range, it is determined that the jackpot B (the number of rounds is 10 rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot end is a jackpot type set to the special symbol oddity state regardless of the gaming state at the jackpot win).

  In addition, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired is in the range of "80 to 114", the jackpot C (the number of rounds is 10 rounds, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot win, the gaming state after jackpot end) If it is determined that the time saving state is 100 times the jackpot type to be set, and if it is within the range of “115 to 164”, the jackpot D (the number of rounds is five rounds, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot win) It is determined that the gaming state after the termination is the jackpot type) set to the special variation of the special symbol.

  Furthermore, if the obtained value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", the jackpot E (the number of rounds is 5 rounds, the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is not a low probability state and time saving state In the case (in the normal state), the normal state is set as the gaming state after the big hit ends, and when the gaming state at the time of the big hit is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), after the big hit ends It is determined that the time saving state is a jackpot type set 100 times as the gaming state of (see FIG. 107).

  Also, when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special figure 2), as in the case of the special figure 1 described above, it is based on the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) The jackpot F to the jackpot K are determined.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big jack A to K). Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type (big hit A to K) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108) as described above. When the process of S307 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is not the jackpot (displacement) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the display mode corresponding to the symbol is set, and the special symbol holding ball storage area (the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area) Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of 203b), the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than back and forth, or complete Set whether it is out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, the normal reach is obtained by comparing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 with the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108). Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as super reach and special reach. When the process of S309 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

  In the process of S310 executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is finished, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set ( S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 in the main process (see FIG. 136). Be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127).

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 129, the variation count subtraction process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the variation number subtraction process (S221). In this variation number subtraction process (S221), the hour / minute counter 203h and the prescribed number counter 203j are subtracted based on the end of variation of the special symbol.

  The time saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the remaining number of times the time saving state is set, and the time saving number is set when the gaming state shifts to the time saving state after the big hit ends. The specified number of times counter 203 j is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202 f (see FIGS. 111 and 112), and the specified number of times based on the contents of the state transition table set after the big hit ends. Is set.

  When the processing of FIG. 129 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / middle counter 203h is larger than 0 (S401). When it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is larger than 0 (S401: Yes), that is, when the current time is in the short state, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S402). The remaining time short number command indicating the value of is set (S403). The remaining short time number commands set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 in the main process (see FIG. 136). Be done. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the current gaming state, that is, the number of remaining short times in the time saving state from the remaining time short number command received as part of the state command, and stores the same in the state storage area 223e.

  After the process of S403, next, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0, that is, the value of the hour / minute counter 203h becomes 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the hour / minute counter 203h by the process of S402. It is determined whether or not (S404). If it is determined in the process of S404 that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S404: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state, the corresponding state command is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S404 that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not 0 (1 or more) (S404: No), the process of S405 is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. If it is determined in the process of S401 that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), the process (S402 to S405) related to the hour / minute counter 203h is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. .

  In the process of S406, it is determined whether the value of the specified number counter 203j is larger than 0 (S406). In the process of S406, when it is determined that the value of the prescribed number counter 203j is larger than 0 (S406: Yes), the value of the hour-time counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S407), and the remaining value indicating the prescribed number counter 203j is displayed. A change count command is set (S408). The remaining fluctuation number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the number of remaining fluctuations of each status, that is, the number of remaining fluctuations until the gaming state or the variation pattern selection table to be referred to is switched, from the remaining fluctuation number command received as part of the status command. , And stored in the state storage area 223e.

  After the process of S408, next, the value of the specified number counter 203j is 0, that is, the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the specified number counter 203j by the process of S407 It is determined whether or not (S409). If it is determined that the value of the prescribed number counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), state transition according to the state transition table 202f is performed, and a corresponding state command is set (S410).

  In the process of S410, for example, the state transition 4 table 202f4 is set as the state transition table 202f, and the value "4" of the prescribed number counter 203j set for the state status ST3a is subtracted to "0". When the state status shifts from ST3a to ST3, information indicating the state status ST3 and information indicating the newly set number of times “96” are set as the state command.

  Then, when the process of S410 is finished, the value of the specified number counter 203j is set according to the set state transition table 202f (S411), and this process is ended. If it is determined in the process of S406 that the value of the prescribed number counter 203j is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S406: No), the process (S407 to S411) related to the prescribed number counter 203j is skipped. This process ends.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and determines the presence or absence of a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, When there is a starting winning combination, the number of holding balls of each special symbol is added, and the value of the corresponding counters is stored in each holding ball storage area and the value of the various counters stored in the special symbol Execute pre-reading processing to determine the lottery result in advance.

  When the start winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the first control example) (S503).

  If the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 in the processing of S503 (S503: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504) . And the ball holding number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) which shows the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S505).

  The holding ball number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is described later in the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S1101), it is transmitted toward the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b 1 of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S505, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above The respective values of the random number counter C4 are stored in the first area of the free storage areas (the first storage area to the fourth storage area) of the special symbol 1 storage ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S506). In the processing of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not won (entered) the first winning opening (ball entrance) 64 in the processing of S501 (S501: No), or, in the processing of S503, the special symbol 1 holding ball When it is determined that the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (is 4) (S503: No), the start winning process for the special symbol 1 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S507.

  Next, in each processing of S507 to S512, the same processing as the processing of each of S501 to S506 is executed for winning (entering) the second ball entrance 140. The processes of S507 to S512 are different only in that the process of deferring the holding ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 140 is executed, and the other processes are the processes of S501 to S506. Since they are identical, their detailed description is omitted. In addition, when each process of S507 to S512 ends, the pre-reading process is executed (S513), and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the prefetching process (S513) which is one process in the start winning process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S513). In this pre-reading process (S513), when the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 has a new winning (entrance), the lottery result of the special symbol for the winning (entrance) is made in advance. A process of determining (prefetching) and setting a command for outputting to the voice lamp control device 113 as a result of the predetermination (prefetching) result is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command (winning (entering) information command) set here, the effect on the pending (coming) information stored on hold is based on the winning (entering) information. It becomes possible to carry out before special symbol variation is carried out.

  In this pre-reading process (FIG. 131, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (entering) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning (entering) at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first winning slot 64 or the second entering slot 140 has a new winning (entering) (S601: Yes), from the special symbol holding ball storage area, (special symbol 1 holding ball Storage area 203a, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b) The value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the current winning, the value of the first type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 A value is acquired (S602).

  Next, among the determination results defined in the first collision random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 106A), the collision determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first collision random number counter C1 is acquired (S603), Among the determination results defined in the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107), the hit type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is obtained (S604).

  After the process of S604, next, among the determination results defined in the stop type table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is obtained (S605), and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d Among the determination results defined in (see FIG. 108), the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (S606).

  Then, the hit determination result information indicating the hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the change indicating the change type determination result, which are acquired in the process of S603 to S606 described above A winning information command including type information is set (S 607), and this processing ends.

  The winning combination (ball entering) information acquired in the process of S602 mentioned above is information for indicating in advance the lottery result when the drawing of the special symbol is executed for the new winning (head entering). If it is good. A lottery result may be selected in advance using various selection tables used for a special symbol lottery, or a selection table identical to the various selection tables described above may be provided for the prefetching process.

  In addition, in the process of S 607, the game state information for indicating the game state when the special symbol variation based on the win (set ball) information to be subjected to the pre-reading process is executed in the winning (set ball) information command May be included. Here, the gaming state information will be described. In this control example, it is possible to set a normal state, a probability change state, and a time saving state as the gaming state, and according to each gaming state, a lottery result of the special symbol (big hit determination result, big hit type, and fluctuation pattern And the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 set by the audio lamp control device 113 is different.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the gaming state is configured to be shifted based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol. Specifically, when the time saving state (100 times) is set as the gaming state, the gaming state changes from the time saving state to the normal state on the condition that the number of times of variation of the special symbol has reached 100 times in that state. Migrated.

  In this control example configured in this manner, it is determined whether or not the drawing of the special symbol based on the winning (set ball) to be subjected to the pre-reading process is executed during the time saving state, and the determination result is used as gaming state information The voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the information included in the winning (entering) information command. Thereby, while the gaming state is in the short time state, the drawing (variation) of the special symbol based on the ball which has won (entered) the first ball entry 64 or the second ball entry 140 is changed to the normal state. Even in the case of being executed after being shifted, it is possible to set a winning (entering) information command corresponding to the gaming state when the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed. Further, only the winning information command corresponding to the gaming state when the lottery (variation) of the special symbol corresponding to the winning (entering) information command is executed as the winning (entering) information command is set as the voice lamp Since the data can be output to the control device 113, the volume of data to be output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The method of setting the winning (entering) information command by the pre-reading process is not limited to the content of this control example, and is set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the content of the received winning (entering) information command. The content of the effect (pre-reading effect) to be performed may be configured so as to be capable of suppressing a defect that contradictory to the lottery (variation) result of the special symbol changed by the transition of the gaming state.

  For example, in the case where a winning (entering) information command is set in the pre-reading process of the main control unit 110, a winning (entering) information command corresponding to a plurality of gaming states can be set. Determine the gaming state when the lottery (variation) of the special symbol corresponding to the winning (entering) information command is executed, and set the pre-reading effect based on the winning (entering) information corresponding to the determination result It may be configured to perform. As a result, in the pre-reading processing of the main control device 110, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced because it is not necessary to perform pre-reading processing of the gaming state.

  In addition, as a winning (entering) information command corresponding to a plurality of gaming states as described above, for example, as a determination result of the jackpot, the first determination result of winning the jackpot no matter what gaming state, the gaming state is a probability variation As a result of the second determination to win the jackpot only in the state, set any of the third determination results that are not won to the jackpot in any gaming state, and let the voice lamp control device 113 correspond to the gaming state It may be configured to be able to acquire the judgment result of the jackpot, or the information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the prefetching process is directly output as a winning (enter) information command, and the voice lamp control device The configuration may be such that the lottery result can be determined based on the received information (information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the main control device 110 in the prefetching process).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entrance 140 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the motorized accessory 140a and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the discrimination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S701: Yes), the present processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the process which shifts the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether the present time is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S 708). Specifically, when the value of the time saving short counter 203h of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability change flag 203g is on, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is, and the value of the time saving middle counter 203h is 0, Also, if the probability change flag 203g is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state (not in the time saving state).

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is determined (S708: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the second random number table 202b for high probability time On the basis of and, the lottery result of whether or not the hit of the normal symbol is acquired (S709). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202b for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is normally detached (see 202b in FIG. 106 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the process of S708, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is not in progress (S708: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the second per time for low probability Based on the random number table 202b, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table 202b for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is normally detached (see 202b in FIG. 106 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S709 or S710 is a hit of the normal symbol (S711), and if it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol (S711: Yes) The display mode at the time of hit is set (S712). In the process of S712, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol), and the process proceeds to S714 .

  On the other hand, in the process of S711, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S711: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S714.

  In the process of S714, it is determined whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is in progress (S714), and if it is in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S714: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 Is set to 3 seconds (S 715), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S714 that the normal state of the normal symbol is determined (S714: No), the variation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S716). Finish. Thus, at the time of high probability (time reduction state) of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol (during the normal state), the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" Therefore, the lottery frequency of the symbols usually increases. Therefore, the electric winning object 140a attached to the second entrance 140 can be easily released by increasing the frequency of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol, so the ball can easily enter the second entrance 140 It becomes a state.

  In addition, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, when the game state of a normal symbol is won in the big hit of a special symbol, it is comprised so that a normal state may be set. By configuring in this manner, during the jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the gaming state of the normal symbol also becomes an advantageous state, and it is possible to suppress giving the player excessive benefits. In addition, the variable winning device 65 easily opens the period (big hit period of the special symbol) and the period when the motorized symbol 140a easily opens (normal symbol hit period) overlaps, and the variable winning which is most advantageous for the player It is possible to suppress a situation in which the open electric powered accessory 140a inhibits the ball winning on the device 65.

  The above-mentioned contents will be described in detail. When the motor-operated part 140a is provided in the first flow path where the ball flows down so that the variable winning device 65 can win, the motor-operated part 140a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the ball flowing down the first flow path gets a prize for the electric jackpot 140a, and there is a problem that the ball can not be won sufficiently for the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, the electric powered part 140a is disposed at the lower position (downstream side) of the variable winning device 65, and the ball which has flowed down the first flow path during the big hit period (during the open period of the variable winning device 65). It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by using a configuration that makes it easy to win the variable winning device 65, but in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is restricted.

  On the other hand, in this control example, since the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state (normal state) during the jackpot of the special symbol, it becomes difficult to open the motorized prize 140a during the jackpot period, and the above problem is solved can do.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S717). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S715 or the process of S716 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

  When it is determined in the process of S717 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S717: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S717 that the fluctuation time of the currently displayed fluctuation display has elapsed (S717: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S718). In the process of S718, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S712, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S713, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device 83) Are set to When the stop display is set by the process of S 718, the second symbol display updating process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is ended, and the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S712 or the process of S713.

  Next, when the variable display currently being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol It is determined (S719). If the lottery result this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S719: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the current time is in the short status of the normal symbol (S720), and it is determined that the current status is in the short status (S720: Yes) sets “one second × two times” as the opening time and opening number of the motorized accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 (S722), and shifts to the processing of S723 . On the other hand, in the process of S720, when it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state (not short time) (S720: No), the opening time and number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 Then, “0.2 seconds × 1 time” is set (S721), and the process proceeds to S723.

  In the process of S723, the opening / closing control start of the motorized prize 140a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S721 or S722 (S723), and this process is ended. If the opening / closing control start of the motorized part 140a is set by the process of S723, the motored part opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is performed next. The open / close control is started, and the open / close control of the motorized accessory 140a is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S721 or S722 end. On the other hand, in the process of S719, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S719: No), the process of S720 to S723 is skipped, and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, passage of the ball at the normal entry (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entry port 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the first control example) (S803).

  The ball does not pass through the normal ball entry port 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is If it is not less than 4 (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S805). In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (one second in the first control example) is performed. Execute (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If generation information of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S812. As described later in the process of S1114 in FIG. 136, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM, the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to step S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1004) S1007: Yes, while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the occurrence information of the power-off (S1008). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S1011), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up processing will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process of 4 m second cycle, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of acquired balls. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) or the start winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning information information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the first control example). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then the jackpot effect is executed when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the first control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the motor-operated part opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motor-operated part 140a attached to the second ball entry port 140 (S1105). In the motorized part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized part 140a is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the opening / closing control of the motorized part 140a is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or the processing of S722 in the normal symbol variation processing are finished.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at device 37. In the first control example, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) ends. The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set by the processing of S715 or the processing of S716 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 132), the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set in the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the process of S712 or the process of S713 of normal symbol variation processing (refer to FIG. 132), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 Turn on).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this first control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing ( S1109), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101 and the above-described S1101 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1109: No), the first main processing is performed until it reaches the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. (1) Updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and the counter value reaches 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238, 239 in the first control example). clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1108, if the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of power failure or power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 134 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1101. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1101. Therefore, in the process at the time of power supply shutoff, in the process of initialization (see S1001 in FIG. 135), without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1201, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201: Yes), an opening command is set (S1202), and this process is ended.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, an opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1203). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1203, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1203: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1204). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1204: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1205), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1206). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is output in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1204 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1204: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1207). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1207, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1207: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1208), and this processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1207: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1209). Specifically, it is the start timing of the ending effect when the special gaming state (all round games set to the jackpot (for example, 15 rounds) in which a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time is finished) To determine.

  In the process of S1209, when it is the start timing of ending effect (S1209: Yes), an ending command is set (S1210), and this process is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S1209 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1211) and it is not the end timing of the ending effect If it is determined (S1211: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S121 that it is the end timing of ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing when the big hit game is all over, based on the first hit type selection table 202c. Then, the contents of the probability change flag 203g and the hour-shortening counter 203h are set (S1212). By the process of S1212, the gaming state (presence or absence of a definite change state, presence or absence of a time saving state, and setting of the number of time savings) after the big hit corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set.

  Next, referring to the jackpot transition setting table 202e, a state transition destination is selected based on the jackpot type winning this time and the gaming state at the time of winning (see FIG. 110), and state transition corresponding to the selected state transition destination Based on the table 202f, the status status and the prescribed number counter 203j are acquired (S1213). For example, in the state where "high probability time short (probable change state)" is set as the gaming state, if "big hit G" is won as the big hit type, "state shift 2" is selected as the state shift destination, and the state Among the transition tables 202f (see FIG. 111 (a)), the state transition 2 table 202f2 (see FIG. 111 (c)) corresponding to the "state transition 2" is referred to.

  After that, set a state specification command to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the special symbol game state (high probability state (probability state), low probability state (normal state)) after the big hit is over ( In step S1214), the end of the jackpot is set (S1215), and the process ends.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 154. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 138, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, initialization is performed in response to power on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S3118 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current startup process (see FIG. 139). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S3002). As described later with reference to FIG. 139, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (S3115 in FIG. 139: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S3118. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S3118 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S3002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after an instantaneous power failure occurs, as shown in S3118 of FIG. Start after completing the execution of the power-off process, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110). It is Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword "55AAh" is written by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S3118 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process moves to S3008.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3002 that the power-off process flag is on (S3002: Yes), the current start-up process is after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off process of S3118 is performed. During execution of the process, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 of FIG. 139 is performed (see S3117 of FIG. 139). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3118 is performed, the process of S3008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S3118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S3008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S3004 through S3006 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in this case (S3008: No), S3009 which is the clear processing of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S3009 is that, when the process of S3008 is performed via the processes of S3004 to S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  In the process of S3010, an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and time setting processing is performed to set reference clocking information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time effect (S3012) , Shift to main processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the previous processing of S3101 has been executed (S3101), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3113 without performing the process of S3102 to S3112. In the processing of S3101, it is the processing concerning display (rendering) mainly in S3102 to S3112 that it is mainly necessary to determine whether 1 ms has elapsed, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3113 and the variable display setting process of S3114 in a short cycle. Since the process of S3113 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3114 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S3102) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S3104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S3105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of lighting a holding lamp (not shown) is performed according to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process for setting an effect. Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S3107) will be described.

  In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S3107), first, it is determined whether a valid period flag indicating that it is a period in which pressing of the frame button 22 is effectively handled is set to ON. Here, if the valid period flag is set to ON, it is next determined whether pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected. When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, a display pressing command corresponding to the button pressing is set, and the process ends.

  In addition, the effective period flag mentioned above is each provided for every production performed based on pressing of the frame button 22. For example, if it is a period in which the background of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed based on depression of the frame button 22, the effective period flag (first effective period flag) for indicating that is turned on. If it is a period during which the operation effect of changing the variation effect mode of the third symbol is set based on the depression of the frame button 22 (the period when the depression of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted in the operation effect), The effective period flag (second effective period flag) for indicating that is set to ON.

  Furthermore, in the plurality of valid period flags described above, the priorities are determined in advance in accordance with the privilege value given when the player presses the frame button 22, and the plurality of valid period flags are set to ON. In the case where it is set, the processing based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is configured to be executed based on the valid period flag having the highest priority among the plurality of valid period flags set to ON.

  By configuring in this way, when the periods for effectively receiving the pressing of the frame button 22 overlap, for example, a period in which the background can be changed (a period in which the first valid period flag is set to on), and an operation effect Based on the pressing of the frame button 22 based on the second valid period flag, which is set to a high priority, when it overlaps with the period in which the second valid period flag is set to on (the second valid period flag is set to on). Since the process is executed, it is possible to execute an effect of high reward value for the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, the effect performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is similarly configured to be performed to indicate that the second effective period flag is set to ON. Since only the effect corresponding to the effective period in which the priority is set high is executed, the player operates the operation timing while watching the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The frame button 22 can be pressed without making a mistake. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In this control example, as a method of setting the priority to each valid period flag, a configuration in which the priority is set to each valid period flag in advance is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, a frame In the button input monitoring and rendering process (S3107), it may be configured to determine whether the valid period flag is set to ON in order from high priority. As a result, even if a plurality of valid period flags are set to ON at the same time, a process based on pressing of the frame button 22 is executed based on the high priority period valid period flag. On the other hand, it is possible to execute an effect with high benefit value and to enhance the effect.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S3107) is finished, the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S3109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S3110 ends, various counter update processes are executed (S3111). In the various counter updating process, a process for updating various counters used in the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. Specifically, the counter values of the first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 included in the effect counter group 223y are updated so as not to be synchronized. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are counters used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are each composed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main processing (see FIG. 136) is executed (1 ms. Each time, the update process is performed so as to have different values.

  In the first control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used, so when selecting a plurality of effects in the main processing Even if the same counter value is referred to, the selected effect is prevented from being biased, but, for example, a plurality of effect modes selected in different processes in one main process When it is desired to synchronize the two, it may be configured to select the effect mode using the same effect counter.

  In the first control example, although a plurality of counters (first effect counter 223y1 to sixth effect counter 223y6) having different update patterns are used, for example, random values may be used by using an update value of one effect counter. May be calculated, and each effect may be selected using the calculated value. By configuring in this manner, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the updated values of the effect counter, the value of the lower first digit, the value of the lower second digit, and the value of the first digit multiplied by the value of the second digit lower the last digit of the value of the effect counter. It may be calculated such that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

  When the process of S3111 ends, next, the effect update process (S3112) is executed. The effect update process is a process of updating various effects set by the audio lamp control device 113 based on an elapsed period. In this effect update process (S3112), control is performed on the effect (for example, the display extension effect executed after the end of the big hit) regardless of the change of the special symbol. The detailed description of the effect update process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3113, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 is executed (S3113). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S3114). In the fluctuation display setting process, the third symbol display device 81 is based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the effect corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation (the fluctuation effect of the third symbol and other effects). The display variation pattern command is generated and set. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S3114 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S3115 that the occurrence information of the power-off is stored (S3115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S3117), and the power-off processing is executed. (S3118). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S3119), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the command determination processing (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process (S3113). The command determination process (S3113) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) and performs control according to the type of command received from the main control device 110.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been made (S3201). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S3201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3202), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command ( S3203), returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to in order to determine the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the below-mentioned variation display setting process (see FIG. 147). And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3201 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S3201: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3204). When the stop type command is received (S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3206). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3204 that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3207). And when it is determined that the holding ball number command is received (S3207: Yes), the holding ball number counter of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received holding ball number command , And stores the value included in the received holding ball number command (S3208), and ends this processing. Specifically, when the command for holding ball number received this time is the command for holding ball number corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special ball 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 from the received number of ball holding command. A value (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when the command for holding ball number received this time is the command for holding ball number corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control 110 from the received number of ball holding command The number of times of suspension N2 of the variable display in the symbol 2 is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b 2 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the value of any of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b 1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 b 2 is changed in the process of S 3208, the updated counter value is notified to the display control device 114 The display ball number command for display is set. Since the actual number of holding balls can be notified to the display control device 114 by this holding ball number command for display, in the holding display area Dn4 of the third symbol display device 81, the correct number of holding symbols can always be obtained It can be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3207 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S3207: No), it is determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S3209: Yes), the winning information command processing is executed (S3210), and this processing is ended.

  Here, the winning information command processing (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command process (S3210). The prize information command process (S3210) is a process executed when the prize information command is received from the main control unit 110, and the information included in the received prize information command corresponds to the prize information storage area 223a. A process for storing in the area (pending storage area corresponding to the prize information command) is executed.

  Here, the information included in the winning information command is information for winning balls such as information on the determination result of the special symbol, information on the stop type, information on the variation pattern, etc., but including information other than that For example, winning information on a ball that has already been won (a winning information command has been received in the past) may be included.

  When the winning information command process (S3210) is executed, first, information (pre-reading information) of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S3231). As described above, the winning information storage area 223a can store a maximum of 4 special symbol 1 winning information commands, a maximum of 4 special symbol 2 winning information commands, and a total of 8 winning information commands. The winning information information command is stored in a designated storage area according to the order in which the winning information information commands are received.

  Next, it is determined whether there is fluctuation type information (fluctuation pattern information of reach or more) of fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more as information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time (S3232). When it is determined in the process of S3232 that there is no fluctuation type information (fluctuation pattern information of reach or more) with fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is fluctuation type information (fluctuation pattern information of reach or more) having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: Yes), a specific effect C (see FIG. 101), that is, predetermined from the start of fluctuation. It is determined whether or not there is fluctuation type information indicating a specific effect (for example, an effect for causing a player to operate the frame button 22) to be executed within a period (for example, within 5 seconds) (S3233).

  Here, when it is determined that the specific effect C is present (S3233: Yes), it is then determined whether the remaining change time of the currently displayed change display is 10 seconds or more (S3234). In the process of S3234, based on the time (the elapsed time to the set fluctuation time) managed by the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the audio lamp control device 113. The remaining fluctuation time of the variable display is determined.

  In the process of S3234, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes), it is a case where a period in which a precursor effect can be added to the fluctuation display under execution is secured. The precursor command is set (S3235), the precursor setting flag 223t is set on (S3236), and the process ends. By performing the above-described processing, it is possible to execute a prognostic effect straddling a plurality of variable displays as a suggested effect for a specific effect C to be executed in the next and subsequent variable displays. As a result, a specific effect (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) performed 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation) (ie, a specific effect C to be executed 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation) Since it is possible to execute the suggested effect using a plurality of variable displays even for the specific effect performed at a time when it is not possible to secure, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the suggested effect and to set the range in which the specific effect can be set. It becomes possible to expand, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of presentation regarding the variable display.

  In the process of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 10 seconds (S3234: No), that is, if a period in which the suggestion effect can be added can not be secured to the fluctuation display under execution, The present processing ends without changing the display mode of the variable display. Here, when it is not possible to secure a period in which the suggestion effect can be added to the variation display being executed (S3234: No), the variation corresponding to the prize information determined to have the countdown effect in the present prize information command processing (S3210) When setting the display, the specific effect is set within a range (for example, a range of 15 seconds or more after the start of the change) in which the suggested effect can be executed with only one variable display, and the suggested effect is set.

  With such a configuration, the timing at which the winning information is generated (the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance) with respect to the fluctuation to which the winning information for indicating that the countdown effect is to be performed is given. Depending on the timing at which the ball enters the ball 140), the effect mode of the countdown effect can be made different, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In this control example, a specific effect (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) to be performed 5 seconds after the start of change) (for example, a specific effect (for example, It is specified that the effect indicates that the jackpot expectation degree is higher than the specific effect (executed 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). That is, the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit of the special symbol is defined so that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more easily selected.

  As a result, when the suggestion effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot in the next and subsequent changes. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player eagerly reserve the reserve of the special symbol so that the suggestive effect across a plurality of changes is executed.

  In this control example, a plurality of variable displays are straddled based on the winning information included in the received winning information command as described above and the timing (the remaining period of the variable display under execution) at which the winning information command is received. Whether or not the suggestion effect is to be executed is determined in the above, but other configurations may be used, for example, the suggestion effect based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display under execution) Whether or not to execute is determined, and if it is determined that execution is performed, a pro-end effect may be performed as a suggested effect, and setting of a specific effect may be performed at the timing when the next variable display is started. Setting the specific effect based on the operation content of the player's frame button 22 during the period in which the omen effect is being performed (setting the specific effect to be the target of the suggested effect from the plurality of specific effects) It may be configured to. By configuring in this way, the effect of the suggested effect is generated based on the gaming situation after the suggested effect is started (lottery result or fluctuation pattern of the next change, or the operation content to the operation means (frame button 22)). An aspect can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom of presentation can be enhanced compared to the configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggested presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

  Further, in the present control example, as an example of executing the suggestion effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display being executed and the variable display to be executed next based on the winning information winning during the variable display Although the suggested effect used is described, without being limited to this, any configuration may be used as long as the suggested effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, for example, winning information winning during the variable display is executed one after another In the case of the variable display, the suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display to be executed one after another from the variable display being executed, or to be performed one after another from the variable display to be executed next. The suggested effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, it is determined whether to set the timing to execute the suggested effect to the currently displayed fluctuation display or to set it to the next fluctuation display based on the timing at which the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the currently displayed fluctuation display). It is good to provide a means to

  The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113. For example, a pending display area in which the number of pending balls of the special symbol is displayed In Dn4, in order to suggest a hold display (hold symbol) corresponding to the winning information indicating a big hit, set a hold change notice effect to change the display mode of the hold display, or set a special symbol corresponding to winning information showing a big hit It is referred to when setting the continuous advance notice production which makes a big hit expect as a production of a special symbol whose change is started earlier than that.

  Further, in the first control example, when the jackpot is won, during the jackpot game, at the end of the jackpot, the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is referred to, and the prize information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. It is determined whether or not there is (presence or absence of a pending U-masu), and based on the determination result, it is configured to set effects during the big hit game or after the big hit end. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the definite variation state, the effect content is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, when an effect (pre-reading effect) with reference to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is being executed, a flag ( For example, when the pre-reading effect flag) is set to ON and the pre-reading effect flag is set to ON, when a new prize information command is received, the prize included in the prize information command It is configured such that a new pre-reading effect based on information is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that a plurality of pre-reading effects are continuously executed without a gap and give the player a sense of discomfort.

  In addition, control other than the above-mentioned content for solving the problem mentioned above may be used, for example, a priority rank is given to a plurality of pre-reading effects set based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a. The pre-read effect with a high priority rank, comparing the priority rank of the pre-read effect currently being executed and the priority rank of the pre-read effect that can be set based on the winning information included in the new prize information command. It may be controlled to execute. In this case, when it is determined that the priority rank of the new pre-reading effect is higher, the pre-reading effect switching notification is performed to notify the player that the pre-reading effect being executed is ended halfway Then, a new pre-reading effect is performed, or a new pre-reading effect is performed after changing the effect mode of the pre-reading effect being executed into a shortened pre-reading effect mode earlier than the end timing set initially. You may.

  In addition, as the priority rank of the pre-reading effect, the priority rank of the pre-reading effect corresponding to the prize information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot, the higher the priority rank Should be set high. By this. When the pre-reading effect being executed is terminated halfway, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot, and it is possible to cause the new pre-reading effect to be performed next to be executed.

  Referring back to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3209 that no winning information command has been received (S3209: No), it is then determined whether a winning related command has been received (S3211), and if a winning related command has been received ( S3211: Yes) The hit related command processing (S3212) is executed, and after the hit related command processing ends, this processing ends.

  Here, the contents of the hit related command process (S3212) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command process (S3212). In the hit related command processing, first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3301). Then, when it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), the jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3302), and then, for display, for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the opening effect An opening command is set (S3303), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening effect.

  Here, the contents of the jackpot effect setting process (S3302) executed when the opening command is received (S3301: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot middle effect setting process (S3302). In this jackpot effect setting process (S3302), the hold status at the time of jackpot win (the contents of the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a and the counter value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223b2 (hold ball number)) A process is performed to set an effect to be performed during a jackpot based on.

  Specifically, the result of determining the presence / absence of the prize information indicating that the special symbol has won the jackpot, and the result of determining whether or not the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit value (4 pieces) The effect to be executed during the jackpot is selected using the jackpot effect presentation selection table 222c (refer to FIG. 115 (c)).

  When the jackpot effect setting process (S3302) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is extracted (S3401), and then, based on the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 The present holding ball number (the holding ball number of the special symbol 2) is extracted (S3402), and it is determined whether the extracted holding ball number (the holding ball number of the special symbol 2) is 0 (S3403).

  Here, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is not 0 (1 or more) (S3403; No), the holding rank corresponding to the extracted winning information and the number of holding balls is read from the holding rank selection table 222b (S3404), It transfers to the process of S3406 mentioned later. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3403 that the number of pending balls is 0, “1” is read as the pending rank, and the process proceeds to the process of S3406.

  In the reserve rank selection table 222b, it is stored at the time of jackpot winning in order to select the reserve rank based on the degree of expectation that the winning information may be won again (on hold within reserve) within the reserve at the end of the big hit. Whether or not there is a possibility that new winning information is stored during the big hit (whether the number of holding balls is the upper limit or not) is a result of determining whether or not the winning information is included the big hit winning information The pending rank is selected based on the result of determining?). Further, when the number of balls held is “0” when the jackpot is won, there is no winning information, so that the held rank “1” is set without using the held rank selection table 222 b.

  As described above, in this control example, when selecting an effect to be executed during a jackpot, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, ie, the number of holding balls, and the content of the winning information, ie, It is comprised so that a pending | holding rank may be selected based on the yes-no decision result. An effect to be executed during a jackpot is selected in the process of S3406 described later based on the hold rank selected here.

  By configuring in this way, the effect corresponding to the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of holding balls, and the content of the winning information, that is, the result of the pass / fail judgment is executed during the big hit. In addition to the effect blessing that the player has won the jackpot, it is possible to execute an effect suggesting the game content after the end of the jackpot.

  In this control example, although the composition to refer to the pending rank selected in the above-mentioned contents is used for the effect to be executed during the big hit, other than that, for example, the number of big hits included in the winning information and Hold rank based on information such as the type of fluctuation pattern and the transition of gaming state (certain change state, short time state, normal state) (a play state that can be determined when all the changes of the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball are finished) May be selected.

  Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned pending rank, the jackpot type executed this time, the number of times the jackpot has been won within a predetermined period (for example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 50 times), It is also possible to use operation information indicating the so-called continuous number of times, such as the number of jackpots won in a state in which the gaming state continues, and the operation content of the player's operation means. Thereby, various effects can be performed during the jackpot.

  Further, in the present control example, the effect during the jackpot selected based on the above-mentioned reserved rank is executed using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 86 (a)). As to the mode, if the player can grasp the contents during the jackpot, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a common jackpot effect is executed using the entire main display area Dm, and a partial area of the main display area Dm You may make it perform a jackpot effect selected based on the holding rank mentioned above as a sub-effect to be executed using a device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub-display device, a lamp) The execution may be performed using a device, a frame of the pachinko machine 10, an audio output device). In this way, it is possible to suggest the game content after the big hit to the player based on the holding rank while sharing the effect for showing the winning in the big hit (the effect for showing that the big hit is in progress). Since it is possible, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot is in progress in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to execute an effect of giving an expectation after the jackpot end.

  Referring back to FIG. 143, the description will be continued. In the process of S3406, the jackpot middle effect is read out with reference to the jackpot inside effect selection table 222c based on the read holding rank and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 (S3406). Next, it is determined whether the jackpot effect read this time is an effect for addition (S3407), and if it is determined to be an effect for addition (S3407: Yes), the addition effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3408) The display jackpot effect command corresponding to the read jackpot effect is set (S3409), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3407 that the jackpot effect currently read out this time is not the effect for addition (S3407: No), the process of S3408 is skipped and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S3409.

  Referring back to FIG. 142, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3301 that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S3304). Here, when the round number command is received (S3304: Yes), the number of rounds is extracted from the received round number command (S3305), and then it is determined whether the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306) ).

  Here, when the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306: Yes), processing for the additional effect is executed at the timing when the new round is started (that is, the timing when the round number command is received). Since it is necessary to execute the processing during addition effect (S3307), after that, the addition effect command for display is set (S3308), and the round number command for display according to the number of rounds extracted this time is set (S3309) ), End this processing. The display addition effect command for display and the round number command for display set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (see FIG. 136) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 In S3102), the information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  Here, the contents of the processing during addition effect processing (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process (S3307) during addition production. The processing during the extra effect (S3307) is a process that is executed when the additional presentation is selected as the effect during the large hit in the above-mentioned large hit internal effect setting process (see FIG. 143), and the additional effect is It is a process for selecting the display mode of the number-of-rounds display mode Dm10 (refer to FIG. 86 (a)) displayed when it is being executed.

  The addition effect processing (S3307) is processing that is executed when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S3304: Yes) in the winning related command processing (see FIG. 142). That is, during the jackpot, the above-described processing during the additional effect is performed each time a new round is started. Thus, it is possible to select the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the progress of the determined round number display mode Dm4 and the in-execution round number display mode Dm3 already displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in this control example, the number of rounds to be displayed in the additional effect is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a in the number of rounds set to the jackpot in progress (for example, 10 rounds) It is configured to add the number of rounds of the jackpot (for example, 15 rounds). In this control example configured in this way, by executing the process during addition effect (S3307) every time a new round is started, the winning information newly stored in the big hit corresponds to the big hit Even in the case where there is, it is possible to execute the effect for addition which reflects the content immediately, it is possible to enhance the effect.

  When the processing during superscription effect (S3307) is executed, first, the number of rounds of jackpot stored in the jackpot information storage area 223f, that is, the number of rounds set to the jackpot currently being executed is read (S3501), Then, all the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read out (S3502). Then, it is determined whether or not there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot among the winning information (S3503).

  Here, if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the number of rounds read by the processing of S3501 (the number of rounds set in the jackpot currently being executed) and the winning information The sum process (S3508 to S3511) is performed which adds up the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot included in. The summing process will be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: No), the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g, ie, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The number of display rounds (“10” in the case of FIG. 86A) displayed as the determined number of rounds display mode Dm4 is read (S3504), and the number of rounds read in the process of S3501 is read in the process of S3506 The number of display rounds is subtracted (S3505). The number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds displayed in a recognizable manner by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds determined to be internally executed by the process of S3505, ie, the player The number of rounds not recognized (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated.

  Next, the number of display rounds is selected by referring to the number-of-additions selection table 222d based on the number of remaining rounds calculated in the process of S3505 and the presence / absence of prize information corresponding to the jackpot, and stored in the display rounds storage area 223g. (S3506), the additional display processing is executed (S3507), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the summing process is executed. In this summing process, first, the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3508), and then the number of rounds read in the processing of S3501 and the number of rounds read in the processing of S3508 The number of combined rounds obtained by summing up is calculated (S3509).

  Next, the number of display rounds stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223g, that is, the number of display rounds displayed as the determined number of rounds display mode Dm4 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. In the case of a), "10" is read (S3510), and the number of display rounds read out in the process of S3510 is subtracted from the number of added rounds summed up in the process of S3509 (S3511). The number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of rounds displayed in a recognizable manner by the player (the number of confirmed rounds) from the number of rounds determined to be internally executed by the process of S3511, ie, the player The number of rounds not recognized (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated. Then, after the process of S3506 described above is performed, the additional display process is performed, and the process ends.

  As described above, among the additional effect in process (S3307) described above, the process of S3501 to the process of S3511 is a process for setting the display mode of the number-of-rounds display mode Dm10 during the execution of the additional effect, and As described above, it is configured to be executed when a new round is started (a new round game is started) during the jackpot. Thereby, the process for setting the display mode of the effect regarding the number of rounds can be performed at the optimal timing.

  The execution timing and the processing content of the process for setting the display mode for displaying as the number-of-rounds display mode Dm10 are not limited to the contents of this control example. For example, in this control example, a new round When the process is started, the processing during addition effect is executed to determine the winning information (S3502, S3503) and the number of display rounds (S3504 to S3506, SS3510 to S3506). Processing is integrally executed, but the above-mentioned winning information determination processing is executed in advance when the winning information command is received, the result is temporarily stored, and the stored result is used. It may be configured to execute the setting process of the number of display rounds described above.

  Further, in this control example, when the round number command is received (S3304 in FIG. 142: Yes), the processing during the additional effect is executed, but the additional effect during the round game (interval period) The intermediate processing may be configured to be performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute processing during addition effect during a round game (interval period) with a relatively small amount of processing during a big hit where various control processing is executed, and the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the processing load of

  In this case, if the number of rounds of the round to be executed next is determined based on the winning information command already received, and the above-described processing during addition effect is executed based on the determination result. Good. Furthermore, in the present control example, the processing during addition production is executed each time a new round is started, but a specific round (for example, even round, multiple of 5 rounds) is started It may be configured such that it is executed only in the above, or a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not the processing during the additional effect is to be executed, and may be executed based on the lottery result.

  In this control example, the processing of S3501 to S3511 is performed each time a new round is started, but for example, after the processing of S3502, a new winning is achieved from the time when the previous round was started. A process of determining whether information is added may be provided, and when new winning information is not added, the processes of S3503 to S3511 may be skipped. This makes it possible to reduce the processing executed each round.

  Referring back to FIG. 144, the description will be continued. When the process of S3506 is finished, next, an additional display process (S3507) which is a process for executing effect display regarding the number of display rounds set in the process of S3506 is executed, and the present process is ended. Here, the addition display process (S3507) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional display processing (S3507). This additional display process (S3507) is a process for setting a display command for additional effect corresponding to the number of display rounds (refer to S3508 in FIG. 144) determined in the processing during additional effect (refer to FIG. 144). In this control example, when the number of rounds in the jackpot becomes a predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds of 5 multiples, that is, 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), the number of display rounds (decided round number display mode Dm 4 The next round (predetermined number of rounds n) when the number of previous rounds of predetermined number of rounds n (number of rounds of 5 multiples) is reached (ie, 4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) A precursor effect (see FIG. 85 (b)) is executed which suggests that the number of display rounds (determination round number display mode Dm4) is updated.

  When the addition display process (S3507) is executed, the number of rounds n (specifically, 5 rounds and 10 rounds) at which the number of rounds at this time becomes the update timing of the number of rounds It is determined whether the number of rounds n-1 (four rounds, nine rounds, fourteen rounds) is one less than the multiple of five, such as fifteen rounds (S3601). If it is determined that this time is the number n-1 of rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: Yes), a predictive effect for displaying the number of finalized rounds in the next round (FIG. 85 (b In order to execute), the corresponding display addition selection command is set (S3602), and this processing ends.

  In this control example, based on the number of display rounds stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223g, the effect mode of the above-mentioned progic effect (see FIG. 85 (b)) is set, for example, storage of the number of display rounds If the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is 10 or more, the effect mode (see FIG. 86 (b)) in which the number of “treasure boxes” displayed during the prognostic effect is reduced or displayed during the prognostic effect A presentation mode (see FIG. 86 (b)) is displayed in which the display mode of the "treasure box" is made luxurious. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to predict the content of the effect of the additional display effect at the time when the precursor effect is executed.

  In this control example, although the presentation mode of the prognostic effect is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the number of display rounds storage area 223g, other than that, for example, it is internally determined. It may be configured to set the production mode of the progic effect based on the number of rounds (when the number of rounds set in the large hold on hold is also added if the number of rounds on hold is fixed). Thereby, the player can be made to predict the number of rounds internally determined based on the mode of production of the omen effect and the mode of production of the additional effect of adding the number of display rounds, and the game is executed during a big hit I can keep my interest in the production.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the player can further develop the additional effect to be executed during the jackpot by changing the display mode of the "treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" displayed during the precursor effect. However, the display mode for other configurations may be changed, for example, the display of “arrow (selected image Dm8)” for selecting “treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)”. A mode (for example, a color or a size) may be changed, and a lighting pattern of sound or an LED may be changed. Also, the period in which the prognostic effect is executed may be configured to be different.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3601 that the number of rounds for this time is not n-1 rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: No), then the number of rounds for this time is n rounds It is determined whether it is the fifth round, the tenth round, the fifteenth round (S3603), and when it is determined that it is the nth round (the fifth round, the tenth round, the fifteenth round) (S3603: Yes), the number of display rounds is stored. A display addition display command corresponding to the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is set (S3604), and this processing ends. Also, when it is determined in the process of S3603 that the number of rounds this time is not the n-th round (S3603: No), this process is ended as it is.

  An additional display command for display set in the process of S3604 described above is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 (S3102) Are sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display addition display command, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-rounds display mode Dm10 corresponding to the content of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this control example, the number of display rounds set in the processing during addition effect is displayed during a specific round (the number of rounds n) (a display mode of the number display mode of determined rounds Dm 4 is varied (added). However, the display mode of the finalized round number display mode Dm4 may be changed (overlaid) at another timing, for example, to determine whether to update the finalized round number display mode Dm4. The lottery means may execute the lottery each time a new round starts, and set the timing to execute the effect of adding and updating the number of decided rounds display mode Dm 4 based on the lottery result. As a result, the timing at which the content of the finalized round number display mode Dm4 is updated can be made irregular, and the player can be made to play a game with a big hit continuously while giving a sense of expectation.

  Referring back to FIG. 142, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3306 that the additional effect flag 223h is not on (is off) (S3306: No), there is no need to execute the process during additional effect (S3307), so the processes of S3307 and S3308 The process skips and executes the process of S3309 described above, and ends the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3304 that the round number command has not been received (S3304: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3310). When it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: Yes), the display ending command is set (S3311), the jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3312), and this process is ended. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 146, a description will be given of the jackpot after-production effect setting process (S3312) executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S3310: Yes). FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of a jackpot after-effects setting process (S3312). In this jackpot post production setting process (S3312), during the period when the jackpot is finished and the variation of the special symbol is executed, it is the processing for continuing to carry out the presentation carried out during the jackpot, and during the jackpot It is a process for setting the jackpot post production corresponding to the executed production.

  When the jackpot effect setting process (S3312) is executed, first, the gaming state after the jackpot is read out from the information stored in the state storage area 223e (S3701), and then the additional effect flag 223h is set to ON. It is determined whether or not the effect performed during the present jackpot is the additional effect (S3702). If it is determined that the effect is for additional effects (S3702: Yes), it is then determined whether there is any winning information in the winning information storage area 223a that has won the jackpot (whether to hold on hold) (S3703).

  If it is determined in the process of S3703 that there is winning information that has won the jackpot (S3703: Yes), the display additional effect jackpot after display command is set (S3704), and the process ends. That is, in the process of S3703, when it is determined that there is winning information that has won the jackpot (S3703: Yes), all of the combined round numbers calculated in the process of S3505 in the process of superimposing effect in FIG. 144 (S3307) are displayed. Since it is not displayed as the number of rounds, the effect for addition continues until the next jackpot is executed (until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information including the jackpot information ends). Set the command for display additional effect jackpot to be displayed.

  The display addition effect big hit after display set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Are sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display addition effect big hit after display command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the display for continuously executing the effect for addition while executing the fluctuation display of the third symbol (FIG. See 88 (a)). By configuring in this way, even after the jackpot is finished, it is possible to continuously carry out the effects executed during the jackpot.

  In this control example, the number of display rounds (fixed round number display mode Dm 4) is partially displayed (for example, five rounds) even for the number of rounds set as one jackpot (for example, 15 rounds). Since it is constituting, from the effect contents of the effect for addition to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether it is the effect for addition being executed during one jackpot, a plurality of jackpots (the first jackpot is It is difficult to grasp whether it is an additional effect performed during the special symbol variation period) which is executed between the end and the second jackpot being started. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the number of jackpots won while the additional effect is continuously executed, or the number of rounds set for one jackpot incomprehensible to the player Therefore, it is possible to play the game while making the player expect that the effect for the addition continues for a long time (the big hit continues for a long time).

  Returning to FIG. 146, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3703 that there is no winning information that has won the jackpot (S3703: No), all of the combined round numbers calculated in the process of S3505 in the process of superimposing effect (S3307) in FIG. Since the additional effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S3705), the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3706), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3702 that the effect executed during the current jackpot is not an additional effect (S3702: No), then the effect executed during the current jackpot is for a continuous hit It is determined whether it is (see FIG. 84) (S3707). Here, if it is determined that the effect is for a continuous hit (S3707: Yes), a command for a large hit for effect for continuous display for display is set (S3708), and this processing is ended.

  The command for the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing (S3102) is stored in the command for display continuous use for production jackpot set here. Are sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the command for the continuous hit for display continuous hit, the display control device 114 starts the display for continuously executing the effect for continuous hit while executing the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 Do. By configuring in this way, even after the jackpot is finished, it is possible to continuously carry out the effects executed during the jackpot.

  In the process of S3707, when it is not determined that the effect is continuous hit (S3707: No), that is, when the effect for normal hit is executed during the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit ends in a definite change or time saving state If it is determined (S3709), and if it is determined that it is a positive or negative state (S3709: Yes), the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3710), and the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is "4000". The setting is made (S3711), and this processing ends.

  Here, the contents to be executed in the processing of S3710 and S3711 will be described. In this control example, the jackpot effect is selected with reference to the jackpot inside effect selection table 222c shown in FIG. 115 (c). As shown in FIG. 115 (c), the effect for the normal winning is the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time when all of the reserved ranks “1” to “4” are won, that is, when the jackpot is won. It is configured as an effect that can be executed even when the information for which the jackpot has been won is included in the (pending symbol) (when it is not included) and when it is not included (when it is not included). There is.

  Then, when the gaming state after the big hit end when the effect for normal hit is executed is the probability change or the time saving state, the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and the ending display displayed during the big hit is predetermined after the big hit The display is made until the condition is satisfied (see FIG. 89 (a)). By configuring in this way, the variation of the special symbol is executed in a state where the big hit ending display is displayed, and when the big hit is won, the ending display screen indicates that the big hit is won (FIG. 89 (FIG. b) see). As a result, even when the normal winning effect is performed, the pending inner row can have an expectation, and when holding on the inner row, the jackpot can be continuously performed and executed.

  Furthermore, in this control example, as a period for executing the big hit ending display continuously even after the big hit end, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is 4 times or until 4 seconds of the big hit end until the condition is satisfied. The period is set, and by setting the value of "4000" in the elapsed time counter 223k in the process of S3711, the time lapse of after the big hit is over (after becoming a state where the variation of the special symbol becomes possible) To count.

  In this way, for example, by setting the period for executing the jackpot ending display based on the elapsed time from the end of the jackpot, instead of setting it based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol (for example, 4 times) Even if the variation of the special symbol is not executed after the end (when there is no suspension of the special symbol), it is possible to execute the jackpot ending display only for a limited period.

  In this control example, the variation of the special symbol is not executed after the big hit end, and when the elapsed time after the big hit end has passed the predetermined period (4 seconds), the demonstration screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Is configured to be displayed.

  In the process of S3709, if it is determined that the gaming state after the big hit is not a definite change or a short time state (S3709: No), the effect executed during the big hit continues during the variation period of the special symbol executed after the big hit. Then, the value of the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3712) without executing the process of displaying the information and the process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 142, the description will be continued. In the process of S3310, when it is determined that the ending command is not received (S3310: No), the process according to the other commands is executed (S3313), and this process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In the process of S3211, when it is determined that the hit related command has not been received (S3211: No), next, it is determined whether the state command has been received (S3213), and it is determined that the state command has been received. (S3213: Yes) extracts the current gaming state from the received command and stores it in the state storage area 223e (S3214).

  In the process of S3214, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main control unit 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 is received, the current gaming state Apart from the above, a process of storing the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot is executed. By configuring in this way, the state command indicating the current gaming state and the state designation command indicating the gaming state (planned gaming state) set when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the jackpot is finished) are divided. Can be stored. In addition, after the big hit ends, it will receive the state command which shows present game state, but at that time, the contents of the state command which shows present game state and the contents of state designated command which shows planned game state It is also possible to provide a determination means for determining whether the two match, and to determine whether the setting of the gaming state is properly performed based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of variably setting the gaming state after the jackpot end to the gaming state which is advantageous to the player illegally.

  If it is determined in the process of S3213 that the status command has not been received (S3213: No), the process according to the received command is executed (S3216), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  By this processing, it is possible to set a command for performing various settings on the display control device 114 based on a command output from the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the variable display setting process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S3114). This variation display setting process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S4014), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3801). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S3801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S3813. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S3801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to be off (S3802), and then in the process of S3203 in the command determination process (see FIG. 140). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223.

  Next, it is determined whether the display extension flag 223i is set on (S3803). If it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is set on (S3803: Yes), the extension management process is executed (S3804). Transfer to processing. The extension management process (S3804) is a process for managing the end timing of the extension display effect of continuing (extending) and displaying the ending display during the big hit even after the big hit ends. The extended management process (S3804) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223i is not set on (is set off) (S3803: No), then the game stored in the state storage area 223e Information indicating the state is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probability change or a time saving state (S3805). If it is determined that the state is a definite change or a short time state (S3805: Yes), a continuous effect setting process is executed (S3806), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S3811. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) (see FIG. 91) to be executed in a definite or time-short state. Details of the continuation effect setting process (S3806) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the gaming state is not a definite change or a short time state (S3805: No), whether the present fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for executing an expectation degree effect based on the extracted fluctuation pattern It discriminates (S3807). If it is determined in the process of S3807 that the fluctuation pattern is to execute the expectation degree effect (S3807: Yes), the expectation degree effect setting process is executed (S3808), and the process proceeds to S3811. The expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) is a process of setting an effect mode of an effect (see FIG. 102) for suggesting an expectation degree in which the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit. The expected degree effect setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3807 that the current fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern not performing the expectation degree effect (S3807: No), the current fluctuation pattern executes the countdown effect based on the extracted fluctuation pattern. If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern for executing the countdown effect (S3809: Yes), the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed and S3811 is executed. Move to the process of In the countdown effect setting process (S3810), the player is notified of the timing at which the specific effect is executed to indicate that the expectation of the lottery result of the special symbol being a big hit is high while the variable symbol of the special symbol is displayed. It is a process which sets up the production | presentation aspect of the production (refer FIG. 98) for. The countdown effect setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3809, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for which the countdown effect is not performed (S3809: No), or if the processing of S3804, S3806, S3808, and S3810 is completed, the extracted fluctuation Based on the pattern, the current variation display mode is determined from the variation pattern table 222a of the audio lamp control device 113 (S3811), and the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S3812).

  When the process of S3812 is finished, it is next determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3813). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S3813: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this variation display setting is made. The process (S3114) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3813: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3814), and then in the process of S3206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3815).

  Next, in the process of S3815, it is determined whether the acquired stop type is a big hit type indicating a big hit (S3816), and when it is determined that a big hit type is found (S3816: Yes), it is acquired in the big hit information storage area 223f. The hit information (the number of rounds of the big hit, the information regarding the gaming state set after the big hit) corresponding to the hit type is stored (S3817), and the process shifts to the processing of S3818. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3816 that the type is not the jackpot type (S3816: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3818 as it is.

  In the process of S3818, the stop type extracted in the process of S3815 is set (S3818), and a display stop type command for transmitting to the display control apparatus 114 is set based on the set stop type (S3819). ), End this processing. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, the extension management process (S3804) executed in the variable display setting process (S3114 in FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension management process (S3804). In the extension management process (S3804), a process of managing presence / absence of the termination condition regarding the number of times of variation of the special symbol among the termination conditions of the jackpot ending display continuously displayed after the jackpot end is executed.

  When the extension management process (S3804) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is 0 (S3901). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is 0 (S3901: Yes), that is, when it is the timing to set the first fluctuation display after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the fluctuation number counter “5” is set as the display end condition (display extension end condition) of the big hit ending display to the value of 223 j (S 3902), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3901 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S3901: No), that is, the second to fourth times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. If it is the timing to set the second fluctuation display, the value of the fluctuation number counter 223 j is decremented by 1 (S 3903), and then it is judged whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223 j is “1” (S 3904). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223 j is “1” (S 3904: Yes), that is, it is determined that it is the timing to set fluctuation display of the fifth rotation after the display extension flag 223 i is set to ON. In this case, since "up to 4 times of the special symbol variation" which is one of the display extension end conditions is established, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (S3905), and this processing is ended. Do.

  If it is determined in the process of S3904 that the value of the fluctuation number counter is not "1" (more than "2") (S3904: No), an extension effect command for display is set (S3906), and this process is executed. finish. By configuring in this way, the variation corresponding to the next special symbol variation is performed when the number of variations of the special symbol satisfies the end condition of the display extension while the ending display of the jackpot is being executed by being extended. At the timing when the display is executed, the display extension flag 223i is set to off, and the extension effect (ending display) can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ending display being ended during the variable display of the special symbol and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  In this control example, when a definite or time-shortened state is set after the end of the big hit, using a dedicated variation pattern table (special variation pattern table 202d4), during a predetermined period (1 to 4 rotations after the end of the big hit) The short variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (see FIG. 109). Thereby, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol after the big hit end is the upper limit (four pieces), the number of times of special symbol fluctuation (four turns) than the elapsed time (4 seconds) as the termination condition of the extension effect An end condition based on the above is established first.

  Therefore, many special symbols are changed during the period when the ending display of the big hit is extended and executed, and the game is always performed with the holding ball secured, in order to see the special effects (see FIG. 89 (b)). Can improve the operation of the game.

  In addition, about the management based on the elapsed time which is one of the termination conditions of the extension effect, in the main processing (refer to FIG. 136) of the sound lamp control device 113, the effect updating processing (periodically every 1 ms) S3112). The effect update process (S3112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the continuation effect setting process (S3806) executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (S3806). The continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) to be executed during the probability change or the time reduction state. Specifically, as the continuous effect (battle effect), the effect mode of the final mode effect (battle reach) and the final mode effect (battle reach) for notifying whether the definite change or the time saving state ends are executed. The effect mode of the effects up to the stage (pre-battle stage effect) is stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 based on the result of determination of the special symbol, the variation pattern (variation time), and the duration of the pre-battle stage effect. A process of setting with reference to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value subselection table 222g, and the final mode selection table 222h is executed.

  The present control example is configured such that the above-described continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed until the definite change or the time saving state ends. By configuring in this manner, when a definite change or a short time state continues for a long period, each continuous effect (battle effect) extends, and each effect (for example, It is possible to suppress that the rendering effect of the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) is reduced.

  In addition, when the continuation effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, that is, when the final mode effect (battle reach) occurs at a timing when the gaming state does not shift from the probability change or the time saving state, the final mode effect ( "Drawing" is selected as the production result of battle reach), and pre-battle production is started again. Thus, in the configuration where continuous production is repeatedly executed, one continuous production period is long In the case of trying to suppress the game, the final aspect effect (battle reach with winning and losing) to indicate that the gaming state is shifted, and the final aspect effect other than the battle aspect are frequently executed , There was a problem that the player gets bored early in the final aspect effect.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the elapsed period (the number of times of variation of the special symbol) after the last mode effect (draw battle reach) is executed last time is measured, and the measurement result is within a predetermined period (for example, special symbol In the case where the number of times of change is less than six, the final aspect effect (draw battle reach) which is not attached to the game is configured not to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the effect at an early stage because the draw on the battle reach is executed frequently in a short period of time.

  Further, in the present control example, the player is suggested to the player the result of the determination of whether the special symbol is on hold or the remaining period of the probability change or the short time depending on the draw battle reach effect mode. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player interested in the draw battle reach, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect of the entire continuous rendering.

  In addition, in this control example, the number of times that the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed is measured, and the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the measurement result. Thereby, in the case where the definite change or the time reduction state continues for a long period, and the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, the continuous effect (battle effect) of the different effect mode can be executed, and the player is early for the effect You can suppress getting bored.

  Here, the process executed in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) of this control example will be briefly described. First, whether to execute battle reach as continuous effect or not in the current variable display A process of determining whether to execute an effect (execution effect selection process), and based on the determination result of the execution effect selection process, a process of setting an effect mode of an effect before battle (first effect mode setting process) or And a process of setting a battle reach presentation mode (second (final) presentation mode setting process) is executed.

  As described above, in the present control example, each time the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is configured to determine whether to execute the pre-battle effect or the battle reach in the current fluctuation display. It is possible to smoothly switch the production from the pre-battle production to the battle reach.

  As shown in FIG. 149, when the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation (the fluctuation of winning the special symbol) (S4001). Here, if it is determined that the change is not a hit change (S4001: No), next, whether the change pattern of this time is a change pattern of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (a change pattern capable of executing battle reach) (S4002), and if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds or 90 seconds (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the duration counter 223p is 6 or more (S4003).

  If it is determined in the process of S4003 that the value of the duration counter 223p is not 6 or more (less than 6) (S4003: No), it is determined whether the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004) When it is determined that the continuation effect flag 223r is not on (S4004: No), that is, when the continuation effect is not executed, the continuation effect mode is selected based on the continuation effect mode selection table 222e (S4005) The selected continuous effect mode is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m (S4006), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is incremented by 1 (S4007), and the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4008).

  When it is determined that the continuation effect flag 223r is not on in the process of S4004 described above, when the first variation display is set after the probability change or the time saving state is set as the gaming state, or the previous variation display is final This is a mode effect (battle reach), and is a case where a new continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is set in the current variable display.

  In such a case, in the process of S4005, based on the continuous rendering mode selection table 222e, the rendering aspect (rendering mode) of the pre-battle rendering to be executed from the current variable display is selected. Here, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the continuation effect mode selection table 222e, the number of times the continuation effect is repeatedly executed (value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q) and the winning combinations stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The continuous effect mode (mode 1 to mode 5) is set based on the information and the value of the third effect counter 223y3, and the continuous effect selected until the next final mode effect (battle reach) is executed A pre-battle rendition based on the mode is executed.

  In the present control example, when the continuation effect flag 223r is set to off, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read ahead, and the continuation effect mode is set based on the result of the read ahead, The configuration is such that the process of setting the variation display mode is executed based on the continuous effect mode set every time the variation of the special symbol is executed, but the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is read ahead As long as the effect based on the pre-read result is executed, any configuration other than that used in this control example may be used. For example, when the continuation effect flag 223r is set to off, the winning information storage area 223a is Pre-read stored prize information and stored in the prize information storage area 223a from the display mode of the variable display executed this time based on the pre-read result Until variable display of the display mode corresponding to the winning information is may be configured to previously set a.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4004 that the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004: Yes), or if the process of S4008 ends, the value of the duration counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4009) . Thus, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223 q can be made different when selecting the next continuous effect mode, and it is possible to suppress continuous selection of the same continuous effect mode.

  In this control example, it is suppressed that the same continuous rendering mode is continuously selected, and the specific condition (pending within holding) at a specific timing (when the value of the continuous rendering setting counter 223 q is 1) In the case where) is established, in order to make a specific effect (continuous effect mode 5) executable, a configuration is used in which the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223 q is incremented by one, but the same continuous effect mode continues In order to achieve the purpose of suppressing selection, other configurations may be used.

  For example, a value to which the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223 q is added may be determined by a lottery (for example, a value of -5 to 5 is drawn). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the regularity in which the continuous rendering mode is selected, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223 q may be added based on the result of the player's operation on the frame button 22, or the number of consecutive jackpots (the gaming state transitions to the normal state) Alternatively, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223 q may be added based on the number of times the jackpot has been won consecutively and the lottery result of the special symbol when the continuous effect mode is selected.

  When the process of S4009 ends, next, a continuation value setting process is executed (S4010). The continuation value setting process executed in the process of S4010 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. A display effect command corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the continuation value setting process of S4010 is set (S4011), and this process is ended. In the process of S4011, an effect command indicating the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the effect before battle among the continuous effects is set. Specifically, the display mode corresponding to the continuation effect mode selected in the process of S4005 and the display mode corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the process of S4010 are collectively set as a display effect command. .

  The effect command for display set in the process of S4011 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Are sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the effect command for display as the variation pattern command, the third symbol display device 81 executes the display of the effect before battle.

  The processing of S4001 to S4003 in the continuation effect setting process (S3806) described above corresponds to the execution effect selection process, and the process of S4004 to S4011 is a process of setting the effect mode of the effect before battle (first effect mode It corresponds to setting processing).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4001 that the current variation is a hit variation (S4001: Yes), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is reset (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4013. Also, in the process of S4003, if it is determined that the value of the duration counter is 6 or more (S4003: Yes), that is, even if the pre-battle effect continues for six or more special symbol variations, the process proceeds to S4013. Transition.

  In the process of S4013, an effect mode of battle reach (final mode) is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (S4013), and a corresponding display final mode command is set (S4014). The final mode command for display set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the final mode command for display, in the third symbol display device 81, battle reach using the continuation value (HP value) displayed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 93A). Is executed. By configuring in this manner, the presentation can be switched without giving the player a sense of discomfort from the pre-battle production to the battle reach.

  When the process of S4014 is finished, next, the continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF (S4015), the continuous effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (S4016), and the value of the continuous period counter 223p is cleared to 0 (S4017) , End this process.

  As described above, in this control example, the pre-battle effect is executed as a variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol fluctuations which are executed while the probability change or the time saving state is set as the gaming state, and one specific one Although it is configured to execute the final aspect presentation (battle reach) against special symbol variation (variation with a special symbol or variation with a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds selected), other than that Also, for example, the final aspect effect (battle reach) may be configured to be performed using the variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol changes. In this case, the presentation aspect of the final aspect (battle reach) is variably displayed (based on the pre-reading result) based on the prize information (the propriety judgment result or the variation pattern in the suspension) stored in the prize information storage area 223a. It is good to be configured to correspond to Thereby, the final aspect presentation (battle reach) performed straddling a plurality of special symbol changes can be smoothly performed.

  Moreover, when using the structure which performs a final aspect production (battle reach) over several special symbol fluctuation, the several display object used as the object of all the display modes displayed by the final aspect production (battle reach) It may be configured to set in advance for each special symbol variation, or the battle reach effect contents, that is, only the attack pattern and the effect result are set in advance, and the increase / decrease display control of the continuation value (HP value) May be set each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the type of final aspect effect (battle reach) set in advance based on the pre-read result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the continuation value setting process (S4010) will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation value setting process (S4010). The continuation value setting process (S4010) is a process for setting the value of the continuation value (HP value in battle effect) variably displayed during the continuation effect. In this control example, when setting the value of the continuation value (the value of the continuation value after change), a value (value of the hundreds place of the other party's HP) selected based on the lottery of the special symbol, and the effect It is set by summing up with the value (the value of the tens place of the other party's HP) selected based on the lottery for. Thereby, the variation of the displayed continuation value can be increased.

  When the continuation value setting process (S4010) is executed, it is first determined whether it is time to change the continuation value (S4101). Although detailed description is omitted, in S4101, the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the voice lamp control device 113 continues based on the rough variation pattern notified from the main controller 110 by the variation pattern command. Determine if the pattern is to change the value.

  In this control example, as described above, the timing for changing the continuation value (HP value) is determined based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition to the above, there is provided a measuring means for measuring the number of times the fluctuation pattern which does not change the continuous value is continuously selected, and when the number of times measured by the measuring means reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) Forced change means for changing the continuous value, or change regulation means for not changing the continuous value regardless of the extracted fluctuation pattern when the number of times measured by the above-mentioned measurement means is a specific number (for example, once) It may be provided. By configuring in this manner, the player may get bored with the effect (pre-battle presentation) without changing the continuity value (HP value) at all during the continuous production (during the pre-battle production), or the frequent value It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the (HP value) is changed and the effect contents become difficult to understand.

  Further, the continuation value change timing may be set based on the result of the operation of the player on the frame button 22 or the result of the pre-reading of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Further, the continuation value change timing is set based on the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the continuation value (HP value) value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. Frequency may be varied.

  If it is determined that it is not the continuation value change timing in the process of S4101 (S4101: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the continuation value change timing (S4101: Yes), the value of the hundreds place of the continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f (S4102), and the selected continuation value (continuance value The continuation value selected based on the main selection table 222f is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n (S4103). Although the detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) to be executed when the continuation value is changed is a value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, that is, the continuation value main It is configured to reference and set the continuation value selected based on the selection table 222f.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) selected in the process of S4102 is 200 or more (S4104), and if it is determined that it is 200 or more (S4104: Yes), the first If the effect value (the value of the tens place) is selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) (S4105), if it is determined that it is less than 200 (S4104; No), the second Based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117 (c)), an effect value (a value of the tens digit) is selected (S4106). A continuation value is calculated by adding the value selected in the process of S4102 and the value selected in the process of S4103 (S4104).

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 117 (b) and 117 (c), the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 and the second continuation value subselection table 222g2 are selected to be the effect value (the value of the tens place) Is configured to be different), the range of selectable effect values is defined as “−20 to +20” in the first continuation value sub selection table 222 g 1, and the second continuation value sub selection table 222 g 2 is selectable The range of the effect value is defined as "-10 to 0". That is, in the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2, a positive value (plus value) is not selected as the effect value. This is because, for example, when “0” is selected as the continuation value (the value of the hundreds place) based on the continuation value main selection table 222 f in the pre-battle effect, (in the continuation value storage area 223 n Even though “0” is set as the stored value, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the effect value is not “0” (for example, “20”) "") Is a configuration for suppressing that a value is displayed and an effect giving a sense of discomfort to the player is executed.

  In this manner, the value of the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222 f is determined, and the configuration of changing the range of selectable effect values based on the determination result is used. In the case of normal time (continuation value is 200 or more), it is possible to make the value of continuation value (HP value) variable in the positive direction or in the negative direction, and increase the variation of the presentation and also make the continuation value In the case of less than 200, the value of the continuation value (HP value) is varied only in the negative direction, thereby suppressing the occurrence of contradiction in the effect.

  Then, when the process of S4105 or S4106 is finished, next, the continuation value (value of hundreds place) selected in the process of S4102 and the effect value (value of tens places) selected in any of S4105 or S4106 Are summed to calculate a continuation value (HP value) (S4107), and a display addition command corresponding to the calculated continuation value (HP value) is set (S4108), and this processing is ended.

  As described above, in the present control example, variable management of the continuation value (HP value) to be variably displayed (increased / decreased display) while the continuation effect is being executed is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The displayed continuation value (HP value), that is, the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value selected based on the continuation value subselection table 222g It is configured not to be a value obtained by adding the value of the tens place) but only the continuation value (the value of the hundreds place) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f. By configuring in this way, with respect to the display pattern of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, reducing the pattern for performing variable management of the continuation value (HP value) Processing load can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, even if variable control of the continuation value (HP value) is performed only by the continuation value (value in the hundreds place) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value (HP value) Because the management content of) and the display content of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are not different from each other, the continuation effect is suitably reduced while reducing the processing load. Can be performed to enhance the rendering effect.

  Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 of this control example, the continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222 f and the continuation value sub selection table 222 g, and the information (command) indicating the selected continuation value is displayed Output to 114. Then, only the continuation value selected with reference to the continuation value main selection table 222f is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, and increase / decrease management of the continuation value is repeatedly executed based on the stored continuation value.

  Although detailed description is later mentioned with reference to FIG. 164, in this control example, the display mode of the continuation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, the attack pattern display mode to be executed The display control device 114 is configured to set and display a change (increase or decrease) display mode of the continuation value (HP value). That is, when the display control device 114 receives a command related to the continuation value output from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 has an area (summed value storage area) for storing the summed continuation value. The difference between the sum value stored in the sum value storage area and the sum value calculated from the command regarding the continuation value received this time is calculated, and the attack pattern display mode, based on the calculated difference value, The variable (increase / decrease) display mode of the continuation value (HP value) is set and displayed.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to preferably perform continuous effects while reducing the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effects.

  In the present control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the continuation value sub selection table 222g for selecting the continuation value for effect, and the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to select the continuation value for effect However, you may provide the display control apparatus 114 with the structure (for example, continuation value subselection table 222g) which selects the continuation value for presentation. With this configuration, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

  Moreover, in this control example, when the continuation value is selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f, a configuration is also used in which the continuation value for selection is selected with reference to the continuation value subselection table 222g. Other configurations may be used, and for example, even when the selection of the continuation value by the continuation value main selection table 222 f is not made (for example, in the case of S 4104 of FIG. 149: No), the continuation value for presentation ( It may be configured to increase or decrease only the value of the tens place. Thereby, it is possible to set more finely the increase and decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In this control example, only the value smaller than the current continuation value (the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n) is selected as the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to select a value that is larger than the current continuation value. In this case, when a value increased from the current continuation value is selected, the continuation effect is not a normal attack effect but a continuation value as an effect aspect of the continuation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to comprise so that the recovery presentation which (HP value) recovers may be performed. As described above, by using the configuration in which the continuation value (HP value) is increased during the continuation effect, it is possible to increase the variation display of the continuation value (HP value) to be executed during the continuation effect and to continue the continuation. When the value (HP value) is frequently changed (increased or decreased), it can be suppressed that the continuous value (HP value) reaches the lower limit value (for example, “0”).

  In this control example, the HP of the character is used as the continuation value variably displayed during the continuation effect, but other than that, the predetermined state (for example, the advantageous state (probability change or time saving state) advantageous to the player It may be a configuration that suggests the player based on a value that changes whether or not the) is set, for example, setting based on the success rate (%) of the effect to be executed and the operation content for the frame button 22 The number of times of operation (times) may be used.

  Furthermore, in this control example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222 f is “0”, as the continuation value (HP value) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 In order to prevent the setting of a value larger than "0", if the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), Although the configuration is made such that a positive value is not selected as the continuation value, other configurations may be used, for example, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222 f is “0”. Alternatively, the selection of the continuation value for presentation (selection using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g) may not be executed.

  In addition, as in the present control example, a process of roughly setting the rendering content in the first control device (audio lamp control device 113) among different control devices (audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114) In the configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly displayed by executing the process of setting and displaying a specific effect display mode by the second control device (display control device 114), the second control device (display control The processing result of the device 114) is output to the first control device (voice lamp control device 113), and then the first control device (voice lamp control device 113) sets the rough presentation contents When it is executed, it is determined whether the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is within the allowable range, and if it is within the allowable range, the next effect content is set as it is processing If it is outside the allowable range, the information on the rough effect contents set at the previous setting of the effect contents is corrected, and based on the correction result, the process of setting the next effect contents is executed, and the next If the processing result is not received after being output from the second control device (display control device 114) at the timing of setting the effect content, the processing to postpone the timing of setting the next effect content is executed. It may be configured.

  By configuring in this manner, the next effect can be set according to the effect mode already displayed by the process executed by the second control device (display control device 114), and the player can The presentation can be performed continuously without giving a sense of discomfort. In this case, when it is determined that the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is out of the allowable range, the processing result is wider than the error range set as the allowable range. It is determined whether or not it is within the limit range, and if the determination result is within the limit range, it is possible to continue setting the effect by performing the above-mentioned correction, and if it is outside the limit range, it is mentioned above It is preferable to forcibly end the effect without performing the correction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the expectation degree rendering setting process (S3808) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation degree effect setting process (S3808). This expectation degree effect setting process (S3808) changes the display mode of the expectation degree display mode displayed during the fluctuation effect of the special symbol, thereby whether or not the special symbol fluctuation of this time is won as a big hit. This is an effect suggested to the player (see FIGS. 102 and 103).

  In this control example, three types of expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 (see FIG. 102A) are displayed as the expected degree effect corresponding to the time lapse of the special symbol variation. Then, the expectation degree increase mode Dk4 for changing any display mode to the display mode having a high degree of expectation among the respective expectation degree display modes is displayed, and any display mode of the expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3. Perform the production so that is variable. Further, a process of setting a display timing for setting a timing at which the expectation degree increase mode Dk4 is displayed is also executed.

  Here, in the present control example, the timings at which the three types of expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 described above are displayed are different, so the expected degree is increased depending on the timing at which the expected degree mode Dk4 is displayed. The target of the expectation degree display mode in which the display mode is variable can be made different depending on the mode Dk4. As a result, even when the same expectation increase mode Dk4 is used, different presentation contents can be obtained only by changing the timing of displaying the expectation increase mode Dk4, and the storage capacity of the image data is reduced. can do.

  In this case, it is preferable that only a still image with a small amount of image data (for example, a character image) be displayed in correspondence with the expected degree display mode in which the expected degree is increased. This makes it possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation with a small amount of data.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, display modes serving as references for the three types of expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are determined in advance according to the expected degree effect mode levels. As a result, the display modes of the three types of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 configured of a plurality of combinations can be set, and the processing load of the display process can be reduced. Further, since the reference display mode (reference display mode) is determined in accordance with the expected degree effect mode level, it is possible to suppress the rising degree of the expected degree from being biased.

  In addition, it is set according to the final display mode (display mode that can be displayed after the end of the expectation degree effect) of the three types of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 set based on the fluctuation pattern and the expectation degree effect mode level In the standard display mode where the expected degree display mode Dk4 is displayed when there is a difference in any expected degree display mode, a high degree of expectation is already shown to the player. An effect can be performed while expecting that the display mode of the expectation degree display mode changes to the display mode showing a higher degree of expectation.

  When the expected degree effect setting process (S3808) is executed, first, the expected degree is selected based on the expected degree selection table 222i (S4201), and then the reference display mode is selected based on the expected degree effect selection table 222j. The expectation degree presentation mode level for setting is selected (S4202). After selecting the expected degree presentation mode level, the display mode of each expected degree display mode predetermined in the expected degree presentation mode level and the actual expected degree presentation mode (each expected degree display set based on the fluctuation pattern) The difference with the display mode of the mode is extracted (S 4203).

  When the process of S4203 is completed, it is determined whether there is a difference (S4204). If it is determined that there is a difference, the difference is calculated for each expected degree display mode (S4205), and based on the calculated difference The display timing of the expectation increase mode Dk4 is determined (S4206). Then, the differences for each of the expected degree display modes are summed (S4207), and the display contents (display mode, display timing) of the expected degree rising mode are determined based on the summed differences (S4208), and the expected degree effect is displayed A display expectation degree effect command for display is set (S4209), and a display good expectation degree target mode notification command for notifying an expectation degree display mode to be a target of the expectation degree increase mode is set (S4210).

  The process of S4208 described above will be specifically described. First, the display mode determining process for determining the display mode (for example, “3UP”) corresponding to the value of the difference added up by the process of S4207 is performed by the display mode determining means. To be executed. Further, the difference in the expected degree display mode in which the difference is generated is determined by the difference determination means, and a plurality of timings at which the expected degree display mode can be set is determined based on the determined result. Are selected based on the expectation selected with reference to the expectation selection table 222i. Thus, the difference between the display content of the expectation degree display mode set in the process of S4202 and the display content of the expectation degree display mode set in the process of S4203 is a plurality of timings that can be complemented by the expectation degree increase effect Thus, since it is possible to set the timing to increase the expectation Dk4, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the example described above, the display mode of each expectation level display mode is determined first, and the content of the expectation level display mode Dk 4 is set based on the value corresponding to the difference. The display mode of the expected degree display mode Dk4 is set based on the expected degree previously selected with reference to the expected degree selection table 222i, and the display contents of each expected degree display mode are determined based on the set contents. It may be configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the countdown effect setting process (S3810) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process (S3810). The countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for executing the countdown effect. And is a process to be executed when it is determined that the countdown effect of accurately notifying the execution timing of the specific effect as the suggested effect for suggesting to the player the execution timing of the specific effect performed during the variable display Execute processing of setting the production mode, processing of setting the production mode of precursor production for suggesting that the countdown production is to be performed, and specific production determination processing of determining the specific production to be the target of the countdown production Do.

  When the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, first, it is determined whether the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301). When it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4301: No), it is possible to execute a suggested effect among a plurality of specific effects included in the current variation pattern One specific effect set in the timing is set (S4302). That is, among the specific effects (specific effects a and b (see FIG. 100 (b)) other than the specific effects (specific effect c (see FIG. 101)) executed at timings when it is difficult to execute the suggested effect, Set one.

  When the process of S4302 ends, next, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that has been won for the winning (S4303). When it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern that has been won per win (S4303: Yes), a precursor display a (a timing after 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation (Fig. 100 (b)) as the start timing of the precursor effect. Refer to)) (S4304), and when it is determined in the process of S4303 that the current fluctuation pattern is not a win (off) fluctuation pattern (S4303: No), as a start timing of the prognostic effect The precursor display b (the timing (see FIG. 100 (b) after 17 seconds from the start of fluctuation)) is set (S4305). That is, in the present control example, it is possible to set the start timing (the start timing of the accompaniment effect) of the suggestion effect that suggests the execution timing of the specific effect based on the lottery result of the fluctuation (the result of determination of success or failure).

  In the example described above, the configuration is used in which the start timing (the start timing of the accompaniment effect) of the suggestion effect is set based on the lottery result of the change (the result of the judgment of success or failure). It may be configured to set the start timing (prompt effect start timing) of the suggested effect, for example, the determination of the result of the player's operation on the frame button 22 or the determination of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is configured to set the start timing (prompt effect start timing) of the suggested effect based on the result (pre-reading result), the time measurement result of the clock means (for example, real time clock) for clocking time, the past game history, etc. You may.

  As described above, a plurality of timings (point where the suggestion effect can be started) that can be set as the start timing of the suggestion effect (predictive effect) is prepared in one fluctuation display (variation pattern), and various conditions described above are satisfied. By using a configuration in which one is set from among a plurality of suggested effect startable points based on the degree of freedom of the suggested effect to be performed can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the processing of S4304 or S4305, when the start timing of the admonition effect (indication effect) is set, next, the countdown period is set based on the start timing of the specific effect and the start timing of the admonition effect (indication effect) S4306).

  This process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 100 (b). In the process of S4302, the specific effect to be the target of the suggested effect in the current variable display is performed in a specific effect a (30 seconds after the start of the change) If a prognostic display a (a timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100 (b))) is set as the start timing of the prognostic effect in the process of S4304, The second is set, and the specific effect targeted for the suggested effect in the current variable display in the process of S4302 is set to the specific effect a (specific effect to be executed 30 seconds after the start of the change), and the precursor effect in the process of S4305 If the precursor indication b (the timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100 (b))) is set as the start timing of 3 seconds is set as the down period.

  Next, the timing at which the countdown effect starts (the display timing of the countdown effect) is calculated based on the start timing of the specific effect and the set-down countdown period, and the start timing of the precursor effect and the display timing of the countdown effect An interval, that is, a precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed is calculated (S4307). Next, in the process of S4307, it is determined whether the calculated interval (precursor effect period) is within 15 seconds (S4308), and if it is within 15 seconds (S4308: Yes), the effect mode of precursor effect (precursor effect) When the short effect mode is set as the effect mode) (S4309), and it is determined that the interval (precursor effect period) is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S4308: No), the long effect as a predictive effect mode The mode is set (S4310).

  When the process of S4309 or S4310 is finished, a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode (specific effect mode, countdown effect mode, precursor effect mode) is set (S4311), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301: Yes), that is, when a precursor effect is already executed in the winning information command processing (see S3210 in FIG. 141) (a plurality of In the case where the indication effect is executed across the fluctuation display), the plural fluctuation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, and thereafter, the process of S4311 described above is executed, and the present process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the plural variation effect setting process (S4312). In the multiple change effect setting process (S4312), a precursor effect continuation execution process for continuously executing the precursor effect executed during the previous fluctuation display and the countdown effect for the specific effect corresponding to the precursor effect are set Processing is performed.

  When the multiple change effect setting process (S4312) is executed, first, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) is set as a specific effect (S4401), and the countdown period is set to 3 seconds (S4402). Then, a display precursor command is set (S4403). The display precursor command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display precursor command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a precursor effect at the same time as the start of the current fluctuation (including a time difference that can not be identified by the player). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to continuously display the aura from the previous variable display without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the display control device 114 of this control example determines whether the precursor effect is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display ends (the precursor setting flag 223t is turned on from the sound lamp control device 113) Means for determining that a command indicating that it is set is received), and when it is determined that the indication effect is displayed at the timing when the fluctuation display ends by the determination means, the indication effect being executed The effect data storage area temporarily stores data together with time data indicating the end of the fluctuation, and the indication effect data stored in the effect data storage area when the indication precursor command is received, Resumption display means for resuming and displaying from the time when the fluctuation display of is completed, and the indication effect over plural fluctuation When you run, directing a series of aura (eg, effect (see FIG. 98 (a)) to run toward the car to the destination) can be performed without causing cut Interrupting.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, since the display precursor command is output as the display fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation display of the special symbol, a plurality of fluctuations are straddled corresponding to the fluctuation display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform display processing of the effect (continuous effect) to be executed in Therefore, based on the processing of the conventional display control device 114, that is, the content of the variation pattern command received each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the presentation aspect of the period until the special symbol variation ends is displayed The processing can be used to perform continuous rendering, and the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, based on the fluctuation pattern command, when executing continuous effects that continue dynamic display even during the stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special symbol in such a configuration. A continuous effect of a length obtained by adding the above-described symbol determination period to the calculated fluctuation time is set. Thereby, continuous rendition can be smoothly performed also during a period during which a special symbol symbol is determined, that is, during a period between continuous fluctuation patterns.

  In addition, when the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of changes, any configuration other than this control example may be used as long as it can be executed so as not to interrupt the series of precursor effects. In the previous fluctuation display, execute the admonition effect without setting the admonition effect period (end timing of the admonition effect), and set the end timing of the admonition effect based on the timing at which the countdown effect is executed in the current fluctuation display You may configure it.

  Referring back to FIG. 153, the description will be continued. After the process of S4403, the display countdown effect command is set (S4404), the precursor setting flag 223t is set to OFF (S4405), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the effect update processing (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an effect update process (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the variation of the special symbol. It is a process for setting an effect.

  When the effect update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is larger than 0 (S5101). If it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S5101: No), that is, if counting of the elapsed time has not been performed, processing relating to measurement of the elapsed time Skip and shift to the processing of S5108.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is larger than 0 (S5101: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S5102), and then the value of the elapsed time counter 223k after subtraction is It is determined whether it is 0 (S5103). Here, if it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S5103: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S5108.

  In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is 0 (S5103: Yes), next, the display extension flag 223i is set to off (S5104), and the present is a change of the special symbol It is determined whether there is any (S5105). In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the present is not during the change of the special symbol (S5105: No), a normal effect for display for notifying the display control device 114 that the extension display of the ending display of the big hit is ended. A command is set (S5106), and the process proceeds to the process of S5107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5105 that the current special symbol is changing (S5105: Yes), the process of S5106 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5107. By configuring in this way, when the extension effect (effect of extending and displaying the ending display of the big hit) is executed after the big hit, a time condition (4 seconds elapsed) which is one of the ending conditions of the extended effect When the special symbol is not changed, the extension effect is ended immediately, and when the special symbol is changed, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF, and the next special symbol change is started. Sometimes the extension production ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the extension effect is suddenly ended during the change of the special symbol and the player is puzzled, and a complicated effect setting process in the case where the extension effect is ended during the change of the special symbol. The processing load can be reduced because it is not necessary to execute.

  In the processing of S5108, processing relating to the updating of other effects is executed. Specifically, for example, processing relating to an effect based on time information acquired from a real time clock (RTC) is executed (S5108). Thereafter, the process ends.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 155 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in this control example. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S610, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after performing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 155) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is ended.

  Thus, by executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 156, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S610 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S6101. And after repeating the process of S6102 several times including the process of S610-S6105 may be performed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in this control example, a case was described in which a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the video RAM 235 for residence (S6003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S6005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 170A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed to transfer (see S7702 in FIG. 170A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)), the simplified command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (b)) and the simplified display setting process are performed so that the power-on image is drawn (See S6309 in FIG. 157 (b)).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is mainly When it is from the control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation presentation period, and a simple fluctuation effect is produced. It can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 157 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 157 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 125) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern but the power-on image. The command determination process (S6302) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S6303) or the simple display setting processing (S6309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S6304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to “disengagement” and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed to shift to the process of S6304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 158, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S6402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S6405), the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 159 (a), the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described. FIG. 159 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, it is determined whether the prognostic effect flag 233 m is set to on (S6501). Here, if it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233 m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), that is, if the precursor effect is continuously executed from the previous fluctuation, the precursor effect is executed from the start of the fluctuation In order to do this, the variable display data table corresponding to the indication effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6502), and the indication effect flag 233m is set to off (S6503).

  Specifically, from the display data table set during the previous fluctuation and the time data set in the display data table, displayed period information for indicating the period displayed during the previous fluctuation A storage means for temporarily storing the extracted extraction information is provided, and in the process of S6502, the continuation of the prognostic effect executed during the previous special figure fluctuation is configured to be executed in the present special figure fluctuation . Thereby, even when the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of changes, the precursor effect can be displayed smoothly.

  In this control example, the contents of the prognostic effect executed during the previous fluctuation are stored, and the stored continuation of the adjective effect is executed in the present fluctuation, but using other configurations For example, the display data table corresponding to the omen effect is divided into a plurality of effect blocks corresponding to the passage of time, the effect block executed during the previous change is determined, and the current change You may comprise so that the presentation block currently set after the presentation block performed in the middle may be performed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the management of precursor effects performed across a plurality of fluctuations.

  Further, in the present control example, only the prognostic effects for two fluctuations are executable as prognostic effects executed across a plurality of fluctuations, so the prognostic effect flag 233 m is set to ON in the processing of S6501. If it is determined that the present change is the end change of the precursor effect, the precursor effect flag 233m is set to off in the process of S6503, but for example, the precursor effect is the special symbol 3 fluctuation or more Counter that can determine the period (the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol) that the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON (for example, the precursor effect counter) And storage means (for example, effect continuation frequency storage means) for storing how many fluctuation the precursor effect being executed continues (for example, the effect continuation frequency storage means), and each time the fluctuation pattern command processing is executed The value of the indication effect counter is updated, it is determined whether the updated value matches the value stored in the effect continuation number storage means, and if it is determined that the value matches, the indication effect flag 233 m is set to be off. It should be configured to

  In the process of S6501, when it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233m is not on (is off) (S6501: No), or when the process of S6503 is finished, next, the fluctuation effect indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command The variation display data table corresponding to the pattern is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the variation presentation table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d S6504).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in this control example, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6504 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6505).

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6504, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6506), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S6507). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S6508), the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this variation pattern command process (see FIG. 159A), in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6507, the display data table buffer 233d is processed by the process of S6504. At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the set variable display data table. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e by the process of (e), and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is Character ROM 2 in advance From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present control example, when the precursor effect flag 233 m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), each of the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the precursor effect and the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command Is set in the corresponding display data table buffer, and the display data corresponding to the indication effect is preferentially displayed for the portion where the display data overlaps. Specifically, the layer in which the precursor effect is displayed is provided prior to the layer in which the normal fluctuation effect is displayed, and the display process is performed on each layer. The contents displayed on the effect layer can be viewed by the player.

  It should be noted that the configuration corresponding to the omen effect only has to be displayed in preference to the aspect corresponding to the normal effect, and as a method other than the above-described example, display data for the omen effect and the received fluctuation pattern command The display data for normal effect set based on the above may be determined, and only display data to be made to be recognized by the player may be set in the display data table buffer.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). FIG. 159 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (large jack A, big jack B, big jack C, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 157 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. Is set (S6603), and the process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S6602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present control example, in fact, if it is "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display type command for suspension (S6406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display related command among the unprocessed commands. The display related command is a command to be referred to when the jackpot is won, and more specifically, a display opening command for indicating the start of the jackpot, a display round number command, and a display ending. It is executed when a command or the like is received.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 160, the details of the hit related command process (S6409) will be described. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command process (S6409). In the hit related command processing (S6409), processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display round number command, and the display ending command is executed.

  When the hit related command processing (S6409) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a display opening command (S6701), and if there is a display opening command (S6701: Yes), opening command processing is executed. Then (S6702), the process ends. The opening command process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 161 (a). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6701 that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), it is next determined whether there is a display round number command (S6703).

  If it is determined in the process of S6703 that there is a display round number command (S6703: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6704), and this process ends. The round number command process (S6704) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 161 (b). If it is determined in the process of S6703 that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), it is determined whether there is a display ending command (S6705). If there is a display ending command (S6705: Yes), end command processing is executed (S6706), and this processing ends. The ending command process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6705 that there is no display ending command (S6705: No), this process ends.

  Next, opening command processing (S6702) executed in the hit related command processing of FIG. 160 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 (a). FIG. 161 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening command process. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read out from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S6801 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the opening command processing is ended, and the present processing is ended.

  By executing the opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the processing of S8702 while extracting the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is the character ROM 234 in advance As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, when the opening command processing is executed, an opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thus, while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow reading speed It takes a lot of time to transfer image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is shown. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display number-of-rounds command is received, there will be a lot of waiting before the opening effect is ended and the round effect starts There is a possibility that time will occur and the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped.

  In addition, the ending command for display to instruct the start of ending effect is matched with the timing when all round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds) are finished If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the ending command for display is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the round effect is ended. After that, a lot of waiting time occurs until the ending effect is started, and there is a fear that the player may feel anxious as to whether or not the operation is stopped, or a sense of discomfort.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the variation display of the jackpot is finished in the third symbol display device 81 It controls so that transfer of data required for round production and ending production ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are performed in the third symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds) When the second symbol display device 81 is finished, the ending effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether or not the operation is stopped. Absent. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there, It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed until the variation effect which becomes the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. As a result, when the third stage symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the opening effect, so the player does not know whether the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 161 (b), round number command processing (S6704) will be described. FIG. 161 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number process, first, the round number display data table is read out from the round number effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902). Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S6905), and the round number command processing ends, and the present processing ends.

  Next, the ending command process (S6706) will be described with reference to FIG. 162, and FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending command process (S6706). The ending command process (S6706) is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process (S6706), first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is used for the ending effect of the data table storage area 233b. It reads from the table storage area (not shown) and sets it in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 7001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7002). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7001, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S7004). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S7005), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the big hit of the special symbol is finished, so the player is notified that the big hit is finished. It can be done.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no display-related relevant command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), If there is an image change command (S6410: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 163, the details of the rear image change command processing (S6411) will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing (S6411). The rear image change command processing (S6411) executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing (S6411), first, the rear surface image change flag is set to ON (S7101). Thereby, it is possible to determine the change of the rear image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171). Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surface A to C and special back surface A to C corresponding to time effect), the back surface corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command The image discrimination flag is turned on, and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the other back image type is set to off (S7102), the back image change command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command judgment processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171), when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7101 is turned on, after changing from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S7102. Identify the back image type of. Then, if the specified back image type is the back B or back C, the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image data is A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. When the rear image type after the change is the rear surface A, all image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235, so image transfer is not performed.

  Further, in task processing, it is defined that the rear surface type of the rear surface image defined in the display data table displays either the rear surface A to C or the special rear surface A to C corresponding to the time effect, The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the processing of S7102, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the range of the rear image The RAM type in which the image data corresponding to is stored (the video RAM 235 for residence or the video RAM for normal 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, two or more back image change commands are not stored in the command buffer area. However, due to the influence of noise or the like, part of the command may change, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7102, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6410 that there is no rear image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). For example (S6412: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 163 (b). FIG. 163 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing (S6413). This error command processing (S6413) is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing (S6413), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to on (S7201). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7202, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  It returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S6412 that there is no error command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a continuation value related command (S6414), and if it is determined that there is a continuation value related command (S6414: Yes) The continuation value related command process (S6415) is executed, the process corresponding to S6401 and other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 164, the details of the continuation value related command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart of the continuation value related command process (S6415). The continuation value related command process (S6415) is to execute a process corresponding to the continuation value related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the continuation value related command processing (S6415), first, the continuation value display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7301), and the total value stored in the total value storage area 233k The value (total value set at the time of previous command reception) is read (S7302), and the difference with the total value indicated by the command received this time is calculated (S7303).

  Then, the display data table indicating the attack pattern corresponding to the difference calculated in the process of S7303 is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7304), and the value of the command received this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k. (S7305). The total value storage area 233 k is configured to be able to store the total value indicated by the command received during the period in which the continuous effect is being executed, in the order in which the command is received. Furthermore, the value of the difference calculated in the process of S7303 is also configured to be storable.

  Thus, for example, it is calculated in the processing of S7303 when the value of the received sum value continuously satisfies the predetermined condition (for example, when 7 is added to any of the sum values continuously). When the value of the difference is continuously a predetermined number (for example, 300 or more), a special attack pattern display data table can be set.

  After the process of S7305, next, null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7306). Then, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7301 and S7304, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7307), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S7308). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S7309), and the continuation value related command processing ends, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present control example, the voice lamp control device 113 only outputs a command indicating the total value of the continuation value (HP value), and the total value set in the previous continuation value related command processing And the difference value is determined on the display control device 114 side, and the display control device 114 executes a display mode (effect mode) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result. Running. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 while diversifying the display of the continuous value (HP value) in the continuous effect (battle effect).

  In this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 has a means for setting the total value, and the display control device 114 is a difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the previously set total value and the currently set total value. And means for setting the display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means, but the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 has a means for setting the first continuation value (the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f) to vary the continuation value (HP value). Means for setting all other means (a second continuation value (continuity value selected using the continuation value sub selection table 222g) for varying the continuation value (HP value), last time Difference calculation means for calculating the difference between the fixed sum value and the currently set sum value, and means for setting a display mode (attack pattern, subtraction number display) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculation means) Of the above-described means, the sound lamp control device 113 may be configured to set only the attack pattern.

  It returns to the explanation of FIG. In the process of S6414, when it is determined that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: No), next, it is determined whether there is an expected degree effect related command (S6416), and it is determined that there is an expected degree effect related command (S6416: Yes) executes the expectation degree effect related command processing (S6417), and returns to the processing of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 165, the details of the expectation degree rendering related command processing (S6417) will be described. FIG. 165 is a flowchart of an expectation degree effect related command process (S6417). The expectation degree rendering related command processing (S6417) is to execute processing corresponding to the expectation degree related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the expectation degree effect related command processing (S6417), first, a display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the received expectation degree effect related command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7401). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7401 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7402).

  Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7402, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7403), and the pointer 233f is It initializes to 0 (S7404) and returns to the command determination processing.

  In this control example, in the expectation degree effect setting process (see S3803 in FIG. 151) set and executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the display mode (see FIG. 102 (a)) at the start time of the expectation degree effect In order to notify an expectation degree display mode to be notified in the expectation degree effect command for display to show a display mode (see FIG. 103 (a)) which is a presentation result (final display mode) and The display expectation degree target mode notification command for indicating the display mode (see FIG. 103 (b)) is set including information indicating the display timing.

  Then, in the expectation degree rendering related command processing (S6417 in FIG. 165), display setting is performed so that the display mode corresponding to each received command is displayed at the display timing corresponding to the display timing information included in each command. Specifically, the display mode (see FIG. 102 (a)) at the start time of the expected degree effect is displayed corresponding to the timing when the expected degree effect is started, and thereafter, the display mode corresponding to the expected degree effect (See FIG. 102 (b)) is displayed. After that, when the command indicating the current expectation degree increase effect includes information for notifying the expectation degree display mode to be notified, the display mode corresponding to the display timing information included in the command is displayed. Display at the timing. Thereafter, the display mode (see FIG. 103 (a)) which is the effect result (final display mode) is displayed.

  If the player is able to select which of the expected degree display modes to be displayed for the expected degree increase effect is selected among the expected degree display modes to be displayed in a plurality, the selection result (correct or A command for indicating the incorrect answer is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and the presence or absence of the display of the final display mode is determined based on the content of the received command. In other words, when the player's selection result is correct, each process (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing) included in the display expectation degree effect command is expected degree effect related command processing (S6417) If the selection result of the player is not correct, the information is displayed among the information (information for indicating the display mode and information for indicating the display timing) included in the expectation-for-display effect command. The setting information on the display of the final display mode is cleared, and the display process is executed so that the final display mode is not displayed.

  Referring back to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no expectation degree rendering related command (S6416: No), it is next determined whether there is a countdown rendering related command (S6417). If it is determined in the process of S6417 that there is a command related to the countdown effect (S6417: Yes), the countdown effect related command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to the process of S6401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 166, the countdown effect related command process (S6419) will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of countdown effect related command processing (S6419). The countdown effect related command process (S6419) is to execute a process corresponding to the countdown effect related command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the countdown effect related command process (S6419), first, it is determined whether there is a display additional precursor command (S7501), and when it is determined that there is a display additional precursor command (S7501: Yes), that is, the previous fluctuation When the precursor effect continued from the display is executed, an additional precursor data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the display additional precursor command is set in the display data table buffer (S7502), and the display data table set in S7502 is supported. A transfer data table to be transferred is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7503).

  Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7503, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), and the pointer 233f is It initializes to 0 (S7509), and returns to the command determination processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7501 that there is no usage warning command for display (S7501: No), the countdown effect data table corresponding to the received display countdown effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S7506) The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7506 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7507).

  Based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7507, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7508), and the pointer 233f is It initializes to 0 (S7509), and returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no countdown effect related command (S6418: No), it is determined whether there is another display command, and if it is determined that there is another display command, The corresponding processing is executed (S6420). Here, as other display commands, for example, a command for holding ball number for display indicating increase or decrease of the number of balls for holding, and an effect (so-called continuous notice) targeting a specific change across a plurality of changes There are a display time presentation command indicating a time presentation based on a measurement result by a display continuous notice command or a time measurement unit (so-called real time clock) included in the audio lamp control device 113.

  When the display ball number command for display is received, the new ball number holding flag is set to on. Then, the number of holding balls is extracted from the received holding ball number command for display, and the number of holding balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated by updating the holding ball number counter based on the extracted number of holding balls. Update display. When the display continuous notice command is received, the new continuous notice command flag is set to on. Then, the distribution between the back of the fish school and the back of the foam is extracted from the continuous notice command for display. Next, the continuous advance notice information storage area is updated based on the extracted allocation, and the continuous advance notice corresponding to the updated content is displayed.

  In the process of S6401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes ), The processing of S6402 to S6420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when the process of S6401 determines that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S6308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, ie, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command In addition to performing variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 159 (b)) which are processings corresponding to the respective commands, the other commands are extracted. And perform processing for discarding without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159A) executed in this case, a display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and In this case, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the power-on are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. In the process, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 167, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7601), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S7601: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, the processes of S7602 and S7603 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7604. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S7602). Is determined to be on (S7603), and if the error occurrence flag is on (S7603: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed based on the error determination flag (S7604).

  Here, the warning image setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the warning image setting process. When the warning image setting process is executed, the warning image data is expanded based on the error determination flag (S7701), the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7702), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7603: No), the process of S7604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7605.

  In S7605 of FIG. 167, pointer update processing is executed (S7605). Here, the details of the pointer update process (S7605) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing (S7605). In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S7801). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7801, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information (S7802). As a result, if it is the End information (S7782: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S7803), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S7803: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233 d is set in the clock counter 233 h (S 7804), the pointer 233 f is set to 1 for initialization (S 7805), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7803 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S7806), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S7802: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 167, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7606). Here, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7606 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and the display coordinate position or Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7607), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S7608). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7608: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interruption process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7608: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S7609).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7609: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is performed, so the finalized display of the third symbol is set, so S7610 The process of S7615 is performed. In the process of S7610, the finalized display data table is read out from the finalized display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7610), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thus, the content is cleared (S7611). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7612).

  When the process of S7612 ends, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7613). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7615) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect to be performed. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In task processing, until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the processing of S7615, and the specification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is on in the process of S7609 (S7609: Yes), the process of S7616 to S7621 is executed to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the process of S7616, it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7616). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S7616: No), the demonstration display data table is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7617), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the content is cleared (S7618). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233 h (S 7619).

  When the process of S7619 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7620), and a demonstration display flag indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7621), and this process is ended and V division is performed. Return to loading process.

  As a result, even if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the final display of the third symbol is started, the display variation pattern command or the display opening command indicating the start of the next variation presentation is received. If not, it is possible to set the drawing contents so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 automatically.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, the details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 170 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901: YES), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so resident image transfer setting processing Is executed (S7902) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S7901, that is, if it is off (S7901: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7903), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170 (b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7902) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 170 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7902).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S8001), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S8001: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S8002). In this process of S8002, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S8002 (S8002: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8002: Yes), the process proceeds to S8003. Further, as a result of the process of S8001, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8001: No), the process proceeds to S8003.

  In the process of S8003, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S8003), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S8003: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8004), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the resident video RAM 235 is not used. To the designated address of the video RAM 235 for residence. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  On the other hand, if all resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the process of S8003 (S8003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S8005), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 157 (b)). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are performed, drawing of an image in normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The image of normal time is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) (see S7901: No in FIG. 170A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171, a normal image transfer setting process (S7903) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7903).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7605) of the display setting process (S6303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S8101). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S8102), and if it is transfer data information (S8102: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S8103) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S8104), and the process proceeds to S8105.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S8102 (S8102: No), the process of S8103 and S8104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8105. In the process of S8105, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of the image data is completed (S8105), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S8105: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S8106).

  In the process of S8106, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S8106 (S8106: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S8106: Yes), the process proceeds to S8107. Further, as a result of the processing of S8105, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S8105: No), the processing proceeds to S8107.

  In the process of S8107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8107). If the transfer start flag is on (S8107: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag Is turned off (S8108), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S8103 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to S8113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S8107: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag 233w is on (S8109). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S8109: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109: Yes), this means that the back image is changed, and therefore, the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S8110), and provided for each back image type. Among the rear surface image determination flags, the image data of the rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface image determination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S8111). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S8112), and the process proceeds to S8113.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S8111, when the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S8113, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113). The determination in the process of S8113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S8113 (S8113: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S8113 (S8113: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S8114). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S8114, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S8115), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, it is indicated by the display stop type command. When it is determined that the stop type information to be output is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the jackpot effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present control example, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305) (S8201). That is, in the processing of S8201, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S8202). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S8202, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S8203). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 157 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the first control example, in the third symbol variation display for showing the player the lottery result of the special symbol, the specific effect (for example, “PUSH display for operating the frame button 22” in the first control example The countdown effect set based on the timing at which the specific effect is set, and the period from when the indicated effect is started until the countdown effect is started It is configured to execute the precursor effect set to.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestion effect for notifying the timing when the specific effect occurs is executed for a predetermined period, the period for performing the suggestion effect (period for performing the prognostic effect) can be freely set. .

  In the first control example, the timing to start the suggested rendering and the specific rendering to be the target of the suggested rendering can be selected from among a plurality of them. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set variously the period during which the suggestion effect is performed by various combinations.

  Furthermore, it is determined whether there is a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) between the timing at which the suggested effect starts and the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and based on the result of the determination, the aspect of the prognostic effect or the countdown effect It is configured to be variable. Thereby, the player can play the game while predicting the effect to be executed in the future based on the content of the effect to be executed.

  In addition, even on the basis of the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol, it is configured such that the aspect of the prognostic effect and the countdown effect is variable. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, a long period (for example, 7 seconds) is easily set as a period in which the countdown effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the current variable display corresponds to the special symbol that has been won in the winning by the aspect of the countdown effect.

  In addition, as an aspect of the effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, other than the aspect of the first control example may be used. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the suggestion effect period is long The following aspect may be set. In this case, a part of the effect mode is variable according to a period (indication effect period) in which the indication effect is executed, and the indication effect period is long for the player and the lottery result of the special symbol is For example, the color of the display mode of the character or the like displayed during the suggestion effect may be variable according to the length of the elapsed period (blue → yellow → red → rainbow) The stage index (for example, the degree of expectation) displayed during the suggestive effect may be configured to be variable according to the length of the elapsed period.

  Further, each of a plurality of specific effects may be set to have a different jackpot expectation degree, and the jackpot expectation degree may be made different depending on the target specific effect. In this case, points capable of performing specific effects are provided at a plurality of points in the variable display period, and among the plurality of points, the specific effects to be executed at the points targeted for the suggested effects are lotterys of special symbols. It may be configured to set based on the result. Thereby, the countdown effect is started, and it is determined as a specific effect even after it is determined to which timing (a point during the variable display period) the countdown effect is executed for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which rendition is to be performed and to enjoy the lasting rendition.

  In the first control example, among the suggested effects, the effects to be executed as the admonition effects are used as an effect mode (an effect mode that suggests the execution timing of the countdown effects) for indicating the period of the adversary effects. As described above, in addition to the effect for indicating the effect period to the player, for example, the effect mode for suggesting to the player the content of the specific effect to be the target of the present effect, or the variation display of this time In the above, the presentation mode (notification mode) may be set to notify the player that the countdown effect is to be executed.

  Further, in the first control example, the start timing of the suggested effect (the start timing of the accompaniment effect) and the end timing of the suggested effect (the end timing of the countdown effect) are separately set, The suggestive effect can be performed so as to straddle a plurality of variable displays. Thus, even for a specific effect set at an initial point (for example, 5 seconds from the start of change) of the variable display, it is possible to set the start timing of the suggested effect during the immediately preceding variable display. Thus, the degree of freedom in setting the suggested effect can be increased.

  In the case of using the above-described technology, the suggested effect may be set to straddle a plurality of variable displays based on the contents of a plurality of winning information that is already stored on hold, or the variable display of the special symbol is executed. A means is provided for determining the ball that has won during the game (the winning ball that will be the next change), and by the determination means, when the remaining change period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period, suggested effects are provided to straddle a plurality of change displays. It may be set. In the latter case, it is difficult to store pending memory (when the variation time of the special symbol is short, or when it is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140), the special symbol is Even when the first pending storage (the pending storage used for the next change) occurs during the change, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect straddling a plurality of change displays. Thereby, the opportunity to perform suggestion production can be increased and a production effect can be heightened.

  The variation time of the special symbol is generally configured so that a long variation time is easily selected when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot expectation degree is greater as the suggestion presentation period is executed so as to correspond to this. It is configured to be high. In the conventional type pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, there is a problem that the jackpot expectation for the current variable display is predicted at the timing when the suggestion effect is started. On the other hand, in the first control example, a plurality of points are provided for the timing at which the suggested effect is started and the timing at which the suggested effect is ended, so that the suggested effect period can not be predicted from the timing at which the suggested effect is started. It is composed of In addition, even if the suggested effect period is the same, the period in which the indication effect is performed and the period in which the countdown effect is performed are configured to be variable. Furthermore, as a specific effect to be an object of the suggested effect, any specific effect of the specific effects having different degrees of jackpot expectation is configured to be selectable.

  In the first control example configured in this way, even after the suggested effect is started, the current suggested effect period, the specific effect to be targeted, and the period of the adjective effect or the period of the countdown effect Can be predicted at an early stage, and it can be suppressed that the rendering effect is reduced.

  In the first control example, the countdown display in which the number is regularly decreased (for example, every one second) is used as the effect mode to be executed during the countdown effect, but the timing at which the specific effect is executed is It is sufficient that the configuration can be notified to the person correctly, for example, a plurality of divided regions are regularly filled (for example, every one second), and a specific effect is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed. May be In this case, the number of divided areas is a display mode for indicating the period of the countdown effect. Moreover, the structure other than this may be sufficient.

  In the first control example, display data for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds) is stored in the storage area of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 as display data to be displayed during the countdown effect. Based on the period information which shows the period of the countdown effect set to the suggestion effect performed, it is comprised so that the display data of a corresponding part may be displayed. The storage capacity can be reduced by having display data in this manner.

  In the first control example, the end timing of the suggested effect (the end timing of the countdown effect) is configured to be set based on the start timing of the specific effect set for the variation effect of the object, but the countdown The end timing of the effect may be matched with the start timing of the specific effect. For example, in the case where the specific effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the setting is performed based on the end timing of the specific effect. It may be configured.

  As described above, in the first control example, the end timing of the countdown effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect so that the end timing of the countdown effect executed as the suggested effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. Then, from the set end timing, the period (time) for executing the countdown effect is calculated backward to set the countdown effect period. Thereby, it is possible to easily set the countdown effect for a predetermined period in correspondence with the execution timing of the specific effect.

  In the first control example described above, as a period for executing the suggestion effect, the indication effect period in which the indication effect is executed and the countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is performed are set in advance before the indication effect is executed. However, other methods may be used, for example, the timing at which the suggestion effect starts (the timing at which the accompaniment effect starts) and the timing at which the suggestion effect ends (the timing at which the countdown effect ends, ie, A configuration may be used in which only the timing at which the specific effect is started is set in advance, and the timing at which the precursor effect is switched to the countdown effect is set after the suggestion effect is performed.

  In this case, for example, it is preferable to execute display control so as to switch from the precursor effect to the countdown effect based on execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the precursor effect. Thus, the player can be motivated to participate in the game in order to execute the countdown effect quickly. Moreover, based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a period in which the countdown effect can be performed is determined in advance, and the timing at which the predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the omen effect can execute the countdown effect. It is preferable to configure to switch the omen effect to the countdown effect only when it is the timing, and to configure the operation effect for operating the frame button 22 during the omen effect to be executed at various timings. By configuring in this manner, the player can be motivated to participate in the operation effect that is executed during the omen effect, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the pseudo-countdown production | presentation (pseudo countdown production | presentation) which does not target specific production | presentation may be performed during precursor production. By executing this pseudo-countdown effect, it is possible to make the player think that the indication effect has ended, and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the future development of the effect. As described above, by configuring the pseudo countdown effect so that it is easy to execute when the jackpot is won, it is possible to play the game while expecting that the executed countdown effect is a pseudo one. Until the countdown effect (pseudo-countdown effect) ends, it is possible to cause the effect being continuously executed to be focused.

  In the first control example described above, the length of the precursor effect period to be executed as the suggestion effect is determined, and the effect mode of the precursor effect period is set based on the result of the determination. A configuration in which the length to be executed is not determined may be used, and for example, the presentation mode of the prognostic presentation may be set based on the timing at which the suggested presentation is performed. In this case, since the length of the antecedent effect period is not determined, it is preferable to use an effect mode that does not give a sense of incongruity to the player at any timing, as an effect mode executed as an admonition effect. It is better to use a dynamic display mode that is executed according to a certain rule such as an effect that a car keeps running at a constant speed on the road.

  By using such an effect mode, even if the accompaniment effect is executed without determining the length of the accompaniment effect period, it is possible to switch to the countdown effect smoothly without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In addition, even if it is a case where such a production mode is used, a display mode (for example, color) of a part of the production mode (in the above-mentioned example, a car) according to the elapsed period of the prognostic effect as described above Of course, it may be configured to be variable.

  Further, instead of determining in advance all the lengths of the precursor effect period in which the precursor effect is executed, only the lengths of some of the periods may be determined. For example, the first precursor effect period of the first half and the second precursor effect period of the second half may be divided, and the length of that period may be determined in advance only for the second precursor effect period. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a specific antecedent effect only during a predetermined period (second antecedent effect period) retroactively from the end timing of the antecedent effect (the start timing of the countdown effect), and more smoothly. The effect can be switched from the omen effect to the countdown effect.

  As described above, in the first control example described above, the game state (probable change state (high probability, presence of power supply)) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state (low probability, no power supply) as the game state. An effect (battle effect) for indicating that the time saving state (low probability, presence of charge) is set is performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily notify the player that the gaming state advantageous to the player is continuing.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned battle effect is based on an effect (battle reach) indicating whether the gaming state advantageous to the player is ended and an effect (pre-battle effect) for determining an effect mode of the battle reach. Configured. By configuring in this manner, a battle is performed in a period other than the case where the gaming state advantageous to the player actually ends (for example, when it is determined that the gaming state shifts to the normal state by the drawing of the special symbol). Since the effect can be continuously executed, the player feels anticipation for the player to continue playing in the advantageous gaming state, and a sense of anxiety that makes the player think that the advantageous gaming state has ended. The game can be played continuously while being entertained.

  Furthermore, during the battle effect described above, an effect is executed in which a continuation value (HP value) increases or decreases to indicate whether the game state (advantage state) advantageous to the player is continuously set. . The continuation value (HP value) is configured to increase or decrease based on the currently set gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol, the remaining period in which the advantageous state is set, or the like.

  Here, when the increase / decrease pattern of the continuation value (HP value) mentioned above is increased and an effect rich in variation is executed, the currently set gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the advantageous state is set. Management required to be associated with the remaining period and the displayed continuation value (HP value). Such management is intended to increase the processing load of the pachinko machine 10, and it is required to increase variations of effects while reducing the processing load.

  Therefore, in the first control example, the above-described expected value (HP value) is set based on the gaming state currently set, the lottery result of the special symbol, or the remaining period in which the advantageous state is set The sum of the main continuation value (for example, the value of the order of 100) and the value set for the purpose of increasing the effect variation (for example, the value of the order of 10 continuations) is continued It was configured to be displayed as a value (HP value).

  As described above, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by adding the value that is actually managed and set and the value that is set to be rendered.

  Further, in the first control example described above, the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuation value is displayed. By displaying this display mode, it is possible to visually notify the player of the degree of increase or decrease of the continuation value, so it is possible to execute an effect that is easy to understand.

  In the first control example, as a display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuation value, “weak attack” and a large difference amount (as a display mode corresponding to a small difference amount (for example, a range of 50 to 150) For example, it has “strong attack” as a display mode corresponding to 350 to 550) and “medium attack” as a display mode corresponding to the difference amount (for example, range of 151 to 349) between them. When the set display mode (attack pattern) is executed, different effects are performed for each display mode, and then the continuation value is updated.

  That is, the player roughly grasps the decrease amount (difference value) of the continuation value (HP) by grasping the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then, concretely, by the updated continuation value. Will be able to grasp the By displaying in such an order, it is possible to notify the information on the game to the player step by step, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the first control example described above, when setting the display mode (attack pattern) described above to reduce the control load of the effect, it is not the difference value of the summed continuation values (HP), but the main continuation The display mode (attack pattern) is set based on the difference value of the values. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the continuation value (the continuation value before update, the continuation value after update) used when setting the display mode (attack pattern) or the pattern of the difference value.

  In addition, as described above, when setting the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the continuation value (HP value) based on the difference value of the main continuation value, the continuation value (the third symbol on the display) The difference value between the main continuation value and the continuation value that is displayed on the display unit 81 plus the difference value of the main continuation value does not match, and the display mode is different from the range of the difference value in appearance There is a problem that the (attack pattern) is set.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in the first control example, when the value of the continuation value (HP) is continuously updated plural times, the difference value of the continuation value (HP) on the display and the main continuation value Are configured such that the display mode (attack pattern) to be set is the same as the difference value of. By configuring in this manner, the above-described problems can be solved.

  Furthermore, in the first control example, there is provided a main continuation value determination means for determining the value of the set main continuation value, and based on the determination result of the main continuation value determination means, The selection tables for selection are configured to be different. Specifically, when the value of the main continuation value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the selection table in which “−20 to +20” is defined as a selectable range for the sub continuation value is referred to If it is less than the value (for example, 200), the selection table in which "-30 to 0" is defined as the selectable range of the sub-continuation value is referred to.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress selection of a positive value as the sub continuation value when the main continuation value is zero.

  In the first control example, as described above, the first effect (pre-battle effect) and the second effect (battle reach) are provided as effects for indicating a period (advantage period) in which a game state advantageous to the player is set. And a unit effect (battle effect). In the first effect, an effect for suggesting an effect mode of the second effect is performed, and in the second effect, an effect for notifying the player whether or not the advantageous period ends is performed.

  Furthermore, in the first control example, the above-described unit effect is repeatedly executed while the advantageous period is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform the second effect a plurality of times during the advantageous period, so it is possible to play the game during the advantageous period while giving the player a sense of tension. .

  In addition, by enabling execution of a plurality of unit effects while the advantageous period is set, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which one unit effect continues for a long time. This can suppress the extension of the effect content.

  In the first control example, a lottery result of a special symbol is a specific lottery result (a period of advantage period is terminated) as a condition (a condition for executing a second effect) in which one unit effect is ended. And the remaining period of the advantageous period is 0, the case where the number of times of variation of the special symbol is equal to or more than a predetermined number is used. Thus, the second effect is executed except when the advantageous period ends, but the second effect is executed when the other conditions are satisfied. It is also good.

  In addition, if the second effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous period ends is executed a plurality of times in a short period, the player may get bored with the second effect early, so the first control In the example, it is suppressed that the 2nd production (pseudo 2nd production) performed for the purpose of production is performed two or more times in a predetermined period. Specifically, the number of times of variation of the special symbol after the unit effect is executed is counted, and the pseudo second effect is not executed when the counter value is less than a predetermined number. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being bored with the second effect early.

  In the first control example described above, any of a plurality of expectation degree effect modes are provided as an expectation degree effect mode, in which a plurality of expectation degree effect modes are indicated in order to gradually suggest an expectation degree that the lottery result of a special symbol in fluctuation is a big hit. It is configured such that an expectation degree variable (rising) effect is executed in which the effect mode is changed to the effect mode in which the expectation degree which is the big hit is set higher than the effect mode.

  Then, at least one of the plurality of expectation degree effect modes described above is configured to be displayed at different timings, and the expectation degree variable (rising) effect indicates which expectation degree effect mode is expected to be changed. It is executed in a display mode in which it is difficult for the player to grasp.

  In the first control example configured as described above, when the expectation degree variable (rising) effect is executed, it is reported that the rendering mode of any of the expectation degree effect modes is variable (rising). In this state, the player should watch the effect while expecting the desired expectation degree effect mode (for example, the expectation degree effect mode in which the expectation degree which is already a big hit is already set high) is further changed (increased) Can.

  In the first control example, the target degree of expectation effect mode is variable by changing the timing at which the expected degree variable (rising) effect is performed. Specifically, an expectation degree effect mode to be displayed later than when an expectation degree variable (rise) effect is executed is configured to be a target. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing at which the expectation degree variable (rising) effect is executed.

  Further, in the first control example, the variable degree (increased) effect is configured to be able to change the effect mode of a plurality of expected degree effect modes, and the variable amount is variable with respect to each expected degree effect mode It is configured to display a variable amount to indicate a value obtained by adding up (stages). As a result, after the expectation degree variable (rising) effect is executed and it is determined that one of the expectation degree effect modes is variable, the player is made to grasp the amount by which the expectation degree effect mode is variable in the current effect. it can.

  Furthermore, after the expectation degree variable (rising) effect is executed, a notification mode for notifying the player of an object for which the expectation degree is raised in the current effect is displayed, so the expectation degree effect mode targeted for the player is displayed. It can be easily grasped.

  In the first control example described above, a plurality of expectation degree effect modes having effect modes capable of displaying the jackpot expectation degree in stages are provided, and it is configured to be able to display different stages of each expectation degree effect mode By combining and grasping the display contents of each expected degree presentation mode being carried out, it is constituted so as to predict whether or not the present fluctuation has been won by the big hit.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to complicate the aspect that indicates the jackpot expectation, and it is possible to provide the player with pleasure to predict, but on the other hand, the display contents of each expectation degree presentation aspect There is a problem that the processing load for control increases. Furthermore, when the effect mode for raising the expectation degree is biased, specifically, only one expected degree effect mode among the plurality of expectation degree effect modes can be changed to the effect mode indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high. If the remaining expectation degree effect mode remains the effect mode indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is low, the player is given an excessive expectation for the jackpot win, and the effect is distrusted. There was a problem of giving it.

  On the other hand, in the first control example, in the plurality of expectation degree effect modes, the expectation degree effect mode before being varied by the expectation degree variable (rising) effect is configured to be set in a plurality of patterns, and a special symbol According to the degree of expectation set based on the lottery result, the degree of expectation of the expectation degree rendering mode set in the pattern is changed (increased). By configuring in this manner, the above-described multiple problems can be solved.

<Additional Effect Example of First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 173 to FIG. 181, an effect additional example of the first control example will be described. In this additional example, an effect (a title imparting effect) that progresses based on the content of the operation on the frame button 22 is added to the first control example described above. This title giving effect is operated during the period when the operation effect is not executed, the number of occurrences of the operation effect requiring the frame button operation, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated for the operation effect (the number of effective operations), Based on the number of times of operation of the frame button 22 (the number of invalid operations), it is executed so as to make the benefit (title) to be given to the player different.

  By using such an effect, it is possible for the player not only to operate the frame button 22 as instructed but also to provide enjoyment for performing other operations (including non-operation), and the player is early in the game You can suppress getting bored.

  Furthermore, in this additional example, the appearance frequency of the operation effect (for example, the effect of dropping the character unit (displacement member) 450) for operating the frame button 22 is variable based on the benefit (title) given to the player It is configured to As a result, for the player who is operating the frame button 22 actively, the operation effect appears frequently, and for the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22, the appearance frequency of the operation effect is set. It can be lowered.

  In addition, compared with the case where the player uses a technique in which the player selects the appearance frequency of the operation effect in advance, the appearance frequency of the operation effect can be adjusted to the player's preference based on the operation result of the operation effect executed during the game Therefore, the operation performed by the player can be reduced.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 173 and FIG. 174, the operation presentation performed in the present additional example will be described. FIG. 173 (a) is a schematic view showing a conversational effect which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, and FIG. 173 (b) is an effect when the frame button 22 is operated in the conversational effect. It is a schematic diagram showing the contents.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (a), in this additional example, an accessory unit (displacement member) 450 is provided to cover the upper part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2 for details) ). Then, the characters "I can talk with the button PUSH" prompting the operation of the frame button 22 are displayed in the sub display area Ds. Here, when operating the frame button 22 are displayed characters "Hello" in the main display area Dm as if as shown in FIG. 173 (b), the character object unit 450 is a comment. As described above, in this additional example, a conversational presentation that can be conducted with the feature unit 450 is performed. Note that the character product unit 450 can be moved to a position other than the position (initial position) shown in FIG. 173 (b) (for example, a position lowered to cover the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) For example, determination means for determining the position of the bonus item and comment display position setting means for displaying a comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the bonus item determined by the determination means may be provided. . As a result, regardless of the character object position, always the character object unit 450 is able to display the characters of "Hello" in the main display area Dm as if it were a comment.

  Further, as the determination means for determining the position of the article, means for directly detecting the position of the article unit 450 using a proximity sensor may be used, or a drive motor for driving the article unit 450 or a drive of the drive motor A detection means may be provided to detect the driving situation (eg, the number of steps) of the transmission means (pulley etc.) for transmitting the force, and the position of the product may be determined based on the detection result of the detection means. In the case where 450 is driven based on an operation scenario, a means for determining an accessory position based on the progress of the operation scenario may be used. When using the configuration of the last person, in addition to the current character position based on the content of the movement scenario, it becomes possible to grasp the future character position, so the display position of the comment according to the character position It can be set in advance. Furthermore, information on the display position of the comment may be associated in advance with the operation scenario of the character article unit 450 and stored, or a plurality of the above-described means may be combined.

  At the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a level display area Dr1 for indicating the current level (setting value) and a title display area Dr2 for indicating the current title are displayed. Here, the level (set value) is a value to be added (increased) based on the game history (game period, game result, effect contents, etc.), and in the present additional example, “third grade” to “send” The levels up to the level are provided in stages (see FIG. 176 (c)), and in FIG. 173 (a), “Level 3”, which is the lowest level, is displayed.

  The title is a privilege that is set based on the level (set value) described above and the operation content of the frame button 22. Although a detailed description will be described later, a plurality of systems are set to this title, and one system is set according to the game content (operation content of the frame button 22). Then, a unique benefit (title) corresponding to each level is set in each system, and "beginner" is displayed in FIG. 173 (a).

  In FIG. 173 (b), based on the fact that the frame button 22 has been operated in the state of FIG. 173 (a), the comment is displayed from the role unit 450, and the level displayed in the level display area Dr1 is increased. "2nd grade" is displayed, and "half a half" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. Note that the comment content of the character unit 450 is variably set according to the level and the title, and the higher the level and the title, the more advantageous information for the player (for example, the winning expectation during the fluctuation and the current gaming state) Information about the game) is set to be easily displayed. Thereby, the player can play the game eagerly.

  Next, the contents of the bonus game drive effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in the present additional example, will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (a). FIG. 174 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the feature driving effect. As shown in FIG. 174 (a), when the bonus game driving effect is executed, the characters “press the button and drop the bonus object” are displayed in the main display area Dm as the effect of prompting the operation of the frame button 22. An image imitating the frame button 22 is displayed.

  In addition, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds, the characters "chance when dropped" suggesting the detection result of the accessory driving effect is displayed. During the period when the bonus driving effect is being executed (during the operation valid period of the framework button 22), the frame button 22 is operated, and the bonus falls to a position covering the main display area Dm. It indicates that the special symbol is highly likely to have won the jackpot. As described above, in the operation effect for operating the frame button 22, by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to detect the winning of the jackpot quickly so that the player can be motivated. The frame button 22 can be operated.

  In this additional example, as described above, different benefits (titles) are provided when the frame button 22 is actively operated and when not operated, so when the operation effect is performed In addition, it is possible to make the player select whether to operate the frame button 22 eagerly, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Furthermore, in this additional example, different benefits (titles) are provided according to the title system set as described above, so even if one game continues to be played under one title system, It is configured so that all benefits (titles) can not be obtained. This makes it difficult to acquire all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and it is possible to suppress prematurely getting bored with the game.

  Further, since the title system is set according to the operation content of the frame button, all benefits (titles) can not be acquired unless the operation content of the frame button 22 is devised. Thereby, it is difficult to obtain all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and various effects to be executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22 can be provided to the player. The presentation effect can be enhanced.

  Here, as described above, since it is necessary to set different title systems in order to obtain various benefits (titles), the current title system is initialized (the history of operation contents of the frame button 22 is initialized) Although it is possible to do this, there is a risk that the player's motivation may deteriorate if all the history based on the game which has been continuously performed is initialized. .

  Therefore, in this additional example, there is a change operation that allows the player to select whether to initialize all the histories or delete the histories up to the stage where different title systems can be set. FIG. 174 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the display screen during this change operation.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (b), in the main display area Dm, the characters “from the beginning” and a part of the history are selected as the all-erase selection mode Dr3 indicating the selection unit selected when initializing all the histories. As the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 indicating the selection unit to be selected when erasing the character, the characters "from the middle" are displayed. Here, when the all deletion selection mode Dr3 is selected, the level (set value) displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title displayed in the title display area Dr2 are set to initial values. The all-erase selection mode Dr3 is mainly selected when erasing the operation history of a different player.

  On the other hand, when the partial deletion selection mode Dr4 is selected, the display going back to the stage in which different title systems can be set is displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title display area Dr2. Although the detailed description will be described later, in this control example, among the low level (set value), the same benefit (title) is provided regardless of any title system, and the level (set value) When is high, one title line among the plural title lines is further branched into plural title lines.

  Thereby, the content retroactively displayed when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected can be made different depending on the level (setting value) or title when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected. Note that a title system that is not set unless the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected may be provided. As a result, it is necessary not only to add (increase) the level (set value) but also to subtract (drop) it, so it is possible to provide a game with more variation.

  As described above, in the first control example, as a jackpot game effect, when the jackpot game is executed a plurality of times during a predetermined period, the jackpot effect straddling the plurality of jackpot games (Consecutive jackpot effect) is configured to be executed, and the content of the jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game is configured to suggest to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is over. However, if it is a gaming machine having a special gaming state other than the jackpot game, for example, a gaming machine having a small hitting game in which the privilege that can be given to the player is smaller than the jackpot gaming, the predetermined period is In the case where a small hit game or a big hit game (hereinafter referred to as a hit game) is executed a plurality of times, a winning effect (a continuous hit that spans the plurality of hit games Ri director) may be configured to be executed. As described above, in the first control example described above, the contents described for the jackpot winning may be executed for game results other than the jackpot (for example, small jacks), other than the jackpot The game results include various game results existing as a conventionally known configuration.

  Further, in the first control example, it is suggested to the player whether or not the jackpot will be won again within the predetermined period (within the suspension storage) as a game result after the currently-performed jackpot game is over. However, other game results may be suggested to the player by a hit effect to be executed during a hit, for example, the number of winning jackpots (including small hits) in the holding memory, the jackpot winning The bonus content (including the small hit), the gaming state (certain change state or time saving state) after the end of the big hit (including the small hit) to be won in the holding memory, and a plurality of game results (big hit, small hit) If it is a target, it may be configured to indicate the type of the game result and the order of execution.

  Furthermore, in the first control example, the contents of the jackpot effect are varied based not only on the ball entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, but also on the ball entry information newly stored in the jackpot game. Is configured to be able to By configuring in this way, it is possible to refer to more ball entry information, to make it possible to easily execute the continuous jackpot effect, and to make the player interested in the jackpot effect.

  In addition, in this control example, as the jackpot continuous effect, the contents of the jackpot effect can be varied based on the stored number of ball entry information at the time when the jackpot game is executed. Specifically, based on the stored number of entering information at the time the jackpot game is executed, a plurality of timings for suggesting (notifying) the jackpot winning again within the predetermined period (within the suspension storage) are different. The jackpot effect of is configured to be executed.

  Among them, in the specific jackpot effect (effect for extras) that can be executed when the number of balls held special symbol (number of entering information) is not the upper limit, to obtain new entering information during the big hit game, the ball information When the player wins the jackpot, the contents of the jackpot effect can be varied so as not to be noticed by the player.

  In the specific jackpot effect described above, the jackpot to partially inform (for example, notification for five rounds) the jackpot game (a plurality of round games (for example, 15 round games)) to be executed during one jackpot Since the effect is executed, it is possible to inform the player incomprehensiblely how many rounds of jackpot games have been executed while the specific jackpot effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the gaming state after the big hit in advance by the number of rounds set to the big hit game.

  In this control example, the jackpot game addition display (the number-of-round display) by the effect for addition is configured to be performed every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). Then, the length of the inter-round interval period in the predetermined round is set longer than the length of the other inter-round interval period. In this way, it is possible to perform an effect of asking whether or not the jackpot ends every predetermined round (every 5 rounds). In addition, since it is configured that the variation of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) to be executed after the big hit ends is executed in the shortening time (0.5 seconds), every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the interval period of and the special symbol variation period between the jackpots.

  In addition, it is good to comprise so that the fluctuation period of the special symbol for a predetermined period performed after the end of a big hit will always be fixed irrespective of the presence or absence of the winning of the big hit. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern table for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol for 4 rotations after the big hit end is defined as the whole period of 0.5 second fluctuation if the lottery result is out, and if the lottery result is a big hit It is preferable to specify that the first rotation is 2 seconds fluctuation, the second rotation is 1.5 seconds fluctuation, the third rotation is 1 second fluctuation, and the 4th rotation is 0.5 seconds fluctuation. Thereby, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol for 4 rotations after the big hit end, a predetermined period (period until the special symbol changes 4 times or period until the jackpot is won) is fixed (2 seconds) be able to. In this case, the interval period for each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) is also made to coincide with the predetermined period (2 seconds) described above, whereby the interval period for every predetermined round (every 5 rounds) and the big hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the special symbol fluctuation period.

  In the first control example, as a jackpot effect to be executed during a jackpot, during a jackpot game (during a round game), a normal jackpot that does not indicate that a jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (within the suspension storage) Has a rendition. When this normal jackpot effect is executed, the end display mode displayed in the final period during the jackpot game (ending period after the end of the round game) is a predetermined period after the big jack end (special symbol 4 variation or, or, It is displayed continuously for 4 seconds. Then, when the jackpot is won again within the period in which the end display mode is displayed continuously after the jackpot end, the jackpot effect is started again via the end display mode, and the effect for continuous hit is executed again.

  By configuring in this way, after the big hit game, the ball entry information corresponding to the special symbol change to be executed during a predetermined period (special symbol 4 change or 4 seconds) after the big hit game is obtained, Even when the acquired ball entry information has won the jackpot, it is possible to execute the effect for consecutive hits. That is, since it is possible to include the ball entry information acquired after the big hit end as the execution condition of the continuous big hit effect indicating that the big hit is carried out continuously, it is possible to increase the rate at which the continuous big hit effect is executed , Can enhance the rendering effect.

  In the first control example, it is determined whether or not to execute the consecutive jackpot effect based on whether or not there is entry information for winning the jackpot in the suspension storage, but other than that, the suspension storage If there is information on entering the jackpot in the jackpot, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot advantageous to the player, and it is determined based on the result of the judgment whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect It may be determined whether or not a game state (for example, a probability change state) advantageous to the player is set as a game state after the jackpot in the holding memory is executed, and continuous based on the judgment result It may be determined whether or not to perform the jackpot effect. Furthermore, after the gaming state (normal state (low probability state)) which is disadvantageous to the player once is set after the big hit which is executed this time, the player is regarded as the gaming state after the big hit in the holding memory is executed. It may be determined whether or not an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability change state) is set, and it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect based on the determination result.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to further increase the added value to the player in the case where the continuous jackpot effect is executed, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, as in the second control example described above, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the fall lottery, it is difficult for the player to grasp the game state in the case of winning the big hit, so the fall lottery using the above described continuous big hit effect The lottery result of may be notified to the player.

  Specifically, a means for determining the gaming state at the time of winning the present jackpot, a means for determining the gaming state set after the end of the present jackpot, and a fall lottery to be executed until the next jackpot is won A means for determining the lottery result of the game may be provided, and it may be determined whether or not the continuous jackpot effect is to be executed based on the determination result of each of the determination means described above, for example, a game when winning this time If the condition is a low probability condition of special symbol, that is, if the game condition of the special symbol is falling by the falling lottery, it is configured to execute the continuous jackpot effect, or the high of the special symbol after the end of the current big hit Only when the probability state is set and it is determined that the gaming state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state by the fall lottery until the next jackpot is won, the continuous jackpot effect is real Even if the gaming state that has won the current jackpot is also the next jackpot, the gaming state of the special symbol does not shift to the low probability state due to being configured to fall into the low probability state by the falling lottery and the high probability state of the special symbol The jackpot effect may be configured to be executed in a certain case.

  In this control example, as the winning information used to determine the content of the jackpot effect to be executed during the jackpot game, winning information at the time when the jackpot game is executed is used, but when the jackpot game is executed As long as it is the timing after it is decided that the jackpot game is executed, it may be any timing, for example, the timing at which the symbol for showing that the jackpot was won is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is started The timing may be a predetermined timing within a period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the jackpot effect. In addition, it may be the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol that has won the jackpot is started, or the predetermined timing within the period when the fluctuation is being executed.

  Also, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no power support) (probable change state (high probability, power support), short time state (low probability, power support) When it becomes), it is set as the composition by which the production (battle production) for showing that the game state is continuing is performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to easily notify the player that the gaming state advantageous to the player is continuing.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Additional Example of First Control Example
Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 175 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the ROM 222 in this additional example partially changes the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 222a with respect to the configuration (see FIG. 114) of the ROM 222 in the first control example described above; It differs in the point which added title system selection table 222aa, title selection table 222ab, and character feature level selection table 222ac. The other configuration is the same as that of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

  First, with reference to FIG. 176 (a), the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 222a for bonus game operation added in the present additional example will be described. FIG. 176 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 222a (for a prize). As shown in FIG. 176 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 222a (for a prize) includes the prize movement levels (1 to 3) selected by the prize movement level selection table 222ac described later and the extracted fluctuation patterns ( The item feature frequency (low) to (high) and (none) are defined in association with a to z). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the accessory operation frequency even when the same variation pattern is selected.

  Next, the contents of the title system selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (b). FIG. 176 (b) schematically shows the contents of the title system selection table 222 aa. In this title system selection table 222aa, a plurality of title systems (1 to 3) are defined in association with the ratio of the effective operation and the invalid operation of the frame button 22 and the button operation ratio at the time of operation effect execution.

  FIG. 176 (c) schematically shows the contents of the title selection table 222ab. In this title selection table 222ab, the current level (set value) (“third grade” to “senior”) and a title that is a privilege to be given to the player in association with the title system (1 to 3) are defined. There is. The title selected here is displayed in the title display area Dr2 (see FIG. 173 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 176 (c), since the same title is set regardless of which title system is set while the level (setting value) is low (third to first rank), the player is currently It is not possible to grasp the set title system. Therefore, immediately after the start of the game, the currently-set title system is grasped, and it is possible to suppress the operation of changing the title system from being executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 177 (a), the contents of the bonus item operation level selection table 222ac will be described. FIG. 177 (c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the bonus item operation level selection table 222ac. The accessory activity level set in the accessory activity level selection table 222ac is referred to when using the fluctuation pattern table 222a (for accessory) described above with reference to FIG. 176 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 177 (a), the item operation level selection table 222ac defines an item operation level in association with a set value (level) and a title system, and in particular, a plurality of title systems Among them, the item operation level 3 is configured to be selectable in the title system 3 in which the set value can reach up to "Senjin" alone. As described above, by providing the bonus action level to be selected only when the level (set value) is increased in a state where a specific title system is set, it is possible to the bonus action to be executed during the fluctuation production It becomes possible to give a special feeling, and the stage effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 175 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 175 (b), the RAM 223 in the present modification is different from the configuration (see FIG. 114) of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above in that an effect setting group 223aa is provided. . The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 223 in the first control example.

  Here, the contents of the effect setting group 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 177 (b). As shown in FIG. 177 (b), the effect setting group 223aa includes an operation effect frequency counter 223aa1, an effective operation frequency counter 223aa2, an operation ratio storage area 223aa3, a title system storage area 223aa4, a setting value storage area 223aa5, an invalid operation frequency. A counter 223aa6, a change flag 223aa7, and a bonus item operation level storage area 223aa8 are stored.

  The operation effect number counter 223aa1 is a counter for counting the number of times the operation effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 has been performed. When it is determined that the operation presentation frequency counter 223aa1 is the fluctuation pattern for executing the operation presentation in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) (S3851 in FIG. 178: Yes), 1 is added, and the frame button input is performed. It is referred to when calculating the button operation ratio in the monitoring and rendering process 2 (see FIG. 179) (S5060 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change processing (see FIG. 180), when the history of the operation effect is changed (erased), it is cleared (see S5103 of FIG. 180).

  The valid operation number counter 223aa2 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the operation effect. In this control example, the value of the effective operation number counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period of the operation effect, and the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (FIG. 179) is incremented by one when the frame button 22 is pressed during the effective period of the operation effect (see S5054 in FIG. 179) and referred to when calculating the button operation ratio (see S5060 in FIG. 179) Also, reference is made when calculating the effective operation ratio (see S5061 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change processing (see FIG. 180), when the history of the operation effect is changed (erased), it is cleared (see S5103 of FIG. 180).

  In this addition example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period during the operation effect, but for example, the frame button 22 is continuously hit. It is determined whether the operation condition such as the success rate (for example, 50%) is satisfied if the operation effect is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) if the operation effect is When the determination result satisfies the operation condition, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 may be incremented by one. Thus, the value of the counter can be fairly added regardless of the content of the operation effect to be executed.

  Furthermore, in this additional example, the value of one valid operation number counter 223aa2 is configured to be added regardless of the instruction content (press, continuous hit, timing press, long press, etc.) of the operation effect on the frame button 22. However, for example, the effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be provided for each instruction content of the operation effect on the frame button 22, and the value of the corresponding effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be added. By configuring in this way, the operation history indicating the operation content of the player to the frame button 22 can be classified in more detail, so that the content and frequency of the operation effect can be changed to one more suitable for the player. Can.

  The operation ratio storage area 223aa3 performs all operations of the frame button 22 based on the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 (value of the valid operation number) and the value of invalid operation number counter 223aa6 described later (value of the invalid operation number). It is an area for storing the ratio of the number of valid operations occupied by the number of times (button operation ratio). The operation ratio storage area 223aa3 stores the button operation ratio calculated in S5060 of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S4007) and the effective operation ratio calculated in the processing of S5061 (see S5062).

  The title system storage area 223aa4 is an area for storing a title system selected using the title system selection table 222aa described above.

  The set value storage area 223aa5 is an area for storing a game content and a level (set value) set based on the change operation.

  The invalid operation number counter 223aa6 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated at a timing other than the operation effective period (operation effective period of the frame button 22 during the operation effect).

  The change flag 223aa7 is a flag set to ON when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected by the change operation. When this flag is set to ON, an effect is suggested that indicates to the player how to operate the frame button 22 for setting different title systems.

  The bonus item operation level storage area 223aa8 is an area for storing the bonus item operation level selected using the bonus item operation level selection table 222ac described above. The appearance frequency of the bonus feature operation effect (operation effect) is variably set by the fluctuation pattern table 222a (for bonus item) with reference to the bonus item action level stored in the bonus item action level storage area 223aa8.

<Control Process of Audio Lamp Controller in Additional Example of First Control Example>
Next, various control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the addition example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. The same elements as the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIG. 178, the variable display setting process 2 in the additional example will be described.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart of the variable display setting process 2 in the additional example. In the processes of S3801 to S3810 and S3812 to S3817 in the variable display setting process 2 in the present additional example, the same processes as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example are executed.

  When the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes of S3801 to S3810 as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example described above are executed, and thereafter, the variation pattern this time If it is determined that the variation pattern has an operation effect (S3851), and if it is determined that the variation pattern has an operation effect (S3851: Yes), the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 (S3852) , Shift to S3853. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3851 that the current fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: No), the process of S3852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3853.

  In the process of S3853, the current variation display mode is determined based on the extracted variation pattern and the bonus item operation level (S3851). Specifically, based on the item operation level selected based on the item operation level selection table 222 ac and the extracted variation patterns (a to z), the variation pattern table for the item operation (FIG. 176 (FIG. (a) Set the bonus item operation frequency defined in (a), and determine the current variation display mode (the variation effect display and the presence or absence of the bonus item operation). Among the variation display modes determined here, for the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation pattern command for display is set by the process of S3812, and is set by various processes of the audio lamp control device 113. Similar to the display command, the command output process (FIG. 139) executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control apparatus 113 is notified of the contents related to the accessory operation notified to the display control apparatus 114. The item operation command to be notified to the device (the other device 228 (refer to FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the item unit 450 is set by the step S3102). When the process of S3853 is completed, the processes of S3812 to S3817 that are the same as the first control example described above are executed, and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and effect processing 2 (S3107).

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 (S3107) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051). Here, when the pressing is not detected (S5051: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051: Yes), next, it is determined whether the current period is the effective period of the conversation effect (see FIG. 173) in the operation effect (S5052). When it is determined that it is the effective period of the conversational effect (S5052: Yes), the display pressing command corresponding to the button depression is set (S5053), the value of the effective operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054), S5060 Move to the process of

  The display pressing command set in the process of S5053 is configured such that the content of the command is set based on the position of the role unit 450, the feature operation level, and the title to be selected, specifically Is a display pressing command for setting the comment display position of the conversational effect based on the result of determining the position of the character unit 450 and determining the content of the comment to be displayed based on the character operation level and the selected title Is set. The display pressing command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display pressing command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the character object unit 450, so that the character object is not given to the player. An effect that is in conversation with unit 450 can be displayed.

  In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the conversation effective period of the conversational effect, a display pressing command is set to display a comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the role unit 450. If it is configured to be movable to a plurality of positions covered by the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, although the role unit 450 is configured to be movable, the position of the character unit 450, and of the third symbol display device 81 The display content displayed on the display screen may be determined, and the timing at which the conversation effect (comment display) is performed may be different with respect to the pressing timing of the frame button 22 based on the determination result. That is, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the character unit 450 and the main part of the fluctuation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the display showing the jackpot expectation, When it is determined that the display area in which the display indicating the symbol to be stopped is made overlaps, the timing in which the display areas described above do not overlap, that is, the position of the bonus unit 450 moves. The comment is displayed until the display area of the display area changes, or the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 progresses and the display area of the main part is changed, and thus the display areas do not overlap. It may be configured to delay the display of

  By configuring in this manner, any of the fluctuation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the conversation effect that is one of the operation effects can be suitably executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Can. In addition, without using the configuration described above, the main part of the variation effect displayed on the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the character unit 450 and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, When it is determined that the display indicating the jackpot expectation degree and the display area in which the display indicating the symbol to be stopped is made overlap, the conversational effect may be canceled.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5052 that it is not the effective period of the conversational effect (S5052: No), it is determined whether the present is the effective period of the bonus game operation effect among the operation effects (S5055). If it is determined that it is the effective period of the role operation effect presentation (S5055: Yes), the display pressing command corresponding to the button depression is set (S5056), and the value of the effective operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054) , Shift to the process of S5060.

  In the process of S5055, when it is not determined that it is not the effective period of the bonus game operation effect (S5055: No), it is then determined whether it is the change effective period (S5057), and when it is the change effective period (S5057: Yes), the change process is executed (S5058), and then the process proceeds to S5060. The contents of the change process (S5058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the process of S5057, when it is determined that it is not the change effective period (S5057: No), the value of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 is incremented by one because the current pressing operation is not in the effective period of the operation effect. Then (S5059), the process proceeds to S5060.

  In the process of S5060, the button operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the operation effect frequency counter 223aa1 and the value of the effective operation frequency counter 223aa2 (S5060). Next, based on the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 and the value of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6, the valid operation ratio is calculated (S5061), and the calculated button operation ratio and valid operation ratio are converted to the operation ratio storage area 223aa3. (S5062). Thereafter, title setting processing is executed (S5063), and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the change process (S5058) will be described with reference to FIG. This change process (S5058) is a process that is executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period of the change operation (see FIG. 174 (b)), and various types of information based on the operation content of the player It is a process for clearing (title system, setting value (level), and information on the button operation ratio to be referred to when selecting the title system, information on the effective operation ratio).

  When the change process (S5058) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current operation content is all reset (whether all deletion selection mode Dr3 has been selected) (S5101). If it is determined that the reset is all (S5101: Yes), all information in the setting value storage area 223aa5 is cleared (S5102), and the operation effect frequency counter 223aa1 and the valid operation frequency counter 223aa2 are cleared. The values of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 are all cleared (S5103), the information of the title system storage area 223aa4 is cleared (S5104), and this processing is ended. As a result, all the information based on the operation content of the player is cleared, the initial value "3rd grade" is displayed in the level display area Dr1, and the initial value "beginner" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. (See FIG. 173 (a)).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5101 that the reset is not all reset (S5101: No), it is determined whether the operation content is a partial reset (whether the partial erase selection mode Dr4 is selected) (S5105). If it is determined that the partial reset is performed (S5105: Yes), the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5106), the information in the setting value storage area 223aa5 is set to the first stage (S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103. . In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the partial reset is not performed (S5105: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, the title setting process (S5063) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the title setting process (S5063). When this title setting process (S5063) is executed, first, a title system is selected based on the title system selection table 222aa (S5201). Then, the selected title system is stored in the title system storage area 223aa4 (S5202), and then the setting value is determined based on the value of the operation effect frequency counter 223aa1 and stored in the setting value storage area 223aa5 (S5203).

  Thereafter, a display setting value command is set (S5204), a title is selected based on the title selection table 222ab (S5205), and a display title command is set (S5206). Next, it is determined whether the change flag 223aa7 is set to on (S5207), and when it is determined that the change flag is set to on (S5207: Yes), a display operation instruction command is set (S5208), and the change flag This processing is ended by setting 223aa7 to off (S5209). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5207 that the change flag 223aa7 is not on (is off) (S5207: No), the process is ended as it is.

  As described above, in the additional example described above, in the additional example described above, the operation aspect of the operation effect (for example, the appearance frequency and the contents of the effect) that is the effect for operating the frame button 22 It can be set variably on the basis of. Thereby, the desired effect mode is set without making the player feel troublesome, as compared with the case where the change operation for changing the frequency of the operation effect to the frequency desired by the player is performed separately from the game. be able to.

  In the pachinko machine 10 in which the effect mode of the operation effect is varied based on the operation history of such a player, in order to enable setting of the effect mode of the operation effect suitable for various types of players, A plurality of effect modes are prepared, but while the same operation is performed on the frame button 22 (for example, when the operation effect is executed, the frame button 22 must always be operated by the necessary amount or more). There is a problem that only the same effect mode is set, and various operation effects can not be provided to the player.

  Therefore, in the above-described additional example, a different benefit (title) is provided to the player by accumulating the game content, and further, the type of the benefit (title) is at least the player's frame button 22. It is configured to be different according to the operation content (operation history) of the operation.

  By configuring in this way, various operations are performed on the frame button 22 in order to obtain different benefits (titles). And the production | presentation aspect of the operation production is variably set based on the content of the various operation performed with respect to the frame button 22. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various operation effects configured to be variably set based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 which has the constitution which grants the privilege which differs by accumulating game contents, setting value (for example, level) is variably set gradually according to the accumulation circumstance of game contents, setting Although it is common to use a configuration that grants a benefit (title) corresponding to the set value (level), if the set value (level) reaches the upper limit, acquiring a further benefit (title) And there is a risk that the game will decline. In addition, there is a problem that when the upper limit of the setting value (level) is set high to prevent the setting value (level) from reaching the upper limit, the storage capacity for the effect increases.

  Therefore, in the additional example described above, any system is set among a plurality of systems (title systems) having different benefits (titles) to be provided based on the operation content (operation history) to the frame button 22. In this manner, a benefit (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system. As a result, since it is not possible to obtain all the benefits (titles) simply by accumulating the game content, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

  Furthermore, in the additional example described above, since the deleting means for deleting the past game content is provided, the operation content (operation history) executed in the past when setting a system different from the system currently set is performed. It is possible to suppress that the system is set based on In this addition example, in order to suppress that the system is set based on the operation content (operation history) executed in the past, the deletion means for deleting the past operation content (operation history) is used. Other configurations may be used. For example, input that a different system setting is desired (input by executing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22), and in that case, the predetermined period It may be configured not to set a new system until (the period of the operation history referred to when setting the system) elapses.

  Further, in the above-described additional example, the erasing means includes all erasing means for erasing all the past game contents and operation contents, and a partial erasing means for partially erasing. The partial erasing means is used when setting a different system from the currently set system, and different systems can set the past operation content (operation history) to be referred to when setting the system. It is configured to erase to the state. As a result, when setting a different system, it is not necessary to restart the game from the beginning, and it is possible to make the player set different systems eagerly.

  In this addition example, when the partial erasing unit is operated, a part of the operation contents (operation history) in the past is erased, and a process of setting an initial value as a setting value (level) is performed. However, by operating the partial eraser, it may be easier to set a system different from the system currently set, rather than starting the game from the beginning (rather than operating the entire eraser), for example, Only a part of the past operation content (operation history) may be deleted while the set value (level) is continued. Alternatively, a system desired by the player may be designated, and part of the past operation content (operation history) may be erased until the designated system can be set.

  Here, in order to set a system different from the system currently set, even if the player operates the partial erasing means and erases a part of the past operation content (operation history), the operation to be executed later is performed. If the frame button 22 is not operated appropriately for the effect, different systems are not set, and there is a possibility that the player may feel dissatisfaction. Specifically, if the operation effect is absorbed in the same operation mode as in the prior art after operating the partial erasing means, the same system as the system set before operating the partial erasing means may be set. There is.

  Therefore, in the present additional example, there is provided guidance notification means for guiding the operation contents of the frame button 22 by the player so that different systems are set after operating the partial erasing means. By digesting the operation effect based on the content notified by the guidance notification means, different systems can be easily set. In addition, since the guidance notification means is notified of the operation content different from the conventional operation content in order to set a different system, the effect of the operation effect is produced by digesting the operation effect according to the notification content by the guidance notification means The contents are also set variably. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation effect different from before, and to improve the effect.

  Note that the content notified to the player by the guidance and notification means may simply be a content that urges an operation different from the previous one to the operation effect, or a content that indicates an operation content to be specifically executed. Further, in addition to the notification by the guide notification unit, a progress notification unit may be provided to notify the player of the progress until the conditions for setting different systems are established. As a result, the player can easily grasp whether or not the operation effect is absorbed so that different systems are set.

  Further, in the case where the set system and the set value (level) satisfy the predetermined conditions, the system set in the above-mentioned additional example can be set only when the predetermined erasing means is operated. You may add a lineage. By providing such a system, for example, it is possible to set a dedicated system only when all the erasing means are operated in a state where the set value has reached the upper limit, or as the set value one less than the upper limit. In the case of the setting value of, a dedicated system may be set only when the partial erasing unit is operated.

  In addition, it is also possible to vary the system that can be set based on the erasure timing by the erasure means, specifically, when the erasure means is operated during the jackpot game or while a specific variation effect is being executed. Only a special system may be settable. In this case, it is preferable that the above-mentioned specific variation effect is executed only when the variation effect executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol satisfies the predetermined condition.

  By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible for the player to set different systems depending on the timing at which the erasing means is operated, and it is possible to actively participate in the game.

  In the above-mentioned additional example, although the configuration in which the privilege (title) is set in advance corresponding to each set value (level) of each system is used, other configurations may be used, and it has already been acquired. A storage unit for storing a benefit (title) may be provided, and a benefit (title) to be granted may be set based on the benefit (title) stored in the storage unit.

  In the additional example described above, as the content (content of the title) of the benefit (title) given to the player, content that suggests setting conditions of the currently set system is used. Thus, by grasping the content of the acquired benefit (title), it is possible to predict the condition necessary for setting different systems.

  Furthermore, when predetermined game conditions are satisfied, the player may be notified of the conditions necessary for setting a desired system, and among the obtainable benefits (titles), the already acquired benefits The number or ratio of (title) may be notified to the player. This makes it possible to increase the player's willingness to join in order to acquire all the benefits (titles).

  As described above, based on the operation content (operation history) to the frame button 22, any system is set among a plurality of systems (title systems) having different benefits (titles) to be provided, When it is configured to determine the benefit (title) to be provided to the player based on the set value (level) and the set system, the currently set system is set based on the granted benefit (title). There is a problem that it becomes easy for the player to grasp.

  On the other hand, in the additional example described above, the same benefit (title) is given until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage, regardless of which system is set. It is configured as follows. As a result, the player can grasp which system is set until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage (unless the game is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined system is set). It can be difficult.

  In addition, as the operation content (operation history) to the frame button 22 referred to in the additional example described above, for example, operation effect frequency information for indicating the number of times the operation effect has been executed, a frame button for the executed operation effect 22. Operation execution frequency information for indicating the presence or absence of the operation to the operation 22, Operation success frequency information for indicating the number of successes of the operation effect (the number of times the predetermined operation condition is satisfied), It may be information for indicating the operation status of the player with respect to the frame button 22 such as invalid operation frequency information for indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated during the effective period).

  Furthermore, as the content of the operation effect, other than the pressing effect for merely pressing the frame button 22 within a predetermined period, the timing operation effect for operating the frame button 22 at a predetermined timing, the frame button 22 for a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period A continuous hit operation effect to be operated, and a long press operation effect to continuously press the frame button 22 continuously for a predetermined period or more may be provided. In this case, it is preferable that the operation content (operation history) to the frame button 22 be managed for each type of the executed operation effect.

  By configuring in this manner, it is determined in detail whether the player dislikes merely operating the frame button 22 or does not dislike the predetermined operation (continuous hit, long press, timing press) on the frame button 22. Becomes possible. Therefore, when setting the operation effect corresponding to the operation content (operation history), it is possible to provide the operation effect more suitable for the player, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction.

  Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of operation means, each information may be managed for each operation means, or the operation contents of all the operation means may be added and managed. You may configure. Furthermore, when an operation effect for operating different operation means according to the jackpot expectation degree is executed, the number of times of operation effect execution and information for indicating the operation number of the operation means are managed in correspondence with the jackpot expectation degree The operation content (operation history) may be managed only for the operation effects executed when the jackpot is won.

  In the additional example described above, it is referred to when the mode (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) of the operation effect and the benefit (title) to be given are determined based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) for the operation effect. System and the setting value (level) are set, but based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22), other than the operation presentation mode (execution frequency, presentation mode, etc.) Alternatively, only one of the above-described system or set value (level) may be set.

  In the above-described additional example, the frame button 22 is used in which it is determined that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation as the operating means that can be operated by the player, but using a configuration other than that Operation means configured as a lever that can be operated by tilting the player left or right or back and forth, or a touch capable of determining that the player is operated in contact or proximity A sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of determining operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used, or a plurality of the above-described operation means may be provided.

  As in the additional example described above, when using a configuration in which the mode of the operation effect is changed based on the player's operation content (operation history) or a predetermined benefit (title) is given, another day is used. It is good to be able to play a game in the state which continued the operation contents (operation history) of the game which went to the game. Specifically, when ending the game, by performing a predetermined operation (end operation), The configuration is made such that the player can acquire information regarding the game content and the operation content (password issuing process), and the output information related to the acquired information is input to the pachinko machine 10, thereby continuing from the acquired information It is good to constitute so that it can play a game of a state.

<On the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 182 to 188, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine has been described in which, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won and the definite change state is set after the big hit, the definite change state continues until the next big hit.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for judging the special symbol's success or failure, the normal state (i.e., the jackpot probability is low) from the probability change state (i.e., the jackpot probability is high probability state). A gaming machine is described which is executed each time a condition in which a transition lottery (hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery) for transitioning (falling) to () is performed is determined to be a special symbol. As described above, in the gaming machine having the fall lottery function, even if the probability change state (high probability state) is set, the period in which the high probability state reliably lasts is not set, so the variation of the special symbol is executed. Each time the player can feel tense.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, similarly to the first control example described above, when the probability change state is set, the high probability state in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability, and the short time state in which the motorized prize 140a is easy to open Even if you win the fall lottery and fall from the high probability state to the low probability state, the predetermined period (for example, after the big hit is over, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is 100 times). Until it reaches) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the player wins the falling lottery (for example, 3 turns) immediately after the big hit, the time reduction state is set for the predetermined period (100 turns), so the user has won the falling lottery according to the operating condition of the electric part 140a. It can suppress that a player is grasped.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the big hit lottery of the special symbol, and the big hit lottery of the special symbol when winning the fall lottery is executed as a low probability state Be done. In other words, if you win the fall lottery in a state that exceeds the predetermined period mentioned above (for example, after the big hit end, the number of times the variation of the special symbol is 100 times), the gaming condition will be normal when the special symbol variation is started (The low probability state and the short time state) will be set.

  In this case, even if the effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the player has won the fall lottery is executed using the variation time of the special symbol selected for the fall lottery, the operator falls only by looking at the operation status of the electric handpiece 140a. There is a problem that the success or failure of the lottery can be easily determined. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the falling lottery in a state where the predetermined period described above (for example, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot end), It is configured to shift the gaming state to the normal state before the fluctuation of the symbol is started.

  By configuring in this manner, the operation content of the motorized prize 140a suddenly becomes the operation content in the non-time-short state in a state where the predetermined symbol (for example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 100 times after the big hit ends) exceeds In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he has won the fall lottery or the big hit lottery, and the player has a sense of expectation until the fluctuation of the special symbol is finished. it can.

  Further, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player the success or failure status of the fall lottery using the continuation effect described in the first control example described above. By configuring in this manner, the player can pay more attention to the effect to be executed, and the effect can be enhanced.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed, and provided in the sound lamp control device 113 The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 and the contents of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 182 (a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the ROM 202 in this control example adds a fall lottery table 202ba and a fall state transition table 202bb to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and a first hit type selection table 202c. (Refer to FIG. 107), the content that was defined as "the next time in the probability change time short" as the gaming state after the big hit is different in that it is defined as "the probability change until the fall lottery win, fall lottery win or 100 times short". , Other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fall lottery table 202ba is a table to be referred to when performing determination (fall lottery) whether or not to fall from the probability change state to the normal state in the definite variation state of the special symbol, and is a random number value determined to be fall Counter value is stored. In the special symbol in the definite variation state, each time the lottery of the special symbol is executed, the fall lottery table 202ba is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to fall to the normal state. Here, the details of the falling lottery table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (b).

  FIG. 182 (b) is a view schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), random number values (counter values) determined to fall in the fall lottery are stored. Specifically, two random number values of "100, 101" (counter value) as a judgment value corresponding to a fall to a normal state (low probability state of special symbol) in a certain symbol state (high probability state) of special symbol Is specified. In the special symbol state, when performing the special symbol lottery, the value of the falling lottery counter (not shown) is compared with the random value (counter value) corresponding to the falling specified in the falling lottery table 202ba. , Falls to the normal state when the values match. The fall lottery counter (not shown) is a loop counter that is periodically updated (for example, each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is performed) in the range of “0 to 299”. Of the 300 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the fall lottery counter, two random values determined to fall are defined, so the probability that it is determined to fall in one fall lottery is 1/150 It is. In addition, the random number value (the value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the definite variation state is five of “5 to 9” (see FIG. 106 (a)), and becomes a big hit during the definite variation state Since the probability is 1/48, the probability of becoming a big hit is set to be higher than the probability that it is determined to be a fall in the fall lottery during a definite change state. Therefore, once transitioning to the definite change state, the player can be expected to win a jackpot a plurality of times before falling to the normal state, so that the interest of the player in the game during the definite change state can be improved. it can.

  The fall state transition table 202bb is a state transition table to be referred to when the fall lottery is won during the definite change state. The description of the same elements as those of the state transition table 202f described in the first control example will be omitted.

  FIG. 182C is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fall state transition table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 182C, the fall state transition table 202bb stores a fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 and a fall state transition 2 table 202bb2. Here, the contents of the falling state transition 1 table 202bb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (d).

  FIG. 182 (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the falling state transition 1 table 202bb1. This fall state transition 1 table 202bb1 is different from the state transition 1 table 202f1 described in the first control example in that the state status in the case of winning the fall lottery is added in each state status, and other than that Are identical.

  Specifically, when the status status is "ST2" and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (up to 100), if the winning of the falling lottery is won, the status status is set to ST3 (there is a low probability time short) and specified The value of the number counter continues as it is. When the status status is “ST2” and the prescribed number counter is 0, and the winning of a falling lottery is successful, the status status is set to ST1 (no low probability time short).

  That is, even if 100 is set to the value of the specified number of counters and the winning of the fall lottery is made before the value of the specified number of counters is reduced to 0, time reduction is performed until the value of the expected number of counters is reduced to 0. Status is granted.

  Next, the falling state transition 2 table 202bb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (e). FIG. 182E is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the falling state transition 2 table 202bb2. This fall state transition 2 table 202bb2 is different from the state transition 2 table 202f2 described in the first control example in that the state status in the case of winning the fall lottery is added to each state status, and other than that Are identical.

  Specifically, if the status status is "ST2a" and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (up to 4 at maximum), when winning the fall lottery, the status status is set to ST3a (low probability time short special), The value of the specified number counter is continued as it is. If the status status is "ST2" and the specified number counter is greater than 0 (up to 96), the winning status is "ST3" (low probability time is short) and the value of the specified number counter is set. Will continue as it is. When the status status is “ST2” and the prescribed number counter is 0, and the winning of a falling lottery is successful, the status status is set to ST1 (no low probability time short).

  That is, even if 100 is set to the value of the specified number of counters and the winning of the fall lottery is made before the value of the specified number of counters is reduced to 0, time reduction is performed until the value of the expected number of counters is reduced to 0. Status is granted.

  FIG. 183 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example has a continuation effect mode selection 3 table 222e instead of the continuation effect mode selection table 222e in the ROM 222 in the first control example, and a final mode selection The difference is that a final mode selection 3 table 222h is provided instead of the table 222h, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the continuation effect mode selection 3 table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (a). FIG. 184 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e. The continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e is associated with the value of the remaining period (the number of remaining fluctuations) stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb with respect to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above. The difference is that the response to the continuous rendering mode is selected. In addition, when there is the winning a prize information which shows the big hit winning within the time of fall winning, because it is the special state of winning the big hit immediately after winning the falling lottery (in a low probability state big hit), regardless of the remaining period Instead, the special mode B can be selected to give the player a bonus effect.

  Next, the contents of the final mode selection 3 table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). Figure 184 (b). It is the model which showed the content of the final mode selection 3 table 222h. The final mode selection 3 table 222h is different from the final mode selection table 222h used in the first control example described above in that the final mode is different according to the setting status of the fall flag 222ba, and the other The points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (b), even if the result of judgment of the success or failure is out, when there is the winning information indicating the big hit in the hold, it can be suggested in the final mode of this time.

  Referring back to FIG. 183 (b), the description will be continued. FIG. 183 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 183 (b), the RAM 223 in the second control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a fall flag 223ba and a remaining period storage area 223bb are provided, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fall flag 223 ba is a flag for indicating that a fall lottery has been won, and is set to ON when a state command indicating that a fall lottery has been won is received from the main control device 110.

<About Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. The present control example is different in that the special symbol variation start process 3 (S213) is used instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) in the first control example described above, and the other points are the same. . The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special fluctuation start process 3 (S213) is executed, first, the processes of S301 and S302 are executed similarly to the special fluctuation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, and thereafter, the fall lottery counter value and Then, compare the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall prescribed in the fall lottery table 202ba (S 351), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random value corresponding to the fall (the lottery result corresponding to the fall) Or not) is determined (S352).

  In the process of S352, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is reached (S352: Yes), the gaming state is made to fall to the normal state by setting the probability change flag 203g to OFF (S353), and the fall ( A state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the gaming state has been changed to the normal state is set (S354).

  Then, similarly to the special variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, after executing the processes of S303 to S307, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot has been won after a short period of time (S355). Here, if the player wins after a short period (S355: Yes), the hour counter 23h is reset (S356), and then S310 and S311 are the same as the special variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example. The process of is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the second control example, when the advantageous start condition (probable change state) advantageous to the player is set, if the variation start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the lottery for the special symbol is performed (the jackpot) Before the lottery is executed, a fall lottery is performed to determine whether to shift the gaming state from the advantageous state to the normal state (a gaming state which is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state).

  Furthermore, in the present control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit in a state in which the motorized prize 140a is easy to open (probable state or short time state (hereinafter referred to as normal pattern high probability state)) It is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state before starting the variation of the special symbol to be targeted.

  According to the control processing of the main control unit 110 in the second control example described above, there are two end conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the first finish condition is that the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number of times (the number of times of time reduction given to the set state), and the probability change as gaming state When the state is set, winning of the fall lottery is set as the second end condition, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to end when both of the above-described two end conditions are satisfied. . In addition, irrespective of the presence or absence of establishment of two end conditions mentioned above, when it is elected to the big hit of a special symbol, the end condition of time saving condition is satisfied.

  That is, for example, in the case of winning a jackpot that is set as the gaming state (next time) after the jackpot end and the jackpot for which 100 times of time reduction is set, the first symbol mentioned above that the special symbol has changed 100 times It becomes a condition and it becomes the 2nd end condition mentioned above having won the fall lottery. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the winning lottery is won by the special symbol variation 10 rotation after the big hit end, the second end condition is satisfied at that time, but the first end condition is Since the condition is not satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is continued until the first end condition is satisfied (the special symbol changes 100 times) (the two end conditions are both satisfied). Then, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches 100 times, both of the end conditions are satisfied, and the transition from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state is made.

  On the other hand, in the state where the number of times of special symbol variation since the big end is over 100 times (the first end condition is satisfied), the fall lottery is not won (the second end condition is satisfied) In the case of no), the high probability state of the normal symbol continues until the win of the fall lottery. Then, when the lottery for falling falls is won (when the second end condition is satisfied), the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state.

  Thus, the state transition timing of the normal symbol can be diversified by providing a plurality of (two) conditions necessary to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state. In addition, when only the above-mentioned second end condition is not established (in the above-mentioned example, when the number of times of special symbol fluctuation exceeds 100 times and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set) ), Because it becomes difficult for the player to grasp at which timing the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state (whether to win the falling lottery), the normal symbol is in high probability state for as long as possible for the player. Can be played while expecting to be

  In this second control example, the special symbol fluctuation count of 100 is set as one of the conditions for shifting the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol to the low probability state (normal state). However, the number of times may be set plurally according to the jackpot type, and for example, plural times such as “one time”, “25 times”, “50 times” may be set stepwise. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends, together with the presence or absence of the winning of the falling lottery. Specifically, before the special symbol variation frequency after the big hit ends reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100 times), if the falling lottery is won, the special symbol variation frequency is a predetermined number ( For example, when reaching 1, 25, 50, 100), the high probability state (short time state) of the normal symbol ends, and when the number of special symbol changes after the big hit is set, for example, 25 times, When the number of times of special symbol variation exceeds 25 times, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is ended immediately when winning the fall lottery.

  Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is used as one of the conditions under which the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends, but other end conditions may be provided, For example, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is out, but is a lottery result in which a game for opening the variable winning device 65 for a short time is executed (so-called, small hit winning) (number of times the variable winning device 65 has operated) Or, measure the number of variations of the special symbol separately with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and measure the number of variations of the special symbol 1 10 times, or the combined number of variation of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reaches 100 times It may be set as the end condition.

Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Second Control Example
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed instead of command determination process (see FIG. 140) with respect to the first control example described above, and command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186). The difference is that a state determination process (see FIG. 187) is added as a sub process, and the other parts are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 186. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed as in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example described above.

  After the process of S3214 is completed, next, the state determination process (S3251) is executed, and then the process of S3215 is executed, and the present process is ended. Here, the details of the state determination processing (S3251) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this state determination process (S3251), various processes on the side of the audio lamp control device 113 when the win is a fall lottery are executed.

  When the state determination process (S3251) is executed, it is first determined whether a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252). The command indicating this fall is set if the fall lottery is won by the special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 185) of the main control unit 110 (S352 in FIG. 185: Yes) (see S354 in FIG. 185). When the command indicating the fall has not been received in the process of S3252 (S3252: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is within a short period (S3253). Here, if it is determined that the time is within a short period (S3253: Yes), next, the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3254), and the remaining number of short times is calculated (S3255). Then, the calculated remaining number of short times is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3256).

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information that has won the jackpot in the hold (S3257), and if it is determined that there is (S3257: Yes), special condition satisfaction information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3258). Here, when the special condition satisfaction information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, the special mode B is selected when setting the continuous rendering mode using the continuous rendering mode selection 3 table 222e (see FIG. 184).

  When the process of S3258 is finished, it is next determined whether a command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is received (S3260), and if it is determined that a command indicating the normal state is received (S3260), falling It is determined whether the flag 223ba is set to on (S3261). If it is determined in the process of S3261 that the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261: Yes), that is, it is the timing when the gaming state has shifted from the time saving state to the normal state in the state of winning the fall lottery. If it is determined, the fall flag 223ba is set to off (S3262), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3260 that the command indicating the normal state is not received (S3260: No), or the fall flag 223ba is not set on in the process of S3261 (set to off) When it is determined that (S3261: No), the process ends.

  As described above, the second control example changes from a probability change state (that is, a high probability state where the jackpot probability is high) to a low probability state where the jackpot probability is low, separately from the jackpot lottery for judging the special symbol Transition lottery to make it transition (fall) (hereinafter referred to as fall lottery). The gaming machine is described which is executed each time the condition for judging whether the special symbol is accepted or not is satisfied. As described above, in the gaming machine having the fall lottery function, even if the probability change state (high probability state) is set, the period in which the high probability state reliably lasts is not set, so the variation of the special symbol is executed. Each time the player can feel tense.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, similarly to the first control example described above, when the probability change state is set, the high probability state in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability, and the short time state in which the motorized prize 140a is easy to open Even if the high probability state falls to the low probability state, for example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 100 times after the big hit, even if the high probability state falls to the low probability state. Until it reaches) is configured to set the time saving state. As a result, even if the player wins the fall lottery (for example, 3 turns) immediately after the big hit, the time reduction state is set for a predetermined period, so that the player who won the fall lottery according to the operation status of the electric jack 140a Can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, the fall lottery is configured to be executed before the big hit lottery of the special symbol, and the big hit lottery of the special symbol when winning the fall lottery is executed as a low probability state Be done. In other words, if you win the fall lottery in a state that exceeds the predetermined period mentioned above (for example, after the big hit end, the number of times the variation of the special symbol is 100 times), the gaming condition will be normal when the special symbol variation is started (The low probability state and the short time state) will be set.

  In this case, even if the effect of suggesting to the player whether or not the player has won the fall lottery is executed using the variation time of the special symbol selected for the fall lottery, the operator falls only by looking at the operation status of the electric handpiece 140a. There is a problem that the success or failure of the lottery can be easily determined. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the falling lottery in a state where the predetermined period described above (for example, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is 100 times after the jackpot end), It is configured to shift the gaming state to the normal state before the fluctuation of the symbol is started.

  By configuring in this manner, the operation content of the motorized prize 140a suddenly becomes the operation content in the non-time-short state in a state where the predetermined symbol (for example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 100 times after the big hit ends) exceeds In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he has won the fall lottery or the big hit lottery, and the player has a sense of expectation until the fluctuation of the special symbol is finished. it can.

  Further, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player the success or failure status of the fall lottery using the above-described continuous effect. By configuring in this manner, the player can pay more attention to the effect to be executed, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the second control example described above, when the win for the fall lottery is made during the definite change state, and the fall timing is during a short period of time, the fluctuation pattern table used continuously during the short even after the fall By using the configuration to select the variation pattern, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the player has won the falling lottery, but other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. 188. Alternatively, another example may be used in which a variation pattern is selected using a special variation pattern table triggered by winning in the fall lottery.

  Here, the contents of the above-described other example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 (a) is a block diagram schematically showing a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 when the above-described another example is used. As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the above-described alternative example, a post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is added.

  The contents of the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 will be described with reference to FIG. 188 (b). FIG. 188 (b) is a schematic view showing the content of the after-fall fluctuation pattern table 202d5. As shown in FIG. 188 (b), the after-fall fluctuation pattern table 202 d 5 is a fluctuation pattern table used for four rotations of the special symbol after winning the lottery for falling during a short period of time. The post-fall fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is configured to easily select a 60-second fluctuation pattern even in the case of a drop. Therefore, immediately after winning the fall lottery, battle reach is likely to occur. As a result, each time a battle reach occurs, the player can watch the effects while giving a sense of tension.

  In this case, it is preferable to notify the player of the effect of notifying that the player has not won the falling lottery by a predetermined ratio depending on the battle reach effect mode. Specifically, the presence or absence of winning of the falling lottery may be suggested depending on the selected opponent of the battle reach (opposite character), or the falling lottery may be performed according to the effect (attack pattern) executed during the battle reach. It may indicate the presence or absence of winning, or may indicate the presence or absence of winning of the falling lottery based on the result of the battle reach (value of the remaining HP at the time of the draw on the battle reach). As a result of the battle reach, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won, it is also considered whether or not the falling lottery is won, and the effect of the presentation can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, when the jackpot is won during the period in which the post-fall fall variation pattern table is used, it is preferable that a special effect mode is executed as the special hit. As a result, when the player sees the effect mode executed as a special hit, it is possible to easily grasp that the jackpot has been won with a low probability state immediately after winning the fall lottery. In this case, it is preferable that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special hit be a fluctuation time which can not be set in other fluctuation pattern tables. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of an immediate hit after a fall due to a sense of incongruity due to a difference in fluctuation time.

<Description of another example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example>
Next, another example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described above will be described. In the first control example described above, the change display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) is performed at the timing when the special view change is started, in the effect mode of the suggestion effect including the precursor effect and the countdown effect. The configuration set in the countdown effect setting process (S3810 in FIG. 152), which is a partial process, is used. On the other hand, in this separate example, only the start timing (the start timing of the prognostic effect) of the suggested effect is set in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special image change is started. It is configured to set a specific effect to be a target of the present suggested effect based on an operation on the frame button 22 executed during the omen effect.

  By configuring in this way, the start timing of the prognostic effect that becomes the start timing of the suggested effect is set as the start timing of the special figure variation, and while the prognostic effect is being executed (while the suggested effect is performed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect to be a target of the suggested effect. Therefore, compared with the case where the suggestion effect is performed for the predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be freely set, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, a prophetic effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed is provided as a suggested effect, and a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed. Since the executability is configured, even when the specific effect is set after the suggested effect is executed (during the prognostic effect execution), the suggested effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

<About the control process performed by the voice lamp control device 113 in another example of the suggestion effect>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190, control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the present alternative example will be described. In this example, the countdown effect setting process 3 (FIG. 189) is used instead of the countdown setting process (see FIG. 152) and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. The difference is that the processing content to be executed in S3107 of S.139 is changed to the processing content of the frame button input monitoring and rendering processing 3 (see FIG. 190). The other elements are the same as those in the first control example described above, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 189, the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the present example will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810). As shown in FIG. 189, when the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) is executed, the processes of S4301 to S4305 which are the same as the first control example described above are executed, and thereafter, the variation pattern is set this time. The production mode of the prognostic effect is set based on the fluctuation time and the start timing of the suggested production (the start timing of the prognostic production) (S4351), the display prognostic production start command is set (S4352), and this processing ends Do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the precursor setting flag 223t is on (S4301: Yes), the multiple variation effect setting process is executed as in the first control example described above (S4321), and then this process is performed. finish.

  As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the fluctuation display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the suggested effect is The start timing of the protagonist effect that becomes the start opportunity is set. As a result, the indication effect is set without setting the specific effect that is the target of the suggested effect.

  In this additional example, the start timing (the start timing of the prognostic effect) of the suggestion effect is variable according to whether or not the special pattern fluctuation this time is the fluctuation pattern winning the big hit. Other conditions may be used to set the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the prognostic effect). For example, the start timing of the suggestion effect according to the length of the fluctuation pattern to be executed ) May be set, or a plurality of start timings (prompt effect start timings) that can be set for one fluctuation pattern may be provided, and a plurality of the suggested effect start timings (progress start timings) The lottery means for performing a lottery for determining the start trigger (the start timing of the accompaniment effect) of 1 of the suggested effects may be provided and set based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Furthermore, the start timing (the start timing of the prognostic effect) of the suggestion effect may be set based on the operation content in which the player operates the frame button 22 before the change of the special symbol of this time is started.

  Furthermore, the start timing (the start timing of the prognostic effect) of the suggestion effect may be varied based on the currently set gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the currently set gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability change state), a precursor A (to facilitate execution of a long suggestion effect as a result) It may be configured to set a point where the period from the start of fluctuation is short (see precursor pattern A shown in FIG. 100 (a)). As a result, since the gaming state currently set can be suggested to the player in addition to the lottery result of the variation depending on the presentation mode of the suggested presentation, the player is interested in the suggested presentation to be executed. You can In addition, as in the second control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a transition (falling) means for shifting (falling) from a probability changing state most advantageous to the player to the time saving state without the player noticing. In order to indicate the game state, the player can be more interested.

  In addition, as a method of setting the start timing (the start timing of the prognostic effect) of the suggestion effect, when the change pattern corresponding to the super reach or the special reach is set as the change pattern, a predetermined timing from the start of the change (for example, , 5 seconds, 10 seconds) may be configured to set the start timing (the start timing of the accompaniment effect) of the suggestion effect at any timing.

  As shown in this additional example, when the suggestion presentation is started in a state where the end trigger of the suggestion production (the end timing of the countdown production), that is, the start trigger of the specific production to be the suggestion production (the start timing) is not set Is a state in which the effect period of the suggestion effect is not set, and therefore, as in the first control example described above, there is a problem in that the effect mode of the precursor effect can not be set based on the set effect period. is there.

  On the other hand, in this additional example, in the processing of S4351, the effect mode of the prognostic effect is set based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be executed this time and the start timing of the prod Are configured to Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of this time is 60 seconds or more, and the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the prognostic effect) is the prognostic A, the prognostic effect is performed for a long time as a presentation mode. The long effect mode (the second route Dc2b in FIG. 98 (a)) corresponding to the effect is set, and in the other cases, the short effect mode (the first event in FIG. 98 (a)) corresponding to the short term precursor effect. The route Dc1a) is set.

  As described above, it is set later by roughly setting the production mode of the prognostic effect on the basis of the period in which the suggested effect can be executed (the period in which the effect can be performed based on the start timing of the suggested effect and the fluctuation time of the change). It is possible to set an effect mode that does not give the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the specific effect (the effect period of the suggested effect).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S3107) executed in the present another example will be described. FIG. 190 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S3107), the effect mode of the suggested effect is performed based on the pressing operation on the frame button 22 performed while the precursor effect set in the process of FIG. 189 is being executed. Processing for setting is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 190, when the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 3 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S5051), and if not pressed (S5051: No ), End this processing as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed in the process of S5051 (S5051: Yes), it is next determined whether the present is in a progic effect period (S5071).

  If it is determined in the process of S5071 that the present is not during the precursor effect period (S5071: No), a process related to other frame button operation is executed (S5078), and this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5071 that the present is during the precursor effect period (S5071: Yes), next, a specific effect corresponding to the content of pressing the frame button 22 is set (S5072).

  Here, the process of S5072 will be specifically described. In this additional example, when the precursor effect is being executed (that is, when the display of FIG. 98 (a) is displayed), the player can press the frame button 22 in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. An operation effect to be operated is executed. In this operation effect, an effect of changing the movement mode (movement speed or movement position) of the character Dc1 imitating a car displayed in the sub display area Ds as a prognostic effect based on the operation of the frame button 22 is performed . Then, in the sub display area Ds that scrolls in response to the movement of the character Dc1, the specific effect suggestion mode for indicating the type of the specific effect set in the present suggested effect is displayed, and the specific effect suggestion acquired by the character Dc1 A specific effect corresponding to the mode is set.

  Here, the specific effect suggesting mode displayed in the sub display area Ds during the omen effect is an aspect (for example, “PUSH”) with which the player can grasp the content (for example, PUSH effect) of the corresponding specific effect. Mode) is displayed. And this specific effect display mode is set based on the specific effect (specific effect corresponding to the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol) which can be set in the special figure fluctuation pattern this time, specifically, FIG. 100 (b As shown with reference to), the specific effect display mode corresponding to the "cut-in effect" performed 26 seconds after the start of the change and the "PUSH display effect" performed 30 seconds after the start of the change is displayed Be done.

  In this addition example, although the aspect of the specific effect and the timing when the specific effect is executed are associated, it is possible to set the aspect of the specific effect and the timing when the specific effect is executed separately. You may configure it. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a game in which, among the plurality of specific effect display modes displayed in the operation effect performed during the omen effect, which specific effect mode is obtained and the period of the suggested effect is set longer. It can be suppressed that the person understands. Therefore, even after the end of the operation production, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the whole of the suggestion production, and the player can enjoy the suggestion production continuously.

  In addition, even if it is configured to set the execution timing of the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect display mode acquired during the operation effect, based on the content of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol this time (fluctuation time or jackpot lottery result) good. As a result, it is possible to select the specific effect desired by the player, and the player can actively participate in the game. Even when such a configuration is used, as described above, the timing at which the specific effect selected by the player is executed is based on the content of the variation pattern of the current special symbol (variation time or jackpot lottery result) By setting, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort with respect to the effect executed during the change of the special symbol.

  Referring back to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. After the process of S5072, the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated (S5073). In the process of S5073, the start timing of the countdown effect (3 seconds in this additional example) is calculated back from the execution timing of the specific effect set in the process of S5072, and the period from the current time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculate. That is, the period calculated in the process of S5073 can be lengthened by operating the frame button 22 quickly during the operation effect performed during the prognostic effect.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the interval calculated in the process of S5073 is within 15 seconds (S5074), and if it is determined within 15 seconds (S5074: Yes), an effect of the prophecy effect currently being executed If the mode is set to the short effect mode (S5075) and it is determined that it is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S5074: No), the pre-presentation effect mode currently being executed is long-effected The mode is set (S5076).

  That is, in this additional example, at the variation start timing of the special symbol, first, roughly based on the content of the variation pattern (variation time, jackpot lottery result) this time, the production mode of the aura effect is roughly set (S4351 in FIG. 189) The precursor effect is executed in accordance with the set effect mode. Then, while the precursor effect is being performed, and at the time when the specific effect to be the subject of the suggestion effect of this time is set, based on the remaining period of the indication effect (the remaining period of the precursor effect) It is configured to make the presentation mode variable.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display the suggested effect without a sense of discomfort toward the specific effect performed during the variable display. In addition, since it is possible to vary the display mode of the prognostic effect based on the operation content during the operation production, for example, the short rendering mode is easily set as the prognostic effect mode intentionally (the remaining period of the prognostic effect is short ) Operate the frame button 22 at the end of the operation effect that is the timing, and enjoy whether the long effect mode is set (whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a long fluctuation time), or conversely Intentionally, the frame button 22 is operated in the early stage during the operation effect at which the long effect mode is easily set as the precursor effect mode (the remaining period of the predictive effect is long), and the precursor effect executed in the long effect mode Can be performed, or effects corresponding to the player's request can be performed.

  After the precursor effect mode is set in the process of S5075 or S5076, the display countdown effect command corresponding to the set effect mode is set (S5077), the process of S5078 described above is performed, and the process is ended.

  As described above, in the additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (refer to FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation starts, the start timing of the suggestion effect (the start timing of the prognostic effect). Only the specific effect to be set as the target of the present suggested effect is set based on the operation to the frame button 22 executed during the omen effect.

  By configuring in this way, the start timing of the prognostic effect that becomes the start timing of the suggested effect is set as the start timing of the special figure variation, and while the prognostic effect is being executed (while the suggested effect is performed) In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect to be a target of the suggested effect. Therefore, compared with the case where the suggestion effect is performed for the predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect can be freely set, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, a prophetic effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed is provided as a suggested effect, and a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed. Since the executability is configured, even when the specific effect is set after the suggested effect is executed (during the prognostic effect execution), the suggested effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In addition, in this additional example, since it is possible to variably set the stage effect mode of the omen effect which is a partial effect of the suggestion effect (effect performed in the first half), the effect mode of the entire suggestion effect It can be set without discomfort. In this addition example, although the effect mode of the countdown effect executed as a partial effect (effect performed in the second half) of the suggested effect is fixed (the countdown display for 3 seconds), the present invention is not limited thereto. The interval until the specific effect is executed at the timing (see S5073 in FIG. 190) at which the specific effect to be executed this time is set is determined (see S5074 in FIG. 190), and based on the determination result, the effect of the countdown effect The period may be set (for example, 3 seconds or 7 seconds).

  Each of the configuration and the technical idea described in the first control example described above may be added to the additional example described above, and the contents of the first control example described above and the contents of the additional example The pachinko machine 10 which has each may be provided.

<Description when the various effects described in the first control example are used in the second control example>
Next, the contents in the case where the contents of the first control example and the contents of the second control example are combined will be described. Specifically, the first control described above is based on the result of the pre-discrimination of the fall lottery that is previously determined based on the lottery result of the fall lottery or the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The content in the case of setting the production | presentation aspect of the various production demonstrated by the example is demonstrated.

  In the first control example described above, in the jackpot during effect setting process (see S3302 in FIG. 143) for setting the jackpot effect, the number of balls held for the special symbol 2 and the ball entry information for winning the jackpot within the ball held. On the basis of the determination result of whether or not there is, it is possible to set the continuous jackpot effect by referring to the jackpot during effect selection table 222c, but in the gaming machine having the configuration of the fall lottery, the lottery result of the fall lottery Alternatively, the jackpot effect may be set with reference to the prior determination result of the falling lottery determined in advance based on the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

  Specifically, there is provided a second prior discrimination means capable of discriminating and associating the winning information for winning a big hit as pre-reading information and the winning information for winning a falling lottery in the order in which the special symbol variation is executed. If it is determined that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information winning in the fall lottery is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information winning in the big hit is determined as the determination result, the continuous jackpot effect is set It is good to be configured not to. As a result, when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, there is no winning information stored in the hold at that time since there is no winning information to be won in the falling lottery, so addition in the case where the continuous jackpot effect is executed It can increase the value more.

  Also, when it is determined by the second prior discrimination means that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information winning for the big hit is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information winning for the falling lottery is executed, The jackpot effect may be set. As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot continuous effects without executing a fall suggestion effect that suggests that the player has won the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of anxiety by executing the fall suggestion effect.

  In addition, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the first turn after the big hit among the pre-reading information at the time of the big hit is determined to include information indicating winning in the fall lottery, the big hit It is preferable not to execute an effect that suggests that a game state (probable change state) advantageous to the player is set after an end of a big hit as an effect. That is, if the player has won the fall lottery at the start timing of the first special symbol change after the big hit, the player will never receive the big hit lottery of the special symbol in a high probability state advantageous to the player. In such a state, if presentation is performed that suggests that the player is set with an advantageous gaming state (probable change state) after the big hit during the big hit, the player is given an excessive sense of expectation. It will be. When the above-described configuration is used, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive sense of expectation to the player.

  Next, in the first control example described above, a continuous effect (battle effect) for notifying a period in which a gaming state (a positive change state or a short time state) advantageous to the player is continuously set can be executed. The effect mode of the continuous effect (the effect mode of the pre-battle effect and the play mode of the battle reach), the lottery result of the special symbol of this time, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (preread information), Although the display mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed during one advantageous state (during a definite change state or a short time state), In a gaming machine having a fall lottery configuration, a fall lottery lottery result determined beforehand based on a lottery result of the fall lottery or information (pre-reading information) stored in the prize information storage area 223a is also included. It may be configured to set the performance aspect of the continued production and.

  In each control example mentioned above, it is constituted so that a change pattern (change production) may be set at the timing when change display setting processing (refer to Drawing 147) of voice lamp control device 113 is performed. That is, the setting of the variation pattern (variation presentation) based on the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also executed at the variation start timing of the special symbol. In this case, since the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e) is decremented by 1 in order to start the variation of the special symbol, winning is achieved. There has been a problem that it is not possible to set a variation pattern (variation effect) in a state where the information (preread information) stored in the information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit number.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the configuration to set the variation pattern (variation effect) by the voice lamp control device 113 is commonly executed regardless of the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. First variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern to be displayed (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and a first to be executed based on information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a (2) Second variation pattern setting means for setting variation patterns (for example, a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a hit in the hold), and it is preferable to use a variation start timing, ie, the following configuration. That is, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when the fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the above-described first fluctuation pattern is set.

  The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a by the second fluctuation pattern setting means after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds after) the fluctuation effect is executed based on the first fluctuation pattern (prefetch information The second variation pattern is set on the basis of the second variation pattern, and variation presentation is performed by adding information indicating the second variation pattern to the variation presentation performed in the first variation pattern. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to delay the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation presentation) based on the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a than the variation start timing of the special symbol.

  Therefore, it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation effect) based on the pre-reading information in a state where the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit number. It can be made easy to carry out the preread effect).

  The timing at which the process of setting the second fluctuation pattern is executed by the above-mentioned second fluctuation pattern setting means may be set after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. The setting timing of the second variation pattern may be made different according to the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the timing of setting the pre-reading effect according to the variation pattern to be executed, so it is possible to make the player actively reserve the holding ball.

  Here, as the execution timing set corresponding to the first variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means, for example, a relatively long variation time (a variation time of 60 seconds or more) is given as the first variation pattern. If it is set, the second variation pattern setting timing is set 15 seconds after the start of variation, and if a relatively short variation time (a variation time of 30 seconds) is set as the first variation pattern, the second variation It is preferable to set the pattern setting timing five seconds after the start of fluctuation.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting unit is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second fluctuation pattern setting unit may not be executed. By configuring in this way, when a fluctuation time that is difficult to execute the pre-reading effect is set, the pre-reading effect is not added during the fluctuation, and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a second fluctuation pattern (pre-reading effect) which can be set by the second fluctuation pattern setting means, a short effect (for example, comment display notice) executed in a short period (for example, 2 seconds) and a long period (for example, Even when the long effect (for example, the notice of stopping the chance) is set to be performed in 20 seconds, the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting unit Is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second fluctuation pattern setting means is not executed, so that the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation pattern set by the first fluctuation pattern setting means is predetermined period In the case of (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the second fluctuation pattern (prefetch effect) can be easily performed by the second fluctuation pattern setting means.

  As described above, in the case where the second variation pattern setting unit is not to be executed according to the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting unit, the winning information storage area 223a is used. Among the stored winning information, the winning information for which the determination of whether to set the second variation pattern by the second variation pattern setting means and the winning information not being executed are identifiably stored If the second variation pattern setting unit is executed, it is determined whether the second variation pattern is already set by the second variation pattern setting unit among the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It is preferable that the setting determination of the second variation pattern is executed excluding the winning combination information for which the determination of the second variation pattern has been executed.

  Further, in addition to the above-described example, the display control device 114 performs a pre-read effect execution command indicating that the second change pattern (pre-reading effect) set by the second change pattern setting unit is executed by the display control device 114 When it is configured to output to the control device 113, and although the audio lamp control device 113 sets the second variation pattern (pre-reading effect), the pre-reading effect execution command can not be received (pre-reading effect is not executed In the following case, it is preferable that the second variation pattern setting unit is executed again on the same winning information in the next variation.

  A special symbol based on storage means capable of storing (pending storage) a plurality of starting winning prizes (first entry slot 64 or second entry slot 140) of special symbol and information (winning information) stored in the storage means The contents of the winning information stored in the storage means (before the lottery condition of the special symbol based on the winning information stored in the storing means is established) before the lottery (variation) of In the gaming machine having the predetermination means (prefetching means) for predetermining, when performing the fluctuation effect (prereading effect) based on the judgment result of the predetermination means, the advance is made at the start of the change of the special symbol. There is a configuration provided with effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the special symbol variation this time based on the determination result of the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, since the effect mode can be set based on the determination result of the pre-determination means as the effect mode corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol, the effect mode to be executed is The content may indicate both the lottery result of the special symbol and the discrimination result of the winning information stored in the storage unit, and can make an effect to make the player interested. However, since the effect mode is determined based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination result at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect mode is set with the number of winning information stored in the storage means not reaching the upper limit number There was a problem of having to That is, the timing at which the effect mode is set is stored (stored in the storage means) using the oldest winning information stored in the storage means (winning information used for the next special symbol variation) to execute the variation of the special symbol. It is not possible to set the presentation mode in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit number, since it is the timing when the winning information being executed is reduced by one). There has been a problem that the frequency of execution of the fluctuation effect (pre-reading effect) based on the determination result of is decreased.

  Furthermore, in the above-described configuration, processing for determining the content of the winning information stored in the storage means and processing for setting an effect mode corresponding to the variation of the special symbol at the start timing of the variation of the special symbol There is a problem that the processing is concentrated in a short period of time and the processing load increases.

  Further, as the configuration for executing the fluctuation effect (pre-reading effect) based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination device, the pre-discrimination device described above based on the fact that the new winning information is stored in the storage device besides the configuration described above. There are also gaming machines that execute discrimination according to the above, and based on the discrimination result, execute an effect (prefetch effect) to indicate a prior discrimination result different from the variation display of the special symbol.

  In such a configuration, it is possible to execute the pre-reading effect at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage unit, so it is possible to smoothly perform the effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination unit. However, since the effect to be executed becomes the effect for indicating the discrimination result of the pre-discriminating means, the effect and display content indicating the discrimination result of the special symbol currently being executed overlap with the player. And there is a problem that it becomes an unclear display. In addition, there is a problem that the processing load is temporarily increased because the preread effect is controlled at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage means.

  In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the configuration to set the variation pattern (variation effect) by the voice lamp control device 113 is commonly executed regardless of the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. First variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern to be displayed (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and a first to be executed based on information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a (2) Second variation pattern setting means for setting variation patterns (for example, a suggestive effect suggesting that there is a hit in the hold), and it is preferable to use a variation start timing, ie, the following configuration. That is, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when the fluctuation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the above-described first fluctuation pattern is set.

  The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a by the second fluctuation pattern setting means after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds after) the fluctuation effect is executed based on the first fluctuation pattern (prefetch information The second variation pattern is set on the basis of the second variation pattern, and variation presentation is performed by adding information indicating the second variation pattern to the variation presentation performed in the first variation pattern. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to delay the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation presentation) based on the information (pre-reading information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a than the variation start timing of the special symbol.

<Third control example>
Next, another control example of the continuous effect described in the first control example described above will be described. In the first control example described above, as shown in FIG. 90, battle rendition (pre-battle rendition and battle reach) is configured to be repeatedly executed during high probability (during a probability change state or a time reduction state) . In the control content of the first control example described above, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, a variation pattern (a variation pattern in which a variation time is 60 seconds or more) that can execute battle reach or a variation pattern that can not execute battle reach There has been a case where (the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds) is continuously selected. In the first control example described above, the fluctuation pattern (outlier fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) capable of executing the battle reach is within a predetermined period in order to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the effect (If, for example, within the interval in which the special symbol changes six times), battle reach will be executed needlessly by configuring not to execute battle reach for the latter change pattern, Although it is configured to solve the problem of causing a decrease in the rendering effect, the variation pattern capable of executing battle reach and the variation pattern not capable of performing battle reach are randomly selected based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In the first control example to be selected, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, it is not possible to execute battle reach (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds. Down) is will be selected in succession, battle before production was remains a problem that the long period of time.

  Therefore, in the third control example, a special effect for showing a lottery result of a special symbol which is configured to be executed during a definite variation state as a gaming state and in which a continuation effect (battle effect) is executed is shown. As a fluctuation pattern table used when selecting a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern table in which pre-battle effects are executed (it is easy to be performed) and a fluctuation pattern table in which battle reach is carried out (it is easy to be performed) It is configured to be used in accordance with the rules (fluctuation scenario).

  By configuring in this way, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, if the special symbol variation count is the predetermined number of times (for example, the 14th rotation from the big hit end), be sure to execute the battle reach Can solve the problems described above. Furthermore, in the third control example, the variation scenario used while the probability variation state is set is configured to be selected and used from a plurality of variation scenarios having different contents. As a result, even in the case of using the configuration in which the variation pattern is selected in accordance with the predetermined variation scenario, it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  Furthermore, in the third control example, a plurality of jackpot types are prepared for jackpots providing the same value (content of jackpot game, gaming state set after jackt termination), and the selected jackpot type Are configured to select a variation pattern to be executed after the end of the big hit based on the variation scenario corresponding to. Thereby, since it is possible to set the variation scenario to be executed after the big hit end according to the type of the big hit, the variation pattern along the variation scenario is surely selected from the special symbol change of the first rotation after the big hit end. be able to.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 202. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the contents of the ROM 202 and the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control unit 110 are partially changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the audio lamp control The difference is that the content of the ROM 222 provided in the device 113 and the content of the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the content of the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 is partially changed; Are identical. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 191 (a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. FIG. As shown in FIG. 191 (a), the ROM 202 in this control example adds a variation scenario setting table 202ca to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and partially changes the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c. The second embodiment differs from the second embodiment in that the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c in the present third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example. The detailed description of the same elements as those of the first hit type selection table 202 c used in the first control example described above will be omitted.

  In the first hit type selection table 202c in the present third control example, jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot K) corresponding to the contents of the jackpot game (the number of rounds) and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is further added. The subdivided jackpot types (jackpots Aa to Aj) are defined. Specifically, among the values “0 to 19” of the first contact type counter C2 defined in association with “big hit A”, the value of the first contact type counter C2 falls within the range of “0, 1”. Is defined in association with "big hit Aa", "big hit Ab" is specified in association with the range of "2, 3", and "big hit" is defined in the range of "4, 5" Ac is defined in association with the "6, 7" range is defined in association with "big hit Ad", "jackpot Ae" corresponds in the range of "8, 9" The jackpot Af is defined in association with the range of “10, 11”, and the jackpot Ag is defined in association with the range of “12, 13”. In the range of "14, 15", "big hit Ah" is defined in association with Cage, the range of "16, 17", are defined in association with the "big hit Ai", the range of "19" is defined in association with the "big hit Aj".

  That is, in the third control example, 10 types of the 20 random numbers from which the “big hit A” is selected among the 200 possible counter values (random number values) of the first type-of-kinds counter C2 are It is defined that the jackpot type (jackpot Aa to jackpot Aj) is equally allocated, and the ratio in which each jackpot type (jackpot Aa to jackpot Aj) is selected is 1%.

  In addition, although the detailed description will be described later, in the third control example, when any of "big hit Aa" to "big hit Aj" is selected, a big hit game (15 rounds specified in "big hit A" The game) is executed, and after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state defined by "jackpot A" is set. And the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation to show the lottery result of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the selected jackpot type (big hit Aa to big hit Aj) .

  By configuring in this way, when a specific jackpot game is set, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation performed after the jackpot game end different, for example, as a jackpot type "big hit Aa" When "big hit Aj" is selected, a variation pattern having a short variation time can be more easily selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the big hit game is finished than when "is selected". That is, even if it is a jackpot type in which the same gaming state is set with the same jackpot game content, the number of changes per unit time in the special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot game end can be varied depending on the jackpot type, It is possible to give the player who wants to be the first to win the next jackpot a sense of expectation for the jackpot type won until the timing when the special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game is executed.

  Similar to the "big hit A" described above, "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit G", "big hit I" defined in the first hit type selection table 202c, that is, high probability after the big hit game is over For jackpot types to which a state and a time saving state (hereinafter referred to as a definite variation state) are given, it is defined that "a to j", which are minor classifications of the respective jackpot types, are equally allocated. On the other hand, "big hit C", "big hit H", "big hit J", "big hit K", that is, high probability state and short time state are not given after the end of the big hit game (low probability state and time short state are given ) For jackpot type, does not define the jackpot type minor classification (a to j), but a common fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation that is executed after the jackpot game is over It is configured as follows.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (a). FIG. 193 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 193 (a), in the third control example, the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is deleted from the first control example, and the jackpot (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1, the first deviation The difference is that a (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, a second outlier variation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3, and a special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 are added.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 193 (b), the jackpot (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1 will be described. FIG. 193 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of a jackpot (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1. The jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 is a variation pattern table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is a probability variation state and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (b), any one of the fluctuation patterns having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected. Specifically, in the range of “0 to 179”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in association with a variation pattern (various super reach types) having a variation time of 60 seconds, and “180 to 198” In the range, fluctuation patterns (various special reach types) having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds are defined in association with each other. In the third control example, when a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected, battle reach (winning battle) in which three attacks are developed by the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (see FIG. 94). When a variation pattern of 90 seconds is selected, a battle reach (winning battle) is performed in which a resurrection effect is performed after three attacks are developed (see FIG. 96).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 193 (c), the first deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2 will be described. FIG. 193C is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first shift (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2. The first out-of-order (probable change) change pattern table 202dc2 is referred to when selecting a change pattern when the gaming state is a positive change state and the lottery result of the special symbol is out. It is one.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (c), in the first out-of-order (probable-change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2, the fluctuation pattern of short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) has a long fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds) It is configured to be easier to select than the variation pattern. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern (short deviation a) having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is defined in association with a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 149”, and “150 to 197” In the range, a fluctuation pattern (short out b) with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is defined in association with “198”, a fluctuation pattern (long out a) with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with “198”. It is done.

  That is, in the first out-of-order (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2, 198 random values (range of “0 to 197”) out of 199 possible counter values (random number values) of the fluctuation type counter C1 are obtained. And a short deviation (short deviation a, short deviation b), which is a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time, is defined, and for the remaining one random value (“198”), the fluctuation time is a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation pattern. Since a gap (long gap a) is specified, the variation time is short in most (about 99.5%) when selecting a variation pattern with reference to the first variation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc2. A variation pattern is selected.

  In the third control example, when a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds (short deviation a) or a fluctuation pattern with 5 seconds (short deviation b) is selected, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91, see FIG. 92). Among them, when “short out b” is selected, an attack effect (see FIG. 92) is executed to increase or decrease the opponent's continuation value (HP value). Note that, when “short out a” is selected, for example, an effect in which the character of the player and the character of the other party have a conversation, or the other party, without executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the other party. An effect of switching the character of is executed. Also, when “long out a” is selected, a battle reach (draw battle) in which three attacks are developed is executed (see FIG. 94).

  Next, the contents of the second deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3 will be described with reference to FIG. 193 (d). FIG. 193D is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the second deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3. The second out-of-order (probable change) change pattern table 202dc3 is a change pattern table that is referred to when selecting a change pattern when the gaming state is a positive change state and the special symbol lottery result is out. As shown in FIG. 193 (d), one of the fluctuation patterns having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected to be selected.

  Specifically, in the range of “0 to 197” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, a variation pattern (long a) with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in association with “198”. A fluctuation pattern (long out b) with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is defined in association.

  FIG. 193 (e) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the special (probable) variation pattern table 202dc4. This special (probable change) change pattern table 202dc4 is a change pattern table to be referred to when selecting a change pattern when the jackpot gaming state is a definite change state, and the change time is not related to the lottery result of the special symbol A variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is configured to be selected. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the fluctuation pattern (very short deviation) with fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds corresponds to the whole range ("0-198") of the value of fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, it is a fluctuation pattern of 0.5 seconds (per ultrashort) in the whole range ("0-198") of the value of fluctuation type counter CS1. Are defined in association with each other.

  Referring back to FIG. 191 (a), the description will be continued. In the variation scenario setting table 202ca, a variation scenario that defines the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 193 (a)) to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in correspondence with the number of variations of the special symbol is It is specified in association with the jackpot type. This variation scenario setting table 202ca is determined to be the ending timing of ending effect, that is, the ending timing of the jackpot game in the jackpot control process (see S1104 in FIG. 137) executed by the main control unit 110 (FIG. 137). (S1211: Yes), which is referred to set a variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type winning this time, a variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type winning this time is read out and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

  Here, the contents of the variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 194 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the variation scenario setting table 202ca associates each variation scenario (variation) with the jackpot type (small category of jackpot type (a to j)) and the gaming state at the time of jackpot win. Scenario 1 to change scenario 11) are defined.

  That is, in the third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the big hit ends (the special symbol variation executed after the big hit ends according to the winning jackpot type and the gaming state when winning the big hit) The range of selection of the variation pattern of Therefore, in addition to the contents of the jackpot game (the number of rounds) and the gaming state set after the jackpot game when winning a jackpot, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern set after the jackpot game different as well. It can improve the interest.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the variation scenario set after the big hit is different depending on the gaming state when the big hit is won. Specifically, if the gaming state when winning a jackpot is a state without time saving (special symbol high probability state, low probability state common), any jackpot type (small category of jackpot type (a to j)) Set a common variation scenario (variation scenario 1) even if is set, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time reduction state (special symbol high probability state, low probability state common) , It is configured to set a variation scenario (variation scenario 2 to 11) corresponding to the set jackpot type (small class (jack) of the jackpot type).

  By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol fluctuation times per unit time is greater in the case of winning a big hit (probable big hit) in a time-saving state than when winning a big hit (probably big hit) in a non-time saving state. It is possible to As a result, the player can be made more aware of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the third control example, when winning a big hit (probable variation big hit) in a time-saving state than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when winning a big hit (probable variation big hit) without time saving state. Although each variation scenario is configured such that the number of special symbol variations per unit time is larger in the variation scenario (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) to be set, the invention is not limited thereto, for example, there is no time saving Each variation scenario may be configured such that the number of special symbol variations per unit time increases when the player wins a jackpot (probable variation jackpot) in the state. By configuring in this manner, for example, in the effect mode that can be set only when the probability variation jackpot is won in the time saving state, the bonus image can be performed for a long time.

  In addition, of the fluctuation scenarios (variation scenario 2 to fluctuation scenario 11) set when winning a big hit (probable variation big hit) in the time-saving state, some of the variation scenarios are big hit (probable variation big hit) without time saving state The number of times of special symbol variation per unit time may be set to be smaller than the variation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when winning, or when winning a big hit (probable variation big hit) with no time saving state. The plurality of variation scenarios may be set based on the jackpot type (the jackpot type minor classification (a to j)).

  Next, contents of each variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 (b) to 196 (d). FIG. 194 (b) is a schematic view showing the contents of the variation scenario 1. First, the contents defined in the variation scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (b). The variation scenario refers to the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game (ie, one special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game becomes the number of variations 1) and the variation pattern of that variation. And the fluctuation pattern table to be detected.

  Further, in the third control example, as described above, when a jackpot type in which a probability change state is set as the gaming state is won after the end of the jackpot game, the corresponding change scenario is set by the change scenario setting table 202ca, and the change scenario The selection of the variation pattern is performed in accordance with the contents defined in.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (b), in the variation scenario 1, the table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined as the variation pattern table to be referred to when the number of variations is “1 to 4”. As a fluctuation pattern to be referred to when “5” is “5”, a table B (for deviation (certain variation) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 3) is defined.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), this variation scenario 1 is set when all jackpots to which the jackpot type (small classification) has been awarded are won in a state where the time saving state is not given as the gaming state, as shown in FIG. Be done. When the variation scenario 1 is set, the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 (table A) (see FIG. 193 (e)) is used during the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotation after the end of the big hit. A fluctuation pattern of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the result of the lottery.

  And after the special symbol variation fifth rotation after the big hit end, the out (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (table B) (see Figure 108 (d)) is used, the variation time is out of 7 seconds-90 seconds The variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type CS1. In addition, since fluctuation scenario 1 is a scenario set when the gaming state is a definite variation state, when winning a big hit of a special symbol in the state where fluctuation scenario 1 is set, as described above, for jackpot A fluctuation pattern is selected using the (probable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1.

  Next, the contents of the variation scenario 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (c). As shown in FIG. 194 (c), in the variation scenario 2, the table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is associated with the range of the variation count of “1 to 4” in the same manner as the variation scenario 1 described above. The table C (the first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of “5 to 13” in the number of fluctuations, and the table D (for the second A definite variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined.

  Thereafter, the table C (the first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with nine fluctuation times until the fluctuation number reaches “199”, and the table D (second Deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with one another. That is, after the special symbol variation is selected nine times using the table C and the variation pattern is selected using the table C, the variation pattern is changed using the table D during the period when the variation number of the special symbol after the big hit is “5 to 199”. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

  By configuring in this manner, in a battle effect performed during a period in which a probability change state is set as a gaming state, a special symbol variation in which a pre-battle effect is executed (a short deviation using a table C (short deviation a , Special symbol variation for which short deviation b) is selected, and special symbol variation for which battle reach is executed (special symbol variation for which long deviation (long deviation a, long deviation b) is selected using table D) Can be set in advance, so that it is possible to change the effect mode of the pre-battle effect toward the special symbol change in which the battle reach is executed.

  Further, in the third control example, when the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C, a slight but long deviation a (outside fluctuation of 60 seconds) is selected. Thereby, when setting a change scenario beforehand, it is comprised so that execution of a battle reach is possible at a timing with surprisingness. As a result, when a battle reach is executed at unexpected timing (ie, when a change time capable of performing the battle reach (a change time of 60 seconds or more) is selected), a jackpot to the player is made. A game can be played while expecting the winning.

  In addition, as described above, by setting the change scenario and enabling the setting of the period in which the pre-battle rendering and the battle reach are performed in advance, the player can not feel uncomfortable for a long time (for example, with suspension) While it is possible to set the stage of the pre-battle stage effect in a period in which the number of special symbol variations larger than the upper limit number of memories is executed), it is possible to set the same variation scenario every time the battle stage is performed. When the effect based on the game is executed, there is a problem that the player gets bored with the battle effect itself.

  In order to solve such a problem, in the third control example, the jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A") in which the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot and the gaming state set after the jackpot end are the same Against a plurality of jackpot types (for example, "jackpot Aa" to "jackpot Aj") in which different fluctuation scenarios are defined, so that the player can not easily grasp the contents of the fluctuation scenarios during battle rendition Configured.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress the demerit (monotonization of presentation) by the scenario while having the merit (conversion of presentation for a long time without giving a sense of discomfort to the player) by making the fluctuation pattern into a scenario. Also, since the game content (round number) of the jackpot and the gaming state set after the jackpot end are configured in a plurality of variation scenarios for the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A"), Even if the player grasps the game content of the jackpot and the gaming state set after the jackpot end, it can be made difficult to grasp in which fluctuation scenario the special figure fluctuation is being executed after the jackpot end. . Therefore, when battle reach is executed, it is unclear whether it is a predetermined battle reach (draw battle) based on a change scenario or a battle reach (win or defeat battle) based on winning a big hit. It is possible to enhance the stage effect.

  In this control example, the jackpot type to which “a to j” is given is specified for all of “jacks A”, “jacks B”, “jacks D”, “jacks G”, and “jacks I”. However, the jackpot type defined for each jackpot may be different, for example, when a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot A" is executed, a specific fluctuation scenario (eg, fluctuation scenario) It may be configured to be settable only in 2). As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the player who is playing a game for a long time to grasp the relationship between the game content of the jackpot and the variation scenario. Therefore, when battle reach is performed at a different timing after the end of a specific jackpot game (for example, a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot A"), the sense of expectation for the jackpot can be enhanced.

  Then, the table B (for out-of-order (probable variation) variation pattern table 202 d 3) is defined in association with the range where the number of variations of the special symbol is “200 ̃”. By configuring in this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability change state continues until the next big hit as in this control example, there is no need to create a variation scenario infinitely, and thus reducing the data capacity of the main control device 110 Can. In this third control example, the variation that is reached when a lottery that is four or more times the probability is executed against the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the definite variation state (about 1/48 (see FIG. 106A)). If the number of times "200" is exceeded, table B (for deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3) is configured to be executed, but if the number of fluctuation times or more is reached, table B (for deviation (probability variation) The variation pattern table 202 d 3) may be configured to be executed. For example, when the number of variations reached “500” is reached when the lottery with 10 times or more of the jackpot probability is executed, the table B is used. Alternatively, the selection of the variation pattern may be performed.

  Further, in the third control example, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed when the number of fluctuation “200” which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario is exceeded, but other than that A table may be used. For example, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table A may be executed until the jackpot is won next time, or the number of times of fluctuation that is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario is "200". Selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table A is executed during the number of times "399", and selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed until the jackpot wins next time when the number of fluctuation exceeds "400" It may be configured to

  In addition, as described above, in the third control example, the battle effect is configured to be executed based on the variation scenario against the special symbol variation within the range of the number of times of lottery that can normally win the jackpot. However, when the upper limit (the number of times of fluctuation "200") of the fluctuation scenario is exceeded, it is preferable that the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute effects other than the battle effect. In this case, it is preferable that a bonus effect such that a video or audio which can not normally be viewed by the player or a point which the player is collecting is provided is executed. This makes it possible to give a special benefit to a player who has not been able to win a jackpot over a long period of time. In addition, in the third control example, the above-mentioned bonus presentation is executed using a variation pattern different from the variation pattern corresponding to the variation scenario set to smoothly execute the battle presentation performed during the definite variation state It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of benefit presentation.

  Next, the contents of the variation scenario 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 194 (d). FIG. 194 (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the definition content of the variation scenario 3. The variation scenario 3 is configured such that a period in which a variation pattern is selected using the table C and the table D is different from the variation scenario 2 described above (see FIG. 194 (c)). Specifically, in the variation scenario 3, the table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in association with the range of the number of variations “1 to 4” in the same manner as the variation scenario 2 described above. Table C (the first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of “5 to 9”, and the variation count is “10”. Table D (second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined.

  Thereafter, the table C (the first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with five fluctuation times until the fluctuation number reaches “190”, and the table D (second Deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with one another. That is, after the special symbol variation is selected five times using the table C, the variation pattern is changed using the table D during the period when the variation number of the special symbol after the big hit is "5-190". A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the timing at which the battle reach (draw battle) based on the change scenario is executed depending on the type of the change scenario that is set. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a victory or a defeat battle), and the stage effect can be enhanced.

  Then, similarly to the above-described fluctuation scenario 2, the table C (the first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of “190-198” and the number of fluctuations is “199”. Table D (second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined, and table B (dislocation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3) is defined in the range of “200 to“.

  Thus, regardless of the type of jackpot, the period before battle (corresponding to the period of “190-198”) corresponding to the last battle reach (the battle reach performed when the number of changes is “199”) By unifying, it is possible to easily unify the contents of the effect to be executed even when any jackpot type is set. Therefore, there is no need to prepare for each jackpot type an effect (effect to make the pre-battle effect or the battle reach effect mode different from the normal effect) that suggests the end of the battle effect to the player, so there is no capacity of the effect data. It can be reduced.

  In addition, it is not necessary to unify the effect (the effect of making the pre-battle production or the battle reach production mode different from the normal production) for suggesting to the player that the battle production ends for all the big hit types, at least 2 The fluctuation scenario is configured so that the effects (the effects of making the pre-battle production and the production mode of the battle reach different from the normal production) are suggested to the player that the battle production ends for the two jackpot types. For example, the volume of effect data can be reduced.

  Next, the contents of the variation scenario 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 195 (a). FIG. 195 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 4. FIG. In this variation scenario 4, the same content as the above-mentioned variation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194 (c)) is defined in the period until the number of variations is “1 to 14”, and the content defined thereafter Are configured to be different from the variation scenario 2. In this manner, a plurality of variation scenarios define the same content for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit, and are configured to differ from each other after the predetermined period elapses, so that the player is set this time. It is possible to make it more difficult to understand what the fluctuation scenario is.

  FIG. 195 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 5. This variation scenario 5 is different from the variation scenarios 2 to 4, and the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table D after the number of variations "1 to 4" for which the variation pattern is selected using the table A Is executed. That is, battle reach (draw battle) is performed without executing pre-battle production. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of discomfort with respect to the battle effect than when other variation scenarios are set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the jackpot to the battle reach performed immediately after the start of the battle production. The other contents are the same as those of the above-described variation scenarios 2 to 4, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 195 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 6. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 195 (c), this variation scenario 6 does not have a period in which a variation pattern is selected using Table A, and a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using Table D. Are different from other fluctuation scenarios in that they are set continuously. The other elements are the same as in the above-described variation scenarios 2 to 4, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the fluctuation scenario, the fluctuation pattern table defined in the fluctuation scenario is made identical to the above-described fluctuation scenario 6 and is associated with each fluctuation pattern table. A variation scenario 7 (see FIG. 195 (d)) is provided in which only the number of variations is changed. As a result, even if the variation pattern is selected using the table C after the big hit ends (that is, when the battle effect is started immediately after the big hit ends), the variation currently set for the player It can make it difficult to understand what the scenario is.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation scenario 8 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (a). FIG. 196 (a) is a schematic view showing the contents of the variation scenario 8. FIG. As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the variation scenario 8 is different from the above-described variation scenarios 1 to 7 in that the period in which the variation pattern is selected is set longer using Table A. . Specifically, the table A is defined in association with the range of “1 to 10” of the number of times of variation of the special symbol to be executed after the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to lengthen the period for selecting a variation pattern using Table A in which a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. The jackpot of can be provided in a short period of time.

  In addition, during the period in which the table A is defined in association, the third symbol display device 81 displays the same as the extended display of the first control example described above, that is, the ending screen showing the end of the jackpot game. It is configured to be displayed. Thereby, a series of jackpot effects can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games.

  Next, the variation scenario 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (b). FIG. 196 (b) is a schematic view showing the contents of the variation scenario 9. As shown in FIG. 196 (b), this variation scenario 9 is different from the other variation scenarios in that the variation pattern table defined first after the end of the big hit is replaced with a table A to make it a table B. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player think that the probability change state is not set as the gaming state after the big hit ends. After that, when a period (period of the number of fluctuations “1 to 4”) defined in association with the table B elapses, a fluctuation pattern using the tables C and D is selected as in the other fluctuation scenarios. The battle effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the selected fluctuation pattern, so that unexpected effects can be provided to the player.

  FIG. 196 (c) is a schematic view showing the contents of the variation scenario 10. As shown in FIG. 196 (c), the variation scenario 10 is different from the other variation scenarios in that the period for selecting a variation pattern using the table D is not set. That is, in this fluctuation scenario 10, since the fluctuation pattern is not selected using the table D during the period when the battle effect is executed, a battle reach (draw battle) predetermined based on the fluctuation scenario is executed. There is nothing to be done.

  In this fluctuation scenario 10, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at the time of selecting the fluctuation pattern using the table C is “198”, and the fluctuation pattern (long deviation a) having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected Or, a lottery result of a special symbol becomes a big hit, and a battle reach is to be executed when a variation pattern of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected using the variation pattern table 202dc1 for big hit . Therefore, when the present variation scenario 10 is set, it is possible to increase the probability of winning a jackpot when battle reach is executed, as compared to the case where another variation scenario is set.

  Further, in the third control example, as in the first control example described above, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the probability change big hit to which a probability change state is given as the gaming state after the big hit ends, and the big hit The game has a normal jackpot as a gaming state after the end, and in the battle reach performed during the battle production, a winning battle is executed when a probability change jackpot is won, and a normal jackpot is won The defeat battle is configured to be executed in the case, and the draw battle is configured to be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is out.

  That is, when the present variation scenario 10 is set, the frequency at which the draw battle is performed can be reduced compared to the case where another variation scenario is set. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the contents of presentation when the battle reach is executed, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, when setting a change scenario without using the table D as in the change scenario 10, there is a possibility that pre-battle effects may be executed for a long period of time. It is better to use a table (table C2) which can select a fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern of 0.5 seconds to 1 second) whose fluctuation time is shorter than a fluctuation pattern of 3 seconds to 5 seconds). . As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which the pre-battle rendering is continuously performed.

  Next, the fluctuation scenario 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 196 (d). FIG. 196 (d) is a schematic view showing the contents of the variation scenario 11. In this variation scenario 11, as shown in FIG. 196 (d), the variation pattern table defined first after the big hit ends is set as table C, and after a predetermined period elapses after the big hit end (special symbol changes 249 times) This is different from the other variation scenarios in that Table A is defined in (4) and the upper limit number of variation scenarios is “400”.

  According to the variation scenario 11, since there is no period in which the variation pattern is selected using the table D similarly to the variation scenario 10 described above, there is a possibility that the jackpot is won when the battle reach is executed. (Possibility of winning or losing battle being executed) can be enhanced, and the player can be made to pay attention to the contents of the battle reach.

  Moreover, since the table A in which the number of changes per unit time becomes the highest is defined when the number of special symbol changes from the end of the big hit exceeds the predetermined number (399 times), the probability change state is set as the game state Dissatisfaction that the player feels when the period in which the jackpot is not won continues for a long period of time (for example, the period during which the special symbol variation of 10 times the value of the jackpot probability denominator is executed) It is possible to suppress the feeling.

  As described above, in the third control example, a plurality (10 types) of change scenarios can be set for the jackpot type in which the same jackpot is executed, and battle reach (draw It is difficult to understand the battle) and the battle reach (win or defeat battle) based on winning the special symbol jackpot, but the type of fluctuation scenario is not limited to this, and from many more types The variation scenario may be settable.

  Further, in the third control example, the fluctuation scenario is determined for all the periods in which the battle effect is executed, and the contents of the battle effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) can be determined in advance. Only a part of the period during which the battle effect is performed (for example, a period between the end of the big hit and the time when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, or a period for 10 special symbol variations calculated backward from the timing when the battle effect ends) A variation scenario may be defined.

  In this third control example, a configuration is set in which the variation scenario of the special symbol variation is set based on the winning jackpot type that has been won, but other elements may be used to set (variable) the variation scenario, for example, Although the lottery result of the special symbol is out, even if it becomes the lottery result (so-called, small hit) which gives the player a small amount of bonus than the jackpot, it is configured to set the variable scenario (variable) Alternatively, the fall scenario may be set (variable) when the fall is won by the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above. Furthermore, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a means for performing a lottery to change the fluctuation scenario is provided, and the fluctuation scenario is set (variable) based on the lottery result It may be configured to

  Next, contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 used in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 191 (b). FIG. 191 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 191 (b), the RAM 203 of the third control example is different in that a variation scenario storage area 203ca is added to the RAM 203 of the first control example described above. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  The variation scenario storage area 203ca is an area for storing a variation scenario set using the variation scenario setting table 202ca. In the third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. This variation scenario storage area 203ca stores a variation scenario corresponding to the winning jackpot type when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, and the number of times of variation number subtraction processing 4 executed every time the variation of the special symbol is performed (Refer to FIG. 204) (refer to S452 in FIG. 204). In this way, after winning the jackpot (after the process of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol to indicate that the jackpot has been started is executed), until the fluctuation of the special symbol after the jackpot is executed Since the variation scenario is stored between the two, it is possible to reliably select the variation pattern of the special symbol to be executed after the big hit, based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 197A, the ROM 222 of the third control example deletes the continuation value main selection table 222 f and the continuation value sub selection table 222 g from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. Point, variation scenario storage area 222ca, first continuation value main selection table 222cb, second continuation value main selection table 222cc, third continuation value main selection table 222cd, and continuation effect mode selection 2 table 222ce The difference is that it has been added. In the third control example, since a modification of the continuation effect (battle effect) of the first control example described above is shown, among the elements provided in the ROM 222 of the first control example described above, the continuation is continued The description is abbreviate | omitted about the element which is not related to a production | presentation, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about an element other than that, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The variation scenario storage area 222 ca is an area in which information for indicating the contents of a plurality of variation scenarios defined in the variation scenario setting table 202 ca of the main controller 110 is stored, and is output from the main controller 110 The voice lamp control device 113 updates the variation scenario based on the command for indicating the setting situation of the variation scenario (for example, the command for indicating the jackpot type or the command for indicating the variation scenario being set) Information used for management is stored.

  When it is determined that the variation scenario storage area 222ca has received a state command including related information related to the variation scenario in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3271 in FIG. 205: Yes And the variation scenario corresponding to the received command is read out and set in the variation scenario update area 223ca (see S3272 in FIG. 205).

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to synchronize the variation scenario set by main controller 110 with the variation scenario managed by voice lamp control device 113, so that the variation pattern to be selected by main controller 110 in the future (The fluctuation pattern selected based on the set fluctuation scenario) can be grasped in advance on the audio lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a long-term effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  That is, in the conventional game machine, the contents of a plurality of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are determined, and based on the determination result, specific winning information (for example, the third of the winning information). A special symbol variation in which special symbol variation is executed is changed period of the special symbol variation (first and second special symbol variation executed in the prize information) which is executed before that. Although it was possible to execute a realistic effect, for example, when a plurality of winning information is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it becomes difficult to perform a long-term effect Also, since the maximum value of the range where long-term effects can be performed becomes the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the maximum number of winning information that can be stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is said that the effect period is limited There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol can be managed in a scenario, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be executed in the future can be easily determined. Therefore, the degree of freedom can be enhanced for long-term effects.

  Further, in the third control example, since the voice lamp control device 113 has the change scenario storage area 222 ca, it is not necessary to output all the contents of the change scenario to which the main control device 110 is set. The main control device 110 may output information for indicating a variation scenario (for example, information indicating a winning jackpot type, identification information capable of specifying a variation scenario to be set from among a plurality of variation scenarios). The amount of data of information to be output can be reduced.

  In addition, although the detailed description is omitted, in the third control example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (in the case of a power failure), the main control unit 110 is restored. Execute recovery processing to output the gaming state stored just before power supply to the sound lamp control device 113 is cut off (or from when the power supply is cut off until the processing of the main control unit 110 is stopped) In the information for indicating the gaming state output in the recovery process, at least the jackpot type won at least last time is currently set as the information for indicating the currently set fluctuation scenario. Any of the information for indicating any of the fluctuation scenarios, the update situation of the fluctuation scenario currently set, and the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol executed after the previous jackpot ended And information for indicating, are configured to contain. As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the game, the updated contents of the change scenario set in the main control device 110 after the recovery and the change managed by the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to easily synchronize with the updated content of the scenario.

  In this case, a predetermined period after the update management processing of the variation scenario by the voice lamp control device 113 is recovered based on the information output from the main control device 110 as the recovery processing (for example, the special symbol varies a plurality of times (five times) The voice lamp control device 113 manages the update scenario of the change scenario set in the main control unit 110 and the period until the change pattern table specified in the change It may be used as a confirmation period to determine whether the updated content of the variation scenario is correctly updated. As a result, the update management process of the variation scenario can be restored more accurately. In addition, during the confirmation period mentioned above, it is based on the fluctuation pattern command outputted from the main control unit 110 without based on the fluctuation scenario, in order to show that the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and that it is under recovery It is good to be configured to execute the recovery display of. As a result, since it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 a fluctuation effect corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation being executed, it is possible to suppress giving the player an unpleasant feeling.

  The first continuation value main selection table 222cb is a table to be referred to when updating the continuation value (HP value) in the case where the continuation effect (battle effect) is being executed, and until the battle reach is executed. It is a table to be referred to when the period (remaining period) of is a predetermined period or more (for example, when the number of times of special symbol variation until the special symbol variation corresponding to battle reach is performed is 4 times or more).

  Here, the method of setting the continuation value in the third control example will be described focusing on the difference from the first control example described above. In the first control example described above, in order to set the main continuation value for performing update management of the continuation value in the sound lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) for effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 The sub-continuation value of each is set with reference to the corresponding table, the combined value of the set main continuation value and sub-continuity value is calculated, and the sum value is calculated, and the information command for indicating the sum value is displayed and displayed In the third control example, only the value of the main continuation value is set in the third control example, and the main continuation value set in the audio lamp control device 113 is indicated. An information command including information for the purpose is output to the display control device 114, the sub continuation value is set based on the information command received by the display control device 114, and the total value is calculated.

  That is, in the third control example, the voice lamp control device 113 selects only the main continuation value which is a value managed to correspond to the lottery result of the special symbol or the variation scenario when the continuation value is repeatedly increased or decreased. , And is configured to be stored by the display control unit 114. Thereby, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be greatly reduced.

  Here, the contents of the first continuation value main selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. In the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, a ratio at which the selected value (main continuation value) to be selected is different from the value (main continuation value) stored in the current continuation value (continuation value storage area 223n) It is defined to be

  In addition, this selection ratio is set by distributing each value with respect to the range (for example, 0 to 199) in which the value of the dedicated effect counter (not shown) can be taken. In the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, the lower limit of selectable selection values is defined as "400". As described above, in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, when the value of the remaining number counter is 4 or more, that is, the special symbol at least four times before the battle reach defined by the variation scenario is executed. Since this is a table used when it is necessary to make a change, an unnecessarily low selection value is set, and it is to suppress the progress of the increase / decrease effect of the continuation value from being delayed. As a result, when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb becomes 3 or less, that is, when the battle reach is started soon, it is possible to execute an effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value without a sense of discomfort.

  The content shown in FIG. 198 will be described. When the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223 n is “1000”, the ratio of “1000” being selected as the selected value (main continuation value) to be selected Is 5%, “900” is selected 50%, “800” is selected 30%, “700” is selected 10%, “600” is selected 3 The percentage in which “%” and “500” are selected is defined as 2%.

  Here, the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the increase or decrease of the continuation value (main continuation value) will be described. In the third control example, an effect corresponding to an increase or decrease of a sum value obtained by adding the main continuation value selected by the audio lamp control device 113 and the sub continuation value selected by the display control device 114 is executed. . The effect to be executed is configured so that the sub continuation value is selected so that the increase / decrease range of the main continuation value and the increase / decrease range of the added value become the same as in the first control example described above. Substantially, the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the selection value (main continuation value) selected using the first continuation value main selection table 222cb.

  Specifically, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "1000", "Strengary" effect is executed, and effect that the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen is not increased or decreased is executed. Be done. When a selection value that does not decrease the main continuation value is selected in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, a command indicating that is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, The display control unit 114 is configured not to select the sub continuation value. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the secondary continuation value is selected and the continuation value (HP value) on the display increases or decreases although the main continuation value is not reduced.

  Next, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "900" to "500", an "attack" effect of decreasing the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is executed. The detailed presentation mode of this “attack” effect is set by the difference value between the current main continuation value and the selected value, “weak attack” if the difference value is 100, “middle attack” if 200, In the case of 300, "strong attack", in the case of 400, "strong attack", and in the case of 500, "strongest attack" are set. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to predict the decreasing range of the continuation value (HP value) by the effect contents performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and therefore the effect contents for the player It can be interesting.

  Similarly, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223 n is “900”, the ratio of “900” being selected as the selected value (main continuation value) to be selected is 10%, “800”. The selection rate is 50%, the selection rate of “700” is 30%, the selection rate of “600” is 5%, the selection rate of “500” is 5%, and the continuation value is When the value stored in the storage area 223 n is “800”, “800” is selected as the selected value (main continuation value) to be selected, 20%, and “700”. 50%, “600” is selected at 20%, and “500” is selected at 10%.

  Also, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is "700", 10% of the "900" is selected and "700" is selected as the selected value (main continuation value) to be selected. The selection rate is defined as 30%, the selection rate of “600” is 40%, the selection rate of “500” is defined as 20%, and the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223 n is “600”. In this case, the percentage for selecting “800” is 10%, the percentage for selecting “600” is 40%, and the percentage for selecting “500” is 40%. If the stored value is "500", the percentage for which "900" is selected is 10%, the percentage for which "700" is selected 10%, and the percentage for which "500" is selected is 80%. Stored in the continuation value storage area 223 n. When the value is "400", the proportion for which "900" is selected is 30%, the proportion for which "700" is selected is 20%, the proportion for which "500" is selected is 10%, and "400" is The percentage to be selected is specified at 40%.

  As described above, when the values stored in the continuation value storage area 223 n are “700” to “400”, the selection value may be higher than the current continuation value. In this case, as the effect to be executed on the display screen, the “recovery” effect is executed in which the continuation value (HP value) of the other party increases. By executing this recovery effect, when the continuation value (HP value) is unexpectedly reduced, it is possible to continuously execute the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) again.

  As described above, in the first continuous value main selection table 222cb used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 4 or more, the ratio at which the effect (weak attack) to gradually decrease the main continuous value is selected Is set higher than the rate at which other effects are selected. As a result, even when the pre-battle rendition is executed over a long period of time, it is possible to develop an increase / decrease rendition of the continuation value. In addition, even if the rate at which “weak attack” is selected is set high, as in the first control example described above, the effect mode to be executed on the display screen is varied according to the selected sub-continuity value. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various presentation modes, and to suppress the player from being bored with the game at an early stage.

  Referring back to FIG. 197, the description will be continued. In the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, when the in-pending flag 223cc is set to ON, that is, when selecting the effect mode of the pre-battle effect in the case of becoming a big hit after the special symbol has changed several times It is a table used. Next, contents of the second continuation value main selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 199, the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is “777”, “333”, as selectable selection values with respect to the first continuation value main selection table 222cb described with reference to FIG. 198. It differs greatly in the point which added "300"-"0". The following description will be focused on differences from the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. Note that among the contents defined in the second continuation value main selection table 222 cc, detailed description of elements that are the same as the first continuation value main selection table 222 cb or only differ from the selection ratio is omitted. .

  The second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured to be able to select “777” and “333” as the value of the main continuation value in order to notify in advance that the prize information corresponding to the big hit exists in the hold. There is. When "777" or "333" is selected as the selection value, a dedicated command indicating that is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, the display control device 114 performs sub-continuation. It is configured so that selection of values is not performed. As a result, although the main continuation value is selected to indicate that the jackpot will be won using the second continuation value main selection table 222 cc, the sub continuation value is selected, and the continuation value on the display (HP It is possible to suppress the situation where the value) increases or decreases.

  In the third control example, when the main continuation value is selected to indicate that the jackpot is to be won, the main continuation can be made to the player by prohibiting the sub continuation value from selecting a value. Although the values ("777", "333") of the value are configured to be able to be notified, any other configuration may be used, and when the command regarding the main continuation value is received to indicate that the jackpot is won. The display control apparatus 114 is configured to select the sub-continuation value using the dedicated selection table, and the value (sub-continuation value) selected using the dedicated selection table is “0”. Only "777" and "333" may be displayed as the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen. In this case, for example, if the main continuation value is "777", a value to which "23" and "13" are added, or "7" and "17" can be taken as values that can be taken by the dedicated selection table described above. It is good to be able to select the value which subtracts. By configuring in this way, when a value other than “0” is selected as the sub-continuation value, the value of the last digit of the continuation value (HP value) can be set to “0”. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that "777" is selected as the continuation value, and the added value of the fact that the continuation value (HP value) for indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed on the display screen. Can be enhanced.

  Further, unlike the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured to be able to select “300” to “0” as selection values. As a result, when the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen in the pre-battle effect is less than "300", it is possible to make the player predict that battle reach will be executed soon. . Although details will be described later, also in the third continuation value main selection table 222 cd (a table used when the value of the remaining number counter 223 cb is 3 or less), “300” to “0” are selected as selection values. It is configured to be selectable at a selection rate lower than the continuation value main selection table 222cc. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the degree of expectation for the jackpot.

  In FIG. 199, although a plurality of values such as "1000 to 800" are collectively described as the current continuation value and the selected value, in actuality, independent contents of "1000", "900", and "800" Since the contents defined in each are the same, a plurality of values are collectively described.

  Further, in the second continuation value main selection table 222 cc, when the resurrection effect is executed, the value of “1000 to 800” is selected as the value to be selected regardless of the value of the currently set main continuation value. The ratio is set high. This is configured such that "777" and "333" can be selected as the main continuation values for indicating that the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is to win the jackpot, and the continuation value (HP value) is restored In the pre-battle rendition after play, by increasing the continuation value (HP value) to the range where the main continuation value for showing winning in big hit is selectable, winning the player in big hit again It is possible to play the game while expecting the main continuation value to be selected to indicate.

  Referring back to FIG. 197, the description will be continued. In the third continuation value main selection table 222cd, when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less, that is, when the remaining number of changes until the battle reach set based on the change scenario is performed is 3 or less. It is a table used when selecting the presentation mode of the pre-battle presentation. Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the third continuation value main selection table 222cd will be described. FIG. 200 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the third continuation value main selection table 222 cd.

  As shown in FIG. 200, the third continuation value main selection table 222 cd has contents similar to the second continuation value main selection table 222 cc shown in FIG. 199, and specifically, the jackpot is to be won. The point at which the proportion at which the main continuation value (“777”, “333”) is selected is “0”, and the point at which the proportion “0” is selected as the selection value is “0” The difference is that the selection rate is low as the selection value (“300” to “0”), and the difference in the selection ratio is similar to some extent for the other contents.

  Referring back to FIG. 197, the description will be continued. The continuation effect mode selection 4 table 222ce is a table for selecting an effect mode (rendering mode) of the effect before battle in the continuous effect. Here, with reference to FIG. 201, the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce will be described. FIG. 201 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the continuation effect mode selection 4 table 222ce. The continuation effect mode selection 4 table 222ce reaches the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario with respect to the continuation effect mode selection table 222e of the first control example described above (with the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol being 200 when the probability change state is set) It is different in that a dedicated effect (mode 6) is selected when the number of times is exceeded. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  That is, in the third control example, a variation scenario is set for the special symbol variation after the big hit, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set using the variation pattern table defined in the set variation scenario. It is configured to be selected. Then, in view of the data capacity of the main control unit 110, the variation scenario is set to a range where the number of times of variation of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times the numerical value of the denominator of the big hit probability Is configured to select a variation pattern using a specific variation putter table (table B) until the next jackpot is won (see FIG. 194).

  In the third control example configured as described above, it is difficult to execute the continuous effect using the variation scenario when the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times described above, so a special effect mode As "mode 6" is selected. When “mode 6” is selected, the battle effect is ended, and the specification corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 108 (d)) defined in the out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (table B) The presentation is performed. As this specific effect, for example, an effect that can not normally be viewed is executed, such as an effect in which a party is performed in reconciliation with an opponent that has not been settled during the battle effect.

  In this 3rd control example, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol which becomes the upper limit of fluctuation scenario is set to “200” or “400”, and only when the period which does not win a jackpot in a definite change state becomes long term It is configured to execute the specific effect described above and give the player a sense of satisfaction, but other than that, it is set, for example, when the jackpot is won in a specific jackpot type (for example, small classification "k") The number of times of variation of the special symbol that is the upper limit of the variation scenario may be "20" only for the specific variation scenario to be performed, so that the above-mentioned bonus effect can be easily viewed. Thereby, when a plurality of jackpot types (small classes "a" to "k") are provided for a jackpot (for example, large class "big hit A") in which the same jackpot game is executed, the game for each small class It is possible to make the privilege (the executability of the specific effect) to be given to the person different, and even after winning the jackpot, it is possible to make the jackpot type won the interest.

  Next, contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 197 (b). FIG. 197 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the third control example deletes the continuation period counter 223p from the RAM 223 of the first control example, and the variation scenario update area 223ca, the remaining number counter 223cb, the in-pending flag 223cc, and the continuation setting flag 223cd. It differs in the point which added. In the third control example, another control example regarding the continuation effect of the above-described first control example is described, and among elements defined in the RAM 223, elements not involved in the continuation effect are The description is omitted.

  The variation scenario update area 223 ca is an area in which the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 and the update status of the variation scenario are updated and managed in order to grasp the update status of the variation scenario on the audio lamp control device 113 side. When it is determined that the variation scenario related information for indicating the variation scenario set in the main control unit 110 is received in the variation scenario update area 223ca (FIG. 205: S3271) in the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 205). : Yes), from the plurality of fluctuation scenarios stored in the fluctuation scenario storage area 222ca, the fluctuation scenario corresponding to the received fluctuation scenario related information is selected, the selected fluctuation scenario is set, and the fluctuation display setting process ( Every time the execution of FIG. 147 is performed, the progress of the change scenario is updated. The value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) based on the update situation of the change scenario set in the change scenario update area 223ca. Then, when the jackpot is won, the set fluctuation scenario is cleared (not shown).

  The remaining number counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of times of variation of the special symbol until the next battle reach is performed based on the variation scenario, and when the set value becomes 0, the battle reach Is configured to be performed. The remaining number counter 223cb calculates the number of times of variation of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the information of the variation scenario update area 223ca in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207), and the calculation thereof The set value is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb (S4052 in FIG. 207).

  The value set in the remaining number counter 223cb is decremented by 1 each time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed (see S4057 in FIG. 207), and battle reach is executed as continuous effect or pre-battle effect It is referred when deciding whether to execute. When it is determined in the hold information that there is a winning in the hold (S3251 in FIG. 206: Yes), the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is referred to, and the hit in the hold is dealt with. The special symbol variation corresponding to the battle reach performed when the value of the remaining symbol counter 223cb becomes 0, and the special symbol variation executed first are determined as to S3253 in FIG. 206). Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value is set (cleared) to 0 (S4060 in FIG. 207).

  The in-hold flag 223cc is a flag for indicating whether or not there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a, and when it is set to ON, the winning information storage area 223a. It indicates that there is a winning information to be won in the jackpot inside.

  The in-hold flag 223cc is not always set to ON when there is winning information for winning a big hit in the winning information storage area 223a, and a special symbol variation corresponding to winning information for winning a big hit is When it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is executed before the value becomes “0” (S3253 in FIG. 206: Yes), it is set to ON. In the continuation value setting process 4 (see FIG. 208), it is determined whether the in-pending hit flag 223 cc is set to on (see S4151 in FIG. 208) and when it is determined to be on (see FIG. 208). S4151: Yes) The hundreds place of the continuation value is executed based on the second continuation value main selection table 222cc.

  The continuation setting flag 223cd is a flag for determining whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set in the positive change state, and the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set when it is set to ON. Indicates that the

  The continuation setting flag 223 cd is determined in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) that the setting status is determined (see S4051 in FIG. 207) and is not set to on (set to off). (S4051 in FIG. 207: No), after the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set, it is set to ON (S4053 in FIG. 207). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4051 in FIG. 207 that it is set to ON (S4051 in FIG. 207: Yes), the process of setting the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is skipped. Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is cleared to 0 (see S4060 in FIG. 207).

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the remaining number counter 223cb from being set again in the state where the value is set to the remaining number counter 223cb. Thus, after setting the value of the remaining number counter 223cb, a process of subtracting one from the value of the remaining number counter 223cb (see S4057 of FIG. 207) each time the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed. The update situation of the variation scenario set in the main control unit 110 and the update situation of the variation scenario managed by the voice lamp control unit 113 can be easily synchronized simply by executing.

  In addition, a value not corresponding to the variation scenario in the process of S3254 executed in the prize information command process 4 (see FIG. 206), that is, a value indicating the number of times of special symbol variation until the prize information for winning a big hit is executed. When the remaining number counter 223cb is set, subtraction based on the value can be reliably executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 202, details of the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic view schematically showing an electrical configuration provided in the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 202, the display control device 114 of the third control example adds a continuation value storage area 233ca to the work RAM 233 with respect to the display control device 114 of the first control example described above, and the character ROM 234. The second embodiment is different in that a first continuation value subselection table 234a3 and a second continuation value subselection table 234a4 are added to the NAND flash memory 234a.

  Continuation value storage area 233ca is an area for storing the continuation value calculated based on the continuation value command for display received from audio lamp control device 113, and in continuation value related command processing 4 (see FIG. 210), The calculated continuation value is stored (see S7305 in FIG. 210). Then, when it is determined in the final mode command processing (see FIG. 211) that the final mode to be executed this time is not the victory battle (S8305 in FIG. 211: No), the stored value is referred to (FIG. 211). See S8306).

  The first continuation value subselection table 234a3 and the second continuation value subselection table 234a4 are the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 (FIG. 117 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. The fourth effect provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above, which is a table having the same contents as the second continuation value sub selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117 (c)) The difference is that an effect counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is used instead of the counter 223y4.

<About control processing of main controller 110 in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204, control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the third control example will be described. In this control example, the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 203) is used instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) with respect to the first control example described above, and the variation count subtraction process (FIG. 129) The difference is that the variation count subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of the reference), and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 203, the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 4 (S104). Compared to the special symbol variation process of the first control example described above (see FIG. 127), the special symbol variation process 4 determines that the variation time of the special symbol has passed (S214: Yes), and the current lottery result is a big hit When it discriminate | determines (S216: Yes), the content of the process performed is different in the point which is partially different, and the same process is performed about another element. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the special symbol variation processing 4 is executed, first, the same processing of S201 to S216 as the above-mentioned special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127) is executed. Then, in the process of S216, when it is determined that the present lottery result is a big hit (S216: Yes), next, the jackpot type selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 192) Set a specific winning opening opening scenario based on. Specifically, the jackpot game content to be executed this time (for example, 15 rounds), the opening period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, the interval period between each round, the last round (for example, And the ending period from the end of the 15th round) to the end of the jackpot, a scenario is set in which the specific winning opening is opened in the present jackpot.

  When the process of S217 is finished, next, the probability change flag 203g and the hour-time middle counter 203h are reset (S218), the start of the big hit is set (S219), and the state command based on the big hit type is set (S251). Then, the processing of S220 that is the same as the first control example described above is performed, and the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S216 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (is out of place) (S216: No), the same process of S221 as the first control example described above is executed, and the process of S220 is performed. To complete this process.

  In the process of S251 described above, a state command including at least information indicating the jackpot type of the jackpot winning this time is set. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts information on the jackpot type from the state command, and responds to the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 222 ca of the ROM 222 based on the extracted information. A variation scenario is selected, and the selected variation scenario is stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca.

  By configuring in this way, the voice lamp control device 113 side can grasp which variation scenario is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol after the big hit ends at the timing when the big hit game is started . Thereby, for example, compared with the case where the information command indicating the fluctuation pattern and the command for indicating the fluctuation scenario set this time are output simultaneously at the timing when the jackpot ends and the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the fluctuation reliably. An effect corresponding to a scenario can be set.

  Further, in the third control example, since the state command set at the timing when the big hit game is started includes information for indicating the variation scenario set after the big hit, it corresponds to the contents of the state command. You can also set the jackpot effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an interest in the effect to be executed during the big hit, since the effect to be executed during the big hit can suggest the fluctuation scenario set after the big hit for the player by the effect to be executed during the big hit. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the variation count subtraction process 4 executed in the third control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the variation count subtraction process 4. The variation count subtraction process 4 is a process (S 451, S 452) for updating the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario update area 223 ca, as compared with the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above. It differs in the added point, and others are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 204, when the variation count subtraction process 4 is executed, the processes of S401 to S411 that are the same as the variation count subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above are executed. Next, it is determined whether or not the variation scenario is stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca (S451). If it is determined that the variation scenario is stored (S451: Yes), the stored variation scenario is updated ( S452), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S451 that no variation scenario is stored (S451: No), the process is ended without executing the process of S452.

  Here, the update content of the change scenario executed in the process of S452 will be described in detail. First, the variation count subtraction process 4 (see S204) is executed as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process (see S203). Thereby, when it is determined that the change of the special symbol is started, the change scenario can be surely updated.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In this control example, in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), a point that command determination process 4 (S205) is used instead of the command control process (see FIG. 140) and prize information command process (see S141). This is different from the point using prize information command processing 4 (see FIG. 203), and the point using fluctuation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) instead of the fluctuation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), and other points Are identical. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, when the process of FIG. 205 is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3214 as the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the process of S3214 is finished, next, it is determined whether the received state command includes the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario (S3271), and the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario is included. If it is determined (S3271: Yes), the change scenario corresponding to the change scenario related information included in the received state command is selected from the change scenario storage area 222ca and stored in the change scenario update area 223ca (S3272) . Then, a display status command is set (S3215), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the related information for setting the variation scenario is not included in the process of S3271 (S3271: No), the process of S3272 is skipped, the process of S3215 is executed, and this process is performed. finish.

  Next, the winning information command process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command process 4.

  When the winning information command process 4 is executed, first, information on the received winning command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area (S3231), and whether the winning command received this time includes information corresponding to the big hit ( It is determined whether or not it is a win (S3251). In the process of S3251, when it is determined that it is a winning prize (S3251: Yes), the special symbol variation corresponding to the prize information received this time based on the portion where the prize information received this time is stored in the prize information storage area. The order of execution is calculated (S3252).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is larger than the fluctuation order calculated in the processing of S3252 (S3253), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is larger (S3253: Yes) , The value set in the remaining number counter 223cb, that is, the value indicating the remaining number (special symbol variation number) until the battle reach is executed based on the content of the variation scenario set, has been won a big hit Is variably set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the battle reach is executed (S3254).

  Thus, since the period until battle reach is actually executed can be flexibly set and determined, it is possible to continuously execute the battle before the battle reach is executed during the battle production. The content (content of increase and decrease of the continuation value) can be set based on the remaining period until the next battle reach is executed. Therefore, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  When the process of S3254 is finished, the on-hold flag 223cc is set to ON (S3255), the other pre-reading process is executed (S3256), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3251 that the winning command received this time is not a hit (S3251: No), the processes of S3252 to S3255 are skipped, the process of S3256 is executed, and the present process is ended. Do.

  Next, the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process 4. The continuous effect setting process 4 (S3806 in FIG. 207) is for setting effect modes of a plurality of effects executed during the continuous effect. When the continuation effect setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether the continuation setting flag 223 cd is set to ON (S4051). If it is determined that the continuation setting flag 223 cd is not set to on (is set to off) (S 4051: Yes), the remaining number counter is next based on the information stored in the variation scenario update area 223 ca The value of 223cb is set (S4052).

  Here, the process of S4052 will be described. The fluctuation scenario update area 223 ca stores (synchronizes) fluctuation scenarios corresponding to the fluctuation scenarios set by the main control unit 110. Then, the table D is used to calculate the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol until the special symbol fluctuation for which the fluctuation pattern is selected is executed, and the calculated number of times is set in the remaining number counter 223cb. Thus, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb indicates the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol until battle reach is executed next based on the fluctuation scenario.

  In the third control example, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is determined, and the table at the time of setting the continuation value is changed based on the determination result. Thereby, the continuation value set corresponding to the period (the number of times of variation of the special symbol) until the next battle reach is executed can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where the continuation value is greatly reduced despite the situation where the battle reach is not executed for the time being (the situation where the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is large).

  Further, in a situation where battle reach is to be executed soon (a situation in which the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is small), the continuation value may be greatly reduced to make the player expect the winning battle to be executed in the battle reach. it can.

  Furthermore, in the third control example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol up to the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed is determined in advance based on the information (the variation pattern information) defined in the variation scenario Therefore, it is possible to determine the variation of the special symbol for which the battle reach is executed regardless of the number of the reserved symbols of the special symbol and the content of the stored prize information. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect without a sense of discomfort.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, among the variation patterns stored on hold, the variation in the special symbol variation executed before the battle reach (draw battle) determined in advance using the variation scenario is performed, variation A fluctuation pattern selected when the value “198” of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired in the fluctuation pattern (first deviation (probable change) fluctuation pattern table (table C) where the lottery result of the special symbol is 60 seconds and the special symbol lottery result is out Or, when it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit and the special symbol more than a predetermined number of times (twice) is executed before the special symbol variation is executed, the special symbol A value corresponding to the number of times of special symbol variation until the symbol is varied is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb. Thereby, even if battle reach is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol without based on the change scenario, that is, even if battle reach is executed, the special symbol change to be executed by the battle reach (battle In the pre-production), it is possible to increase or decrease the continuation value appropriately.

  Referring back to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. After the process of S4052, the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4053). As described above, while the continuation setting flag 223 cd is set to ON, the processing of S 4052 is configured not to be executed by the determination processing of S 4051. As a result, in the state where the value is already set in the remaining number counter 223cb, the setting of the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is prohibited. Therefore, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb not based on the variation scenario (the value of the remaining number counter 223cb set corresponding to the special symbol variation that becomes the big hit when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit) is set Even if it does, the value can be maintained continuously.

  When the process of S4053 is finished, it is then determined whether or not the current variation (special symbol variation) corresponds to a big hit corresponding to a big hit (S4054), and if it is determined that it is a hit variation (S4054: Yes), the battle The process proceeds to the process of S4013 to be described later in order to set the battle reach effect mode which is the final mode of the effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change is not the hit change (the out change) (S4054: No), it is then determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 0 (S4055).

  Here, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 0 (S 4055: Yes), that is, the special symbol fluctuation of this time, the battle reach is executed based on the fluctuation scenario (special symbol fluctuation (table D When it is a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using), it proceeds to processing of S4013 described later, and when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S4055: No Next, it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (S 4056).

  In the process of S4056, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern (long deviation a) having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected using the first outlier (probable change) fluctuation pattern table (table C), and the fluctuation pattern is 60 seconds. If it is determined that (S 4056: Yes), the process proceeds to S 4013 described later. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the fluctuation pattern (long deviation a) is 60 seconds (S 4056: No), the processing proceeds to S 4057.

  That is, in the discrimination process of S4054 to S4056 described above, whether to set the pre-battle effect as the fluctuation effect (effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81) to be set corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation this time It is determined whether or not to set, in S4054 it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, in S4055 whether or not the battle reach is set based on the variation scenario of the special symbol In S4056, in the special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not it is a specific lottery result although it has been winning out.

  If the variation effect to be executed corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is the pre-battle effect, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is decremented by 1 (S4057), and then S4004 as in the first control example described above. The processing of ~ S4008 is executed, and then, the continuation value setting processing 2 is executed (S4058), and this processing is ended. The contents of the continuation value setting process 2 (S4058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect to be executed corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation this time is battle reach (when it is determined Yes in any of S4054, S4055, S4056), the final based on the final mode selection table 222h The mode is selected (S4013), the corresponding display final mode command is set (S4014), the continuation effect flag 223r, the continuation setting flag 223cd, and the in-hold flag 223cc are set to OFF (S4059), and the remaining number counter 223cb Is set to 0 (S4060), the content stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (processing 4016 of S3709), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058) executed in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see S3806 in FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058). In the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058), a process of determining a selection table for selecting a continuation value is executed according to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb and the setting status of the within-pending flag 223cc. As described above, by making the selection range of the continuation value set as the production mode of the pre-battle effect different according to the game situation, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is obtained. It is possible to make the player interested.

  When the continuation value setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is the continuation value fluctuation timing. In the third control example, when the short deviation b whose fluctuation time is 5 seconds is selected in the first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2 (table C), it is determined that it is the continuation value fluctuation timing . In the third control example, as a variation pattern of a special symbol, a variation pattern (short deviation b) determined to be a continuation value variation timing and a variation pattern determined not to be a continuation value variation timing (short deviation a) And the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with lottery means for lottery whether or not to change the continuous value, and the continuous value is changed with respect to the same fluctuation pattern. It may be configured to be settable in the case where it is not. In addition, when it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (operation means), it may be configured to determine that it is the continuation value fluctuation timing. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to actively participate in the game.

  In the process of S4101, when it is determined that it is the continuation value change timing (S4101: Yes), in order to execute the process for setting the effect mode to increase or decrease (variable) the continuation value in the current fluctuation effect Transfer to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the continuation value change timing (S4101: No), this processing ends.

  In the processing of S4151, it is determined whether the in-pending flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151). Here, if it is determined that the in-hold flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151: Yes), that is, if there is in-hold prize information corresponding to the special symbol winning in the jackpot, the second The value of the main continuation value (the hundreds place of HP) is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222cc (S4157), and the value of the selected main continuation value is a specific value ("333" or "777") It is determined whether there is any (S4158).

  In the process of S4158, when it is determined that the value of the selected main continuation value is a specific value (S4158: Yes), display control is performed to display the selected value on the third symbol display device 81 as it is. The display specific continuation value command to which the continuation value (sub continuation value) for effect is not added is set in the device 114 (S4159), and this processing ends. In addition, as described above using FIG. 206, even if there is a special symbol winning the jackpot within the suspension of the special symbol, it is based on the variation scenario until the variation of the corresponding special symbol is executed. When a battle reach (pulled battle) is executed, the on-hold hit flag 223cc is not set to on, so that selection of a main continuation value using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is not performed. Thereby, battle reach (win or defeat battle) can be executed immediately after battle reach (draw battle) based on the change scenario is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is surprising to the player.

  As described above, in the third control example, it is specifically based on the order of fluctuation with the special symbol winning to the jackpot existing in the hold and the special symbol in which the battle reach (draw battle) is executed based on the fluctuation scenario. In particular, the main continuation value is configured to be selected with the content corresponding to the special symbol variation that is executed first, but other configurations may be used, for example, being present in the hold The type of jackpot to be determined is determined in advance, and the determination result is a predetermined determination result (for example, a determination result corresponding to a probability variation big hit for which a winning battle is executed) and a predetermined determination result (for example, a defeat battle) The selection table for selecting the value of the main continuation value may be different depending on whether or not the determination result corresponding to the normal hit to be executed.

  Specifically, for example, when the change of the special symbol where the battle reach (draw battle) based on the change scenario is executed is executed earlier than the change of the special symbol corresponding to the probable variation jackpot existing in the hold Sets the variation count until the special symbol variation corresponding to the probability variation big hit is executed to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb, and the variation scenario is more than the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the normal hit existing in the hold When the change of the special symbol on which the battle reach (draw battle) based on is executed is executed first, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb which is already set is not changed. Thus, based on the type of jackpot to be executed (perhaps a big hit or a regular jackpot), the battle continuation effect can be selected by changing the value of the main continuation value that can be selected before the battle pre-production It is possible to predict the type of the jackpot according to the presentation mode of, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, the continuation value finally displayed in the battle reach serving as the draw battle may be taken over as it is to set the effect mode of the next battle effect. As a result, it is possible to give relevance to the battle effect that is repeatedly executed a plurality of times, and to make the player interested in the effect which is executed over a long period of time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4151 that the within-pending hit flag 223cc is not set on (is set off) (S4151: No), then the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 4 or more Is determined (S4152), and if it is determined that it is 4 or more (S4152: Yes), the value of the main continuation value (the hundreds place of HP) is selected based on the first continuation value main selection table 222cb Then (S4153), the process proceeds to S4154.

  If it is determined in the process of S4152 that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is not 4 or more (3 or less) (S4152: No), the main continuation value is determined based on the third continuation value main selection table 222cd. Select the value (hundreds of HP) (S4156), shift to the process of S4154, and set the display continuation value command corresponding to the value of the main continuation value selected this time (S4154), to the process of S4155 Transition.

  In the process of S4155, the value of the main continuation value selected in the process of S4153, S4156, and S4159 described above is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n. Thereby, at the timing of setting the continuation value next, the value of the main continuation value selected this time can be read out and a new continuation value can be selected. When the process of S4155 ends, the present process ends.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device 114 in Third Control Example
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 211. In this control example, in contrast to the first control example described above, command value determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) is used instead of command determination processing (see FIG. 158), continuation value related command processing (see FIG. 164). This embodiment is different from the above in that continuous value related command processing 4 (see FIG. 210) is used and final mode command processing (see FIG. 211) is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the third control example, the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the continuation effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) with respect to the first control example described above Are set by the display control device 114. As described above, by setting the value of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen by the display control device 114, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, as mentioned above, the main continuation value set based on the lottery result of the special symbol and the variation scenario is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the command for indicating the set main continuation value is displayed and controlled Since it is configured to output to the device 114, more information than necessary (for example, information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, and the update status of the variation scenario) to the display control device 114. There is no need to output a command to indicate information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of the process (the process for setting the continuation value, the process for setting the command to be output to the display control apparatus 114) executed by the audio lamp control apparatus 113.

  First, the contents of the command determination process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4. In this command determination process 4, with respect to the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above, whether there is a process to be executed when there is a continuation value related command and a final mode command for display It differs in the point which added the processing which distinguishes.

  When command determination process 4 is executed, the same processes of S6401 to S6414 as the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above are executed, and it is determined that there is a continuation value related command in the process of S6414. When it is determined (S6414: Yes), the continuation value related command process 4 is executed (S6451), and the process proceeds to S6401. The continuation value related command process 4 executed in the process of S6451 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: No), it is determined whether there is a final mode command for display (S6452), and it is determined that there is a final mode command for display In the case (S6452: Yes), the final mode command processing for display is executed (S6453), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S6401.

  The final mode command process for display executed in the process of S6453 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6452 that there is no display final mode command (S6452: No), the same process of S6420 as the command determination process (see FIG. 158) of the first control example described above is executed. It transfers to the process 6401 of S3709.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 210, contents of the continuation value related command processing 4 (S6451) executed in the above-described command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuation value related command processing 4. In the continuation value related command process 4, a process for setting and displaying a continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while the continuation effect is being executed, and a continuation effect A process for displaying an effect to be performed during the process is performed.

  When the continuation value related command process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a display specific continuation value command in the command received this time (S7351). The display specific continuation value command is a specific value ("333" for indicating that the jackpot will be won as the main continuation value in the continuation value setting process 4 (see S4058 in FIG. 208) executed in the voice lamp control device 113. "," 777 ") is selected. Although the detailed description will be described later, in the present processing, when it is determined that there is a display specific continuation value command, the main continuation value output from the audio lamp control device 113 is displayed on the display screen as it is doing. Thereby, when the specific value ("333", "777") for indicating that the jackpot is won as the main continuation value is selected, the sub continuation value is set in the display control device 114, and the main continuation value is set. Displaying a continuation value obtained by adding together the sub-continuation value on the display screen, and preventing the player from being notified of a specific value (“333”, “777”) for indicating winning in a big hit Can.

  When it is determined in the process of S7351 that there is no display specific continuation value command (S7351: No), that is, when the display continuation value command is received, the continuation value (main continuation value corresponding to the command received this time) Is calculated (S7352), and it is determined whether the calculated continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353). If it is determined in the process of S7353 that the continuation value (main continuation value) is not 0 (more than 100), the sub continuation value is selected based on the first continuation value sub selection table 234a3, and the process proceeds to S7356. Transition. Each subcontinuity value defined in the first continuation value subselection table 234a3 is the same as the first continuation value subselection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117 (b)) of the first control example described above. , I omit the explanation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7353 that the continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353: Yes), a sub continuation value is selected based on the second continuation value sub selection table 234a4, and the process of S7356 Transition to Each subcontinuity value defined in the second continuity value subselection table 234a4 is the same as the second continuity value subselection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117 (c)) of the first control example described above. , I omit the explanation.

  Then, in the process of S7356, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command and the sub-continuity value selected by the process of S7354 or S7355 are added up (S7356). As described above, when the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command is 0, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is larger than 0. The audio lamp control device is configured to use the second continuation value subselection table 234a4 in which a subcontinuity value that can not become a value (that is, can not select a positive value as a subcontinuity value) is defined. With respect to the content indicated by the continuation value (main continuation value) selected in 113 (the other party's continuation value (HP value) is set to “0”, the content indicating that winning in a probability variation jackpot in this battle rendition) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 contradictory (a value other than “0” is displayed).

  After the process of S7356, next, the sum value stored in the sum value storage area 233k is read (S7357), and the sum value calculated in the process of S7356 and the sum value read in the process of S7357 The difference is calculated (S7358). Then, an attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), the sum value calculated this time is stored in the sum value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process of S7365. Transition to

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7351 that there is a display specific continuation value command (S7351: Yes), the sum value is read from the sum value storage area 233k (S7361), and the continuation calculated in the process of S7352 The difference between the value and the total value read out in the process of S7361 is calculated (S7362), the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), calculated this time The continuation value is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process proceeds to the process of S7365.

  After the process of S7360 or the process of S7364, the continuation value calculated in the process of S7352 is stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca (S7365), and thereafter, the relation of the continuation value of the first control example described above Command processing (see FIG. 164) and the same processing of S7306 to S7309 are executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the contents of final mode command processing (S6453) executed in the above-described command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of final mode command processing. In this final mode command process, a process of setting a battle reach presentation mode (continuation value (HP value) display mode) for indicating the result of the continuous production (battle production), and the set production mode on the display screen And a process for displaying.

  When final mode command processing (S6453) is executed, first, a final mode data table corresponding to the received command is determined (S8301). The received command indicates the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118 (a)) in the continuation effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) executed in the audio lamp control device 113. Information is included, and the final form data table corresponding to the information is read out from the character ROM 234 and determined.

  Next, the addition value stored in the addition value storage area 233k, that is, the continuation value (HP value) currently displayed on the display screen is read (S8302), and the initial state of the final form data table determined in the processing of S8301. It is set as value data (S8303). As described above, data relating to the continuous value (HP value) that can be set various values can be additionally set to the effect data corresponding to the battle reach effect mode (mode of attack pattern) having a predetermined number of patterns. By configuring as possible, it is possible to reduce the amount of data regarding the battle reach presentation mode.

  After the process of S8303, the final result information included in the received command is read (process 8304 of S3709), and it is determined whether the read final result is information indicating victory (S8305). Here, as the final result information included in the received command, information for indicating the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118 (a)) is used to determine the final result. Alternatively, the display final mode command processing may be executed including special information for indicating the final result of the battle.

  If it is determined in the process of S8305 that the final result is not victory (loss or draw) (S8305: No), the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca and the sum value storage area are stored Calculate the difference from the total value being calculated (S8306), and change the subtraction value of the first own attack presentation data among the determined effect data in the final form data table to the subtraction value obtained by adding the calculated difference (S8307), and the process proceeds to S8308.

  Here, the processing contents of S8306 and S8307 described above will be described. In the third control example, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set to the main continuation value set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the lottery result of the special symbol. It is configured to be created by adding up the sub continuation values set for presentation in the display control device 114. With this configuration, the variation of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen can be increased while reducing the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect can be enhanced. However, in battle reach in which the result of the continuous rendering (battle rendering) is displayed, a situation may occur in which the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is as close as possible to “0”.

  In such a case, for example, in the voice lamp control device 113, even if the main continuation value in which the continuation value (HP value) of the other party is not "0" is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the display control device 114 There is a possibility that the continuation value (HP value) of the other party displayed on the display screen may become “0” depending on the sub-continuity value for effect set in the above. That is, while the continuation value (HP value) to be displayed is large, an error occurs between the main continuation value set and managed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. Even if there is no adverse effect in terms of presentation, it has a positive effect of increasing variations of the presentation, but if the displayed continuation value (HP value) becomes smaller, the audio lamp control device An error between the main continuation value set and managed at 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen causes a contradiction in the presentation result, and the presentation giving distrust to the player is executed. There is a problem that there is a risk of

  Therefore, in the third control example, when setting the effect mode of the final aspect (battle reach) of the continuous effect (battle effect), the final result of the current continuous effect (battle effect) is determined, and the determination result is In the case other than victory, that is, when the opponent's continuation value (HP value) does not become "0", the attack between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen during battle reach It is made to cancel by presentation.

  In this way, the above-mentioned problem that occurs as a result of the continuous effect (battle effect) is displayed while leaving an error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen Can. In the third control example, the main continuation value and the continuation value displayed on the display screen are displayed in the first own attack pattern set as the final aspect (battle reach) of the continuation effect (battle effect) Since it is configured to eliminate the error with the value), it is possible to share the rendering mode of the remaining own attack patterns (for example, the second and third times).

  In addition, as the effect mode of the final mode (Battle reach) selected this time, when the effect mode of its own attack pattern is set to 0 times, the effect that the opponent's continuation value does not decrease during the battle reach Because it is an aspect, even if the error between the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is not eliminated, the difference between the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is the effect Since there is no problem of causing a contradiction in the result, in the process of S8307, the change processing of the attack presentation data is not executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S8305 that the final result is a victory (S8305: Yes), the processes of S8306 and S8307 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S8308.

  In the process of S8038, the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read out from the countdown effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8308). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8308 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8309).

  Then, based on the attack pattern display data table included in the final form data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8309, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8310), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 8311). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S8312), the final mode command processing is ended, and this processing is ended.

<On another control example of the third control example>
Next, another control example of the above-described third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third control example described above, the fluctuation scenario is set based on the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the set fluctuation scenario, so that during the period when the continuous effect is being executed, The battle reach was configured to be able to be executed effectively. In addition, in order to prevent the player from being bored early with respect to the continuous effect performed in accordance with the predetermined change scenario, a plurality of change scenarios are prepared, and different according to the jackpot type. It was configured to select a change scenario.

  The third control example configured in this way is configured to be able to enhance the rendering effect of the continuous effect, but is set according to the storage capacity storing a plurality of variation scenarios and a plurality of variation scenarios There is a problem that the storage capacity for storing a plurality of jackpot types increases. In particular, since the main control device 110 needs to perform various processing related to gaming within a limited storage capacity and store data, the increase in storage capacity leads to other processing and data storage capacity. There is a risk that pressure will be exerted, and as a result, the interest of the game will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in another control example of the third control example, even if the number of variation scenarios is reduced, the jackpot type is the same as the third control example described above in order to be able to provide variation-rich continuous effects. In addition to the fluctuation scenario set corresponding to, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result, the fluctuation using a different fluctuation scenario for a predetermined period (for example, 10 special rotations) It was configured to select a pattern.

  By configuring in this way, even when one variation scenario is set, the content of the continuous effect to be executed may be made different depending on the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. it can. Further, since the effect mode during continuous rendering is set by the combination of a plurality of variation scenarios, even if the number of stored variation scenarios is reduced, it is possible to execute variation-rich continuous rendering.

<About the electrical configuration in another control example of the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214, the electrical configuration in this separate control example will be described. The present separate control example is different from the above third control example in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are partially changed and the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 212 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 in another control example of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212 (a), in this separate control example, a small hit type selection table 202da is added to the third control example described above, and the contents of the first random number table 202a are partially changed. This point is different from the point where the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca are partially changed. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first hit random number table 202a in the present separate control example, a range in which it is determined as "small hit" is provided in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery result is out. The first hit random number table 202a in the present separate control example will be described with reference to FIG. 213 (a). FIG. 213 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a in the present separate control example.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (a), in the third control example described above, a range of the first random number counter value C1 in which “disengagement” is defined when the gaming state is a definite change state as a lottery result is A "small hit" is defined for the range "295 to 299" which is a part of 299 "). When the player wins a "small hit" as a lottery result of the special symbol, a bonus that is less than the above-described jackpot but is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Specifically, control is performed such that the variable winning device 65 is opened for a short period of time so that the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, as described above, since "small hit" can be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is not a big hit, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 when winning "small hit" It is possible to eliminate the setting of the state.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 213 (b). FIG. 213 (b) shows the contents of the small hitting type selection table 202da. As shown in FIG. 213 (b), in another control example of the third control example, the small hitting type is set from a plurality. Specifically, in the range of “0 to 49”, the acquired value of the small hitting type counter value C5 can acquire any of the 100 counter values in total of “0” to “99”. , "Small hitting A" is matched and specified, and "small hitting B" is matched and specified to the range of "50-99".

  Then, when the player wins the "small jack A", a variation scenario for executing a specific fluctuation pattern is additionally set, and when the player wins the "small jack B", the particular fluctuation pattern is executed. Is configured not to set additional fluctuation scenarios.

  Next, the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca in the present separate control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 (a) and 214 (b). FIG. 214 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the variation scenario A1 stored in the variation scenario setting table 202ca, and FIG. 214 (b) is a diagram showing the variation scenario setting table 202ca. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed | regulated to the memorize | stored small hit and after fluctuation scenario.

  In the variation scenario setting table 202ca in this separate control example, only the above-mentioned two variation scenarios are stored, and when the probability variation jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the variation scenario A1 is set after the big hit , And is configured to be stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. Further, when a small winning is won in the drawing of the special symbol 2 executed during the definite variation state, a post-small hitting variation scenario is set and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. Then, after the small hitting ends, the special symbol variation pattern is selected based on the contents specified in the small hitting post variation scenario for the number of special symbol swings specified in the small hitting post change scenario, and There is.

  Although detailed description will be omitted, also in this separate control example, the variation count subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is executed as in the third control example described above, and every time a special symbol variation is executed ( In special symbol variation processing 4 (see FIG. 203), the variation scenario set in the variation scenario storage area 203ca is configured to be updated whenever it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. .

  The variation scenario storage area 203ca is configured to be able to store both the variation scenario A1 and the small hitting variation scenario, and when the small hitting is won during the definite variation state, both variation scenarios are subjected to variation number subtraction processing 4 It is updated by (see FIG. 204). Therefore, regardless of the number of small hit wins during the definite change state, the variation scenario A1 can be updated, and the table B can be set when the number of special symbol changes from the end of the big hit reaches 200 times. .

  As shown in FIG. 214 (a), in the variation scenario A1, the above-described table A (special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in association with the range of the variation number of “1 to 4”. Table C (the first deviation (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of “5 to 13”, and the number of fluctuations is “14”. The table D (second deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) Is defined.

  Thereafter, the table C (the first outlier (probable variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with 9 times of fluctuation until the number of times of fluctuation reaches “195”, and the table D (second time of fluctuation) Deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in association with one another. That is, after the special symbol variation is selected nine times using the table C and the variation pattern is selected using the table C, the variation pattern is changed using the table D during the period when the variation number of the special symbol after the big hit is “5 to 195”. A scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

  Then, the table C (the first outlier (probable change) change pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of “195-198” in the number of changes, and the change in table D (second out (probable change) in the 199). A pattern table 202dc3) is defined. Then, the table B is defined in association with the range of the number of fluctuations in the range of “200 to” similarly to the third control example described above.

  As shown in FIG. 214 (b), in the small hitting post variation scenario, the above-mentioned table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in association with the range of variation numbers “1 to 9”, Table D (the second outlier (probable change) change pattern table 202dc3) is defined in the range of “5 to 13” in the number of changes, and table D (second outlier (probable change) change pattern in the number of changes is “10” 202dc3) is defined. And when the frequency | count of fluctuation | variation exceeds 10 times, it comprises so that a fluctuation | variation scenario may be complete | finished. In the case where the after-small variation scenario ends, the variation pattern of the special symbol is continuously selected in accordance with the contents defined in the variation scenario A1 in which the variation scenario is updated at the same time.

  As described above, in another control example of the third control example, when a small hit is won as a lottery result of a special symbol, a different variation scenario is performed during a predetermined period (for example, a special symbol 10 fluctuation). Because it is configured to be set, it is possible to make the variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol different according to the timing of winning in the small hit. Therefore, continuous effects of various patterns can be provided without preparing a plurality of variation scenarios in advance as in the third control example described above.

  In addition, since the fluctuation pattern table (table D) on which battle reach is executed (it is easy to be executed) is defined at the end of the fluctuation scenario used when winning in a small hit, by winning in a small hit, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the battle reach will not be executed for a long time.

  In this separate control example, a configuration having one variation scenario (variation scenario A1) is used as the variation scenario set after the end of the probability variation jackpot, but it has a plurality of variation scenarios as in the third control example described above You may use a structure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide continuous rendition of more patterns. In addition, in the separate control example, when the small winning is won, the small hitting type (small hitting A) that sets different fluctuation scenarios is the same as the small hitting type (small hitting B) that does not set different fluctuation scenarios. Although it is configured to be a percentage (50%) of, the distribution ratio of each small hit type may be set appropriately, the probability of winning in a small hit, and battle reach in the change scenario A1 The variation pattern table (table D) to be executed (it is easy to be executed) may be set based on the specified interval and the content of the benefit (prize ball) provided when the small hit is won.

  Also, in this separate control example, a configuration is used in which the same variable winning device (variable winning device 65) is opened in the case of winning a jackpot of a special symbol and in the case of winning a small hit. The machine 10 may be provided with a second variable winning device opened only when a small hit is won. In this case, it is preferable to configure that the second variable winning device is opened is harder to grasp than that the variable winning device 65 is opened. By thus configuring, the player wins a small hit during the continuation effect Since it can be made difficult for the player to be grasped, continuous effects of various patterns can be provided to the player without discomfort. In addition, in this case, the display mode of the third symbol to indicate that the player wins the small hit is also difficult to be grasped by the player, for example, the third symbol is reduced or displayed at the third symbol stop timing. The main display area Dm of the three-symbol display device 81 may display a lively effect that is more prominent than the third symbol.

  In the present separate control example, the first random number table 202a is configured to win only the special symbol 2 for the small hit, but the special symbol 1 may also be configured for the small hit. In this case, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may have different probabilities of winning in a small hit.

  In another control example of the third control example described above, as a condition for setting a variation scenario (small hitting variation scenario) different from the variation scenario (variation scenario A1) previously determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol The special symbol indicates that the player wins a small hit, but may be configured to set a different variation scenario when other conditions are satisfied, for example, in the second control example described above. It may be configured to set different fluctuation scenarios when winning the fall lottery used.

<On another control example of the suggested effect described in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, another control example of the suggestion effect (see FIG. 100) described in the first control example described above will be described. In the first control example described above, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestion effect are set separately, and the period in which the suggestion effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing (end timing of the countdown effect which is the second half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggested performance, and the start timing of the suggested performance (the first half part is the precursor The start timing of the effect) can be set from a plurality of points, and the suggestion effect is performed without setting the period to be executed in advance, so that the degree of freedom in setting the suggested effect is increased. In the suggested effect of the first control example described above, the timing at which the specific effect targeted for the suggested effect is executed is set from a plurality of timings, and the end timing of the suggested effect based on the execution timing of the suggested effect By setting the end timing) and setting the execution period of the suggested effect, it is possible to execute various combinations of suggested effects.

  On the other hand, in this separate control example, the suggestion effect is executed in a state where the end timing of the suggestion effect is not set, and the predetermined condition (operation content to the frame button 22) is satisfied during the period in which the suggestion effect is being executed. The specific effect to be the target of the suggested effect is determined based on and the countdown effect is executed toward the determined specific effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the suggestion effect according to the operation content of the player to the frame button 22 during the suggestion effect, so the player can actively participate in the game Can.

  First, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of the suggestion effect in the present separate control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in the case where the effect mode of the suggested effect is changed according to the content of the operation on the frame button 22 during the suggested effect. The same components as those in the timing chart (see FIG. 100) showing the flow of the suggested effect in the first control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 215, when the variation of the special symbol that can execute the suggestion effect is started, the precursor display (see FIG. 98 (a)), which is the first half part of the suggestion effect, is performed for 13 seconds 10 seconds after the start of the variation. Be done. A button operation effective period for effectively determining the pressing operation on the frame button 22 is set for the second half 8 seconds of the display period in which the indication is displayed, and the frame button 22 in the button operation effective period is set. An operation mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect, which is the second half part of the suggested effect, is determined by the content of the operation to the.

  Specifically, during the button operation effective period, a comment “Press the button well in time” is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 in response to the display. The timing is determined by the operation timing determination means. The operation timing determination means is configured to be able to determine the operation timing of the player with respect to the frame button 22 in a plurality of steps, and the frame button 22 has the best timing (for example, within 0.2 seconds before and after the designated timing). When the operation (hereinafter referred to as button operation B) and the range deviated from the specified timing from the button operation B (for example, excluding the range of the button operation B within the range of 1 second before and after the specified timing) And when the frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter referred to as button operation A) and when the frame button 22 is not operated or the frame button 22 is not operated (hereinafter, no button operation). At least the case can be determined.

  Here, when it is determined that the button operation A is performed by the operation timing determination means, that is, although the button operation is performed during the button operation effective period, when the operation timing is slightly deviated, the operation is performed during the current fluctuation effect. Among the specific effects to be performed, the countdown effect for the specific effect b (the cut-in display to be executed 26 seconds after the start of the change) is set. Specifically, the countdown display for 3 seconds is executed as the countdown effect (the value displayed in the second display area of the display screen of FIG. 98 (b) is "3", "2", "1", " The effect of counting down in the order of “0” is executed). Then, the cut-in display, which is the specific effect b, is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes “0”.

  Next, when it is determined that the button operation B is performed by the operation timing determination means, that is, when the button operation is performed with good timing during the button operation valid period, the specific effect among the specific effects performed during the current fluctuation effect A countdown effect for the effect a (PUSH display (see FIG. 99) to be performed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) is set. Specifically, a countdown display of 7 seconds is executed as a countdown effect. Then, the PUSH display as the specific effect a is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect becomes “0”.

  In addition, when it is determined that the button operation is not performed by the operation timing determination means, that is, when the button operation is not performed during the button operation effective period or when the button operation is performed at a largely deviated timing, the countdown effect is performed. Suggested production ends at the timing when the prognostic production ends without doing (Gasse suggested production).

  As described above, in this separate control example, as in the first control example described above, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggested effect are set at different timings (conditions), and further, among the suggested effects Based on the predetermined condition (decision result of the operation contents to the frame button 22) which is satisfied during the pro-prediction effect execution period which is the first half part, determine the specific effect to be the target of the suggested effect under execution It is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect (display mode, display period) of the countdown production which is may be set. In this way, the player can be made to actively participate in the game.

  Also, in this separate control example, the later the timing at which the specific effects (specific effect a, specific effect b) executed at a plurality of timings are executed, the more likely that the special symbol variation this time is winning a big hit It is configured to be high. Therefore, if the button operation is performed in good timing during the button operation effective period, the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect having a high hit probability and the player can be relieved.

  That is, in FIG. 215, the fluctuation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed is shown as an example, but among the plurality of fluctuation patterns set in the pachinko machine 10, only the specific effect b is executed In the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 215, when button operation A is performed, the target of the suggested effect becomes the specific effect b, and the player is notified to the player. It is not possible to notify in advance whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are both executed, and the effect proceeds while the player is given an anxious feeling. Become.

  However, when the frame button 22 is operated with good timing during the button operation effective period, the countdown effect targeting the specific effect a is executed, so the player can play the game without giving anxiety to the player. You can Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to participate in the game in which the frame button 22 is actively operated.

  In this control example, in the fluctuation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed as one fluctuation pattern, the specific condition to be an object of the suggested effect is a predetermined condition that is satisfied after the suggested effect is performed Although it is configured to be determined based on the operation content of the frame button 22, it may be configured not to display a specific effect that is not a target of the suggested effect. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern in which only the specific effect a is executed as one fluctuation pattern, the timing at which the specific effect a to be the object of the suggested effect is performed is determined based on the predetermined condition established after the suggested effect is executed. It may be configured to With this configuration, when the frame button 22 can not be operated with good timing, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the content of the suggested effect to be executed when the frame button 22 can be operated with good timing. Can operate the frame button 22.

  In the separate control example explained above, as the operation content of the frame button 22 after the suggestion effect is started, the operation effect for operating the frame button 22 at good timing during the pro-end effect which is the first half part of the suggestion effect is executed The specific effect to be the target of the suggested effect is determined based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect, and the effect mode of the countdown effect corresponding to the determined specific effect is set. ing.

  In this case, as the operation effect, the display screen of the third symbol display device displays the character "press the button with good timing" as the display mode indicating the content of the operation effect, and the index display for indicating the specified timing of the operation effect It is preferable to display an aspect and a movement display aspect moving with time, and to indicate to the player that the timing when the movement display aspect overlaps with the index display aspect is the best. This makes it possible to inform the player of the content of the operation effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, as the operation result of the frame button 22 for the operation effect, the movement display mode is stopped and displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is actually operated, and the error with the index display mode is displayed for visual recognition by the player It is preferable to display the characters “Excellent” and “Good” for informing whether the error range is within the allowable range (corresponding to the button operation A or the button operation B). This makes it possible to inform the player of the result of the operation effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

  According to the example described above, in order to vary the effect mode of the suggested effect based on the content of the operation of the frame button 22, the difference between the operation timing of the frame button 22 and the designated timing designated in advance is determined. However, other configurations may be used as long as the effect mode of the suggested effect can be changed based on the predetermined designation condition and the actual operation content. For example, within the period in which the operation effect is executed The number of times the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) may be determined, and the effect mode of the suggested effect may be varied based on the determination result, or the frame button may be operated as an operation means that can be operated by the player. An operation means other than 22 may be provided, it may be determined whether or not a specific operation means among a plurality of operation means is operated, and the effect mode of the suggested effect may be varied based on the determination result.

  In the separate control example shown in FIG. 215, it is configured to set an effect mode (indication mode of countdown effect which is the second half part of the suggestive effect) based on the operation content on the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period. However, in order to produce the same effect, the effect mode of the suggested effect may be set based on the timing when the pressing operation is performed during the button operation valid period. Here, the details will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 216 (a) is a timing chart showing a flow of effects in the case where the effect mode of the suggested effect is changed according to the operation timing (pressing timing) on the frame button 22 during the suggested effect. The same elements as those in the timing chart (see FIG. 100 or FIG. 215) showing the flow of the suggested effect in the first control example and another control example described above are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 216, in this separate control example, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) set during the precursor effect period which is the first half part of the suggested effect is determined in the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds) It is possible to divide it. Here, an effect aspect of the suggestion effect set based on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 (b) to (d).

  FIG. 216 (b) is a timing chart showing an effect aspect of the suggestion effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation effective period, and FIG. Is a timing chart showing an effect mode of the suggestion effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation effective period, and FIG. 216 (d) is a button It is the timing chart which showed the production feature of suggestion production when the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed) during the operation effective period.

  First, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) within the first half (two seconds) of the button operation effective period, the target of the suggested effect is a specific effect a Then, the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period to 1 second later is set as the precursor period (8 seconds), and the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period is started It is set as an execution period (12 seconds) of the countdown effect from one second to the timing when the specific effect a is started.

  As described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first half (2 seconds) with respect to the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds) switching timing defined in the button operation valid period (8 seconds) In the case where it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated just before the end of the first half (2 seconds) by configuring the timing to switch the production mode of the suggested production to 1 (switch from prognostic production to countdown production) by 1 second. Even if there is, it is possible to execute processing for smoothly switching the effect using the period (one second) until the effect is switched.

  In this case, the button operation valid period changing process is executed to invalidate the operation of the frame button 22 for the second half (6 seconds) of the preset button operation valid period (8 seconds). As a result, even if the countdown effect is performed during the period in which the button operation effective period is set in advance, the operation on the frame button 22 in the middle can be invalidated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) within the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation effective period, the target of the suggested effect is specified effects The period is set to b, and is set as an execution period (3 seconds) of the countdown effect from the timing when the button operation effective period ends to the timing when the specific effect b is started. Then, when there is no operation to the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 216 (d), during the button operation effective period without setting the specific effect to be the target of the suggestion effect. The indication effect (13 seconds) is executed, and then the indication effect is ended without performing the countdown effect (Gase indication effect).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 216, even if the specific effect to be the target of the suggested effect is set based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period, the above-described operation is performed. An effect similar to that of FIG. 215 can be achieved.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 216, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (first half and second half), and different time is set for each divided period (first half Although it is configured to set the second half (6 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds), it is sufficient if the operation timing to the frame button 22 can be identified during the button operation valid period, for example, button operation valid The period may be divided into two or more periods (for example, divided into three), or the same time may be set for the divided periods. In addition, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (for example, period A (1 second), period B (1 second)), and period A and period B are set alternately. You may. As a result, different suggestion effects are executed only when the timing at which the button operation is performed on the frame button 22 is slightly deviated, and the effect can be enhanced.

  As described above in the first control example described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, in the other control example of the suggestion effect, the player's operation mode with respect to the frame button 22 (the predetermined condition established during the execution of the suggestion effect) Although the presence or absence of the operation, the content of the operation, the operation timing) is set, other conditions may be set, for example, winnings generated during the execution of the suggested effect (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry) Even when the ball entering the mouth 140, the ball entering the general winning hole 63, the ball entering (passing) the through gate 67, the generation timing of the information, or the content of the generation is set as a predetermined condition good. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player stops the firing of the ball while the special symbol is fluctuating.

  Also, in another control example of the suggestion effect described in the first control example described using FIG. 215 and FIG. 216, an example is shown in which the suggestion effect is completed during one special symbol variation, for example As shown in FIG. 101 of the first control example described above, the suggested effect may be executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device 113 in another control example of suggestion effect explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219, control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present separate control example will be described. In this separate control example, in place of the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), a countdown effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) is provided with respect to the first control example described above; The difference is that the process 5 (see FIG. 218) is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of countdown effect setting processing 5. When the countdown effect setting process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a hit (S4303), and if it is determined that it is a hit (S4303: Yes), identification is performed 26 seconds after the start of the variation After 30 seconds, the effect b (cut-in) is set, and the specific effect a (PUSH) is set (S4371), and the process proceeds to S4373.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4303 that the current fluctuation pattern is not a hit (S4303: No), a specific effect b (cut-in) is set 26 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (S4372) and the process of S4373 Transition.

  In the process of S4373, the button operation effective period is set in a period of 15 seconds to 23 seconds after the start of fluctuation (S4373), and a prognostic effect corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern is set (S4374), and a prognostic effect display command is set. (S4375), and the process ends.

  Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring and effect processing 5. When the frame button input monitoring and effect process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051), and when it is determined that it has not been detected (S5051: No), this process finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is detected (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether it is currently in the effective period of the first antecedent effect (S5081), and it is determined that it is in the effective period of the first antecedent effect. (S5081: Yes), when the frame button operation related processing (S5082 to S5088) is executed during the first precursor effect, and it is determined that the first precursor effect is not in effect (S5081: No), the second If it is determined that it is during the effective period during the prognostic effect (S5089), and it is determined that it is during the effective period of the second prognostic effect (S5089: Yes), the processing related to the frame button operation during the second prognostic effect A second precursor effect setting process is executed (S5090). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the effective period in the second precursor effect (S5089: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, the process (S5082 to S5088) related to the frame button operation during the first precursor effect will be described. First, an error between the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the designated timing set in the aura effect is calculated (S5082), and it is determined whether the error is within 0.1 second (S5083). If the error is within 0.1 seconds (S5083: Yes), the specific effect a is set as an effect target (S5084), and a period from 23 seconds to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation is set as the countdown effect period (S5085) ), The display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode is set (S5077), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the error is not within 0.1 seconds (S5083: No), it is then determined whether the error is within 0.5 seconds (S5086) and is within 0.5 seconds. If it is determined (S 5086: Yes), the specific effect b is set to the effect mode (S 5087), and the period from 23 seconds to 26 seconds after the start of fluctuation is set to the countdown effect period (S 5088). And the process ends. If it is determined in S5086 that the time is not within 0.5 seconds (S5086: No), the process proceeds to the above-described S5077, and the present process ends.

  Next, the second precursor effect setting process executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect process 5 (see FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second precursor effect setting process. When the second precursor effect setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the present time is the first half period, that is, whether the period in which the frame button 22 is operated is the first half period (S5091). In the process of S5091, when it is determined that it is the first half period (S5091: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5092), and the precursor effect period is set to 8 seconds (S5093). A period from seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5094), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the first half period (S5091: No), it is next determined whether the present is the second half period, that is, whether the period when the frame button 22 is operated is the second half period (S5095) When it is determined that it is the second half period (S5095: yes), the specific effect b is set as an effect target (S5096), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5097), and 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of fluctuation The period up to is set as the countdown effect period (S5098), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second half period is not in the process of S5095 (S5095: No), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5099), and the present process is ended.

<On another example of control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the extension display described in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, another example of the extension display processing (processing to display the ending display of the big hit during the special symbol variation period after the big hit ends) set after the big hit will be described. In the first control example described above, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (four times) after the extension display is performed, or a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses after the extension display is performed In the case where it is determined that the extension display end condition is satisfied, the third symbol is used if the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied prior to the end condition based on the number of times the special symbol changes. The demonstration display is performed on the display device 81, and the demonstration display is continued until the special symbol variation in which the short-time (0.5 second) variation time is set is ended.

  On the other hand, in this another example, the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied prior to the end condition based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and after the extension display is ended, the change in a short period (0.5 seconds) When special symbol variation in which time is set is executed, it is configured to set the variation production based on the remaining number of variations of the special symbol variation in which the variation time of a short period (0.5 seconds) is set. There is.

  Specifically, a specific period effect is set in which the fluctuation effect of a period longer than the actual special symbol fluctuation period (0.5 seconds) is executed. For example, the remaining fluctuation number of the special symbol is 2 times (this fluctuation In the case of 2), the variation effect of 2 seconds is set, when the remaining variation number of the special symbol is 3 times (including the variation of this time), the variation effect of 3 seconds is set, the remaining variation of the special symbol In the case where the number of times is four (including the current variation), a four-second variation effect is set.

  And, when the next special symbol change is executed while the change effect which is the specified period effect is being executed, the remaining period of the change effect which has already been executed is an effect period of the change effect in which the remaining period is newly executed. It is set so that a fluctuation production is rewritten so that it may become.

  By configuring in this way, the extended display is executed after the big hit end, and the special symbol change executed during a predetermined period (4 times of special symbol change or 4 seconds) after the big hit end wins the big hit. In contrast, after the big hit ends, when the fluctuation time of a short period (0.5 seconds) is set for the special symbol change for the predetermined number of times after the big hit, in order to continue the production during the big hit without feeling uncomfortable Even if the special symbol change is not performed a predetermined number of times (four times) within the predetermined period (four seconds) of the, it is possible to execute a change effect corresponding to the special symbol change without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Here, with respect to the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present alternative example, differences with the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. This example differs from the first control example described above in that the contents of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) are partially changed, and the other processes are the same. About the same element, the same numerals are attached and the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 6 in this example. When the variation display setting process 6 is executed, first, the same processes of S3801 to S3804 as the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above are executed. If it is determined in the process of S3803 that the display extension flag 223i is not on (is off) (S3803: No), it is next determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871). That is, it is determined whether a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed since the extension display is performed after the big hit is finished and the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (four times).

  If it is determined in the process of S3871 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is not 1 or more (is 0), the same as S3811 to S3817 in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above. Execute the process and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3871 that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871: Yes), next, a specific period effect corresponding to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is determined (S3872) The display specific period effect command is set (S3873), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S3874), and the same S3812 to S3817 as the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above. The process of is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in this example, in a state in which a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from when the extended display is executed after the big hit, until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (four times). When the special symbol variation is started, it is configured to execute the specific period effect corresponding to the remaining number of the special symbol variation (the value of the variation number counter), so a predetermined period after the big hit ends (4 Even if the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (four times) within the second), the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In addition, when using the structure of another example mentioned above, the period (number of times of special symbol change) which performs extension display may be made more than the number of retention upper limits (four pieces) of special symbol 2, for example, extension Set the maximum number of special symbol variations that can be executed before the elapsed period (4 seconds), which is one of the display termination conditions, (for example, 0.5 second fluctuation 8 times) as the extension display termination condition You may. Thereby, the opportunity to continue the presentation during the jackpot can be increased, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

  Also, although detailed description is omitted, it is executed in a state where a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from when the extended display is executed after the big hit ends until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (four times) If you win a big hit with a special symbol variation, a big hit game will be started after the special symbol variation of 0.5 second variation is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example 0.5 In addition to the special symbol fluctuation period of seconds, it may be configured to execute the fluctuation effect using the opening period of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the fluctuation effect using a period of 0.5 seconds or more, so it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

<About another control example of expectation degree indication rendering explained in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225, another control example of the expectation degree suggestion effect of the first control example described above will be described. In the control example according to this embodiment, similarly to the first control example described above, an effect period in which an expectation degree 1 display Dk1 to an expectation degree 3 display Dk3 which are expected degree display modes displayed in one variation effect display can be displayed. And a period in which each expected degree display mode can display the expected degree rising mode Dk4 obtained by adding up variable amounts which are varied during the variable stage, is set during one variation stage (see FIG. 221), and each stage On the other hand, the operation valid period for enabling the operation of the frame button 22 can be set.

  Furthermore, when setting the fluctuation effect, when the effect mode which does not display three expectation degree display modes is selected, the display mode of the holding symbol can be made variable using the points acquired by the expectation degree increase mode Dk4. Configured. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to use the points obtained in the expectation increase mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, thus making the player motivated It is possible to participate in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, the contents of effects in the control example according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing a flow of expectation degree indication effects in the control example according to this embodiment. In addition, the description is abbreviate | omitted about the element same as the expectation degree suggestion presentation of the 1st control example mentioned above.

  As shown in FIG. 221, when the fluctuation effect is performed in which the expectation degree suggestive rendering is performed, the expectation for notifying the expectation degree rising aspect Dk4 in the current fluctuation effect for 10 seconds from the time 15 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation. The variable indication effect is performed (see FIG. 102 (b)). Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 221 (b), the display screen shown in FIG. 222 (a) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 222 (a), the display content displayed during the expectation degree suggestion effect will be described.

  FIG. 222 (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display example in a period from notification of the degree of expectation increase mode Dk4 to execution of the degree of expectation increase presentation. As shown in FIG. 222 (a), the value acquired as the expectation increase mode Dk4 ("3 UP" in this figure) is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2. Referring back to FIG. 221, the description will be continued. Thereafter, when 33 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, an expectation increase effect is performed in which the first operation effective period of 5 seconds is set (FIG. 221 (c). In this state, FIG. 222 (b) The display screen shown is displayed.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 during the first operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 223 (a), the display mode of the expectation degree 1 display Dk1 is changed, and the expectation degree increase manner Dk4 is displayed. The value is displayed by subtraction. As described above, by operating the frame button 22 during each operation effective period, the display mode of the corresponding expected degree display can be varied, so that the player is made to operate the frame button 22 eagerly. It becomes possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 221, since the degree of expectation 1 display is displayed over a plurality of operation valid periods, even when the frame button 22 is operated in any operation valid period. The display mode may be variable. Thereby, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first operation effective period, the display mode of the expected degree 1 display Dk1 is not changed, or the variable amount is small, that is, the middle stage of the fluctuation effect (1) During the operation effective period), it is possible to suppress that the player loses the expectation to the jackpot early.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225, control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in another control example of the expected degree suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation degree effect setting process 7. When the expectation degree effect setting process 7 is executed, first, an expectation degree is selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i as in the first control example described above (S4251). Then, based on the selected degree of expectation, the point to be given in the expectation degree rising mode Dk 4 is set (S 4252), and effects performed in each of the first period, the second period, and the third period based on the expectation degree The mode is set (S4253).

  When the process of S4253 is finished, it is determined whether there is a period (vacant period) in which the effect mode is not set in each period (first period, second period, third period) (S4254), and the effect mode is set. If there is not a period (vacant period) (S4254: Yes), it is then determined whether there is winning information indicating a hit in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S4255). Here, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating a hit (S4255: Yes), a holding symbol variable effect mode for changing the holding symbol is set in a period (vacant period) in which the effect mode is not set. (S4256), the process proceeds to S4257. On the other hand, if there is no period in which the effect mode is not set in the process of S4254 (S4254: No), or if it is determined that there is no winning information indicating a win in the process of S4255 (S4255: No), S4257 as it is. Move to the process of

  In the process of S4257, an operation valid period (a first operation valid period, a second operation valid period, a third operation valid period) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set for each period in which the rendering mode is set. The setting is made (S4257), the display expectation degree rendering command is set (S4258), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the expectation degree effect setting process 7 (S3808), using the expectation degree selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i, the giving point used in the present fluctuation production and the giving point thereof It is configured to set the effect mode used. And the production | presentation aspect using the grant point is the presence or absence of the setting selected for each of a plurality of periods (the first period to the third period) specified in association with the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed this time It is set in the effect mode based on (whether or not the effect mode is set) and the content of the effect mode (type of expected level display mode to be set, display mode).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which effect mode is executed during which period (the first period to the third period). In addition, since the number of displayed expectation degree display modes that can change the display mode is also indefinite using the value acquired as the expectation degree increase mode Dk4 during the expectation degree variable indication effect period, it is acquired as the expectation degree increase mode Dk4. If the displayed number of expected degree display modes to be executed is small even if the calculated value is small (for example, 2UP), use the value acquired as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 for the expected degree display mode Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the player's willingness to play is reduced due to the presentation result during the expected degree variable suggestion presentation period.

  In addition, in another control example of this expectation degree suggestion production, as shown in FIG. 221, although the expectation degree variable suggestion production period uses a configuration that is executed once at the beginning of the fluctuation production, it is not limited thereto. You may provide in the middle of a fluctuation production (for example, between a 2nd operation effective period (refer FIG. 221 (d)) and a 3rd operation effective period (refer FIG. 221 (e))). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the target period of the presentation using the value acquired as the expectation increase mode Dk4 during the expectation change variable indication production, so a large value as the expectation increase mode Dk4 ( For example, when 3) is earned, the expectation to the jackpot can be further enhanced. Further, the expected degree variable suggestion effect may be configured to be performed a plurality of times (for example, twice) during one change effect.

  Furthermore, in another control example of this expectation degree suggestion production, when the production feature which uses grant point is not set vis-a-vis the plural periods which can set the operation effective period, the display feature of the retention design as additional production Although a configuration is used in which an effect to vary the value is used, other contents may be used as an additional effect, for example, a value collected by the player (for example, in another example of the first control example described above) It may be configured to add an effect for adding the accumulated value (see FIG. 176 (c)) described above and an effect for suggesting the current gaming state.

  In addition, the effect selecting means capable of selecting the effect to be executed by the player even when the effect mode using the grant points is set for all of the plurality of periods in which the operation effective period can be set. (For example, a selection screen for selecting an effect to be executed is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the selection result of the effect to be executed by the operation means operable by the player can be selected. Based on the effect to be performed may be varied.

  In the expected effect setting process 7 described with reference to FIG. 224, it is for display that the expected degree variable indication effect period is defined in the fixed period of fluctuation effect (period of 15 seconds to 25 seconds from the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 221) Although the expectation degree rendering command is configured to be set, for example, based on the determination result of the determination unit that determines the expectation degree selected with reference to the expectation degree selection table 222i, as the other configuration. A plurality of periods (for example, a period of 15 seconds to 25 seconds from the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 221, a period after the first period shown in FIG. 221 (40 seconds to An expected degree variable suggestion effect period setting means may be provided to set any one of the 50 seconds period). Thereby, a plurality of timings at which the expected degree variable suggestion effect is executed can be set, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, based on elements other than the degree of expectation selected with reference to the degree of expectation selection table 222i, it is configured to set a period during which the expected degree variable suggestion effect is executed by the above described expected degree variable suggestion effect period setting means. For example, a period in which the expectation variable suggestion effect is executed may be set based on the content of the operation performed by the player through the operation means, or the winning combination stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It may be configured to set a period in which the variable degree of expectation suggestion is performed based on the information included in the information.

  Next, referring to FIG. 225, the frame button input monitoring and effect process 7 will be described. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring and rendering process 7. When the frame button input monitoring and effect process 7 is executed, it is first determined whether or not the operation (depression) of the frame button 22 has been detected (S5051), and when detected (S5051: Yes), next hold variable effect setting If it is determined that it is in the holding variable effect setting period (S5901: Yes), a display variable command for changing the holding symbol is set (S5902), and subtraction is performed. A display command indicating the subsequent assigned point is set (S5903), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5901 that the hold variable effect setting period is not in progress (S5901: No), it is determined whether it is the first operation valid period (S5904) and it is determined that it is the first operation valid period. If it is determined (S5904: Yes), a display variable command for changing the first expected degree display (expected degree 1 display) Dk1 is set (S5905), and a display command indicating a point to be given after subtraction is set. (S5903), this processing ends.

  In the process of S5904, when it is determined that it is not the first operation valid period (S5904: No), it is determined whether it is the second operation valid period (S5906), and it is determined that it is the second operation valid period. (S5906: Yes), set a display variable command for changing the second expectation display (Expected Degree 2 display) Dk2 (S5907), and set a display command indicating the addition point after subtraction (S5903) , End this process.

  In the process of S5906, when it is determined that the second operation valid period is not (S5906: No), it is determined whether it is the third operation valid period (S5908), and when it is determined that it is the third operation valid period. (S5908: Yes), a display variable command for changing the third expectation display (Expected Degree 3 display) Dk3 is set (S5909), and a display command indicating the addition point after subtraction is set (S5903) , End this process.

  As described above, in the present separate control example, as in the first control example described above, expectation degree 1 display Dk1 to expectation degree 3 display, which is an expectation degree display mode displayed in one time of the fluctuation effect production Set the duration for which Dk 3 can be displayed and the period for which expected degree increase aspect Dk 4 in which each expected degree display mode is variable during variable stage is added can be displayed during one variation stage ( (Refer to FIG. 221), it is possible to set an operation effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled for each effect period.

  Furthermore, when setting the fluctuation effect, when the effect mode which does not display three expectation degree display modes is selected, the display mode of the holding symbol can be made variable using the points acquired by the expectation degree increase mode Dk4. Configured. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to use the points obtained in the expectation increase mode Dk4 for game results other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, thus making the player motivated It is possible to participate in the game.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated in all the operation effective periods, the setting point provided in this separate control example is set so that all can be used, and the portion not operated by the frame button 22 ends the fluctuation The configuration may be such that time remains, and the content of the above-described title addition effect may be varied with respect to the remaining provision points at the end of the change.

Embodiment A1
Hereinafter, an A1 embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. The same configurations as those described in the above embodiments and control examples will be described again for the sake of convenience. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as an A1 embodiment with reference to FIG. 226 to FIG. 296. FIG. 226 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, FIG. 227 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment. It is a rear view of.

  As shown in FIG. 226, the pachinko machine 10 according to the A1 embodiment is formed into an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape. An inner frame 12 supported openably and closably with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 226) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 227) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 229) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 226), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 226), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 229). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 226), there is provided a display lamp 34 which incorporates a light emitting means such as an LED and can display the payout of the prize ball and the occurrence of an error.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 227, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, showing a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (movable member 310). Rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), ordinary symbol starting opening (not shown) Through gate) 67, variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 226). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 226) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 226). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 229) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 227) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once returns to the inside of the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. Rubber rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 227) at a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a certain amount of momentum hits the rubber pair 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 227). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 229), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  The first winning opening 64 is disposed below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is arranged to divide the game area on the game board 13 into right and left, and the left side of the variable display unit 80 is a left flow path where the game ball can flow down, and the right side of the variable display unit 80 is played A right side channel is formed to allow the ball to flow down. The game ball which has flowed down the left channel is configured not to flow down the right channel. The first winning opening 64 is disposed at a position where game balls flowing down the left channel and game balls flowing down the right channel can enter.

  The second winning opening 640 is disposed at a position where the gaming ball flowing down the right side flow path is more likely to enter than the gaming ball flowing down the left side flow path. In the second winning opening 640, a horizontally long rectangular opening is formed in the game board 13, and a flow path through which game balls can flow down is formed in the opening, and the ball enters the opening. A photo sensor for detecting the game ball is provided. On the front side of the opening, a motorized accessory 640a is additionally provided as a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the opening / closing drive is performed on the front side with the opening / closing plate variable. And an open port solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning opening 640 is normally in a closed state where the game ball can not win or is difficult to win. When hitting a normal symbol (the second symbol), the open port solenoid is driven to tilt the electric role object 640a downward to the front, and the ball is easily opened in the opening of the second winning opening 640. It operates to repeat the state of the open state and the closed state at the normal time a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As a jackpot type determined here, 5R time short (95 times) jackpot (big hit A), 5R time short set corresponding to the first special symbol variably displayed when winning in the first winning opening 64 (3 times) jackpot (jackpot B), 15R regular jackpot (jackpot C) is prepared. In addition, a 15R time short (95 times) jackpot (big hit D) set corresponding to the second special symbol variably displayed when winning in the second winning opening 640 is prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "5R time short (95 times) jackpot (big hit A)" is that the maximum number of rounds is changed 95 times the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) after the jackpot of 5 rounds, 95 In the period until the fluctuation of the second movement stops, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (the second symbol) shifts to the high probability state, and the short change gaming time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is easy to be selected It is a jackpot. "5 R time short (3 times) big hit (big hit B)", the special symbol (1st special symbol or 2nd special symbol) is changed 3 times after the maximum round number of 5 rounds of big hit, and the third change The period before the game stops, the lottery probability of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is shifted to the high probability state, and the short variation time of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is easy to be selected It is. In addition, “15R normal jackpot (jackpot C)” is a jackpot in which the low probability state is set after the maximum round number of jackpots of 15 rounds and the time saving gaming state is not set.

  During the short time (during the short game state), not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, compared to the normal A long time is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, during the short hours, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized jackpot 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 during time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time thereof, the motorized jackpot 640a per hit is performed. The number of times of release may be changed to increase the number of times more than in the normal case. In addition, during time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed, and at least the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per opening time and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one time. It is also possible to change one. In addition, during the time saving, the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per hit is not made, but only the hit probability of the second symbol It may be changed to be up as compared to normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the third symbol changes. The second symbol is variably displayed using as a trigger the passage of the third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs display and a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) configured of an LED is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238). For example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the first symbol display device 81 A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device 83 has a symbol of "o" and a symbol of "x" as a display symbol (a second symbol (not shown)) each time a ball passes through a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, in the second symbol display device 83, after the variation display of the second symbol, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the middle of time than in the normal game state. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during time saving, it is possible to perform the winning lottery (the number of times of the variation display of the second symbol) more than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during time saving. In addition, since four balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 by the player as a winning ball by entering the ball into the second winning hole 640, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning hole 640. It is possible to play the game while suppressing the player's balls from decreasing, and while making it possible to suppress the investment for additionally lending the balls, it is possible to make the drawing of the special symbol take place in a short period of time .

  It should be noted that the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during the short time also by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting during the time saving, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized role 640a per time If it is, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than in the middle in time, the hit probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and the electric combination for one hit is also possible. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the object 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the area of the left channel of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired to the game board, part of the balls flowing down the left side of the game board It is configured to be passable. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol holding lamp It is also lit and displayed on (not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, and is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times) You may. Further, the number of assembled normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembling position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning opening 64 for winning a ball is disposed. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a jackpot is made at (see FIG. 229), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball passes the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, the winning balls are not paid out, but the present invention is not limited thereto, for example, a predetermined number of one ball etc. You may comprise so that a prize ball may be paid out.

  In addition, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which four balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640 a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640 a is in a closed state, and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed as a trigger of passage of the ball to the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electrically operated symbol The ball 640a is in the open state, and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is high compared to that in the normal period, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol of "○" in the variable display of the second symbol Is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the motorized utility object 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640, compared to the normal time, during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, if the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot (if it became a jackpot in the lottery corresponding to the second special symbol), 15R in the proportion of 100% 15R When the short time (95 times) the big hit (big hit D) is selected and the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 (if it becomes a big hit in the lottery corresponding to the first special symbol), the short time gaming state is awarded The jackpot is a jackpot of up to 5R (61% of the time when the jackpot is hit) and the jackpot type is selected to be advantageous to the player if the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 It is done. By configuring in this manner, in the normal gaming state (in a low probability gaming state and in a state in which time reduction is not given), the ball is more easily won in the first winning opening 64 than in the second winning opening 640. By setting the winning ball 64 to win the game ball in 1 winning opening 64, the rate at which the big hit (big hit A or big hit B) to which the short time is awarded is selected is set low, time saving is given, and the second winning hole 640 is assigned a ball When it becomes a state that is easy to win, it is easy to make a big hit with the second special symbol, and it can be configured so that the time saving state can be easily continued. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the value for the time saving.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a substantially long rectangular shaped special winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, on the right side of the variable display unit 80, a V prize door 600 capable of guiding a ball to the V entrance 600a of the V prize device 620 is disposed. In the V winning door 600, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit B or when it becomes a small hit, the ball does not enter the V entrance 600a upright Thus, the ball is configured to be able to enter a ball into the V-shaped ball entrance 600a by changing from an upright closed state to an open state rotated approximately 90 degrees to the right.

  In the case of a small hit, a 1R (round) small hit game is executed in which the V winning door 600 is open for 1.2 seconds or until the 10 balls, V entrance 600a, are won. On the other hand, in the case of the big hit B, as in the small hit game up to the first R, the V winning door is opened, and from the second R, the variable winning device 65 is changed to the open. Here, from 2R, the V winning door arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a is preset as 1R (round) until the ball wins 10 balls in 30 seconds or the specific winning opening 65a. A round game is repeatedly executed until the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type.

  Even if it is small hit by being constituted in this way, even if it is big hit B, it does not inform whether it is small hit or big hit B by the third symbol display device 81 etc. By configuring to shift to a game or a jackpot game, similarly, the game ball is caused to enter the V prize device 620, and the game is expected in the hope that the game ball enters the V prize hole 624 described later. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, when the game is a small hit, the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 of the V pay device 620 described later so that a big hit game is executed after the small hit game. . In the small hit game, the jackpot started with the game ball entering the V winning opening 624 is configured such that the variable winning device 65 is opened from the 1R's.

  In the case of the jackpot game in the jackpot B, in the first R jackpot game, when the game ball enters the V prize device 620, the prize control is executed so that the game ball enters the V prize opening 624 Is configured. Thereby, even when it is a jackpot game in jackpot B, it is possible to make it seem as if the variable winning device 65 is opened thereafter by having won the V prize opening 624 (in fact, 2R in the jackpot game The eyes are running). In addition, when a ball is won in the V entrance 600a and the specific winning opening 65a, 15 balls are paid out to the player as a winning ball for one ball. In addition, in the big hit game other than the big hit B, since the variable winning device 65 is configured to be in an open state from the 1R (round) point, the contents of the big hit game that the big hit game has been started instead Is also configured to allow identification.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol (for example, a reference symbol such as 333 etc.) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a small hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, it will be a stop symbol of the small hit The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol (for example, a reference symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, also in the case of a small hit and a large hit B, in the third symbol display device 81, similarly, the third symbol is a reach display mode (a left symbol and a middle symbol are the same first symbol) 3) The stop symbol is displayed on the display mode stopped by the symbol) and the middle symbol is the stop symbol of the chance symbol which is configured by the stop symbol of the chance symbol (the third symbol with the character "CHANCE") displayed. It is informed by being done. As a result, the player stops displaying the third symbol with a chance symbol, and a game (corresponding to a small hit game or a big hit game) in which the 1R V prize door 600 is opened is executed at the minimum. It can be recognized that the ball can enter the V winning hole 624. In addition, when a specific symbol (for example, 777 notched symbol) is stopped and displayed among the third symbols, it is notified that the big hit game is to be executed, and the specific symbol is displayed. By being displayed, the player may be configured to early recognize that the high added value jackpot game is to be executed.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close in front of the lower side of the opening and closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of big hit B, from 2R eyes, in the case other than big hit B, drive the large opening solenoid from 1 R eyes and tilt the opening and closing plate to the front lower side, and the ball is easy to win in the specified winning opening 65a Is temporarily formed, and it operates so as to alternately repeat the open state and the normal closed state.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231, the V winning device 620 will be described. The V winning device 620 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 and attached at a position on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIGS. 229 and 231, the V winning device 620 includes a movable guiding member 622, a rotary distribution member 621, a V winning opening 624, a left discharge path 623a, a right discharge path 623b, a first retention member 622d, and a flow path switching. It is comprised by the member 622e.

  Under normal conditions, the rotary distribution member 621 of the V-winning device 620 is configured to be visible to the player, and when the power is turned on, the rotary distribution member 621 is always rotated in the left-right direction in a fixed cycle Are configured to When the V winning door 600 is opened in response to the start of the small hitting game or the big hitting game, the gaming ball can flow into the V entry ball opening 600 a of the V winning device 620. In the butt portion between the V prize door 600 and the V prize device 620, there is formed a V entrance 600a capable of entering game balls, and from the V entrance 600a to the V prize device 620 A guiding path is formed to guide the A photosensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is disposed at the V entrance 600a, and it is configured to be able to count the number of winnings on the V winning device 620 (V entrance 600a). Based on the detection of a ball by the photo sensor, a winning ball (three balls) is paid out to the player.

  Here, referring to FIG. 253, the V prize device 620 will be described in detail in accordance with the timing chart of the operation control of the V prize device 620 in the small hitting game. When a small hit game is started, an open period (t2: 1.2 seconds) V winning opening solenoid is activated (activated to ON) after an opening period (t1: 0.1 seconds) elapses. The door 600 is variably opened. When the gaming ball is in the open state and the V ball entrance 600a has won, the gaming ball which has flowed down the guiding path is configured to be restricted by the first staying member 622d shown in FIG. The first retaining member 622d is configured to operate (turn on) the retaining 1 solenoid for 4 seconds so that the ball projects to the front side to retain the ball in the upper part based on the start of the small hitting game . When one ball is retained in the first retaining member 622d, the gaming ball flowing down thereafter collides with the retained ball and is discharged to either the left or the right. After 1.2 seconds of the opening period of the V winning door 600 elapses, 2.7 seconds after the V winning opening solenoid is turned off and the V winning door 600 is changed from the open state to the closed state. The stay 1 solenoid 209a is turned off, and the first stay member 622d retracts toward the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10 so that the ball staying at the top flows downward. Below the first retention member 622d, a flow path switching member 622e that operates in the left-right direction at all times is disposed.

  The flow path switching member 622 e is configured to operate left and right by being turned on and off at 0.4 s intervals by the flow path solenoid 209 b. By being turned off, the movable guide member 622 is moved to a position blocking the inlet of the movable guide member 622 so that the ball can not enter the movable guide member 622. In the off state, the ball flowing down from the upstream is guided to the right by the inclined portion formed on the upper portion of the flow path switching member 622e and is discharged out of the V prize apparatus. On the other hand, when the flow path switching member is retracted to the left side of the inflow port in a state where the flow path solenoid is turned on, the ball can flow into the movable guiding member 622 It is configured.

  At the timing when the first staying member 622d retreats and the gaming ball which has been staying flows down, the flow path switching member 622e is in the open state (the flow path solenoid is turned on and the flow path switching member is retracted to the left) The ball flows into the movable guiding member 622. As shown in FIG. 231, the movable guiding member 622 is formed in a cylindrical shape that allows a single ball to flow down, an inlet to which the ball flows in is formed at one end side, and the ball is discharged at the other end side An outlet 622a is formed. A recess 622c in which a single ball is held is formed on the front side (upstream side) of the discharge port 622a, and on the downstream side of the recess 622c, a second retaining member for blocking the flow of the ball entering the recess 622c 622b is arranged. The second retention member 622b is in a restricted state in which the retention 2 solenoid 612 is activated (turned on) to prevent the flow of the ball which protrudes upward and enters the recess 622c by the operation (turns on). 622b is turned to the left and is changed to the release state which allows the flow down of the ball entering the recess 622c.

  As shown in FIG. 253, the second staying member 622b is changed to the restricted state by the staying 2 solenoid 612 being activated (turned on) for 2 seconds (t6) 5 seconds after the start of the small hitting game , Restricts the flow of the ball entering the recess 622 c. The movable induction member 622 is pivoted leftward by the staying 2 movable motor 610a so that the inlet side rises as shown in FIG. 231 (b) five seconds after the start of the small hitting game (t4). After that, for 1.5 seconds (t5), the staying 2 movable motor 610a is operated to raise the movable induction member 622 so as to move to the maximum movable position (see FIG. 231 (b)). As described above, since the staying 2 solenoid 612 is controlled to be off at a timing 6 seconds after the start of the small hitting game, the second staying member 622b is released while the movable induction member 622 is rising. In this state, the movable guiding member 622 is inclined downward to the left, and when the inclination angle is further increased, the ball entering the recess 622 c is configured to easily flow downward to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (a), when the ball entering the recess 622c starts to flow down, the ball entering the recess 622c is discharged to the rotary distribution member 621 from the outlet 622a. The discharged balls roll on the rotary distribution member 621 and are discharged downstream. The rotary distribution member 621 is pivoted to the left and right in a constant cycle after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and the V prize hole 624 and the rotary distribution member 621 disposed downstream of the rotary distribution member 621 When a ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a at a timing when the downstream discharge port 621a matches in parallel, the ball can easily enter the V winning opening 624. On the other hand, when balls are discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a in a state where the downstream discharge port 621a and the V winning opening do not coincide in parallel, the left discharge path 623a or the right discharge path 623b arranged on the left and right It is configured to be discharged to the outside.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, a V effective period is determined to determine that the ball has entered the V winning opening 624 for 2 seconds (t 7) after 5 seconds from the start of the small hit. It is configured. Only when the photo sensor detects that the ball has entered the V winning opening 624 during this V effective period, the winning detection is made effective, and the control processing is made invalid when winning is made in other periods. doing. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to determine only the period in which winning is possible to V winning opening 624, and damage caused by fraud such as when a ball is operated with a magnet or the like and the V winning opening 624 is made to win illegally. Can be reduced. In the present embodiment, when the winning of the V winning opening 624 is detected during the V effective period, a big hit game is executed after the small hit game. The jackpot game awarded when the ball passes through the V prize mouth 624 in the small hit game normally is the type of the small hit game executed (small hit A or small hit B (Fig. 244 (b)-(c) The jackpot type corresponding to) is configured to be set.

  A timing chart shown in FIG. 254 is shown for the case where V does not pass to V in small hits. In the example shown in FIG. 254, when the flow path switching member 622e is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided to the movable guiding member 622 by the release of the first retention member 622d, and thus V prize winning An example is shown. Similarly, FIG. 254 is an example of a timing chart for winning to the V winning opening 624 when the jackpot B is present, and FIG. 255 is a timing chart for not winning for the V winning opening 624 when the jackpot B is present. It is an example. Further, FIG. 252 is a gaming flow showing a gaming state set when a jackpot or a jackpot in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (b), when small hitting A in the special figure 1 is executed, 5R (time reduction 95 times) big hitting is set, and when small hitting B is executed, 10R (normal No time savings) A jackpot is set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 244 (c), when small hitting C in special figure 2 is executed, 15R (time reduction 95 times) big hitting is set, and small hitting D is executed, 5R ( When the short hit E is executed, the 5R (no time short) jackpot is set. It should be noted that the time saving of each jackpot name described above indicates that the time saving gaming state is set, and the subsequent number display indicates the number of times of variation of the special symbol as a period in which the time saving gaming state is set. "Normal" indicates that the time saving gaming state is not set jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed, the jackpot type corresponding to the small hitting type is executed by winning in the V winning opening 624, but it is not limited thereto, the V winning opening 624 The counter value (for example, the first hit type counter value C2) may be acquired at the timing of winning in and selected from a predetermined selection table. The predetermined selection table may set a different selection table for each gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state), or may set a different selection table depending on the type of the special symbol, or it is small Different selection tables may be set depending on the hit type.

  In addition, here, when the variable display when the small special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special special symbol (special figure 2) are determined to be small hit or big hit is stopped and displayed, the small hit type The LED of the first symbol display device 37a is lit and displayed in a lighting manner corresponding to the jackpot type. Since this is a display mode in which a plurality of LEDs are displayed in combination, even if the player visually recognizes the first symbol display device 37a, the small hit type and the big hit type are configured so that identification is difficult at first glance It is done. Furthermore, in the case of a jackpot, the LED of the first symbol display device 37 is configured to be displayed corresponding to the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type. Also for the notification of the number of rounds, the number of rounds is not notified by letters or the like, and is displayed together with the lighting of the LED indicating the jackpot type, so that it is more difficult for the player to identify. As a result, even if the first symbol display device 37 notifies the player of the jackpot type, the small jackpot type, and the number of rounds of the jackpot, and can maintain the fairness of the game, the notification that is difficult for the player to understand By doing this, it is difficult to identify the player's identification of the small hit game and the big hit game to the player before its execution, and the small hit game, the big hit game in the big hit B, etc. It is configured to be able to play games while making predictions. Thereby, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the small hitting game is executed, the type of jackpot game awarded when winning in the V prize opening 624 differs depending on the small hitting type, so the jackpot becomes disadvantageous to the player. When the small hitting game corresponding to the small hitting type to which the type is granted is executed, by stopping the firing of the gaming ball and playing the game ball so as not to enter the V entrance ball opening 600a, There is a risk that the disadvantage on the game arcade side will increase, but in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, etc. constitute a notification mode in which the type of small hit is hard to understand Because of this, it is possible to suppress the manner of playing the above-mentioned disadvantages.

  Furthermore, 0.1 seconds after the display of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be a small hit is stopped and displayed, the V prize door 600 is in the open state, and the open state is maintained for 1.2 seconds. Even if it is a player who can analyze and identify the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, even if the player operates the firing of the gaming ball after the identification, it is up to the V entrance 600a. It is configured that it is difficult to fire the game ball to reach it. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since 100 game balls are configured to be fired at equal intervals regardless of the firing intensity per minute, it is configured to fire one shot every 0.6 seconds Since it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball to reach the V entrance 600a after being fired from the launcher, if the game ball is not continuously launched to the right area, the V entrance 600a It becomes difficult to enter into the ball, and when control is made not to enter the V inlet 600a at the time of small hit, the game ball to the V inlet 600a for the small hit game corresponding to any small hit type You will not be able to enter the ball. Therefore, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified of a right-handed strike (a notification mode for notifying the player that the game ball is fired to the right-hand area), the player immediately starts right-handed strike. You can play the game as you

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 226).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 600a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 66. The out port 66 is disposed below the variable winning device 65.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 13 in a front view, and is illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 228, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 229) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 229) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 is used as a trigger. Variable display is performed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, the variation display is performed commonly to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol of the third symbol. Also, the second special symbol is configured to be variably displayed in priority to the first special symbol, and is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not simultaneously variably displayed. It is done.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed. The configuration may be possible. By configuring in this way, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows on the left, middle and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols consisting of the numbers "0" to "9".

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display The jackpot is configured to occur after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, three symbol rows having main symbols are displayed. In each symbol row, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol column, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol column. The symbol row is displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed to the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed to the right of the middle symbol row.

  In addition, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle and lower three stages for each symbol row. The middle part of the third symbol is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row → right symbol row → middle symbol row. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the lower part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, it is the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed. The number of holding balls is one for holding balls, and one identification symbol (holding symbol) of "round symbol" is displayed and notified to the player. The player can determine the current number of balls held by the number of the held symbols. In addition, with respect to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, the maximum number of holding balls is set to four, and each holding ball is a holding ball for the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in distinguishable different colors (for example, black for the first winning opening 64, red for the second winning opening 640).

  In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the third symbol and the holding symbol, a character symbol, characters, etc. are displayed as a notice display mode displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol. Be done. Moreover, when a game is not performed for a predetermined period, a standby display image such as a model name of the pachinko machine 10 or a digest of the reach display mode is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. The number of times may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

<Electric Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 239 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  In the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, the first random number table 202a, the first random type selection table 202b, the normal random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, the small hit type selection table 202e, the big hit scenario table 202aa, the small hit The scenario table 202ab is set respectively. In addition, although it is memorize | stored also about the data etc. which are required for another game, in description of the invention in this embodiment, since it is unnecessary, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The first random number table 202a, the first collision type selection table 202b, the random symbol table 202c with the normal symbols, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202e will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  The jackpot scenario table 202aa is a data table in which the jackpot scenario in which the operation content in the jackpot game is set is defined, and the opening period of the jackpot game (the first round game is executed after the jackpot game is started) Period), the round period (the maximum period in which one round game is set), the inter-round interval period (the period from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game) Corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa, which is defined correspondingly, is set when the jackpot game is started, and is incremented periodically (every time the main processing of the main control unit 110 is executed). Operation control is performed.

  In the jackpot scenario table 202aa, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning jackpot type are defined. Here, the detailed contents of the jackpot scenario table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. 248 (a). FIG. 248 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot scenario table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 248 (a), in the jackpot scenario table 202aa, different scenarios are defined corresponding to the jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot D).

  Specifically, the jackpot scenario a202aa1 corresponding to the jackpot game for 5R in jackpot types A and C in which the jackpot game of opening the specific winning opening 65a is executed as shown in FIG. 248 (a) is the jackpot type In D, a jackpot scenario 202aa6 corresponding to a jackpot game of 15R minutes is defined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 248 (a), depending on the number of rounds in the jackpot game, the jackpot type B for opening the V winning hole 624 or the specified winning hole 65a as a scenario corresponding to the first round of the jackpot game Per action scenario a202aa2 which shows the action contents of the first half of the first round, per action scenario b202aa3 which shows the action contents of the second half of the first round, c202aa4 per scenario, and the action contents of the round game from the second round to the fifth round A jackpot scenario b202aa5 indicating that is specified.

  In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B, as described later with reference to FIG. 254 and FIG. 255, the contents of the round game of the first round are the same as the game contents of the small hit game (error that the player can not distinguish) Scenario is defined, and when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B is started, the V prize door 600 is opened, and a round game (V challenge) for aiming the V prize hole 624 is executed. Be done.

  Furthermore, by opening the V winning door 600 during the V challenge, the gaming ball is easily entered into the V entrance 600a, and the gaming sphere entered into the V entrance 600a is a flow path switching member. Based on the detection result of the second staying sensor (not shown), whether or not the game ball is in a state of staying by the second staying member 622b of the movable guiding member 622 after passing 622e (see FIG. 231 (a)). Based on the determination result, the operation content of the second half of the round game of the first round is configured to be different.

  In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 241, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 274) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a winning on the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas) and a second winning opening 640 The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning in is provided respectively, and in each of these areas, according to the ball entering timing to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the second The values of the random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the normal start openings (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 999). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is stored. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table (refer to FIGS. 242 (a) to (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the first random number When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the first random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Here, in the first hit random number table 202a1, a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol are respectively set.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 242 (b), in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “0 to 3”, “0 to 0”. If it is any of 3 ", it is determined that it is a jackpot. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is other than "0 to 3" (that is, if it is determined that the jackpot lottery is out), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "4" If it is "4", it is determined that it is a small hit. Here, when it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order.

  As shown in FIG. 242 (c), in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired similarly to the first special symbol is “0 to 3”, “ If it is any one of “0 to 3”, it is determined that a jackpot is made. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is other than “0 to 3” (ie, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is out), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is any of “4 to 997”. It is determined whether it is or not, and if it is any of "4 to 997", it is determined that it is a small hit. Here, when it is determined that it is not a small hit, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order.

  Thus, although the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be the same, for the small hitting probability, the second special symbol is a small hitting probability than the first special symbol Is set high. As a result, in the time-saving game state where entry of the game ball to the second winning opening 640 becomes easy, since the lottery is easy to be executed with the second special symbol, the probability of becoming a small hit is high, You can increase the chances you can Therefore, since the time saving game state can be set more advantageously for the player, it is expected that the jackpot game in which the time saving game state is provided is executed even when the normal game state is set. Thus, it is possible to play a game, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early in the game.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99 1) are sequentially added one by one, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit classification counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second winning opening 640.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number to be a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol, If it is a random number which becomes the slippage of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the slippage of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that will be the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is the one at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a specific display mode when the big hit Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first random number counter C1, there are four random number values that will be the big wins of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the random numbers “0 to 3” are random numbers per special symbol 1 as described above It is stored in the table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 per random number table 202a2. As described above, since the total number of random number values to be the big hit is 4 while the total number of random number values is 1000, the probability to be the big hit of the special symbol is "1/250".

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a jackpot, the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 241 (a)) for determining the type of jackpot to be executed is It is set in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. In the first hit type selection table 202b, as shown in FIG. 243 (a), the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 which is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for the first special symbol, and the second special Special figure 2 big hit classification selection table 202b2 which is the data table in order to decide the classification of the large hitting game vis-a-vis the design is set respectively.

  FIG. 243 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special view 1 jackpot type selection table 202 b 1. As a jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is set such that three types of jackpot A to jackpot C described above are selected by the value of the first collision type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is any of “0 to 44” is “big hit A (5R time reduction 95 wins)”. That is, the value "0 to 44" of the first collision type counter C2 is set as the determination value. The jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of “45 to 60” is “big hit B (5R time 3 short jackpots)”. That is, the values "45 to 60" of the first collision type counter C2 are set as the determination values. The jackpot type when the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is any of "61 to 99" is "jack C (10 R hour short non hit)". That is, the values "61 to 99" of the first collision type counter C2 are set as the determination values.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state, the game ball is played mainly by winning the gaming ball to the first winning opening 64, but the time saving gaming state is 61% of the big win of the first special symbol. It has become a jackpot (jack A and jack B) to be granted. Therefore, even when the first special symbol is a big hit, the time saving game state is not necessarily provided, the player is interested in whether it is a big hit type to which a time saving game is given even when a big hit It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  FIG. 243 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special view 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As a jackpot type of the second special symbol, one kind of jackpot D described above is set so as to be selected by the value of the first collision type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any of “0 to 99” is “big hit D (15 R time-long 95 short wins)”. That is, the value "0 to 99" of the first collision type counter C2 is set as the determination value.

  As described above, when the second special symbol becomes a big hit (by the big hit determination for the second winning hole 640), it is configured to be always given a big hit to which a time saving game is given There is. In addition, the number of times is set to 95, which is more advantageous than the jackpot B, and the number of rounds to be executed is set to 15R, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot A to C. It is configured. As a result, when a big hit is made mainly by the lottery of the second special symbol that is easy to be executed in the short time game state, a big hit game that is more advantageous than the first special symbol is configured to be executed. It is configured to have a high value when the gaming state is executed.

  The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when it becomes a small hit of a special symbol, and a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). Within 99), 1 is sequentially added, and it is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol 1 holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball has won the second winning opening 640.

  Further, the value of the small hitting type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a small hit, a small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 244 (a)) for determining the type of the small hit to be executed. Is set in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. In the small hit type selection table 202e, as shown in FIG. 244 (a), the special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202e1, which is a data table for determining the small hit game type for the first special symbol, and the second Special figure 2 small hitting classification selection table 202e2 which is the data table in order to decide the classification of the small hitting game vis-a-vis the special design is set respectively.

  FIG. 244 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special-figure 1 small hit type selection table 202b1. As the small hitting type of the first special symbol, it is set such that two kinds of the above-mentioned small hitting A and small hitting B are selected by the value of the small hitting type counter C5. Specifically, the small hitting type when the value of the small hitting type counter C5 being acquired is any of “0 to 64” is “small hitting A (V in 5 R when passing V 95 wins per win)” It becomes. That is, the value of “0 to 64” of the small hitting type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hitting type in the case where the value of the small hitting type counter C5 being acquired is any of "65 to 99" is "small hitting B (10 R hour short non hit hit at V passage)". That is, the value "65 to 99" of the small hitting type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

  Here, the type of jackpot game to be executed subsequently is set to the small jack A and the small jack B when the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small jack game. In the case of small hitting A, a jackpot of 5R hour short 95 times is set, and after the execution of small hitting A, a jackpot in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then 95 It is configured to set a time-short game (period of time until the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed 95 times and the stop display is made). Also, in the case of small hit B, 10R time short non-hit is set, after the execution of small hit B, a big hit game is performed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to 10R open state, but after the big hit game Is configured such that a time saving game state is not set, and a normal game state is set. As described above, the small hit B has many rounds to be executed in the big hit game and is set to be more advantageous than the small hit A, but since the short time gaming state is not set after the big hit game, It is difficult for a lottery with the second special symbol, which is advantageous, to be difficult to be executed, and overall, the small hit A is set to be advantageous to the player when the V winning opening 624 wins over the small hit B. It is done.

  FIG. 244 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small hitting type selection table 202b2. As the small hitting type of the second special symbol, three kinds of the above-mentioned small hitting C to small hitting D are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hitting type counter C5. Specifically, the small hitting type when the value of the small hitting type counter C5 which has been acquired is any of "0 to 49" is "small hitting C (95 R short on V passing 95 times big hit)" It becomes. That is, the value of “0 to 49” of the small hitting type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hitting type when the value of the small hitting type counter C5 being acquired is any of “50 to 79” is “small hit D (V in 5 R when passing V 95 hits in a row)”. That is, the value "50 to 79" of the small hitting type counter C5 is set as the judgment value. The small hitting type in the case where the value of the small hitting type counter C5 being acquired is any of "80 to 99" is "small hitting E (5R at the time of V passing)." That is, the value of "80 to 99" of the small hitting type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

  Here, the type of the jackpot game to be executed after the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is set to the small hit C to the small hit E, respectively. In the case of small hitting C, a jackpot of 15R hours and short 95 times is set, and after the small hitting C is executed, a jackpot in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed. It is configured to set a time-short game (period of time until the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed 95 times and the stop display is made). Moreover, in the case of small hitting D, a jackpot is set for 5R time short 95 times, and after the execution of small hitting D, a big hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and thereafter the variable winning A jackpot is executed in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and thereafter 95 short time games (period until 95 variations of the special symbol are executed and stopped and displayed) are set as the short time gaming state It is configured. Also, in the case of small hitting E, 5R time short non jackpot is set, after the execution of small hitting E, the big winning game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, but after the big hitting game Is configured such that a time saving game state is not set, and a normal game state is set.

  In this way, for the small hit type for the second special symbol, when the V winning opening 624 wins more than the small hit type for the first special symbol, the short hit game state is set to be advantageous to the player The rate at which the type is selected is set high. Thereby, when the time saving game state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol becomes easy to be executed, and the probability of being judged as a small hit is also set higher than the lottery of the first special symbol, It is determined that the game is a small hit, and by making the V winning opening 624 win, it is possible to easily execute a big hit game in which the time saving game state is set again. As a result, the jackpot game can be given to the player while continuing the time saving game state, and the value of the time saving game state can be further enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits and the variable display is stopped, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. Are configured to Therefore, the player wants to play a game so that a more advantageous jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the time saving game state is set) is executed by effectively using the remaining number of times when the time reduction game is in progress. . Then, the small hitting game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and only when it is the small hitting type to which the short time gaming state is not given, the firing of the gaming ball is stopped and the V entrance 600a is reached. There is a possibility that a gaming method which is disadvantageous to the gaming shop side to play a game so as not to enter the gaming ball may be executed. However, in the present embodiment, the V winning door 600 is set to an open state for 1.6 seconds 0.1 second after the variable display determined to be a small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the configuration of this embodiment, which is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds and requires 2 seconds to the V entrance 600a, the game ball is fired after the first symbol display device 37 is confirmed. It is difficult to enter the ball into the V entrance 600a, and it is determined that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits, and the variation is stopped, and the right-handed notification is the third symbol display device 81. It is difficult to enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a in the small hit game in all the small hit types if the game ball is not immediately fired to the right area and played without being played in the Is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the gaming method in which the gaming shop side becomes extremely disadvantageous.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 247, each hit type and the operation of the hit game will be described. In jackpots A and jackpots C, a round game is repeated 5R until the variable winning device 65 has 10 balls, and the game ball continues winning until the game ball is in a 29 second open state.

  In the jackpot B, in the first round game, the V winning door 600 is in the open state, and the V ball inlet 600a is opened for 1.2 seconds. In addition, if 10 balls are won in the 1st R, it will be closed before 1.2 seconds have passed, but in 1.2 seconds, an open time in which it is impossible to enter 10 balls realistically It has become. In the second to fifth round games, a round game is executed which continues until the variable winning device 65 receives 10 balls, or until the game balls reach a 29 second open state.

  As for the jackpot D, 1R is played 10 balls to the variable winning device 65, and the round game continues until the gaming ball is won, or until the open state is continued for 29 seconds, is repeatedly executed for 15R.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). So-called short-off (7 seconds), off-case (30 seconds), various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), special reach according to fluctuation type counter CS1 and lottery result (displacement, big hit type, small hit) Various display modes (various (90 seconds), simulated no development (30 seconds), simulated 1 development (34 seconds), simulated 2 development (38 seconds), simulated 3 development (42 seconds) The fluctuation time is determined. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 274) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 245 (a)) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. It is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 245 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a fluctuation pattern table 202d for normal use which is used when the gaming state is normal and a fluctuation pattern table 202d for time saving which is used when the time saving state is played. Is set respectively.

  FIG. 245 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal-use fluctuation pattern table 202d1. The variation pattern table 202d1 for normal use is a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out, the short (7 seconds), the gusset (30 seconds), various normal reach ((7 seconds) 30 seconds), various kinds of super reach (60 seconds), various kinds of special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation is checked by comparing the acquired value of fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set judgment value. A pattern is selected.

  In detail, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139", short deviation (7 seconds) is selected, and if it is "140 to 149", false separation (30 seconds) is selected. In the case of "150 to 179", various types of normal reach (30 seconds) are selected, and in the case of "180 to 194", various types of super reach (60 seconds) are selected, and they are "195 to 198" In the case, the judgment value is set such that various special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

  As a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot and is a jackpot A, C to D (ie, other than a jackpot B) as a jackpot type, various types of normal reach (30 seconds) Super reach various (60 seconds) and special reach various (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected by comparing the acquired value of fluctuation type counter CS1 with the set judgment value. Be done. Here, the player is notified that the jackpot is a jackpot by displaying the third symbol in a stop display (symbol matching jackpot) even at the time of the fluctuation stop. In addition, about the eye of "777", it is displayed only when it is a jackpot type in which a time saving gaming state is set after a jackpot game. In addition, when it is the jackpot type in which the short time game state is set after the jackpot game, the determination symbol of the stop symbol of the third symbol is configured to be determined also for the other than the '777's It is also configured not to know whether or not a time saving game will be granted unless it is after the jackpot game.

  Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 40", various types of normal reach (30 seconds) are selected, and when they are "41 to 179", various types of super reach (60 seconds) are selected. In the case where "180 to 198" is selected, the determination value is set such that various special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

  In addition, each fluctuation pattern selected when it is a jackpot is configured with the same fluctuation time as each fluctuation pattern selected when it is out, and it is a stop symbol (all eyes) that finally shows a jackpot. It is configured to be different depending on whether it is displayed or not. As a result, even if the determination result is out of the game, the player can be expected to have a jackpot by selecting a similar fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern to be a reach) which is selected even in the case of a jackpot. it can.

  As a variation pattern that is selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is small hit or big hit, and is the big hit B as a big hit type, pseudo development no effect (30 seconds), pseudo development 1 production (34 seconds), pseudo development 2 times production (38 seconds), pseudo development 3 times production (42 seconds) are respectively set, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the judgment value which is set A corresponding variation pattern is selected by comparison. Here, the player is notified that at least a small hit has been won by the player by stopping and displaying the chance eye (see FIG. 238) when the fluctuation is stopped. As a result, even if it is a big hit B, it is displayed with the same stop symbol as a small hit, so that the player may play a game in the hope of winning a game ball to the V winning opening 624 in a small hit game. it can.

  In detail, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49", the pseudo evolution non-rendering (30 seconds) is selected, and if it is "50 to 99" the pseudo evolution one-rendering ( 34 seconds) is selected, and in the case of "100 to 149", the pseudo development twice effect (38 seconds) is selected, and in the case of "150 to 198", the pseudo evolution 3 stage effect (38 seconds) is Each determination value is set to be selected.

  Here, referring to FIG. 232 to FIG. 236, with the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment (30 seconds), pseudo development none effect (30 seconds), pseudo development 1 effect (34 seconds) in this embodiment. The effect mode to be displayed will be described. 232 to 233 are views showing the flow of the variation aspect of the third symbol in the case of the out-of-case (30 seconds). When the variation start trigger of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be dislocated, each third symbol (left, middle, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. 232 (a) Scrolling display starts in the vertical direction). In the lower right area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the fourth symbol is "circle symbol in a display region smaller than the region where the third symbol is displayed (the region where each third symbol is displayed). The symbol “×” and “×” are configured to be displayed in a two-row display on the left and right as a symbol that is alternately displayed. The fourth symbol is configured to be variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display period of the special symbol displayed by the first symbol display device 37, and a display mode corresponding to the determination result at the end timing of the variation period. (Off: Round pattern in left row, × symbol combination in right row, jackpot: Round symbol in left row, combination of round symbol in right row, small hit: × symbol in left row, × symbol combination in right row) It is configured to be displayed stopped. In addition, the state in which three lines are described on the 4th symbol as shown to FIG. 232 (a)-(b) has shown that the 4th symbol is fluctuatingly displayed.

  In the case (30 seconds), when 30 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, the third symbol temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 233 is fixedly stopped (displayed from shaking fluctuation and stopped) and synchronized with that, the fourth symbol It is also configured to be displayed stopped.

  In the pseudo development no effect (30 seconds), the left and right symbols in the reach display mode as shown in FIG. The difference is that the chance eye symbol is displayed in which the word "CHANCE" is displayed.

  Next, FIGS. 234 to 236 are diagrams showing the flow of the variation aspect of the third symbol in the pseudo-evolution once effect (34 seconds). When it is determined that the small hit or the big hit B, and the pseudo-evolution once effect is selected, the variation start trigger of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the same as that described in the pseudo-evolution no effect, FIG. As shown in a), each third symbol (left, middle, right symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 starts scroll display in the vertical direction. After that, after being displayed by high-speed scroll display (the speed or mode in which the type of the third symbol is difficult to identify), the chance symbol symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 232 (b) After displaying, swing the third symbol up and down).

  After this, in the pseudo development one time effect, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the variable display is performed so that the “5” symbol of the middle symbol and the “4” symbol of the right symbol are interchanged. Here, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in combination of “345”, it is set as a symbol of a combination for notifying the player that re-variation is to be executed. As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the scroll display is started again by moving in a combination of “345” and displaying. Thereafter, after the high-speed scroll display, as shown in FIG. 237 (a), the chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed at a timing when 34 seconds of the fluctuation time (variation period) has elapsed. Here, in the case of pseudo-evolution 2 times production (38 seconds) and pseudo-evolution 3 productions (42 seconds), after temporary stop, if pseudo-evolution 2 productions, it re-fluctuates again once In the case of the pseudo development 3 times effect, it is configured such that the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the effect of performing the re-variation twice is executed. As described above, by performing the pseudo change a plurality of times, it is possible to obscure the timing of the start of the small hitting game or the big hit B.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 235 to FIG. 236, a description will be given of the SW (switch) effect in the case of the pseudo-develop, the pseudo-evolution once, the pseudo-evolution twice, and the pseudo-evolution three. On the audio lamp control device 113 side, an effect using the frame button 22 is set as one of the effects selected according to the fluctuation pattern command. A detailed rendering content is randomly selected by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command indicating the out-of-case, the pseudo-evolution one time, the pseudo-evolution 2 stage, and the pseudo-evolution 3 stage effect. As one of the effects, when the temporary stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 235 (a), the symbol indicating the frame button 22 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 22 is pressed. An effect for prompting the player is executed.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 235 (b), if any of the pseudo development 1 production, the pseudo development 2 production, the pseudo development 3 production is selected, it is changed again The symbol "345" is displayed to indicate that the re-variation is performed. On the other hand, when the gasse removal is selected, the symbol temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 236 does not change, and it is configured to be stopped and displayed at the timing when the fluctuation period has elapsed. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that "CHANCE" symbol of a chance eye may be displayed as a final stop symbol which changed again, it is not restricted to it, "CHANCE" symbol and other symbols (for example, It is also possible to display an effect of whether the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed up to the stop display position by alternately displaying "4" symbols or by displaying both symbols and scrolling. In this case, when the symbol "CHANCE" does not stop at the middle symbol, it may be changed again if it is changed again from the stopped symbol. By configuring in this manner, it becomes difficult to determine each variation pattern before the player is decidedly stopped, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand the start timing of the small hitting game and the big hit B. Therefore, even if the small symbol in the fourth symbol and the configuration in which the large hit is displayed can be identified, attention to the fourth symbol can be reduced by the effect of the third symbol, and the small hit game is started Can be difficult to identify. Furthermore, in the fourth symbol, the small hit type can not be identified, so the first symbol display device 37 must be confirmed, and the firing of the game ball in a specific small hit game is stopped, etc. You can suppress the special game method (capture attack) of.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 238, an effect aspect (variation pattern) in the third symbol display device 81 until the final stop symbol in the small hit or the big hit B will be described. As explained in the previous section, no pseudo development, pseudo development 1 production, pseudo development 2 production, pseudo development 3 production, when the chance symbol showing the final stop symbol is temporarily stopped, the chance symbol pattern shakes and fluctuates In the state of being done, the word "It is preparing to aim at the right" is displayed on the upper part of the chance eye pattern. Furthermore, the outline of the right-handed informing symbol n for making a notification to operate the launch handle with a launch intensity with which the game ball is launched to the right area in the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display 81 is lightly displayed. Two seconds before the fluctuation time elapses and the fluctuation time elapses, the character "Say right, I will aim at the right" is displayed and the density of the outline of the right-handed informing symbol n is displayed dark (Fig. 237) (B)). Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 238, the right-handed informing symbol n is displayed not only in the outline but also in the middle, and the character “right-handed” is displayed on the left side.

  In this manner, the game ball is fired to the right area at the timing when the small hitting game is started by notifying in a stepwise manner before the right-handed notification is decided and stopped, and the V prize door 600 is opened. It is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball can not be released in time during the period.

  In the present embodiment, the right-handed informing symbol is displayed stepwise when the re-variation is displayed as a final symbol after being executed a prescribed number of times, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and temporary stopping is performed. Every time at the timing, the step display of the right-handed informing symbol n is started, and in the case of disengaging or changing again, the right-handed informing symbol n is switched to the display mode of the determined right informing symbol n (see FIG. 238). May not be displayed, and the third symbol may be re-varied again. In this case, the symbol "CHANCE" is displayed in the middle symbol at each temporary stop, and if it is changed again, it is scrolled again without being displayed fixedly, and if it is out, the other first 3 symbols may be replaced with fixed symbols (for example, one frame scroll (displacement) may be stopped) to give notice of disengagement. By configuring in this manner, it is further difficult to understand the small hit start time, and each time the temporary stop is made, the player is prepared to make a right strike, and a special game such as not being fired at a specific small hit type Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 will be described. FIG. 246 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The time saving variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state. In the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2, as a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time reduction gaming state is out, short out (2 seconds), short out pseudo 1 ( 6 seconds) and the short deviation pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) are set, and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is compared with the set judgment value to select the corresponding fluctuation pattern.

  In detail, the short deviation (2 seconds) is selected when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 90”, and the short deviation pseudo one time (6 seconds if the value is “91 to 189” In the case of “190 to 198”, the judgment value is set such that the short deviation pseudo two times (9 seconds) is selected.

  Short out (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high-speed fluctuation of 1 second from the start of fluctuation, it shakes with a chance eye (the middle symbol "CHANCE" symbol shakes greatly) After a temporary stop for 1 second, the change symbol is switched to the off symbol (the middle symbol scrolls from the "CHANCE" symbol to one frame downward (slip) symbol). Variation pattern. In addition, the middle symbol during temporary stop shakes greatly, and the symbol "CHANCE" and the symbol "for example," 1 "symbol arranged next to that one frame are displayed alternately at the stop display position. The player is configured not to misunderstand that it is a lottery result such as a small hit.

  The short-off pseudo one-time (6 seconds) variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 6 seconds, and the symbol is high-speed again for 2 seconds after the temporary stop for 1 second After starting to fluctuate and re-fluctuating, after a temporary stop for 2 seconds at the chance eye (temporary stop mode similar to short-off (2 seconds)), the missing symbol (the middle symbol scrolls one frame downward from the "CHANCE" symbol) It is a change pattern in which a change effect is performed by switching to (sliding) symbol) and confirming and stopping, and being notified of being out of position.

  The short-off pseudo-twice (9 seconds) fluctuation pattern is a change pattern in which the change time is set to 9 seconds, and after the temporary stop for one short-off pseudo-one cycle for 2 seconds, the symbol changes again for 2 seconds at high speed. After starting to re-fluctuate, after being temporarily stopped for 1 second at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to short-off (2 seconds)), the missing symbol (the middle symbol scrolls one frame downward from the "CHANCE" symbol ( It is a change pattern in which a change effect is performed by switching to a slipped symbol) and confirming and stopping, and being notified of being out of position.

  In the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2, as a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time reduction gaming state is a small hit, a short hit (2 seconds), a short hit pseudo 1 (6 seconds), short per false 2 times (9 seconds), short per false 3 times (12 seconds) are set, and the acquired value of fluctuation type counter CS1 is compared with the set judgment value The corresponding variation pattern is selected.

  In detail, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 67", a short hit (2 seconds) is selected, and if "68 to 136", a short hit is pseudo 1 time (6 seconds) ) Is selected, and in the case of “137 to 167”, the short hitting pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is selected, and in the case of “168 198” the short hitting pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) is selected The judgment value is set to

  The short hit (2 seconds) is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high-speed fluctuation of 1 second from the start of fluctuation, it shakes with a chance eye (the middle symbol "CHANCE" symbol shakes greatly) It is a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation effect in which a small stop is notified and a definite stop is notified after a temporary stop for 1 second after a change. In addition, the middle symbol during temporary stop shakes greatly, and the symbol "CHANCE" and the symbol "for example, symbol" 1 "arranged next to one frame thereof are alternately displayed at the stop display position.

  The fluctuation pattern of 1 time (6 seconds) of the short hit is a change pattern in which the change time is set to 6 seconds, and the symbol is high for 2 seconds again after temporary stop for 1 second of the short hit (2 seconds) mentioned above After starting to fluctuate and re-fluctuating, there is a fluctuation effect in which it is decided and stopped after being temporarily stopped for 2 seconds at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to the short hit (2 seconds)) and it is informed that it is a small hit It is a fluctuation pattern to be executed.

  The variation pattern with short per second pseudo 2 times (9 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 9 seconds, and the pattern per 2 seconds high speed variation again after temporary stop for 1 second per short per short pseudo After starting to re-fluctuate, perform a temporary stop (temporary stop mode similar to short hit (2 sec)) for 1 second at the chance eyes and then decide to stop and execute the fluctuation effect informing that it is a small hit Variation pattern.

  The variation pattern with short 3 false hits (12 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 12 seconds, and after 1 second temporary stop of the short hits false 2 After starting to re-fluctuate, perform a temporary stop (temporary stop mode similar to short hit (2 sec)) for 1 second at the chance eyes and then decide to stop and execute the fluctuation effect informing that it is a small hit Variation pattern.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the time saving game, the same variation time is configured in the case where the lottery result is out and the case where the win is small, and the same variation timing (elapsed timing of variation time) It was configured to temporarily stop the third symbol with a chance eye. In this way, even when the lottery result is out, it can be thought as if every fluctuation small hit, and it is possible to make the player prepare for the right strike in preparation for the start of the small hit game. Furthermore, the first symbol display device 37 confirms whether or not a specific small hit type (for example, a small hit type which is a small hit type which is disadvantageous to the player among the small hit types), and launches the gaming ball. It is possible to suppress a problem in which a special game method for stopping and entering the gaming ball into the V-balloon 600a is prevented.

  It should be noted that the stepwise notification of the right-handed notification symbol in the normal gaming state may be performed at each temporary stop even during the time saving game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the game play with the expectation that it will be a small hit even if the variation is more out of place.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the ball passes either the left or right normal starting port (through gate) 67 When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 242 (d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the second set by the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit. In addition, this second per random number table 202c is for high probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol), and high probability (normal symbol) with high probability of being hit of normal symbol from low probability. The number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  FIG. 242 (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c described above. In the second random number table 202c, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that will hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202C for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed ) And the second winning opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202C for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  When the ball passes the normal starting opening 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired and the variation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed ) And the second winning opening 640 is opened "one second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the release period of the second winning opening 640 Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time is The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 274).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Referring back to FIG. 240, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 240, the RAM 203 is a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 274), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 273) upon powering on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 241 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, large hitting start flag 203h, large hitting middle flag 203i, small hitting start flag 203j, small hitting middle flag 203k, V passing place big hit category value It has 203 m, a V flag 203 n, and other memory areas 203 z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) as shown in FIG. 240, and in each of these areas The respective values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit type counter C5 acquired based on the winning at the first winning opening 64 are respectively stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first winning opening 64, and the acquired data has four holding areas (hold Among the vacant areas of the first area to the reserved fourth area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for winning on the second winning opening 640 are stored respectively, The configuration of is the same, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), like the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b And. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right normal starting opening 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas Among the vacant areas of the area (area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 at maximum value 1 each time Are added (see S304 in FIG. 266). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 263).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 holding ball number command (S211 in FIG. 263, S266 in FIG. See S305). The special symbol 1 holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol 1 holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of pending balls on the display. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display controlled by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the holding ball of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command received.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the holding ball number symbol (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding ball number notified by the display holding ball number command.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d in that the number of holding balls held in the second winning opening 640 is stored and stored. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is changed, the special symbol 2 holding ball number command is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f has a maximum number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on passage of the ball at the normal starting opening 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 every time the ball passes the normal starting opening 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. . On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed.

  When the ball passes either the left or right normal starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter C4 Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes either the left or right normal starting opening 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c.

  The time saving counter 203 g is a counter for counting the number of times of fluctuation of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. The counter value corresponding to the number of times is set in the time counter 203g, and it is decremented by 1 at the timing when the variation of the special symbol stops, so that the number of times the variation of the special symbol set in the time-saving game state ends The game state is configured to be set.

  The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is a jackpot game start timing. When the variation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a big hit is stopped, the big hit start flag 203h is set to ON (see FIG. 263: S219). When it is determined that the big hit start flag 203h is on and it is identified that it is the big hit start timing, it is set to off. The big hit start flag 203 h is set to be off in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and to maintain the state immediately before the power failure when the power failure or the like occurs.

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. The determination result is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose jackpot is large is stopped (FIG. 263: S219). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type is ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. The big hit flag 203i is a flag that is set to an off state in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. Are configured to

  The small hit start flag 203j is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. The judgment result is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol which is a small hit is stopped. When it is determined that the small hit start flag 203j is on and it is identified that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off. The small hit start flag 203 j is a flag set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

  The small hit middle flag 203k is a flag indicating that a small hit game is being played. The judgment result is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol which is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit is ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. This small hit middle flag 203k is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. It is configured to be.

  The V-pass jackpot type value 203m is a memory for storing data for determining a jackpot type in which a ball is set to be won in the V winning opening 624 within the V effective period when a small hitting game is being executed. It is an area. The V-pass jackpot type value 203m stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the small jackpot type being determined, when the variation of the special symbol for which the determination result is a small hit is stopped. When the ball is won in the V winning opening 624 during the V effective period, the V flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the jackpot jackpot type value 203m at the time of V passing is configured to be set on. ing. At the end of the small hitting game, the data value stored in the jackpot type value 203m at the time of V passage is cleared. The V-pass jackpot type value 203m is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up Configured to be held by the

  In the V flag 203n, when the ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the V effective period in the small hitting game, the flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the type of the small hitting game being executed is set on Ru. At the end of the small hitting game, it is determined that the V flag 203 n is on, so that it is identified that there is a winning on the V prize opening 624 during the V effective period, and the flag set to on The jackpot type to be executed is determined and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. The V flag 203 n is a flag that is set to off in an initial state such as RAM clear, and is maintained by backing up a state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. Is configured as.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  The scenario counter 203 aa is a counter for advancing various scenarios (big hit scenario, hit scenario) defining the operation control contents of the big hit game or the small hit game, and when the big hit game or the small hit game is started Then, the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275) or the small hit control process (FIG. 275) executed in the main process (see FIG. 274) of the main control unit 110 is set to “1” as the counter value. Every time 278 (see S1005) is executed, its value is incremented by "1". Then, when the various scenarios (the jackpot scenario and the hit scenario) are added up to the end value, “0” is reset as the counter value.

  The specific control completion flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) executed when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type is ended, and is set to ON. This indicates that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) has ended.

  This specific controlled flag 203ab is set to ON when the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) ends (see S1212 in FIG. 276), and the flag setting status is the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275). (See S1118 in FIG. 275). Here, when it is determined that the specific control completion flag 203ab is set to ON (S1118: Yes), when the big hit B is set as the big hit type, the first round where a special round game is executed is It is determined that the game has ended, and the normal round game after the second round (round game for opening the specific winning opening 65a) is executed. And, when the big hit game ends, it is set to off (see S1307 in Figure 277).

  Referring back to FIG. 239, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208 Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 251 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a and various other data and programs necessary for controlling a game.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, fluctuation patterns of types of fluctuation patterns (such as out-of-range, out-of-reach, various types of reach, etc.) are respectively set to counter values for selecting fluctuation patterns (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various types of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (b). As shown in FIG. 251 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, and a fluctuation start flag 223d A stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, an SW effective time counter 223g, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball or the like before the start of the change.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ), Which is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b holds the holding balls of the first special symbol. It is supposed to manage the number.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball to first winning opening 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and is suspended. When the number of balls has been subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is stored. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display several symbols in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c stores the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b based on the holding ball number command output from the main control unit 110 And the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and is turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is made. When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The variation pattern command for display set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2002) of the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2105 in FIG. 282), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S2226 in FIG. 284). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although illustration is omitted, the main processing (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated one by one each time it is executed.

  The SW valid time counter 223 g is a storage area in which a period in which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid is stored.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 282) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Control) and the advance notice. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later in detail.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

Regarding Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in First A1 Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 257 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed after the boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 286) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 261) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 288 (b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and entry of the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3003 and S3004 in FIG. 286).

  The power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power on to display the third image at the power on main image. 81 is displayed (the third symbol display device 81 displays "o" and "x").

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the fluctuation effect when it is "the jackpot of the special symbol", and the image is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the fluctuation effect when it is "the out of special symbol".

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 so that the power-on-change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on change image resident in 235 b and the image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is directed against. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 257, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after the entry to the first winning opening 64 occurs, in the first symbol display device 37, although the variation effect is started, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a condition.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233 j and a drawing target buffer flag 233 k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while if the stop type of the change effect is a big hit, The stop symbol according to the jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the short term of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the short term of the normal symbol. Since the longer the short term of the normal symbol, the more chances of the ball passing through the through gate 67, the more chances of the normal symbol drawing will be made, and the more chances for the normal symbol to hit. Therefore, the chance to enter the second winning opening 640 becomes easier because the chance to open the electric winning combination becomes a big hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy to be drawn lottery of special symbols. Therefore, the longer the short term of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball, the electric jackpot becomes a big hit of an ordinary symbol and the ball is a second winning opening It becomes easy to get to 640 and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the special symbol being held will be a big hit of the special symbol in the ending effect, the player can select the special symbol in the lottery of the special symbol being held. Since it can be recognized that the player wins the jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the jackpot of the special symbol will surely be made. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 259) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 260 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 260).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 260, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information specified in the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 (see S3005 in FIG. 286). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3305 in FIG. 288 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3301 in FIG. 288 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S3308 in FIG. 288 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 288 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 288 (b) (see S3309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 289 to 296) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are performed.

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 of FIG. 170 (a)), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 170B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) of transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 261) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 261) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 261) described later (see FIG. 261) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 for which the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. 288 (b In step S3303), pointer update processing (see S7605 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 261, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 261 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 261, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 288 (b)). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  For all stored sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to that sprite in the image storage area 236a of the ordinary video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by an initial setting process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233j is performed when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 288 (b)) is executed, the process is performed (see S8202 of FIG. 172).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in the A1 Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 999, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning (start winning) on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation processing, the through gate passage processing accompanied by the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). The details of through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the through gate passing process is performed, the V inlet passing process is performed (S108), and then the V passing process (S109) is performed. Here, the details of the V inlet passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271.

  After the V passage process (S109) is executed, the emission control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed in the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d Is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), that is, when there is no holding ball for newly starting the special symbol variation, this is as it is End the process.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210). A holding ball number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the processing of S213 is executed, and the present processing ends.

  Moreover, in the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202: Yes), the change time of the change display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed It is determined whether or not it has been made (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is set (S215) . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol or not is determined, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is the jackpot, the value of the first counter type counter C2 Accordingly, any one of the jackpot A to the jackpot D is determined, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small winning, the small hitting A to E is determined according to the value of the small hitting type counter C5.

  In the present embodiment, the player is notified of the lottery result of this special symbol (decision result of various kinds of counters) by the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. Yes, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, turn on the blue LED in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b, if it is a small hit, turn on the red LED, if it is off Turn on the red LED and the green LED.

  And when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the big hit A is determined, the blue LED in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b, a mode showing the big hit A (for example, the alphabet "a" If the jackpot B is determined, then it is turned on in the embodiment showing the jackpot B (for example, the embodiment imitating "b" of the alphabet), and if the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot is When the jack is turned on in a mode showing C (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "c") and the jackpot D is determined, it is turned on in a mode showing the jackpot D (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "d") Let

  Further, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, as in the case of winning the above-described large hit, the red LED is lit in a mode according to each small hit type (small hit A to small hit E) Let In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation. Further, in the present embodiment, a mode (a color corresponding to a lottery result of a special symbol) showing contents of each winning type so that the player can grasp each winning type (big hit type and small hit type) determined as described above. Although the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be lit in the form formed from the lighting aspect corresponding to each type of contact, other configurations may be used, for example, lottery results or The same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b even if the determined hit types are different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol this time and the type of winning determined. However, other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured to display in a lighting mode divided to a degree that allows the player to distinguish that the lottery result of the special symbol is different. .

  After the process of S215 is completed, it is determined whether the lottery result (this lottery result) of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is the big hit of the special symbol ( S216). If the lottery result this time is a big hit of the special symbol (S216: Yes), based on the big hit type, in order to enable the ball to be able to win in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 624) The opening scenario for opening and closing the door 600 is set (S217), and then the setting of the jackpot start (setting of the jackpot such as 15 rounds) is performed corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the present jackpot (S218) ).

  When the process of S218 is finished, next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit medium flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the stop command is set (S225). ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S216 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S221). If it is determined that (S221: Yes), the small hitting start setting process (S222) is performed, the process of S225 described above is performed, and the process is ended. The details of the small hitting start setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S221, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (is out) (S221: No), next, it is determined whether the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more (S223) . When it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is not 1 or more (0) (S223: No), the process of S225 described above is executed, and the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour-time counter 203g is 1 or more (S223: Yes), that is, when the current time is in the time-short state, the value of the time-same period counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224). Execute the process and end this process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of special symbol," "small hit of special symbol," or "out of special symbol" It is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81 while performing the propriety determination.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area (special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b) The respective values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S231). Next, the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired based on the special symbol big hit random number table (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the special symbol type (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2) (S232), the process proceeds to S233.

  Specifically, when the special symbol variation to be executed in this process is the first special symbol, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired is the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242 (b)) Compare one by one with the four random numbers set in. As described above, four random numbers from "0 to 3" are set as random number values for the first special symbol, and the first hit random number counter C1 obtained and random hits for these first rounds If the numbers match, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. Similarly, when the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 matches the small random number value “4” set in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242 (b)), Determined to be a small hit of the special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and different random numbers may be used. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random number values is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to that, it is determined to be a jackpot for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random numbers may be set differently. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured such that the number of determination values determined to be small hits is different. By configuring in this manner, the probability that the lottery result will be a small hit can be varied according to the type of the special symbol, and the player is motivated to execute the lottery with the special symbol with a higher probability of small hit. Can play a game.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number table 202a is set such that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win a small hit, but only one of the special symbols is small. The first random number table 202a may be set to be won. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and only the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is special It is good to set so as to set a random value that will be a small winning of a symbol. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the bonus (small hit game) that can be given to the player different according to the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the jackpot of the special symbol is made to correspond to the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the first random number counter C1 according to the type of the special symbol within the other range (4 to 999) The small symbol of the special symbol is made to correspond, but as a configuration other than that, for example, the value of a part (for example, 0 to 2) of the range that becomes the large hit in the first special symbol is small in the second special symbol It may be set as a winning range.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a are used to perform drawing of special symbols (big hit, small hit, missed). As a configuration other than the above, a plurality of per random number tables may be used to draw a special symbol, for example, whether the first random number table is used to win a special symbol lottery result or not The second random number table is used to determine whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit if the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit. You may. As described above, by drawing a special symbol using a plurality of random number tables, the drawing result of the special symbol can be set more randomly, and it is possible to suppress the cheating that operates the drawing result of the special symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is used when drawing a special symbol, but any other configuration may be used. For example, the values of a plurality of random number counters and the first number A lottery of special symbols may be made using the random number table 202a. In this case, for example, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter, and the lottery result of the special symbol is small based on the value of the second random number counter It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a hit.

  Referring back to FIG. 264, the description will be continued. In the process of S233, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S232 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S233). If it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is determined (S233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the type of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery this time (S234), The display pattern at the time of big hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S235), the big hit fluctuation pattern is decided on the basis of the value of fluctuation type counter (S236), fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern decided this time A command is set (S243), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S233 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S233: No), it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S237). If it is determined (S237: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table according to the special symbol type corresponding to the special symbol lottery this time (S238), the special symbol and the small hit type Set the display mode at the time of small hitting corresponding to the small hitting variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter, and set the variation pattern command corresponding to the small hitting variation pattern decided this time (S 243), This process ends.

  Moreover, in the process of S237, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S237: No), that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out, the outlier corresponding to the special symbol type The display mode at the hour is set (S241), the fluctuation pattern at the time of detachment is determined based on the number of holding balls (S242), and the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern at the time of the presently decided is set (S243), This process ends.

  In addition, although a detailed description will be described later, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of holding balls, but the special symbol When the result of the lottery is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is configured to be different according to the number of holding balls. Specifically, as the number of holding balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed is larger, the variation pattern having a shorter variation time is more easily determined. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time until the number of holding balls increases, until the lottery result (off) where the lottery result of the special symbol does not give a bonus to the player is displayed, so it is executed per unit time. In order to increase the number of lottery times of special symbols to be played, the player can be motivated to play a game in order to always secure a large number of holding balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of holding balls, it is possible to lengthen one special symbol fluctuation time, so it is suppressed that a special symbol does not fluctuate during the game. It is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from decreasing.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is configured to be different based on the number of holding balls at the timing when the processing of the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, but other than that, for example, the special symbol is It may be configured to shorten the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern being executed, on condition that the number of holding balls becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, three) during the fluctuation. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to play the game eagerly in an effort to secure a large number of holding balls even while the special symbol is fluctuating.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is made different based on the number of holding balls only when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the holding ball The variation pattern may be made to differ based on the number, or the configuration may be such that the variation pattern of a long variation time is more easily determined as the number of holding balls increases. Furthermore, as for the number of holding balls to be referred to when determining the variation pattern, a value obtained by adding the number of holding balls of the first special symbol and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol may be used, or the first special symbol and the first special symbol Of 2 special symbols, only the value of the number of holding balls of the second special symbol where the special symbol variation start process is preferentially executed may be used, or the side of the special symbol variation start process to be executed this time Only the value of the holding ball number of the symbol may be used.

  Next, the small hitting start setting process (S222) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 is a flowchart of the small hitting start setting process (S222). In this small hitting start setting process, the solenoid (V inlet solenoid) 209 for opening the V prize door 600 and the ball passing through the opened V prize door 600 are V The first retaining member 622d (see FIG. 231), the movable guiding member 622 (see FIG. 231), the second retaining member 622b (see FIG. 231), and the rotary distribution member provided in the flow path flowing down toward the winning opening 624 A process of setting a scenario for driving a solenoid for operating each of 621 (see FIG. 231) is executed.

  In the small hitting start setting process (S244), first, based on the small hitting scenario table 202ab (refer to FIG. 248 (b)), a scenario (hit scenario a) corresponding to the set small hitting type is set (S241) . Next, the small hitting type according to the small hitting type determined to the V passing jackpot type value is set (S 242), the start of the small hitting corresponding to the small hitting type is set (S 243), the small hitting start flag 203 j The small hit middle flag 203k is set to ON (S244), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 266, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) in the present embodiment. This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), determines the presence or absence of a winning (start winning) to the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, the start winning Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 266, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S301). Here, entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S302) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S303).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S301: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S303: No), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first winning opening 64 (S301: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S304). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S305).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above The respective values are stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S306). In the process of S306, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S307 to S312, the same processing as that of the processing of S301 to S306 is also performed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The process is different from the other in that the process of holding the second special symbol is executed with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined in the process of S307 that the ball has not won the second winning opening (S307: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S312 (S313). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, the prefetch process (S313) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing pre-reading processing (S313). When the pre-reading process (S313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning combination (S321). If there is no new winning combination (S321: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when there is a new winning combination (S321: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning combination is the winning of the first special symbol (S322).

  In the process of S322, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table and the special symbol 1 small hit selection table The lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hitting type are acquired (S323), and the process proceeds to S325.

  On the other hand, in the process of S322, if it is determined that the winning is the second special symbol (S322: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table and the special symbol 2 small hit selection table Based on the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hitting type are acquired (S324), and the process proceeds to S325. In the process of S325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the process of S323 or S324 described above is set ( S325). Then, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83, the open time of the motorized role piece 640a, etc. It is a process to control.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S401). The middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) includes the display in which the second symbol display device 83 shows a hit and the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is in the middle of the hit (S401: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S402: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S403). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S404), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S404: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S404: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S405).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S406). In the process of S406, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S407).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-middle counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S408). The hour-time counter 203g indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-period counter 203g is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more (S408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S409). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S409: Yes), the process proceeds to S411.

  In the process of S409, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S409: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the normal symbol random number table for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S410). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 8 (b)).

  In the process of S408, when the value of the time saving / storing counter 203g is 0 (S408: No), the process proceeds to S411. In the process of S411, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S407 Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S411). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 8 (b)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S410 or S411 is the hit of the normal symbol (S412), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S412: Yes) , The hit display mode is set (S413). In the process of S413, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the hour and hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S414). If the value of the hour and hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S414: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S415). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 415: Yes), the process proceeds to S 417.

  In the process of S415, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S415: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. The open period is set to 1 second, and the open frequency is set to 2 (S416), and the process proceeds to S419. In the process of S414, when the value of the time-span-middle counter 203g is 0 (S414: No), the process proceeds to S417. In the process of S417, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, while setting the open period of the motorized accessory 640a to 0.2 seconds, The number of times of release is set to 1 (S417), and the process proceeds to S419.

  In the process of S412, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S412: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S418). In the process of S418, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S419.

  In the process of S419, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S419), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S419: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S420), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 0 (S419: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S421), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the open period of the motorized accessory 640a becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. To do (S422). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S420 or the processing of S421.

  In the process of S422, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S422: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S422, if the fluctuation time of the currently displayed fluctuation display has elapsed (S422: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S423). In the process of S423, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S413, the "o" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S418, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) in the second symbol display device 83. Are set to When the stop display is set by the process of S423, the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S413 or S418.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S424). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S424: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role object 640a is set (S425), and this processing is ended. When start of the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S425, then, when the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) is executed, The opening and closing control is started, and the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S416 or S417 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S424 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S424: No), the process of S425 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 269, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. This through gate passage processing determines presence or absence of passage of the ball in this normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, and when there is passage of the ball, acquires and holds the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 It is a process for

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S431). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S432). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S433).

  Whether the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S 431: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203 f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S433: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S433: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f The value (M) of is added 1 (S434). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 Is stored in the area (S435), and the process ends.

  In addition, when the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the first area of the vacant reserved areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and the value is If it is 0, the pending first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the V inlet passage processing (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

  In the V inlet passing process (S108), it is first determined whether the first staying sensor 622f is on (S501), and if it is not on (S501: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first staying sensor 622f is on (S501: Yes), next, during the V winning opening opening period, ie, the first round of the jackpot game in which the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type It is determined based on whether the set scenario is the hit scenario a202aa2 or not (S502). In the process of S502, when it is determined that the V winning opening opening period is in progress (S502: Yes), the V entrance passing command is set (S503), and the process is ended. If it is not in the small hit (S502: No), it is a case that the game ball enters the V prize device 620 despite not being a small hit game, so an error command is set (S504), and this processing is finish.

  The V entrance pass command set in the process of S503 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the V entrance passage command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the game balls passed through the V entrance and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. In this way, it is possible to execute an effect in a small hit game based on entering the ball into the V prize device 620.

  Next, the V passage process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the V passage process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

  When the V passing process (S109) is executed, it is first determined whether there is a V passing, that is, whether or not the gaming ball has won in the V prize opening 624 (S601), and if it is determined that a winning is achieved (S601: Yes Then, it is determined whether the present time is during the V effective period (S602). In the process of S602, when the value of the scenario counter 203aa for counting the progress of the scenario (per scenario b222aa3) set in the small hitting game or the big hit type B is “1” to “501”, It is determined that the V-effective period is in progress, and otherwise it is determined that the V-effective period is not in progress.

  In the process of S602, if it is determined that the V-effective period is in progress (S602: Yes), it is next determined whether a small hit game is currently in progress (S603), and a small hit game is in progress (S603) : Yes), the V passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small hitting type of this small hitting game is acquired (S 604), the V flag corresponding to the big hitting type is set to ON (S 605), and the hour counter is 0 (S606), and the process proceeds to the process of S607.

  That is, in the processing of S604 to S606, processing for executing the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball has won the V winning opening 624 during the small hitting game. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S603 that there is no small hit game being played (a big hit game corresponding to a big hit type B) (S603: No), it is necessary to newly perform a process for executing a big hit game. Because there is not, the process of S604 to S606 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S607.

  In the process of S 607, a V passage command is set (S 607), and this process ends. The V-passing command set here is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. If the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V pass command, for example, if the V pass command is received during the small hit game, the V challenge executed during the small hit game is successful, and the small hit game is continued. , Perform the effect to show that the jackpot game is executed. In addition, when the V passing command is received during the big hit game, the same effect as when the V passing command is received during the small hit game is executed.

  On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received at a predetermined timing during a small hit game, a disappointing effect is executed to indicate that the V challenge has failed, and the V passing command is received at a predetermined timing during the big hit game If not, the rebirth effect from the disappointing effect is executed, and the player is informed that the jackpot game will be executed continuously.

  In the present embodiment, only the command (V passing command) for indicating that the gaming ball has won is shown in the V winning opening 624, but the gaming ball has not won in the V winning opening 624. It may be configured to set a command (for example, V non-passing command) for indicating that. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, only the game balls (for example, one) held by the second holding member 622b can enter the V winning opening 624, so the second holding member 622b Number counting means for measuring the number of game balls staying by the game, and the game balls flowed down from the rotary distribution member 621 through the left discharge path 623a and the right discharge path 623b (see FIG. 229) through which the game balls can flow The V non-passing command may be set when the detecting means detects the number of gaming balls measured by the number measuring means. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform appropriate rendering, and can enhance rendering effects. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game ball is clogged in the V prize device 620.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S602 that the present time is not during the V effective period (S602: No), an error command is set (S607), and this process is ended. By performing the process of S607, the game ball is in a state of winning the V winning opening 624 outside the V effective period, that is, when a game is performed to win the game ball into the V winning opening 624 illegally, or V winning It is possible to quickly notify the outside of a case where a failure of a member (for example, the second staying member 622b) attached to the port 624 occurs.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the contents of the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S801). That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the main control unit 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), it becomes the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) A payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111 (S912). On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Because there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutoff did not end normally, in this case as well, the payout initialization is performed to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) Send a command (S912).

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. A payout initialization command is sent (S912). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process is executed. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.), the RAM 203 is similarly initialized (S914). In the RAM initialization process, the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on and the occurrence information of the power-off is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S907: Yes), backup to RAM 203 is made. While holding the data, clear the power-off occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is sent to restore the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of the drive power-off (S909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Then, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S 910), and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects (S 911). Then, the interruption is permitted and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up processing will be described. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 274), first, while the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. The voice lamp control device also performs various commands set in special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 263), start winning processing (see FIG. 266), V entrance passing processing (see FIG. 270), and V passing processing (see FIG. 271). Send to 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the opening command, round number command, ending command set in the big hit control process (see FIG. 275) and various commands set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 278) described later. . In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 274), but may be performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

  Next, small hitting control processing (S1005) is executed. The small hitting control process (S1005) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the motor-operated article opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motor-operated article 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 (S1006). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S425 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S416 or the process of S417 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S236, the process of S240 or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the variation display according to the variation pattern is The first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the first variation time period corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S236, the process of S240, or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264) is completed. In the display mode set by the processing of S235, S239, S241 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the variation symbols being executed in the one symbol display device 37a, 37b are ended, the stop symbol (first symbol) ) Is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S420 or the processing of S421 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 268), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device . As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S423 of the normal symbol change processing (see FIG. 268), the variation executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S413 or the process of S418 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 268). ).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1010: No), during the time to the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main processing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011, S1012).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113) And transmit (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  In addition, the processing of S1009 is the timing when the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can start from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, the stack pointer has a predetermined value (in the initialization process) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By being set to the initial value, it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the variable winning device 65 Is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) or the process of S1406 of the small hitting ending control process (see FIG. 279) described later is executed to determine whether the big hit scenario is set. Do. That is, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a big hit, and the big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result or the big hit scenario is based on having passed the specific area (V winning opening 624) during the small hit game. Determine if it has been set. When it is determined in the process of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF, and then the set scenario is for Jackpot B. It is determined whether or not (S1102).

  When it is determined in the process of S1102 that the jackpot scenario of the jackpot B is set (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether the specific control completion flag 203ab is on (S1117).

  If it is determined in the process of S1117 that the specific control completion flag 203ab is off (S1117: No), the process of the specific jackpot control process (S1118) is executed, and the jackpot control process is ended. The process of the specific jackpot control process (S1118) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a big hit scenario other than the big hit B is set in the process of S1102 (S1102: No), or if it is determined that the specific control completion flag 233ab is on in the process of S1117 (S1117: Yes) adds 1 to the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa (S1103), and determines whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the opening start timing of the big hit scenario (S1104). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 1 Determine.

  If it is determined in the process of S1104 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the opening start (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1104: Yes), the jackpot opening command The setting is made (S1105), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the opening start (S1104: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the round start (in the case of the jackpot scenario a) It is determined whether the counter value is 1251) (S1106).

  When it is determined in the process of S1106 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in the process of S1107 (specific winning The specific winning opening solenoid is set on so that the open / close door 65b of the opening 65a is opened), and then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1108), and the present process is ended.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not the value corresponding to the start of the round (S1106: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied. (S1109). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a in the present embodiment, when 29 seconds have passed since the specific winning opening 65a was opened, or after the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls ( For example, when 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1109, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1109: Yes), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a counter value corresponding to the end of the round currently being executed. The value is updated to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from (S1110), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to be determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control process from the next time onwards. .

  Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the scenario counter 203 aa and to execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied by a predetermined number (for example, 10) balls being won in the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the specific winning opening 65a is closed due to a factor not accompanied by the passage of time (update of the counter value). In this case, the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is configured to be updated to the value immediately before the counter value for which the corresponding operation control is performed (the operation control is performed in the next big hit control process) And so on).

  By doing this, operation control (for example, operation control for closing a specific winning opening due to a predetermined number of winning balls) is used as a jackpot scenario due to factors that do not accompany time lapse (counter value update) It becomes possible to carry out based on. Therefore, operation control is performed based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has elapsed as a closing condition of the specified winning opening (first specified winning opening) 65a, and when there is a predetermined number of winnings, it is not based on the jackpot scenario. There is an effect that it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as performing operation control, and it is possible to facilitate design and prevent a situation where both operation controls are mixed.

  If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S1109: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the value corresponding to the end of the round (if it is jackpot scenario a For example, it is determined whether the counter value is 8750) (S1111).

  If it is determined in the process of S1111 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1111: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S1112 (specific winning The specific winning a prize opening solenoid 65f2 is set to OFF so that the open / close door 65b of the mouth 65a is closed), and the process is ended. In addition, the discrimination | determination process to S1106-S1 111 mentioned above is repeatedly performed for the number of rounds of the big hit set to the big hit scenario.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1111 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not the value corresponding to the round end (S1111: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the value corresponding to the interval start (big hit If the scenario is a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1113). When it is determined in the process of S1113 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the interval start (S1113: Yes), an interval command is set (S1114), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1113 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the interval start (S1113: No), then the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a processing performed during an ending period in jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the last round of jackpot game to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. .

  The contents of the jackpot ending control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is finished, next, an operation process based on other scenarios is executed (S1116), and this process is ended. Here, as the process of S1116, for example, when drive control of the V distribution motor 620a for driving the rotation distribution member 621 is performed based on the big hit scenario, the operation process of the motor is executed.

  Next, the specific jackpot control process (S1118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing this specific jackpot control process (S1118). The specific jackpot control process (S1118) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and is a process executed when the jackpot type B is set as the jackpot type.

  In the specific jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the set scenario is the hit scenario a (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that there is a setting of the hit scenario a (S1201: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1202), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after addition is It executes (S1203).

  Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1204). If it is determined in the process of S1204 that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1204: No), the process returns to the jackpot control process as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1204 that the end timing of the hit scenario a is reached (S1204: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1205), and the value is retained in the second retention member 622b. It is determined whether there is a playing ball (staying ball) (S1206).

  If it is determined in the process of S1206 that there is a staying ball in the first staying member 622d, a hit scenario b is set (S1207), and the process moves to the process of S1209. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no staying ball in the first staying member 622d, the hit scenario c is set (S1208), and the process proceeds to the process of S1209. As a result, at the end timing of the hit scenario a, the type of hit scenario to be set thereafter can be made different depending on whether or not there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b.

  In the process of S1209, an operation according to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1209), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1210).

  In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the per scenario b or c (S1210: Yes), the jackpot scenario b is set (S1211), and the specific control completion flag 233ab is set on ( S1212), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1210 that the end timing of the hit scenario b or c is not reached (S1210: No), the processes of S1211 and S1212 are skipped, and the process is ended.

  When it is determined in the process of S1201 that there is no setting of the hit scenario a (S1201: No), it is then determined whether or not there is the setting of the hit scenario b or c (S1213). If it is determined in the process of S1213 that there is a setting of the hit scenario b or c (S1213: Yes), the process proceeds to S1209. Thereby, when the winning scenario a is set, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is executed, and when the hitting scenario b or c is set thereafter, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is skipped and the processing of S1209 is performed. The following can be performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1213 that neither of the hit scenarios b and c is set (S1213: No), the process is ended as it is.

  Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending control process (S1115). The jackpot ending control process (S1115) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275).

  In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of ending (in the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 40751) (S1301). When it is determined in the process of S1301 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of ending (S1301: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1302), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not the value corresponding to the ending start (S1301: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the value corresponding to the ending end (in the case of the jackpot scenario a It is determined whether the counter value is 42000) (S1303). When it is determined in the process of S1303 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the ending of the ending (S1303: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1303 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending end (S1303: Yes), the setting of the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1304), and then the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1305). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended.

  Next, the big hit flag 203i is set to off (S1306), and the specific control completion flag 203ab is set to off (S1307). Then, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1308), the jackpot end command is set (S1309), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the small hitting control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the small hitting control process (S1005). This small hitting control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (refer to FIG. 274), and the setting of the command for causing the voice lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small hitting, It is a process for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600 attached to the mouth 600a and the flow passage solenoid 209b. In the present embodiment, the scenario set in the small hit game is the same as the specific jackpot control process (S1118) described above with reference to FIG. 276, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether a hit scenario a is set (S1401). In the process of S1401, when it is determined that there is a setting of the hit scenario a (S1401: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1402), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after addition is It carries out (S1403).

  Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1404). When it is determined in the process of S1404 that it is not the end timing of the hit scenario a (S1404: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1404 that the end timing of the hit scenario a is reached (S1404: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1405), and the value is retained in the second retention member 622b. It is determined whether there is a playing ball (staying ball) (S1406).

  In the process of S1406, if it is determined that there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b, the hit scenario b is set (S1407), and the process moves to the process of S1409. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no staying ball in the second staying member 622b, the hit scenario c is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to the process of S1409. Thereby, at the end timing of the hit scenario a, it is possible to set an effect according to whether or not there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b.

  In the process of S1409, an operation according to the value of the scenario counter 203aa is executed (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the hit scenario b or c (S1410).

  If it is determined in the process of S1410 that the end timing of the hit scenario b or c is reached (S1410: Yes), the small hitting ending control process is executed (S1411), and the process ends. Details of the small hitting ending control process (S1411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1410 that the end timing of the hit scenario b or c is not reached (S1410: No), the process of S1411 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  When it is determined in the process of S1401 that there is no setting of the hit scenario a (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not there is the setting of the hit scenario b or c (S1412). If it is determined in the process of S1412 that there is a setting of the hit scenario b or c (S1412: Yes), the process proceeds to S1409. As a result, when hit scenario a is set, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is executed, and when hit scenario b or c is set thereafter, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is skipped and the processing of S1409 is performed. The following can be performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1412 that neither of the hit scenarios b and c is set (S1412: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  Next, the small hitting ending control process (S1411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing this small hitting end control process (S1411). The small hitting end control process (S1411) is a process executed in the small hitting control process (see FIG. 278).

  In the small hitting ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending start (the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 751) (S1501). When it is determined in the process of S1501 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of ending (S1501: Yes), a small hitting end command is set (S1502), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the ending start (S1501: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending end (if the scenario counter 203aa) It is determined whether the counter value is 1500) (S1503). If it is determined in the process of S1503 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is not a value corresponding to the ending of the ending (S1503: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the ending (S1503: Yes), the small hitting scenario setting is cleared and the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1504). Then, the process proceeds to step S1505.

  In S1505, it is determined whether the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505). If it is determined in the process of S1505 that the V flag 203n is not set to ON (S1505: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203n set in S705 of FIG. It sets (S1506). Then, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit flag 203i are set to ON (S1507), the V flag 203n is set to OFF (S1508), and this processing ends.

  In addition, in this embodiment, since small hit games are all set as one round games, unlike the big hit scenario which performs operation control of the big hit game, the process which sets the command regarding the number of rounds, and the interval period (round In the case of providing a small hit game having a plurality of rounds without providing a scenario corresponding to the interval period), a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-described big hit game may be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the small hitting scenario is set for the period in which the small hitting game is executed, for example, until the predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the small hitting game ends. You may set a small hit scenario for the target. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set a V-passing valid period until 1 second has elapsed after the small hitting game is over. Therefore, it becomes possible to set the period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and it is possible to reduce the volume of control processing.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 624 in a small hit game, a big hit game corresponding to a large hit type set in advance corresponding to the small hit is executed. Although configured, the present invention is not limited thereto, and it may be configured to obtain the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the gaming ball by the V winning opening 624 and to determine the jackpot type.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Controller 113 in the A1 Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 285. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, referring to FIG. 280, the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 280 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S2018 is performed (see FIG. 281) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1402). As described later with reference to FIG. 281, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S2015 in FIG. 281), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2018. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S2018 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1402: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1514 It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1516 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1402: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S2018, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in this case, the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1406). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S2017 of FIG. 281). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2018 is performed, the process of S1408 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S2018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1409), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410). The permission is set (S1411), and the process shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1408 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1404 through S1406 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410). Then (S1411), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1409 is that, when the process of S1408 is reached via the processes of S1404 to S1406, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the process of S2001 this time is executed (S2001), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S2001: No), the processing proceeds to S2013 without performing the processing of S2002 to S2012. In the process of S2001, the process of determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (rendering) in S2002 to S2012, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S2014, and the command determination process of S2013 in a short cycle. Execution of the process of S2013 in a short cycle can prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the process of S2014 is executed in a short cycle, so that the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2001 (S2001: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S2003 to S2012 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S2002) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2008 described later (S2003), and then the power on notification process is executed (S2004). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, notification by power on notification processing is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S2005.

  In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S2007). Although this frame button input monitoring and effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285, the frame button 22 monitors an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed to enhance the effect. It is a process set so as to produce an effect corresponding to the case where the input of is confirmed. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 285.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2008), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2009, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S2008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S2009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the various counter updating process of S2011, the various counters used in the control process of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are updated. In the effect update process of S2012, an update process such as effect is executed.

  After the effect update process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S2013). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S2014. In the process of S2014, the variable display setting process is executed (S2014). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variation display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S2017), and the power-off process is executed (S2018). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S2019), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not (S2016), the RAM 223 is destroyed If not (S2016: No), the processing returns to S2001, and the main processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2016: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 282, a command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, in this process, when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process (FIG. 280, S2013), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control unit 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the main control unit 110 It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2101). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2102), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S2103), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2101: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2104). When the stop type command is received (S2104: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2105), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2106). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S2104: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2107). And when the holding ball number command is received (S2107: Yes), the first special symbol and the second special symbol holding ball number are extracted from the received holding ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 holding ball is extracted. The number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c are stored respectively. In addition, when the processing of S2108 is executed, the display ball holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2107, when the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S2107: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2109). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2109: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2110). Thereafter, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2109 that no winning information command has been received (S2109: No), it is determined whether a win-related command related to a big hit, a small hit, etc. has been received (S2111). If it is determined that a hit-related command has been received (S2111: Yes), a hit-related process is executed (S2112). The hit-related process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 283. However, a process based on each command output from main controller 110 at a large hit or a small hit is executed. Thereafter, this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2111 that a hit-related command has not been received (S2111: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and a process according to the received command is executed. Then (S2115), the processing returns to the main processing. If the other command is a command used in the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed control device 114 The command is set to be sent to the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the hit-related processing (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing (S2112). The hit related processing (S2112) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 282) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the hit-related process (S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S2201). When the jackpot start command is received, the display jackpot start command is set (S2202). Although omitted, also in the voice lamp control device 113, when the jackpot start command is received, processing required for the start of jackpots of various lamps, voices, etc. is executed. Thereafter, this process ends.

  If it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2203). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2203: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number indicated by the received command (S2204). Thereafter, this process ends.

  If it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the big hit end command has been received (S2205). If it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S2205: Yes), a display jackpot end command indicating that it is the jackpot end timing is set (S2206). Thereafter, this process ends.

  When it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S2205: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S2207). If it is determined that the small hitting start command has been received (S2207: Yes), a small hitting display start command indicating that it is the start timing of the small hitting game is set (S2208). Thereafter, this process ends.

  If it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that the small hitting end command has been received (S2209: Yes), a small hitting display end command indicating that it is the small hitting game ending timing is set (S2210). Thereafter, this process ends.

  If it is determined that the small hitting end command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether the V entrance passing command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that the V inlet passage command is received (S2211: Yes), a display V inlet passage command indicating that the first staying sensor is on is set (S2212). Thereafter, this process ends. The fact that the first staying sensor is on indicates that the gaming ball has entered the V-enter ball 600a.

  If it is determined that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether the V passage command has been received (S2213). When it is determined that the V passage command has been received (S2213: Yes), the game ball passes through the V prize opening 624 and the V effect (effect of displaying characters such as "V" on the third symbol display device 81) A display V effect command indicating that it is time to execute the command is set (S2214). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the variation display setting process (S 2014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2014). This variation display setting process (S2014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2221). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S2221: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S2226. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2221: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2222), and then the fluctuation pattern in the process of S2003 of the command determination process (see FIG. 282). The fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2223).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2224). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  In the process of S2225, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2225). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2225: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2225: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2226), and then in the process of S2006 in the command determination process (see FIG. 282) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2227). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2228), and the process shifts to the processing of S2229. In the process of S2229, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2229). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S2007) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S2007). This frame button input monitoring and effect process (S2007) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the effect is enhanced in the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the effect according to the operation of the player, the display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22.

  In the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (FIG. 285, S2007), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW effective time (SW effective time counter 223g> 0) is set (S2301) . As for the SW effective time, as shown in FIG. 235, the SW effective time automatically corresponds to the SW effective time corresponding to the timing when the effect of the fluctuation pattern using the frame button 22 is selected. It is set. If it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S2301: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223g is updated by subtracting the value corresponding to the elapsed time (S2302). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed (S2303; Yes), a display chance eye command is set based on the set fluctuation pattern and the pressing timing. By this display chance eye command, re-variation (see FIG. 235) is executed in the third symbol display device 81, and an effect that temporary stop display of sway variation is executed again without being re-varied is executed. The SW valid time counter 223g is reset (set to 0) (S2305). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is 0 in the process of S2301 (S2301: No), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S2303 (S2303: No ), The processing of S2306 is executed. In the processing of S2306, processing (background change etc.) related to other SW effects is executed.

<About Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device in First Control Processing Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 296. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 286, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 286 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S3001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S3001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory 234a is slow particularly when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S3101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S3102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S3102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S3103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S3104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S3001 in FIG. 286). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) (S3105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S3001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 287, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S3102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S3103 to S3105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S3101. The processing of S3103 to S3105 may be executed after the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S3102.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S3103 to S3105 without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 286. When the boot process is ended, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process (S3002), after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is displayed on the entire screen so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instructs execution of image drawing and display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S3003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S3004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S3004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S3005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video in the transfer setting process (see S3305 in FIG. 288 (b)). The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer data to the RAM 235 is executed.

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)), the simplified command determination process (see FIG. 288) is performed so that the power-on main image or the power-on fluctuation image is drawn. 288 (b) (see S3308) and the simplified display setting process (see S3309 in FIG. 288 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is from the main control unit 110 by the voice lamp control device When the display change pattern command is received via the display 113, the power-on change image can be displayed immediately during the change presentation period, and simple change presentation can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S3005, the interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 288 (a), a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 288 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 288 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 288 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 261) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 288 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern but the power-on image. A command determination process (S3302) is performed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S3303) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S3302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296.

  In the display setting process (S3303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3302) etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process are the same as the display setting process (see FIGS. 167 to 168) of the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  After the display setting process (S3303) is executed, task processing is then executed (S3304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S3303) or the simple display setting processing (S3309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process are the same as the transfer setting process (see FIGS. 170 and 171) of the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S3306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S3304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 261 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process are the same as the drawing process (see FIG. 172) of the first control example, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S3307, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process (S3302), when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A to D, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) , And the stop type table corresponding to the chance eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S3308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S3309) is executed to shift to the process of S3304.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S3302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 289, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S3401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S3403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S3404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S3405), the process returns to the process of S3401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (a). FIG. 290 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 3501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S 3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3501 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3503). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3503. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3504), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3506), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S3505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S350. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S3504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. If it is determined in the process of S3404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S3406), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S3406: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S3407), and the process returns to S3401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S3407) will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (b). FIG. 290 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A to D, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command The symbol type is determined (S3601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 288 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device 81 Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the screen is set (S3602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S3603), and ends this type-of-stop command processing and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S3602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S3304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the process of S3602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. If it is determined in the process of S3406 that there is no display type command for suspension (S3406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear surface image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3408). If there is an image change command (S3408: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S3409), and the process returns to S3401.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 291 (a). FIG. 291 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set to on ( S3701). Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S3702), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3701 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3702. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in the task processing (S3304), when it is defined that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3702 Then, the rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. If it is determined in the process of S3408 that there is no rear image change command (S3408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S3410). For example (S3410: Yes), an error command process is executed (S3411), and the process returns to S3401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S3411) will be described with reference to FIG. 291 (b). FIG. 291 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S 3802). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3802, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3802, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. If it is determined in the process of S3410 that there is no error command (S3410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit related command among the unprocessed commands (S3412). For example (S3412: Yes), the hit related command process is executed (S3413), and the process returns to S3401.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the details of the hit related command processing (S3413) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the hit related command processing.

  In this hit related command processing, as shown in FIG. 292, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command among the hit related commands (S3901), and if there is a display jackpot start command (S3901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S3902), and the process proceeds to S3903.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command processing (S3902) will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (a). FIG. 293 (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing. The jackpot start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot start command processing, first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the received display jackpot start command is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3921). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table set in S3921 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3922).

  Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3921, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3923), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3924). Then, the demonstration display flag and the determination display flag are both set to OFF (S3925), the jackpot start command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the jackpot start command processing, in the display setting processing, the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3921 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3924. The drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the second symbol display device 81, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer is processed by the processing of S3922. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in 233e, and the image data of the sprite necessary in the set jackpot start display data table is the character ROM 234 in advance As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  When the jackpot start command processing is executed, the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thus, while the jackpot start effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (big hit start effect, round effect, big hit end effect) due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time before the image data used for rendering is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in time with the end of the jackpot start effect in the third symbol display device 81, so the first round If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the command for the number of display rounds has been received, there are a lot of times from the end of the jackpot start effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or uneasy as to whether the operation has stopped.

  In addition, since the display jackpot end command instructing start of the jackpot end effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 end, the display jackpot If image data required for big hit end effect is transferred from character ROM 234 to video RAM 236 for normal use after receiving the end command, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the big hit end effect As a result, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display jackpot start command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is started from there, and the fluctuation display of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. It controls so that transfer of data required for a round production and a big hit end production is completed by the time. Thereby, when the jackpot start effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the round effect is completely finished in the third symbol display device 81, the big hit end effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player may not feel the operation is stopped, There is no sense of discomfort. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of image data used in the big hit end effect is started from there. The transfer of the image data to be used in the jackpot start effect is controlled to end before the third jackpot display device 81 ends the jackpot variation effect. As a result, since the big hit start effect can be started in the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the variation effect that becomes the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, the player is asked whether the operation has stopped. There is no anxiety or discomfort. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S3901 that there is no jackpot start command for display (S3901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a round command for display among the hit related commands (S3903), and display If there is a command for the number of rounds (S3903: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3906.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S3904) will be described with reference to FIG. 293 (b). FIG. 293 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S3931). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3932).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3931, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3934). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3935), the round number command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S3903, when it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3903: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display big hit end command among the hit related commands (S3905), display If there is a jackpot end command for use (S3905: Yes), the jackpot end command processing is executed (S3906), and the process shifts to the processing of S3907.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S3906) will be described with reference to FIG. 294 (a). FIG. 294 (a) is a flowchart showing jackpot end command processing. The jackpot end command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display jackpot end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot end command processing, first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot end effect indicated by the display jackpot end command is determined, and the determined jackpot end display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the display data table buffer 233d is set (S3941). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3942). The jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 may be distinguishable. Specifically, the data table determination flag corresponding to the big hit end display data table set by the process of S3941 is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other big hit end display data tables is set to off. Thus, by referring to the data table determination flag, the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing such as the display setting process corresponds to the display mode of which jackpot end effect It can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3941, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3943), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3944). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3945), the jackpot end command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S3905 that there is no display big hit end command (S3905: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command among the hit related commands (S3907), If there is the small hitting start command for display (S3907: Yes), the small hitting start command processing is executed (S3908), and thereafter, the process shifts to the processing of S3909.

  Here, the details of the small hitting start command process (S3908) will be described with reference to FIG. 294 (b). FIG. 294 (b) is a flowchart showing small hitting start command processing. This small hitting start command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the small hitting display start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the small hit start command process, first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received small hit start command for display is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3951). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hit start display data table set in S3951 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3952).

  Then, based on the small hit start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3951, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3954). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3955), the small hitting start command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By the small hitting start command processing being executed, in the display setting processing, the small hitting start indication set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3951 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S3954 The drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the data table, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data is processed by the process of S3952. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table buffer 233e, and the image data of the sprite necessary in the set small hit start display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234. Or As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Also, when the small hitting start command processing is executed, the small hitting start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Thus, while the small hit start effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to transfer the image data necessary for the round effect and the small hit end effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the small hitting effect (small hitting start effect, round effect, small hit) is caused due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time before the image data used for rendering in the end effect) is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the small hitting start effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the command for the number of display rounds indicating that the small hit start effect is over and the round effect is started There is a risk that a lot of waiting time will occur, causing the player to feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether the operation has stopped.

  In addition, the display small hitting end command instructing the start of the small hitting end effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 end, so the display If the image data required for the small hit end effect has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the small hit end command for the small hit is received, the round effect ends until the small hit end effect starts There is a risk that a lot of waiting time will occur, causing the player to feel uneasy or uncomfortable as to whether the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the small hitting start command for display is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the small hitting end effect is started from there, and the small symbol fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 It is controlled so that transfer of data required for a round production and a small hitting end production is completed by the end of. Thereby, when the small hit start effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects are finished in the third symbol display device 81 In this case, since the small hit end effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of image data used in the small hit end effect is started from there. The control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the small hitting start effect is finished until the variation effect which becomes the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. As a result, when the variation effect to be a small hit is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the small hit start effect can be started on the third symbol display device 81 immediately, so the operation is not stopped for the player There is no such thing as anxiety or discomfort. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S3907 that there is no small win for display start command (S3907: No), next, whether or not there is a small win for display small display command among the win related commands is determined (S3909) If there is a small hitting end command for display (S3909: Yes), the small hitting end command processing is executed (S3910), and then the process proceeds to the processing of S3911.

  Here, the details of the small hitting end command process (S3910) will be described with reference to FIG. 295 (a). FIG. 295 (a) is a flowchart showing small hitting end command processing. This small hitting end command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display small hitting end command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the small hitting end command processing, first, a small hitting end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the small hitting end effect indicated by the small hitting display end command is determined, and the decided small hitting end display data table is a data table. It is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3961). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3962). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each small hit end display data table corresponding to the display format of each small hit end effect, the data table determination corresponding to the small hit end display data table set by the process of S3961 The flag is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other small hit end display data table is set to off. In the display setting process, the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of the small hit end effect set by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703. It can be easily determined whether it is a thing.

  Next, based on the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3961, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3963), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3964). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3965), the small hitting end command is ended, and the process returns to the winning related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S3909, if it is determined that there is no display small hit end command (S3909: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passing command among the hit related commands (S3911) If there is a display V inlet passage command (S3911: Yes), the V inlet passage command processing is executed (S3912), and then the process proceeds to S3913.

  Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S3912) will be described with reference to FIG. 295 (b). FIG. 295 (b) is a flowchart showing V inlet passage command processing. The V entrance pass command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V entrance pass command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V entrance passage command processing, first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect indicated by the display V entrance passage command is determined, and the determined V entrance passage display data table is used as a data table. It is read from the storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3971). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3972). The display mode of the V entrance passing effect may be determined. Specifically, a data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect is provided, and the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the V entrance passage display data table set by the process of S3971 is turned on, and the other V The data table determination flag corresponding to the entrance passage display data table is set to off. Thereby, the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing such as the display setting process is referred to which V entrance passage end effect by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703. It can be easily judged whether it corresponds to the display mode of.

  Next, based on the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3971, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3973), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3974). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to off (S3975), the V entrance passing command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S3911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passing command (S3911: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display V effect command in the hit related commands (S3913), If there is a display V effect command (S3913: Yes), V effect command processing is executed (S3914), and then the hit related command processing is ended.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S3914) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing V-effect command processing. The V effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display V effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the V effect command processing, first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of V effect indicated by the V effect command for display is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , And is set in the display data table buffer 233 d (S 3981). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 3982).

  Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d by the process of S 3981, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233 h (S 3983), and the pointer 233 f is initialized to 0. (S3984). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3985), the V effect command is ended, and the process returns to the hit related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. If it is determined in the process of S3412 that there is no hit related command (S3412: No), it is then determined whether there is a display chance eye command (S3414), and if there is a display chance eye command (S3414) (Yes), the chance eye command processing is executed (S3415), and the process returns to the process of S3401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 291 (c), the details of the chance eye command processing (S3415) will be described. FIG. 291 (c) is a flowchart showing chance eye command processing. The chance eye command processing is to execute a process corresponding to the display chance eye command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the chance eye command processing, first, the chance eye display data table corresponding to the display manner of the chance eye shown by the chance eye command for display is determined, and the determined chance eye display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. , And the display data table buffer 233d (S3851). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3852).

  Next, based on the chance display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3851, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3853), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3854). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3855), the chance eye command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 289. If it is determined in the process of S3414 that there is no chance command (S3414: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S3416), and the process returns to S3401.

  In the process of S3401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes ), The processing of S3402 to S3416 is executed again. Then, the processes of S3401 to S3416 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S3401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S3308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288 (b)), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 290 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 290 (b)) which are processes corresponding to the respective commands are executed. With regard to the command of, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 290A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in the processing of S3501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image, which are set and necessary in that case, are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, in the process of S3502, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

Embodiment A2
Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment will be described. FIG. 297 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 297, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A2 embodiment is a right area of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as the right hitting area) as compared with the above-described A1 embodiment. They differ in that they differ in their configuration. Specifically, among the gaming balls that are provided with the sorting device B700 in the right-handed area and flow down the right-handed area, the gaming balls that flowed down the first flow path B701a into the sorting device B700 are divided into two flow paths ( It has the structure for allocating to 2nd flow path B701 b and 3rd flow path B 701 c).

  Next, a sorting apparatus B700 provided in the right-handed area of the game board 13 of the present A2 embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299.

  FIG. 298 is a schematic view enlarging the right hitting area of the game board 13. The ball which has been fired to the right-handed area and flowed down the first flow passage B 701 a passes through the distribution device B 700 and is distributed to the second flow passage B 701 b or the third flow passage B 701 c. The detailed configuration of the distribution device B700 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 described later, but the balls having flowed down the first flow passage B 701 a are divided into three in the second flow passage B 701 b and the third flow passage B 701 c: It is configured to be distributed at a ratio of one. By configuring in this manner, it is necessary to fire a plurality of game balls in order to ensure that the game ball is entered into the V ball entrance 600 a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open. It is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is fired at a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game. In addition, since at least four of the balls that have flowed into the distribution apparatus B700 can cause one ball to flow down the third flow path 701c, in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously fired. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball can not be entered into the V ball entrance 600 a during the period when the V prize door 600 is open.

  The second flow passage B 701 b is configured to allow the flowed down ball to flow down to a region where the through gate 67 can pass, and the third flow passage B 701 c allows the flowed down ball to enter the V inlet 600 a When the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out of the second flow passage B 701 b passes through the V winning door 600 in the open state, and is in the V inlet 600 a. Flow in (enter). On the other hand, when the V winning door 600 is closed, it is configured to flow down to an area through which the through gate 67 can pass.

  In the present embodiment, when the V winning door 600 is open, the ball that has flowed out of the third flow path B 701 c is always configured to enter the V inlet 600 a, but other than that For example, a distribution member (nail, distribution device, etc.) for distributing the flow-down direction of the ball may be provided between the outlet of the third flow path B 701 c and the V winning door 600. When V is open, only a part of the sphere that has flowed out of the third flow path B 701 c may enter the V inlet 600 a.

  By configuring in this manner, among the gaming balls regularly distributed by the sorting apparatus B 700 (ratio of 3: 1), irregularly generating the gaming balls flowing into the V-ball inlet 600a. In order to cause the game ball to enter the V ball entrance 600a while the V winning door 600 is open, the game ball can be fired more continuously.

  Next, the structure of the distribution device B 700 for distributing the inflowing ball into two flow paths will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 (a) to (d). FIGS. 299 (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the configuration of the distribution device B700, and FIGS. 114 (c) and (d) are the spherical flow and distribution of the first channel B 701a. It is the model which showed the relationship with apparatus B700 typically.

  As shown in FIG. 299 (a), the sorting device B 700 is a rotating body configured to be pivotable about an axial center, and in four directions (four directions at intervals of 90 degrees) of the rotating body. The blade member (1st blade member B700a, 2nd blade member B700b) which can contact | abut on a ball | bowl is provided. The first blade member B700a has a flat shape so that the ball having flowed down to the distribution device B700 flows down to the third flow path B701c (to flow down to the side of the rotating body of the distribution device B700) The second blade member B 700 b is such that the ball having flowed down to the distribution device 700 flows down to the second flow path B 701 b (so as to flow downward to the lower side of the rotating body of the distribution device B 700) It is comprised by the shape of a plane plate shape.

  In the present embodiment, as the distributor B700, a rotating body having one first blade member B700a and three second blade members B700b is used, so the number of balls and the third flow to be distributed to the second flow passage B701b are used. The number of balls distributed to the road B 701c is configured to be 3: 1. Furthermore, a metal piece B700c is embedded in the side surface of the rotating body of the distribution device B700, and it can be determined whether a rotating body is rotating or not by a detection sensor (not shown). In this way, the act of modifying the distribution device B700 improperly and causing the spheres flowing into the flow path unit B720 to flow down only to one flow path (the second flow path B701b or the third flow path B701c) is performed. Can be easily determined.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 299 (c) and (d), the arrangement relationship between the first flow path B 701a and the distribution device B 700 will be described. FIG. 299 (c) is a schematic view showing a state in which the second blade member B 700b is located in the flow path. In this state, when the ball flows down the first flow passage B 701 a, the ball abuts on the second blade member B 700 b and is distributed to the third flow passage B 701 c. Then, the second blade member B700b in contact with the ball rotates 90 degrees (downwardly 90 degrees) along the flowing direction of the ball (downward direction in FIG. 299 (c)), and the first blade member B700a It will be located inside.

  When two spheres pass through the sorting device B 700 from the state shown in FIG. 299 (c), transition to the state shown in FIG. 299 (d) (state where the first blade member B 700a is positioned in the flow path) Do.

  As described above, by bringing the ball flowing down the distribution device B 700 into contact with the blade members provided on the rotating body, the flow direction of the ball is changed, and the rotating body is rotated. Since the rotor can be rotated and the blade members that can come into contact with the ball can be changed each time the wheel passes, the balls can be distributed reliably.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the distributor B700 is provided in the right-handed area, and the flow path (third flow path 701c) capable of entering into the V inlet 600a, and the V inlet 600a. Because the game ball is distributed to the channel (the second channel 701b) which can not enter the ball (hard channel), the V ball inlet can be opened while the V winning door 600 is open. Since it is necessary to fire a plurality of game balls in order to make the game ball enter the ball reliably in 600a, it is possible to suppress the game of firing the game ball in one shot and improve the operation of the game. .

  In addition, since at least four of the balls that have flowed into the distribution apparatus B700 can cause one ball to flow down the third flow path 701c, in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously fired. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball can not be entered into the V ball entrance 600 a during the period when the V prize door 600 is open.

  As mentioned above, in A2 embodiment explained, although composition which has distribution device B700 was used in order to control a game which shoots a game ball by one shot, composition other than that may be used, for example, game ball The game ball is provided with delay means for irregularly dropping the game ball in the right-handed area so that the period from the shot to the V-inlet 600a is irregular. You may use the structure which suppresses the game which shoots a game ball by one shot by making it difficult to grasp the period until it reaches V entrance ball mouth 600a easily, and a plurality of game balls are continuous. In order to prevent the game ball from reaching the V ball entry port 600a unless it flows down, a holding means for holding the game ball for a predetermined period is provided in the right hitting area, and the game ball is staying in the holding means. , A game where the following game balls are staying It may be configured so as to flow into the ball entrance possible flow path V ball entrance opening 600a by impinging on.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration of the sorting apparatus B700 is configured to distribute to the third flow channel 701 at a ratio of one ball to four balls, but the invention is not limited thereto, and other ratios may be used. The minute device B 700 may be configured by a windmill or the like, and may be distributed at random rates.

<A3 Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 301, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment will be described. FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 13 in the present third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A3 embodiment is a right area of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right hitting area) as compared with the above-described A1 embodiment. It differs in the point which varied the composition of. Specifically, it is different in that a cruise member 1700 for delaying the flow of the game ball is provided above the V winning door 600 in the right-handed area, and the other points are the same. The same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the clune member 1700, the flow of the gaming ball is delayed by flowing down the inside of the clune member 1700 as a path of the gaming ball flowing down the right hitting area, and the V prize door 600 is reached. And a normal path which flows down the outside (right side) of the crew member 1700 and flows down to the V winning door 600.

  By configuring in this manner, even after the player has stopped firing the gaming ball, the gaming ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600.

  Here, for example, if the player determines the small hitting type and a small hitting type which is disadvantageous to the player occurs, the player refrains from firing so that the game ball does not flow down to the V winning door 600. A game can be considered. In this case, since the player does not experience the V prize due to the small hitting game which is disadvantageous to the player, the damage to the game arcade becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the above-described configuration, even if the player determines the small hit type and then stops the game ball from firing, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the clune member 1700 (delay path) is the V prize door 600 Since it will flow down, it is possible to prevent the situation where the V winning due to the small hitting game which is disadvantageous for the player does not occur.

  In addition, depending on whether it flows down the delay path or the normal path, the timing at which the launched gaming balls reach the V winning door 600 changes significantly. Therefore, during the period when the V prize door 600 is open, in order to make the game ball enter the V entrance ball mouth 600a surely (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delay path), It is necessary to fire the game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the game ball is fired at a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game.

  Here, the details of the crown member 1700 will be described with reference to FIG. The clune member 1700 is formed in a conical shape, and has at the top a ball entry portion 1710 a into which gaming balls flowing down the right hitting area enter. The ball entry portion 1710a is an opening slightly larger than a single game ball (in this embodiment, the diameter is 12 mm).

  A spiral channel 1710d is formed in the interior of the clune member 1700 to cause the gaming ball having entered the ball entry portion 1710a to flow down helically along the inner wall of the clune member 1700, and at the end of the spiral channel 1710d. A bottom portion 1710c is formed in a mortar shape gently sloping to the center. The spiral channel 1710d is configured such that the gaming ball having entered the ball entering portion 1710a flows downward to the outer end of the bottom portion 1710c in a spiral manner along the inner circumferential surface of the bottom portion 1710c. There is. The bottom surface portion 1710 c is identical to the bottom surface shape of a well-known clune, and guides the gaming balls to the central portion gradually while circularly moving the gaming balls along the inner periphery of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom surface portion 1710c, a ball outlet 1710b slightly larger (in this embodiment, 12 mm in diameter in the present embodiment) than the single game ball is projected downward in a cylindrical shape. Furthermore, inside the ball outlet 1710b, a flow path is formed by a flow path wall projecting 0.5 mm in a spiral shape, and the gaming ball spirals inside the ball outlet 1710b to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b It is configured to be discharged.

  In the present embodiment, the spiral channel 1710d is formed inside the clune member 1710. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the spiral channel 1710d may not be provided. May be formed only by the spiral channel 1710d. Further, instead of the spiral flow path 1710d, a decelerating portion may be formed of a material or the like having a high coefficient of friction for decelerating the flow-down speed of the gaming ball. Any delay may be selected as long as it delays the flow of the game ball.

  As a result, the gaming balls having entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the clune member 1700 roll slowly along the inner peripheral wall of the clune member 1700 in the spiral flow path 1710d and are guided to the bottom surface portion 1710c. The gaming balls guided to the bottom surface portion 1710c are guided to the ball outlet 1710b gradually while performing circular motion on the bottom surface portion 1710c from the outer peripheral side to the center. Further, the diameter of the ball outlet 1710 b is slightly larger than that of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball rotates in a spiral shape inside the ball outlet 1710 b projecting downward by the spiral flow path formed inside. While being discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b. By configuring in this manner, the gaming ball having entered the ball entry portion 1710a of the lone member 1700 is configured to take about six seconds to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the time until the V winning door 600 is opened after the small hitting type is displayed is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if the small hit type is displayed and the launch of a new game ball is discontinued, the game ball flowing down the inside of the crew member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illegal game which prevents the player from firing the game ball after judging the small hitting type and prevents the player from generating the V winning by the small hitting game which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured to be selected so as to have many variation times shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the clone member 1700 (delay path). There is. As a result, the game ball entering the ball entry portion 1710a of the clune member 1700 before (or during) the small winning variation effect finishes the small hitting variation effect, and the V prize door 600 is opened. It becomes easy to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b at the timing. This makes it difficult for the player to control entering the game ball to the V entrance 600a, thereby suppressing an illegal game and making it easy for the game ball to enter the V entrance 600a in a normal game. , The player's interest can be improved. It should be noted that the variation time shorter (or the same) as the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the clone member 1700 (delay path) may be configured to be difficult to select.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times (2 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, 12 seconds) are selected as the fluctuation time of the small hitting. Therefore, it becomes difficult to fire the gaming ball at a timing when the V winning door 600 is opened, and to cause the gaming ball to enter the V ball entrance 600a. In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the gaming ball reaches the V ball entrance 600a largely changes depending on which of the delay path and the normal path the gaming ball flowing down the right hitting area flows down. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to launch the gaming ball in anticipation of the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the game ball is fired at a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game.

  It should be noted that the variation time of the small hit is not limited to the one described above, and may be only a variation time shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the clone member 1700 or only a long variation time. Naturally good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to predict the timing at which the game ball reaches the V entrance 600 a by providing two paths of the delay path and the normal path, but it is possible Of course, three or more paths may be provided.

  As described above, in the present A3 embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right hitting area is provided with the V ball entry port 600 a by providing the clune member 1700 above the V prize door 600 (V entry port 600 a). As a path for entering the ball, delay paths with different flow-down times and a normal path were provided.

  By this delay path, even after the player stops firing the game balls, the game balls flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600. That is, even if the player determines the small hit type and then stops the firing of the gaming ball, the gaming ball whose flow-down is delayed by the cruise member 1700 (delayed path) enters the V-in-balloon 600a. become. In this way, it is possible to suppress an unfair game in which the player determines the small hitting type and prevents the game ball from entering the V ball entrance 600a at the time of the small hitting game which is disadvantageous to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the launched gaming balls reach the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether the flow is delayed down the delay path or down the normal path. Therefore, during the period when the V prize door 600 is open, in order to make the game ball enter the V entrance ball mouth 600a surely (that is, even if the game ball flows down the delay path), It is necessary to fire the game ball before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the game ball is fired at a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time for the game ball to flow down the crew member 1700 (delay path) is longer than the time until the V winning door 600 is opened after the small hit type is displayed. doing. Therefore, even if the small hitting type is displayed and the firing of a new gaming ball is stopped, the gaming ball which is being delayed by the inside of the crew member 1700 flows down to the V winning door 600. In this way, it is possible to prevent the illegal game which stops the firing of the game ball after the player determines the small hitting type and does not generate the V winning due to the small hitting game which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured to be selected so as to have many variation times shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the clone member 1700 (delay path). There is. As a result, the game ball entering the ball entry portion 1710a of the clune member 1700 before (or during) the small winning variation effect finishes the small hitting variation effect, and the V prize door 600 is opened. It becomes easy to be discharged from the ball outlet 1710b at the timing. This makes it difficult for the player to control entering the game ball to the V entrance 600a, thereby suppressing an illegal game and making it easy for the game ball to enter the V entrance 600a in a normal game. , The player's interest can be improved.

The A4 Embodiment
Next, an A4 embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 319. FIG. In the present A4 embodiment, a sorting device 720 for sorting gaming balls is disposed in the right flow path of the variable display unit 80 in contrast to the A1 embodiment, and balls flowing down the right flow path are alternately distributed. After placing a stop on the small aisle or the fluctuation of the special symbol determined to be a big hit in one aisle configured and arranged, the gate will be the start of the small hit or the big hit game, the ball in the right channel The difference is that by continuing to be launched, it is possible to enter the ball into the V winning device 620 at the start of the small hit or the big hit. The other configurations are the same, and thus the other configurations are omitted.

  The configuration of the game board 13 in the A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 and 303. FIG. In the present A4 embodiment, the sorting device 720 is disposed at a position on the upstream side of the V winning door 600 in the right side area of the variable display unit 80. The sorting device 720 has a ball entry port 720c at the top where a ball flowing down the right channel can enter and is formed with a width through which one game ball can pass, and the ball passing through the ball inlet 720c is When it flows down, it is comprised so that it may distribute to the left side flow path 720d and the right side flow path 720e the ball | bowl which rotates to right and left and flows down alternately. At the lower end portion of the right side flow passage 720e, a start gate 720a configured of a photo sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is disposed. A small hitting game or a big hit game start is set by passing the ball through the start gate 720a. As described above, in the second embodiment, the ball does not shift to the small hitting game or the large hitting game even when the variation of the special symbol determined to be the small hitting or the large hitting is stopped, and the ball is the start gate 720a. It will be in the state where execution of a small hit game or a big hit game is on standby until it passes.

  The distribution rotation member 720b receives the entered game ball by the left accommodation portion or the right accommodation portion arranged on the left and right. When the gaming ball is received by the left accommodation portion, the weight of the gaming ball causes the sorting rotation member 720b to rotate counterclockwise in a front view to guide the gaming ball to the left flow path 720d. Here, the distribution rotation member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right, and a magnet is provided on the boundary wall between the left accommodation portion and the right accommodation portion.

  On the base body provided on the rear side of the distribution device 720, the magnets of the distribution rotation member 720b are arranged on the center line of the passage opening on the base side. The magnet of the distribution rotation member 720b and the base-side magnet are configured to be mutually repelled in polarity. In detail, the base-side magnet is configured of a rod-like magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S-pole or N-pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet is disposed and fixed so that its tip end faces the distribution rotation member 720b.

  The magnet is also formed of a rod-shaped magnet as the base-side magnet, and is fixed to the distribution rotation member 720b so that the tip end faces the base-side magnet. The distribution rotation member 720b is rotated so that the boundary wall between the left housing portion and the right housing portion is directly above (the center line of the interval at which the game ball of the passage opening can enter about 1 ball). A position where the side magnet and the magnet of the distribution rotation member come closest to each other (the tip portions face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity (for example, the N pole and the N pole), the repulsion case, stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distribution rotation member faces just upward There is no, and it will be maintained in the position turned to either left or right.

  As a result, when the distribution rotation member reaches a position where the magnet is on the center line of the passage opening (a position on the upper side), the distribution rotation member 720b is moved to the left or right by repulsion between the magnet and the base side magnet. By rotating to the left, either the left accommodation unit or the right accommodation unit faces the side (game machine upper side) that receives the game ball entering the sorting device 720. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball jam from occurring due to the entering game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the left accommodation portion and the right accommodation portion.

  In addition, for example, after the left accommodation section receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left by guiding the game ball to the left flow path 720d by repulsion between the magnet and the base side magnet, the distribution rotation is performed. It is possible to prevent the member 720b from rotating to the right (the left accommodation portion faces upward). As a result, after guiding the gaming ball to the left flow path 720d, the right accommodation portion faces upward, and the gaming chamber that has entered the sorting device 720 next is received by the right accommodation portion, and the gaming ball is As a result of the weight of the sorting pivoting member 720b being rotated about 180 degrees to the right, the gaming ball is guided to the right channel 720e. In this manner, the distribution rotation member 720b can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution device 720 to the left channel 720d and the right channel 720e. Therefore, the game balls can be distributed and guided equally to the left side flow passage 720d and the right side flow passage 720e.

  After being distributed to the right flow path 720e by the distribution rotation member 720b, the ball that has passed through the entrance 720c is moved to the left flow path 720d by rotating the distribution rotation member 720b in the left direction. It is distributed. When distributed to the left flow passage 720d, the flow is guided to a flow passage capable of entering the V inlet 600a. When the ball passes through the start gate 720a, a small hit or big hit game is started, and the V prize door 600 is changed to the open state, so the ball distributed to the left flow path to the V entrance 600a thereafter It becomes possible to enter the ball. Here, the V winning door 600 is opened three seconds after one second from the start timing of the big hit game at the small hit or big hit B (the timing when the ball passes through the start gate 720a). Here, since the ball is fired at the same interval of 100 shots per minute by the launcher, it is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds per shot. Therefore, when the ball is continuously fired to the right area, the game ball is discharged from the left flow path 720d after about 0.6 seconds after passing the start gate 720a (sorting device The flow paths are formed such that the time for the balls to flow down between the left side flow path 720 d and the right side flow path 720 e of the 720 is the same).

  Since the flow-down time from the lower end portion of the left side flow passage 720d to the V-inlet 600a is about 0.1 second, the ball will flow down before the V winning door 600 is opened, and then The ball discharged from the left flow passage 720d (1.2 seconds after first discharged from the left flow passage 720d) can be won at the V entry ball opening 600a because the V winning door 600 is in the open state. Become. In addition, it is possible to win a prize in the V-ball inlet 600a up to the ball discharged from the left side flow passage 720d.

  In this way, after passing the ball to the start gate 720a, the firing of the ball is stopped and the small hit type is confirmed by the first symbol display device 37, and the small hit number with a small number of time reductions is selected. Even if you try to avoid winning in the V winning opening 624 in, the balls that can be winning is limited to 2 balls even if firing continuously, and after firing it is allowed to win the V entrance 600a even if fired It is difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the left channel 720d is configured to be capable of entering into the V inlet 600a, but the game ball passing through the right channel 720e may be capable of entering the ball. Of the gaming balls flowing down the right channel, the gaming ball that has not entered the distribution device 720 may be configured to be able to enter the ball.

  Further, although the sorting apparatus 720 in the present embodiment is configured to alternately distribute the entered game balls, the sorting rotation member 720b may be configured by a windmill or the like and randomly distributed to the left and right. .

Regarding Electrical Configuration in the A4 Embodiment
The present A4 embodiment is different from the A1 embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 are changed. The other points are the same as in the first control example, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 307 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the A4 embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present A4 control is different from that of the A1 embodiment in that a condition device flag 203ac is added. The other configuration is the same as that of the A1 embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The conditional device flag ac is a flag indicating that the start gate 720a has been passed. It is a flag for determining whether or not the power has been returned after passing through the start gate 720a by referring to the case where the power is turned off or the like. Set to off based on the end of the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 304 to FIG. 306 and FIG. 308 to FIG. 309, an effect aspect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined to be small hitting or big hitting B in this embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 308 (a) is a timing chart showing the contents controlled by the main control unit 110 when passing through the V winning opening 624 in the small hitting game, and the timing chart of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81. It is.

  From the state that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the judgment of acceptance is executed, and when the small hitting is judged, the fluctuation display of the third symbol (special symbol) starts with the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device Be done. At the start of the change, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), the characters "roulette chance start" are displayed. Three seconds after that, as shown in FIG. 304 (b), the third symbol is displayed in the upper right in a reduced size, and roulette display is started. In the roulette display, the arrow symbol is displayed on the left side, and by the roulette symbol stopped at the arrow position, the “V” symbol indicating that the acceptance result (big hit, removed, small hit) and the V winning opening 624 have been won. And although it did not win in the V prize mouth 624, the “BIG” symbol indicating that the jackpot game has been started, and the “crossbones” symbol indicating that it is off are arranged. After that, during the variation time of the special symbol, the roulette display is displayed at high speed rotation as shown in FIG. 305 (a). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 305 (b), when the fluctuation period has passed and the fluctuation of the third symbol has stopped, the scroll (rotational display) of the roulette display is slowly displayed, and the right-handed notification symbol is displayed on the upper left The player is notified that it is a displayed and right strike period.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 306 (a), the position of the "V" symbol on the roulette display is stopped and displayed at a position coincident with the arrow symbol at the timing when the gaming ball enters the V winning opening 624. Also, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624, if the result of the determination is out at the timing when the V effective period has passed, as shown in FIG. The display is stopped at the position where the position matches the arrow pattern. Although illustration is omitted, when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624, if the result of the determination is a big hit (big hit B), stop at the position where the position of the "BIG" symbol matches the arrow symbol Displayed, it is informed that the game actually being executed is a jackpot game.

  By configuring in this way, it is composed of a series of effects until the period when it is possible to enter the ball in the V winning hole 624 has passed, whether the success or failure judgment result is a big hit or a small hit, Can be used to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 310 to 311, a pachinko machine 10 according to the A4 embodiment will be described. In the A1 embodiment, after the variation period of the special symbol has passed, if the judgment result is a big hit, a big hit game is started after 0.1 seconds, but in this embodiment, the game ball is the start gate 720a. It is different in that the jackpot game is started by passing. In addition, the description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure same as 1st Embodiment.

  With reference to FIG. 310, special symbol variation processing 2 (S140) in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S140). In special symbol variation processing 2 (S140), the processing from S217 to S220 is deleted from the special symbol variation processing (S104: see FIG. 263) in the A1 embodiment, and the conditional device determination processing (S250) is added. They differ in that they The other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The conditional device determination processing (S250) in the present A4 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the contents of the condition device determination processing (S250). In the conditional device determination process (S250), first, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the start gate 720a (S251). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate 720a (S251: Yes), an open scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S252). The big hit start flag 203j, the big hit medium flag 203k, and the condition device flag 203ac are set to ON (S254). The hour / minute counter 203g is set to 0 (S255), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S251 that the game ball has not passed through the start gate 720a (S251: No), this process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot game is started by passing the start gate 720a, the jackpot game can be started with the intention of the player.

  In the present embodiment, only the start of the jackpot game is started by passing the start gate 720a, but the small hit game may also be started by passing the start gate 720a. . By configuring in this way, the game ball having passed through the start gate 720a can be easily made to win the V entrance 600a, and the game ball can be prevented from entering a specific small hitting game type so that the game ball is It can be difficult to launch.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the start gate 720a is provided in the left flow passage 720e, but the invention is not limited thereto, and the start gate 720a may be disposed in the right flow passage 720d. When configured in this way, it is possible to enter the V entrance 600a from the passage of the start gate 720a after the game ball passes through the start gate 720a until the V prize door 600 is opened. It may be configured to be a period in which By configuring in this manner, in the small hitting game, it is possible to enter the gaming ball into the V-balloon 600a, and it is possible to suppress the game method of avoiding winning of the gaming ball in the specific small hitting type.

The A5 Embodiment
Next, the present fifth embodiment A5 and its modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In the A1 embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 in the V winning device 620 is always constant, but in the present embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed in the case of the big hit B. It differs in the point.

  In FIG. 312 (a), the jackpot B in the present A5 embodiment is executed, the gaming ball enters the V entry ball opening 600a, and the gaming ball is induced to the rotary distribution member 621 by the movable guiding member 622 Is a diagram showing the case of At a timing when the movable guiding member 622 starts to rise, the rotary distribution member 621 is configured to stop at a central position (a position where the gaming ball is guided to the V winning opening 624).

  FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 3 (S1118) in the present A5 embodiment. It differs in the point to which the process of S1281-S1282 is added with respect to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: refer FIG. 276) in A1 embodiment. The other processes are the same as in the A1 embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  After the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter is executed in the process of S1203, the process of S1281 is executed. In the process of S1281, it is determined whether or not it is time to turn off the V winning opening solenoid (the solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600) (S1281). If it is determined that the V prize solenoid is off (S1281: Yes), data for stopping the V distribution motor at the center position for 3.7 seconds is set in the scenario a (S1282). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S1204. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time to turn off the V winning opening solenoid, the process proceeds to the processing of S1204.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot B, since the rotary distribution member is configured to stop at the center position according to the V prize timing, the game which was thought to be a small hit game Can produce a fresh taste for the elderly. Furthermore, since the jackpot B can always be made to win a prize to the V prize opening 624, having won the V prize opening 624 can make it seem as if the second R was started.

  Next, a modified example of the A5 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312 (b). In the A5 embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed when it is the big hit B, but not limited to that, when the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is not changed, it is the big hit B, The decision flow path 660 is newly projected, the movable induction member 622 releases the stagnation 2 solenoid at an intermediate position, and the game ball is dropped onto the movable induction member 622, and the decision flow path 660 is played to the V prize hole 624 It differs in that it was configured to guide the ball. The determined flow path 660 is configured to be protruded by the motor, and is configured to guide the gaming ball to the V winning hole 624 with a high probability or 100%.

  FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 4 (S1118) in the modification of the present A5 embodiment. The specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment is different in that the process of S1283 is added. The other processes are the same as in the A1 embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S1207, when the hit scenario B is set, that is, when the rising of the movable induction member 622 is started, the determined flow path is operated by the motor for 2 seconds, protrudes forward, and falls from the movable induction member 622 The game ball can be changed to a position where it can be received on the top (S1283). Thereafter, the process of S1209 is performed. Although illustration is omitted, the movable induction member 622 is also set to turn off the staying 2 solenoid at an intermediate position.

  Thereby, in the case of the jackpot B, it is possible to win a prize to the V winning hole 624 via a different induction route from the case of the small jack. As a result, it is possible to switch the prize control to the V prize winning opening between the case of the small hit and the case of the big hit B, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The phrase "at the start (at the time of execution) of the jackpot (jackpot game) used in describing each control example and each embodiment described above wins the jackpot lottery of the special symbol, and the jackpot game is started" Is used as a concept to indicate the timing at which the symbol is fixed, and specifically, the special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) by a combination of symbols to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit The concept includes timing, timing when the opening period of the jackpot starts, timing when the round game of the jackpot starts, and the like.

  The phrase "at the end of the big hit (big hit game)" used in describing each control example and each embodiment described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the big hit game ends, and specifically, Is a concept that includes the timing at which the final round of the jackpot ends, the timing at which the ending period of the jackpot ends, and the timing for drawing a first special symbol after the jackpot ends.

  When a specific timing is not designated in each control example and each embodiment described above for each word used in such a concept, any one of the above described timings is appropriately adopted. It is good.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described in each control example and each embodiment described above may be combined as appropriate, and, for example, fall lottery means for executing the fall lottery used in the second control example described above For the pachinko machine 10 having a small hitting lottery means for executing the small hitting lottery used in the third control example described above may be provided.

  In addition, the fall lottery means used in the second control example described above executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the jackpot probability of the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state, but other than that The contents set for the elements of may be used to shift (fall), for example, to shift the hit probability of the normal symbol (the second symbol) from the high probability state to the low probability state (fall) It may be configured to execute a drawing for the purpose of shifting the time saving state to a normal state (falling).

  In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 that can be pressed and operated by the player is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player, but a configuration different from the frame button 22 may be provided as the operating means. Shooting results of lever-shaped operation means operable by the player in the front-rear direction, touch sensor-type operation means for detecting contact (or proximity) of the player, and photographing means for photographing the movement of the player A camera type operation means or the like may be provided to determine Further, the number of operation means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operation means may be provided.

  In each control example mentioned above, although the composition which performs the various effects performed using the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81 is used, a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, and a plurality of display means In the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing at least two or more of the various effects described in each of the control examples described above, it may be configured to execute the various effects described above using The player may be able to select an effect to be actually executed from two or more executable effects.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused. Moreover, you may carry out to the pachinko machine (so-called, simultaneous change machine) in which lottery (variation) of a plurality of kinds of special symbols (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2) is simultaneously executed.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Projection Plate Member 620 of the Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to the side end face of the light transmitting member, and being incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member In the gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light irradiating means is high. A game machine A1 comprising: an emission increasing means for emitting light, and the emission increasing means disposed outside the display area.

  Here, a light transmitting member formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to the side end surface of the light transmitting member is provided, from the side end surface of the light transmitting member There is known a gaming machine in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, JP-A-2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by arranging the light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device through the light transmitting member in a normal state. When a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiating means is made to enter from the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion Light from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups each including a plurality of reflecting surfaces are disposed, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize the light that is reflected by the reflection portion and emitted from the front of the light transmission member as a pattern or a pattern. That is, it is possible to make a pattern or a design float (display) on the front of the liquid crystal display together with the display of the liquid crystal display.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member reflected by the reflecting portion is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly raise (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiation means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption increase, but also the amount of heat generation becomes large, which causes the problem of affecting the heat to other members and devices.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the light emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member among the light irradiated from the light irradiating means, the light reflected by the reflection portion The light emitted from the front of the transmitting member can be intensified. As a result, it is possible to clearly show (display) patterns and designs. In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generation can be reduced to suppress the influence of heat on other members and devices. Furthermore, since the emission increasing means is disposed outside the display area, it can be made less visible to the player, and deterioration of the appearance can be suppressed accordingly.

  In addition, the formation position of the reflection part of a light transmissive member may be a back surface of a light transmissive member, for example, or may be the inside of a light transmissive member.

  In the gaming machine A1, the output increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front and back of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front surface and the rear surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light directly arriving but also the light emitted from the light irradiating means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the light incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member Light collection efficiency can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light reaching the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member among the light irradiated from the light irradiating means, so the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , The pattern or pattern can be clearly displayed (lifted). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generation can be reduced to suppress the influence of heat on other members and devices.

  Furthermore, when the light emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along the outer edge of at least one of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member as described above, when another device in the game area emits light. The light from the other device can be blocked by the outer edge member to prevent the light from entering from the side end face of the light transmission member. Therefore, light from other devices is incident on the light transmission member when the light irradiation means is turned off (when light is not incident on the light transmission member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmission member). It can be suppressed that a pattern or a design is displayed in front of the light transmission member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front and back of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2, the outer edge members are respectively disposed on the front and back of the light transmitting member, and therefore, of the light irradiated from the light irradiating means, The outer edge member of the front and the outer edge member of the back respectively reflect the light which is not directly incident on the side end face and which is released to the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member and is made incident from the side end of the light transmitting member be able to. Therefore, the condensing efficiency of the light which injects into the side end surface of a light transmissive member can be raised further by that part.

  Furthermore, by thus providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back of the light transmitting member, light emitted by other devices in the game area may reach either the front or back side of the light transmitting member Since it can be intercepted by each of the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, it is possible to suppress incidence from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, light from other devices is incident on the light transmission member when the light irradiation means is turned off (when light is not incident on the light transmission member and no pattern or pattern is displayed in front of the light transmission member). It can be more reliably suppressed that a pattern or a design is displayed in front of the light transmitting member.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is disposed so as to protrude outward beyond the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is disposed so as to protrude outward beyond the side end face of the light transmitting member, so the light emitted from the light irradiating means The light can be easily made to be incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member by being reflected by the projecting part of the outer edge member (the surface continuously provided to the side end surface of the light transmitting member). Therefore, the condensing efficiency of the light which injects into the side end surface of a light transmissive member can be raised further by that part.

  In any one of the game machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member in the effect exerted by any of the game machines A2 to A4, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be floated (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of materials having the same refractive index, light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member is not easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member It is easy to be transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion, and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member These include not only those advancing in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those advancing in the direction toward the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light reaching the reflection part is reduced. On the other hand, by forming the outer edge member from a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmission member as in the gaming machine A4, the light transmitted from the side end face of the light transmission member can be made the light transmission member and the outer edge member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary with the light, it is possible to secure the light reaching the reflection part.

  In any one of game machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the outer edge member is disposed in a state in which a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines A2 to A5. Light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected by the front or back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be floated (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other when the refractive index between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member is the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, the side end face of the light transmitting member The incident light is hard to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion, and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member These include not only those advancing in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those advancing in the direction toward the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light reaching the reflection part is reduced. On the other hand, as in the gaming machine A5, the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member, whereby the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member. Since the reflected light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

  The game machine according to any one of A2 to A6, further comprising: a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives a pinion gear engaged with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear A game machine A7 comprising: driving means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface. And the drive mechanism for driving the pinion gear to rotate and drive the pinion gear, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven by the drive means. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, which allows the light transmitting member to rotate together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, the outer edge member is used to combine the role of condensing the light emitted from the light emitting means on the side end face of the light transmitting member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member and rotating it. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved along with the simplification of the structure.

  The game machine according to any one of A2 to A7, further comprising: a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface. Since the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels which are recessed and guided along the guide grooves, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is exposed by the action of the guide grooves and the support wheels, that is, light The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state in which light can be incident from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, the outer edge member can be used to combine the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiation means on the side end face of the light transmission member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmission member with the support wheel. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to improve the reliability accompanying the reduction of the product cost and the simplification of the structure.

  The support wheel may be rotatably supported or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as the form in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, the form in which the rotatably supported support wheel rolls or slides along the guide groove, or the form in which it can not rotate An embodiment in which the fixed support wheel slides along the guide groove is exemplified.

  Further, in the gaming machine A8 subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member in which the curved rack gear is engraved is formed on one of the front or back of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member in which the guide groove is recessed is a light transmitting member. It is preferable to arrange each on the other of the front or back. That is, by the outer edge members being disposed on the front and back of the light transmitting member, the light irradiated from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member, and the front of the light transmitting member This is because each of the light falling off to the side and the light falling off to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the back surface, respectively, and can be made incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In addition, as described above, the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, so that light emitted from other devices in the game area reaches from either side of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member Even in this case, the light can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, and it is possible to suppress incidence from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  In the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side is opposed to the front or back face of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the facing between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is a groove.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side is opposed to the front or back of the light transmitting member at a predetermined interval. Since a guide groove is formed between the two members facing each other, the structure of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member can be miniaturized. That is, by having one of the inner walls of the guide groove on the front or back of the light transmitting member, the outer edge member does not have to be U-shaped in cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Accordingly, the above-described structure can be miniaturized accordingly.

  In addition, since the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member is the front surface of the light transmission member. Or it can be easily reflected at the back (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be floated (displayed).

  In any one of the game machines A2 to A9, the side end face of the light transmitting member is formed to be orthogonal to the front and back of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has an irradiation direction of light from its irradiation surface A game machine A10, wherein the irradiation surface is disposed to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front and back of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means Since the irradiation surface is disposed to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture in which the irradiation direction of light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The light incident from the light source can be easily reflected by the front or back of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is strengthened to make the pattern or pattern clear. It can be floated (displayed).

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A game machine comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light emitting means dispersedly disposed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the target member, the plurality of light emitting means Providing at least two of the light emitting means of the above and one or more substrate members formed elastically deformable as well as a base member for holding the substrate member in a predetermined posture that is elastically deformed Feature game machine B1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting means disposed in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the target member (e.g. -29735 gazette). According to this gaming machine, by emitting light from the light emitting means and causing the light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels the inside of the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting portion, It can be emitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member from the light transmitting material into a disc shape and forms the reflection part, while irradiating the plurality of light emitting means to the outer peripheral surface of the disc shape (target member) It was arranged to surround the periphery of the target member in a posture in which the target was directed, and a structure was devised in which light emitted from each light emitting means was made incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member (unknown at the time of filing of the present application).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around the target member, it has been newly found that the time and effort for the installation work is increased. In particular, since it is necessary to arrange the plurality of light emitting means in a posture (that is, each of which has a different direction) in which each irradiation surface is directed to the outer peripheral surface of the target member, also from this point .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two light emitting means are mounted and one or more substrate members formed elastically deformable and the substrate members are held in a predetermined posture which is elastically deformed. Because one base member is provided on the base member, the work of arranging at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, the effort of the arrangement | positioning operation | work of a light emission means can be suppressed by that much.

  Further, when the substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined position after being elastically deformed, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to arrange the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which the irradiation surfaces thereof are individually directed to the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the time and effort of the light emitting means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine B1 includes a block body which is formed to be higher in rigidity than the substrate member and is disposed on the substrate member, and the block body is held by the base member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed to be higher in rigidity than the substrate member and disposed on the substrate member, and the block body is held by the base member Thus, it is possible to easily prescribe the posture of the substrate member by suppressing the warpage and deflection of the substrate member. As a result, the attitude of the light emitting means can be prevented from being affected by the warpage or deflection of the substrate member, so that the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed to an appropriate direction and the direction can be easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is disposed in an area in which the block body of the substrate members is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is disposed in the area in which the block body of the substrate members is disposed, so the attitude of the light emitting means is a warp of the substrate member Can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed to an appropriate direction and the direction can be more easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, while the plurality of the block bodies are disposed on the substrate member with a predetermined interval, the base in a posture in which the substrate member located between the block bodies is elastically deformed. A game machine B4 characterized by being held by the body.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2 or B3, the block body is disposed on the substrate member with a plurality of spaced apart predetermined intervals, and the substrate member located between the block bodies is elastic. Since the base member is held in the deformed (bent) posture, the posture (direction of the irradiation surface) of the light emitting means is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held on the base member. be able to.

  In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the side opposite to the target member. A game machine B5 characterized in that it is disposed on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is opposite to the target member The light emitting means can be made closer to the target member while the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body is obtained because the light emitting means is disposed on the back surface of the substrate member.

  In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front of the substrate member, and a head of the screw is protruded from the front of the substrate member.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed from the front of the substrate member by a screw and the head of the screw is projected to the front of the substrate member. Can be protected by the screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head portion of the screw can be abutted against the member, and damage to the light emitting means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two of the screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

  Preferably, the two screws are disposed along the displacement direction of the movable member. By disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws disposed in this manner, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the head of the screw, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a projection is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving and fitting the projection is the other of the base body or the block body. A game machine B8 characterized in that it is recessed.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and the fitting is received and fitted with the protrusion Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body or the block body, the block body can be disposed on the base body by fitting the projection into the fitting hole, and the time and effort of the installation operation can be suppressed. . In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are disposed on the substrate member and disposed between the block bodies in an elastically deformed (bent) posture, one block body is positioned by fitting (temporarily fixed Since the base plate member can be elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body can be fitted, the workability of the arrangement can be improved.

  In any one of the game machines B2 to B8, the block body has a recess on the surface on the side disposed on the substrate member, and the recess of the block body accommodates the electronic component disposed on the substrate member. Game machine B9 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recess on the surface on the side to be disposed on the substrate member, and is disposed on the substrate member in the recess of the block body Since the electronic component is accommodated, the electronic component can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid that the movable member abuts on the electronic component and is broken.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member for displacement. Machine, the displacement member is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In the state where the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, the first member is disposed at the predetermined position between the first position and the second position. A game machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

  Here, a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member and formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member for displacement are provided. There is known a gaming machine which is provided and performs effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, JP-A-2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacing member is disposed at a retracted position (for example, one of the first position or the second position) which is invisible to the player or is on the outer edge side of the game area When a state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhanging position (the first position or the other of the second position) overhanging the game area, and the movement of the displacement member displaced toward the overhanging position is played An effect to make the person visually recognize is performed. However, in the above-described gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so it is difficult to cause the displacement member to perform interesting displacement There was a problem that there was.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacing member is elastically deformed as the displacing member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacing member is moved from the first position by the action of gravity. In the state where the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, the first member is disposed at the predetermined position between the first position and the second position. Since the gravity acting on the displacing member balances with the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, the reciprocation displacement (approximately single vibration) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member centering on this balanced position (predetermined position) ) Can be performed on the displacement member. That is, since the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be regarded as the movement of orthogonal projection of the constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, it is possible to make the displacement member perform interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if the driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a mode different from the above-mentioned displacement (movement of orthogonal projection of constant velocity circular motion). The variation of displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, only by switching whether to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, the variation of displacement can be increased, and there is no need to complicate the structure and control. It can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is formed such that one end thereof is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, one end is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. When the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacing member is released to cause the displacing member to reciprocate displacement (approximately single vibration) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be not only linear movement in the vertical direction but also combined with rotational movement with the one end side as the rotation center. As a result, it is possible to cause such displacement members to perform interesting displacements.

  The gaming machine C2 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the drive force of the drive means. And a connecting member having one end rotatably connected at a position eccentric to the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end rotatably connected to the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the transmission means is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the drive means, and eccentric from the rotation center of the rotation member And the other end is connected to the displacement member, so that the application of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is released to restore the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member. When the displacement member causes the displacement member to make a reciprocating displacement (approximately single vibration) due to the force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, and with the pushing and pulling, the displacement member Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the force in the push and pull direction. That is, when the displacing member is reciprocated, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacing member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacing member can be changed. Such displacement member can be made to perform interesting displacement.

  In the gaming machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, a direction connecting the rotation center of the rotation member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member The game machine C4 is characterized in that the direction connecting the connection position of the rotating member and the connection member and the connection position of the connection member and the displacement member are substantially orthogonal.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the connection position of the rotation center of the rotation member and the rotation member and the connection member And the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacing member are substantially orthogonal to each other. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balancing position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced when going from the balancing position in either direction of push-pull. That is, when the displacing member is reciprocated, the resistance received by the displacing member can be changed approximately symmetrically with respect to the balance position when the displacing member is reciprocated, so that the reciprocating displacement of the displacing member can be easily continued.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion protruding toward the other, and the predetermined position within the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the second position, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is more than the central range. When the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to the above, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member has a projecting portion protruding toward the other, and between the first position and the second position When the displacement member is displaced at the central side range including the predetermined position of the movable range of the movable member, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotation member or the connection member, so that the application of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is cancelled. When causing the displacement member to make a reciprocating displacement centering on the equilibrium position (predetermined position), in the central area, the occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion is avoided, and the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed. While the driving force of the driving means When displacing the displacing member further, in the outer region, the projecting portion can be made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be abuttable so that rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member can be suppressed. .

  In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A game machine C6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. Since the range is set, in the state in which the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be reduced by suppressing rattling between the rotation member and the connection member by using the projecting portion. While it is possible to stabilize, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position toward the second position by the driving force of the driving means, the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion can be avoided, so that it acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while utilizing gravity.

  For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is a projection position where the displacement member is projected toward the center side of the game area In the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member is suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and inhibition of the effects of other members can be suppressed, and the displacement member When displacing from the first position toward the second position (the overhanging position), the second position can be quickly projected (displaced), and the rendering effect by the projecting operation can be enhanced. .

  In the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotation member, the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member, and the connection position of the connection member and the displacement member are substantially aligned on one line. A gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotation member, the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member, and the connection position of the connection member and the displacement member are substantially straight Since it is positioned on a line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is the direction toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction to rotate the rotating member is It is possible to form a non-occurring state (ie, a dead center). Therefore, when displacing the displacing member toward the second position, it is possible to displace the displacing member smoothly (rapidly) while avoiding occurrence of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion. After being disposed at the position, the rattling of the displacement member can be suppressed by the action of the above-described dead center, and the appearance and durability can be improved.

  In any one of the game machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes an abutting portion formed to be able to abut on the base member, and the abutting portion indicates the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is characterized in that it is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member, and is disposed on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Gaming machine C8.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member is provided with the contact portion formed to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion includes the displacement member and the base Since it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member When the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the contact portion of the connection member is abutted against the base member, whereby the connection portion of the rotation member and the connection member (the rotation member and one end of the connection member are rotatable) It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft) with respect to the bearing hole of the portion connected to the As a result, the drive force of the drive means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a game machine comprising a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the drive means comprises: a first drive means; (2) when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the second driving means And the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

  Here, a gaming machine is known which comprises a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, and performs effects by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in the normal state, the displacing member is arranged at the retreat position which is invisible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, but when the predetermined game state is formed An effect of causing the player to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the extended position by displacing the displacement member toward the extended position is performed.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the effect of the effect by the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional game machine, the displacement mode of the displacement member (the locus when the displacement member is displaced relative to the base member) is limited in one way, so the effect by the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern Therefore, it was difficult for the player to make a presentation which made the player's sense. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed to be strong or weak, the displacement speed of the displacing member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (locus) remains constant. It was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, when the drive means comprises the first drive means and the second drive means, and the displacement member is displaced by the drive force applied from the first drive means, (2) Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner in the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the drive means, the effect of the effect by the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, as in the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (the locus when the displacement member is displaced relative to the base member) is limited in one way, the effect does not become one pattern, and one displacement member Since it is possible to displace in the street displacement mode, it is possible to achieve an effect of making a player's impression by switching the displacement mode.

  In the gaming machine D1, a first member is slidably disposed on the base member and is driven by the first driving means, and is slidably disposed on the base member and the second driving means And a second member driven by the second member, wherein the first part and the second part of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. .

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the first member is slidably disposed on the base member and is slidably disposed on the base member and the first member driven by the first driving means. And a second member driven by the second drive means, and the first and second portions of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first and second members, respectively. When the first member is slidingly displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the second part side, while the second driving means causes the second driving means to When the member is slidingly displaced, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to achieve an effect of making a player's impression by switching such a displacement mode.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the rotation centers the same and making the rotation directions different, but forming the rotation directions different and the rotation centers different as well. As a result, the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made large, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to make an impression.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connection pin which protrudes from one of the first portion of the displacement member or one of the first members is A game machine D3 rotatably and slidably inserted in a guide groove formed in the other.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and one of the first portion of the displacement member or the first member Since the connecting pin projected from the other is rotatably and slidably inserted in the guide groove formed on the other side, the driving force of the first driving means linearly displaces the first member or the driving force of the second driving means Form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side according to whether the second member is linearly displaced it can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two displacement modes, it is possible to achieve an effect of making a player's impression by switching such a displacement mode.

  In this case, since the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, there is no need to have a complicated structure as in the case of slide displacement with a curved trajectory (curved trajectory If so, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member displaced in a curved shape. ), For example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be utilized, and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability and the operation reliability as well as reducing the product cost.

  In the gaming machine D3, a gaming machine D4 characterized in that the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel, so the first driving means or the second driving means In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the drive means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first drive means and the second drive means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three displacement modes, it is possible to make it easy for the player to make an impression by switching such a displacement mode.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacing member, the type (rotation) of displacement is the same, but in addition to the one in which the rotation direction and the position of the rotation center are different, the type of displacement itself is different. (Ie, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change of the displacement aspect of the displacement member can be further increased, and it is possible to more easily make the player's impressions.

  In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first drive means and the second drive means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A game machine D5 characterized in that the speed is taken.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second member Since the displacement speed of the member is different from the displacement speed, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can not only be displaced (linear movement) parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but can be linearly moved while rotating the posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to perform the presentation of the player's intention.

  It is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement mode combining such rotational motion and linear motion by the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of one of the driving means. As in the present invention, it has become possible to use two drive means for the first time.

  One of the game machines D1 to D5 includes a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement. While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stop state. Gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the gaming machine D6 includes a second displacement member disposed displaceably on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means. At the same time, while the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stop state. The device (change) of the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to easily make an effect of making the player feel good.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking Projection Unit 5600 as an Example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiation unit for irradiating light toward the target member, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation unit are formed to be displaceable. The game machine E1 characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of the one or both of them.

  Here, the game includes a displacement member formed displaceably between the first position and the second position, and drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to cause displacement, and effecting the game by displacement of the displacement member A machine is known (for example, JP, 2011-239870, A). In this gaming machine, light irradiator (LED) is disposed inside the displacement member, and a light transmitting portion made of a light transmitting material is provided on the front surface (surface on the player side) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light portion from the back by the light irradiation means, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (the light transmitting portion) emits light. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, the change in the mode visually recognized by the player is scarce, and it is difficult to give interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed displaceably, and the displacement mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both. The manner in which the player visually recognizes can be changed. As a result, it is easy to give the player an interest.

  In addition, as a form by which the irradiation aspect of light is changed, the form by which the position of the object member irradiated by a light irradiation means is changed, the distance from the irradiation surface of a light irradiation means to the irradiation position of an object member changes, for example And the form which combined these, etc. are illustrated.

  A gaming machine E2 comprising a base member, wherein the light emitting means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed displaceably on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member and the target member is disposed displaceably to the base member. It is possible to fix the target wiring and to suppress the occurrence of disconnection accordingly.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a shielding member having an opening and disposed on the base member, and allows the player to visually recognize a part of the target member from the opening of the shielding member, and the target member is a light It is formed of a transparent material in a plate shape and is provided with a reflection part, and light reflected from the light emitting means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflection part and emitted from the front of the target member. A game machine E3 characterized by.

  Here, in the reflection portion, a plurality of groups each including a plurality of reflection surfaces are disposed, and each group has a shape of a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize the light that is reflected by the reflection portion and emitted from the front of the light transmission member as a pattern or a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the shielding member having the opening and disposed on the base member is provided, and the player is allowed to visually recognize part of the target member from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, the player can visually recognize different portions of the target member from the opening of the shielding member.

  For example, a first position at which a first group of the plurality of groups constituting the reflection part can be viewed through the opening, and a second group other than the first group is an opening When the target member is displaceable between the second position that is visible through the second position, the target member is disposed at the first position, and the opening of the shielding member causes the first group to move. By making the player visually recognize the first pattern or pattern to be formed, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or symbol to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member , And the second pattern or pattern formed by the second group.

  In this case, since the target member is formed of the light transmitting material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or the pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiating means is not irradiated. By doing this, it can be made difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and is disposed rotatably on the base member with a center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Game machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and can be rotated by the base member about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center As compared with the case where the target member is made slideable, the target member is arranged while securing the number of patterns and symbols to be made visible to the player through the opening of the shielding member. Space required for

  In the gaming machine E2, the target member is formed of a light transmitting material into a circular plate shape in a front view and is provided with a reflecting portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end surface is The light is reflected by the reflection part and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiation units are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end face of the target member. A game machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member with the center of the circular shape as a rotation center.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E6, the target member is formed of a light transmitting material in a circular plate shape and is provided with a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means The incident light is reflected by the reflection part and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the side end face of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating the light from the light emitting means, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. it can.

  In the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light emitting devices are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation units are distributed in the circumferential direction at the positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member. The light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant regardless of the phase). That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by light emitted from the front of the target member.

  A game machine E7 comprising a base member in the game machine E1, wherein the light irradiation means and the target member are disposed displaceably on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means and the target member are disposed displaceably on the base member. The variation of the change of the irradiation mode can be increased. Therefore, the manner in which the player visually recognizes can be further changed, and the player can be made to have an interest.

  The game machine E7 includes a drive unit for applying a driving force to the target member for displacement, and the light irradiation unit is in contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. And a game machine E8 characterized by being displaced together with the target member.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E7, the gaming machine E8 is provided with a driving means for applying a driving force to the target member for displacement, and the light irradiating means is an object displaced by the driving force given from the driving means When the members are in contact, they are displaced together with the target member, so that they can also serve as drive means for displacing the target member, and it is unnecessary to separately provide drive means for displacing the light irradiation means. it can.

<Feature F group> (countdown notice set freely)
The effect period setting means for setting one effect period among different effect periods, the specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect in the specific period set within the one effect period, and the specific effect execution means A notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect for notifying in advance that a specific effect is to be executed, and a trigger for starting the notification effect based on predetermined first information, which is different from the first information. A game machine F1 comprising: notification effect setting means for setting an end trigger of the notification effect based on information.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine which executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not a winning is made. Then, a game in which an advance notification effect (countdown effect) for notifying the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) is executed among effects performed for a predetermined period is executable. There is a machine. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-198568).

  In such a conventional game machine, by notifying the player in advance the timing at which the specific effect is executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the expectation of the player against the jackpot. However, when it is determined that the advance notification effect is to be executed, the content of the effect becomes monotonous because the period for executing the advance notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set. There is a problem that the player gets bored early for the effect. In addition, in the conventional game machine having the configuration described above, while the advance notification effect is being performed, the effect mode of the advance notification effect is varied (for example, the specific effect to be targeted for the advance notification effect is varied) ), There was a problem that it was not possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  According to the gaming machine F1, as the execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is executed, the start effect is set by the notification effect setting means based on the first information, and based on the second information A termination trigger is set. Since the period which performs alerting production based on a plurality of different information is set by this, the period when alerting production is performed can be set up freely, and it is effective in the ability to heighten the rendering effect.

  The gaming machine F1 has execution information determination means for determining execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting means sets execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information determination means to the second information. A game machine F2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the end information of the notification effect is set with the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is to be executed as the second information. The notification effect corresponding to can be set. Therefore, the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be performed can be executed while freely setting the period in which the notification effect is to be performed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F2, the execution information determining means determines at least a timing at which the specific effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F2, the end information of the notification effect is set as the second information, with the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is to be executed. The notification effect corresponding to can be set. Therefore, since it is possible to accurately notify the timing at which the specific effect is performed while making it possible to freely set the period in which the informing effect is performed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine F2 or F3 has, as the specific effect to be executed by the specific effect executing means, a specific effect setting means for setting one of the specific effects among the plurality of specific effects having different execution timings. A game machine F4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, for a plurality of specific effects with different execution timings, it is possible to easily set a notification effect according to the timing when the specific effects are executed. it can. Therefore, since it is possible to accurately notify the period in which the specific effect is performed while making it possible to freely set the period in which the informing effect is performed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means is different from the timing of setting the start timing of the notification effect based on the first information, and the end timing of the notification effect based on the second information. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the informing effect can be set at different timings, so the period in which the informing effect is executed is freely set. The effect can be enhanced and the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F5, the informing effect period setting means sets an ending trigger of the informing effect based on the second information while the informing effect is being executed by the informing effect executing means. Feature game machine F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5, after the notification effect is executed, the end timing of the notification effect can be set to enable setting of the notification effect, and then the notification effect is performed. It will set the execution period. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period in which the informing effect is executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. In addition, at the time when the notification effect is executed, it is not set at which timing the specific effect to be executed is the notification effect, so that the content of the notification effect is predicted by the player in advance. It can be reliably prevented.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, an operation means operable by the player, an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation performed by the operation effect executing means The operation determining means for determining that the operation means has been operated during the effect, and the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the notification effect based on the determination result of the operation determining means. A game machine F7 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the effect period of the informing effect is set based on the operation content of the operating means during the operation effect, so the player participates in the effect It has the effect of being able to boost motivation.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. And at least the second notification effect period is set based on the second information.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the second notification effect period can be set based on the second information in the period in which the notification effect is executed, so the notification effect period is free. In the gaming machine that can be set to, it is possible to secure a period for executing the effect based on the second information, and it is possible to perform an effect that the player can easily understand.

  In the gaming machine F8, the informing effect execution means is configured to execute a temporal effect that suggests over time the period until the specific effect is executed in the second informing effect period. Machine F9.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F8, it is possible to execute clocking effect during the second notification effect period, so it is possible to inform the player of the timing when the specific effect is executed. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine F9, based on notification effect period determination means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means, and the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means, A game machine F10, comprising: a time-lapse effect setting means for setting a time period during which the time-lapse effect is executed.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F9, based on the length of the effect period in which the informing effect is executed, the effecting period setting means executes the period in which the effect over time is performed for a certain period Since the timing which subtracted for a fixed period from the execution timing of the specific effect is decided as the opportunity to execute the time-lapse effect, even if a different effect period is set by the effect period setting means, the start timing of the specific effect is accurate There is an effect that can be suggested to the player.

  In any one of the game machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets a effect mode of a first effect to be executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information, and (1) A game machine F11 having first effect mode variable means for changing the first effect mode when a predetermined effect change condition is satisfied in a notification effect period.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the rendering aspect of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period is established while the first effect is being executed. It is variable when a possible effect variable condition is established. As a result, since the effect mode of the informing effect can be changed after the informing effect is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the game machine F11, the effect variable condition is established when an end trigger of the notification effect is set by the notification effect setting means.

  According to the gaming machine F12, it is possible to set an end trigger of the informing effect, and to change the effect mode of the first effect when the effect period of the informing effect is determined. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set termination timing, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine F1, an operation means operable by the player, an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means Operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect executing means. A game machine F13 characterized in that the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on the determination result by the operation determination means.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the termination trigger of the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, the effect period of the informing effect can be varied by the operation of the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine F13 has a specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result by the operation determination means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. Information for making the second information the game machine F14.

  According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F13, a specific period in which the specific effect is performed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect performed during the informing effect, and the specified period is set. Since the effect period of the informing effect can be varied based on the effect, the informing effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be performed.

  In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period out of a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect execution means is set by the specific period setting means. A game machine F15 characterized by performing the specific effect corresponding to the specific period.

  According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F14, the specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed, so that different specific effects are performed depending on the operation content of the operation means Can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. The operation effect execution means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and the length of the second notification effect period corresponds to the specific period set by the specific period setting means. It has an effect period variable means to make it change. A game machine F16 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine F16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period, By varying the length of the second notification effect period based on the content of the operation to the operation means during the operation effect, the length of the notification effect is changed. Therefore, in the case of varying the length of the informing effect, it is possible to secure the period in which the operation effect is executed, so that there is an effect that it is possible to execute the effect in which the player can easily operate the operation means.

<Feature G group> (Variation of HP display)
The variable effect is executed by a determination means that executes a determination based on the effect information, a variable effect execution means that executes a variable effect that changes the effect value based on the determination result by the determination means, and the effect execution means When the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means for determining the first effect value for varying the effect value, and the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means, the effect value A game machine G1 comprising: second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value that can be varied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not a jackpot is won. Then, the game machine executes an effect (a battle effect) in which the player character and the enemy character fight against each other as the fluctuation effect, and reports the result of whether or not the jackpot was won by the value of each strength point at the end of the effect. is there. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-9075).

  In such a conventional type gaming machine, the effect of reducing the strength points of the player character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle production, and it is determined whether the player has won the jackpot for the strength points decreasing. By informing the player in advance of the timing at which the effect of is performed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the expectation of the player against the jackpot. Furthermore, by setting in detail the strength points to be reduced during the battle effect, the effect pattern of the battle effect is increased, and the player is prevented from being bored with the battle effect. However, in the conventional game machine, detailed physical strength points displayed on the display screen are managed, and the next physical strength points are set based on the managed physical strength points, so the number of physical strength points decreases. There is a problem that the amount of processing for managing becomes enormous. In addition, although it is possible to simplify the reduction management of the physical strength point by reducing the pattern which reduces the physical strength point during the battle production, in this case, the production pattern of the battle production is reduced, and the player is early There was a problem of getting tired of

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by the plurality of determining means, it is easier to increase the variation of the effect value than in the case where the effect value is determined by 1 determining means It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine G1, when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting the specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed, and the effect state setting means, the effect value is set. The effect value updating means for continuously and variably updating, and a first effect value storage means capable of storing the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining means, the effect value updating means A game machine G2 for variably updating the effect value based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, when the effect value determined based on the first effect value and the second effect value is variably updated, it is not the added effect value but the first effect value Only one effect value is stored, and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, so the effect value actually displayed (the effect value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value) is The pattern of the value (first effect value) which is variably updated by the effect value updating means can be reduced with respect to the display pattern, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode based on a variable amount of the effect value variably updated by the effect value update means, and an effect for displaying the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means A game machine G3 having a mode display means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G2, a presentation aspect based on the variable amount of the presentation value variably updated by the presentation updating means is displayed, so by looking at the presentation aspect to be executed, There is an effect that it is possible to inform the player of the variable amount of the effect value in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of an effect value, and the second effect value is constituted by a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the first effect value A game machine G4 characterized by including effect value adding means for calculating the effect value by adding it to the second effect value.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G3, the first effect value, which is a part of the effect value, and the second effect value different from the first effect value are summed by the effect value summing means Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be made more diverse.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a privilege is awarded based on the determination means that executes the determination when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. A game providing machine G5 comprising a privilege giving means, wherein the first effect value determining means determines the first effect value when the determination by the determining means is executed.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined when the determination by the determining means is executed, and the effect value is variable. An effect can be performed so as to be related to the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable situation of the effect value, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determining means determines the second effect value based on the first effect value determining means determining the first effect value. A game machine G6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second effect value is determined when the first effect value is determined, so the first effect value and the second effect are determined. The effect value obtained by adding up the value is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the effect value which has been changed by the determination by the determination means being performed, and it is possible to provide the pleasure to be predicted.

  In the game machine G5 or G6, a game machine G7 characterized in that the first effect value determination means varies the variable amount of the first effect value based on the determination result in the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be made different based on the determination result of the determination means. There is an effect that it can be made to gaze at, and a presentation effect can be heightened.

  In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determining means makes it easy to determine the first effect value so that the variable amount is larger when the determination result of the determining means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value, the easier it is to give a benefit. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the variable amount of the effect value. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G8, the second effect value determined by the second effect value determining means is a first range or a second range different from the first range as a selectable range. The second effect value determination means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. The means selects one selection range out of the plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means and determines the second effect value. A game machine G9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, if the selection range in which the second effect value is selected is different based on whether or not the first effect value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. You can Therefore, the variation of the effect value can be easily increased.

  In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means, as the second effect value, a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased is stored, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. When the second effect value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value as a result of the determination by the determination value determining means. A game machine G10, wherein the second selection range is selected to set the second effect value.

  According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G9, when the first effect value is less than the predetermined value, the second effect value for reducing the first effect value is selected, so the first effect It is possible to suppress that the effect value obtained by adding up the value and the second effect value becomes larger than the first effect value. Thereby, for example, when the lower limit (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to suppress that the value larger than the lower limit is determined as the effect value, giving the player a sense of discomfort. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the effect to be performed.

<Feature H group> (advantage period suggestion notification of falling lottery machine)
A first discrimination means for performing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, and a bonus game execution for executing a bonus game when a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means is a predetermined first discrimination result Means, the high probability state in which the first judgment result by the first judgment means is likely to be the predetermined first judgment result, and the first judgment result by the first judgment means is the predetermined one rather than the high probability state When the predetermined determination condition is satisfied in the state where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means capable of setting the low probability state that is unlikely to be the first determination result, and the probability setting means A second discrimination means for performing discrimination is provided, and the probability setting means sets the low probability state when the second discrimination result by the second discrimination means is a predetermined second discrimination result. Yes, as a gaming state, Note: A game state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is easily established and a second gaming state in which the predetermined discrimination condition is less likely to be established than the first gaming state, and the gaming state setting In a gaming machine having a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for notifying a period in which the first gaming state is set, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state. The second game state is set when the first condition is satisfied in the state in which the game is being performed, and the period effect execution means is a first effect for indicating whether the first condition is satisfied. And the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect are repeatedly executed during the period effect, and the first condition is set by the low probability game by the probability setting means. First done And the second requirement for which the determination of the predetermined number of times is performed by the first determination means in a state in which the first gaming state is set, and the first requirement or A game machine H1 having period effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to establishment information of the second requirement.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variation state in which the probability of winning a win is high) based on winning in a win, There is a gaming machine which suggests to the player a result of an effect (for example, battle effect) as to whether or not a period in which the gaming state continues is over. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2011-143197).

  In such a conventional game machine, when the winning in the advantageous gaming state is won, the presentation result of the winning pattern that the own character wins is displayed, and when the winning in the advantageous gaming state is won, the own character The battle effect is displayed so that the effect result of the defeat pattern in which the game is defeated is displayed, and the effect result of the draw pattern without win or loss is displayed when the win is not made (when the advantageous gaming state is continuously set). Since it is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the contents of the battle effect, and the effect can be enhanced. However, in the advantageous gaming state, when the game is executed without winning in a win for a long period of time, as a result, the battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed becomes easy to be executed. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of Furthermore, in the above-described conventional game machine, the battle effect of the draw pattern is executed when a specific variation pattern is drawn without being hit as a result of the drawing. When a specific variation pattern is drawn continuously, there is a problem that the battle effect of the draw pattern is continuously executed, and the player's expectation for the battle effect is further lowered.

  According to the gaming machine H1, of the period effects performed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Then, the presence or absence of establishment of the first requirement and the second requirement can be predicted based on the effect mode of the second effect. Thereby, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the gaming state based on the effect mode of the second effect to be newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it can control that it gets bored early to a period production.

  In the gaming machine H1, a gaming machine H2 characterized in that the period effect mode setting means has a first effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the first effect.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1, the effect mode of the first effect for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is the first requirement or the first result in addition to the effect result of the second effect. Since it is set based on the presence or absence of establishment of the second requirement, it is possible to predict the result of whether or not the first condition is established, and the situation until the first condition is established, depending on the presentation mode of the first effect. Can. Therefore, the player can be made to pay more attention to the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the game machine H1 or H2, the period effect mode setting means has a second effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the second effect.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the effect mode of the second effect for determining the effect mode of the first effect is based on the presence or absence of the establishment of the first requirement or the second requirement. Therefore, the situation until the first condition is satisfied can be predicted by the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, the player can be made to look closely at the effect mode of the second effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when any one of the first requirement and the second requirement is satisfied. A game machine H4 that features.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the presentation aspect of the period effect is achieved by the establishment of any of the plurality of requirements for establishing the first condition. It is variable. Therefore, the period until the first condition is satisfied can be predicted by the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, the player can be made to look closely at the effect mode of the period effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine H4 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining period until the second requirement is established, and the period effect mode setting means is a portion of the remaining period determining means when the first requirement is satisfied. A game machine H5 characterized in that an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the determination result is set.

  According to the gaming machine H5, the effect mode of the period effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thus, it is possible to suggest the remaining period until the first condition is established by the effect mode of the period effect. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with enthusiasm while giving the player a sense of crisis, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period effect execution means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when the predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied, In the case where the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and in the case where the low probability state is set, the easiness of establishment of the effect switching condition is differentiated. Gaming machine H6.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the low probability state is set. (1) Since the frequency at which the effect is performed can be made different, the probability state currently set can be predicted based on the frequency at which the first effect is performed, and the interest of the game can be improved. It has the effect of

  A gaming machine H7 characterized by having condition setting means for facilitating establishment of the effect switching condition during a predetermined period after the first requirement is established.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H6, the first effect can be easily performed during a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, the probability state currently set can be predicted based on the frequency at which the first effect is executed for the player, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the game machines H1 to H7, the period effect execution means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result. A game machine H8 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is the discrimination result that the bonus game is executed. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, the effect will be watched while paying attention to both whether the bonus game is won or the first condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can be made interested in the effects to be executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, there is provided a number measuring means for measuring the number of the period effects which is executed while the first gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. A game machine H9, wherein the second effect mode setting means sets the second effect mode based on the number of times of execution of the period effect measured by the number-of-times measurement means.

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the term effect is repeatedly executed, the second effect mode is set based on the number of times repeated. When the gaming state is continuously set for a long time, it is possible to suppress that the same effect mode is repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, the effect period determining means for determining an effect period after the first effect is performed by the period effect executing means, and the predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied. And the effect regulation means for restricting the execution of the first effect by the period effect execution means when the effect period determined by the effect period determination means is within the predetermined period. The game machine H10 which features.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the effect switching condition is satisfied, it is determined that the effect period after the first effect is executed is within the predetermined period. In the case where it is determined, the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restricting means. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the first effect is frequently performed, and thus it is possible to suppress the player from being bored with the execution of the first effect.

  In the gaming machine H10, the first effect to be executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is not to be restricted by the effect restriction means The game machine H11 which features.

  According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the bonus game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the effect period determining means, so that the benefit game is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the rendering effect in the case of being executed is reduced. In addition, when the first effect is executed again within the predetermined effect period after the previous first effect is executed, the degree of expectation that the bonus game is executed can be enhanced, and the effect can be enhanced. It has the effect of

<Feature J group> (Different target effects at the notification timing of expectation level increase effects)
Expectation degree display control means capable of displaying on the display means a plurality of expectation degree display modes capable of suggesting the degree of expectation in order to show that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the above described expectation degree display control means At least one expectation of the display mode changing means for changing the expectation degree display mode in a stepwise manner, the variable information setting means for setting variable information to be changed by the display mode variable means, and the plurality of expectation degree display modes A variable suggestion effect executing means for executing variable indication effects suggesting that the degree display mode is variable, and the expectation degree display control means is configured to perform at least one of the plurality of expectation degree display modes The display mode is displayed on the display means at different timings, and it has execution timing setting means for setting the timing to execute the variable suggestion effect Game machine J1 to butterflies.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not a jackpot is won. Then, the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period has a plurality of display modes corresponding to the degree of expectation of the jackpot, and the degree of jackpot expectation of the variation effect this time is displayed There is a gaming machine which notifies the player by the display mode of the character. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-248305).

  In such a conventional game machine, since it is possible to show the expectation of the jackpot to the player by the display mode of the character displayed during the change production, to make the presentation contents of the change production to be executed interested It is possible to enhance the stage effect. Furthermore, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, among the plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation degree display modes in which the display mode corresponding to the expectation level of the jackpot is displayed are provided, and the display modes of each expectation degree display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation to the player by making a judgment, the player can be made to predict the jackpot expectation based on the display modes of the plurality of types of expectation display modes, and the effect to be executed The player can be made to pay attention to the content, and the effect of presentation can be enhanced. Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting a display mode of the expectation level display mode so as to indicate which display mode is displayed as the expectation level display mode. There is also a gaming machine that is configured to execute an expectation degree display mode prior suggestion effect that causes the player to predict in which display mode the expectation degree display mode is displayed as the fluctuation effect. In addition, there is also a gaming machine which changes the display mode of the expectation degree display mode from the display mode which is displayed on the display screen.

  However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expected degree display modes, when an expected degree display mode prior suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expected degree display mode is executed, an expectation that is not a target of expected degree display mode prior suggested effect There is a problem in that it is implicitly denied that the degree display mode is variable, and the rendering effect is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine J1, of the plurality of expected degree display modes displayed on the display means at different timings, the variable suggested effect which suggests that the expected degree displayed mode is changed by the variable suggested effect execution means To be executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect can be made different. As a result, even if the same effect mode is used as the variable indication effect, there is an effect that it is possible to make the expectation degree display mode to be an indication target of the variable indication effect different.

  In the gaming machine J1, determination means for performing a determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and privilege giving means for providing a benefit based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result. And the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1, since the expected degree display mode can easily show the high expected degree when a privilege is given, the player displays the expected degree display mode I will watch the contents carefully. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the game machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect is to notify variable information of an expected degree display mode which is changed stepwise.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1 or J2, variable information of the expected degree display mode to be targeted can be notified by the variable suggestion effect, so that the variable suggestion effect is given to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to cause the user to gaze closely and to enhance the rendering effect.

  In the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts including at least a variable amount for indicating a degree to which the expected degree display mode is actually changed is displayed. J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as variable suggestion effects, and therefore, the variable is larger among the plurality of variable amounts displayed to the player It is possible to play a game while giving expectation so that the amount becomes a real variable amount, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any of the game machines J1 to J4, the apparatus has object notification means for notifying the user of the expectation degree display mode to be the object of the variable indication effect executed by the variable indication effect execution means before the end of the variable indication effect. A game machine J5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the variable is executed for the player by notifying the player of the target of the variable suggestion effect to be executed this time in advance. It has the effect of being able to enjoy the suggested production with confidence.

  In any one of the game machines J2 to J5, based on the result of determination by the determination means, expectation degree type setting means for setting the expectation degree type and the expectation degree type set by the expectation degree type setting means And an expectation setting means for setting an expectation for each of the plurality of expectation display modes, and the expectation display control means is configured to set the plurality of expectation display modes by the expectation setting means. The expectation indication form for indicating at least a part of the expectation among the expectation of is displayed in advance, and the variable indication effect is set by the expectation that is already displayed and the expectation setting unit. A game machine J6 characterized by suggesting a difference between the degree of expectation and the variable amount.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, an effect is suggested that suggests the difference between the already displayed expectation and the preset expectation as a variable amount. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable indication effect is small, if the variable indication effect is executed for the expectation degree display mode in which the high expectation degree is already displayed, a benefit is given. Increase the possibility of Therefore, not only the effect contents of the variable indication effect, but also the display mode of the current expected degree display mode will be lottery, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine J2, an operation means operable by the player, an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect executing means Operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the display mode changing means varies the expectation degree display mode in accordance with the determination result by the operation determining means. Feature game machine J8.

  According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J2, the expected degree display mode is changed in response to the operation to the operating means, so that the player can operate the operating means vigorously. It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine J8, a discrimination means for performing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, and a bonus game execution means for performing a bonus game when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. A predetermined number is stored as an upper limit until an acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information when the predetermined acquisition condition is established, and the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition means until the predetermined determination condition is established. Storage means, a pre-judgment means for executing pre-discrimination based on the ball entry information stored in the memory means, and the number of ball entry information indicating the number of the ball entry information stored in the memory means In the gaming machine having the number-of-entered-information number display means to be displayed, when the predetermined additional condition is satisfied, the entered information number display means is displayed corresponding to the determination result by the operation determination means. The ball entry information And characterized in that having an additional effect execution means for executing an additional effect of varying the display mode for indicating the game machine J9.

  According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J8, the display mode for indicating the number of ball entry information can also be varied by the additional effect executed corresponding to the operation to the operation means. There is an effect that the player can operate the operation means eagerly.

  The gaming machine J9 includes effect condition determination means for determining whether the expectation degree display mode displayed by the expectation degree display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and the effect condition determination means satisfies the effect condition. The game machine J10 characterized in that the additional condition is satisfied when it is determined that the condition is not present.

  According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J9, when the expected degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy the predetermined rendering condition, additional rendering is performed, so a plurality of renderings are performed. There is an effect that it is possible to give relevancy and enhance the rendering effect.

  In the gaming machine J10, the effect condition judging means is characterized by judging that the effect condition is not satisfied when the expectation degree display mode is not displayed by the predetermined number by the expectation degree display control means. Gaming machine J11.

  According to the gaming machine J11, since the number of effects to be executed can be complemented by executing the additional effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J10, the game will be motivated by the small number of effects to be executed. There is an effect that it can control that it falls.

<Features K group> (big hit effect at the time of holding continuation)
Discrimination means for performing discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is established, benefit game execution means for performing a bonus game when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a prescribed discrimination result, and predetermined acquisition conditions An acquisition unit for acquiring ball entry information when it is established, and a storage unit capable of storing the predetermined number as an upper limit until the predetermined discrimination condition is established, and the ball entry information acquired by the acquisition unit; In a gaming machine having a predetermination means for performing predetermination based on the ball entry information stored in the storage means, the predetermination means establishes at least a predetermination condition during the bonus game. The present invention is characterized in that the prior discrimination is executed in the case of having performed, and a presentation mode setting unit for setting a presentation mode during the bonus game in accordance with the discrimination result of the prior discrimination unit. Game machine K1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, ball entry information is acquired based on entering the starting opening, and the ball entry condition can be held until the lottery condition is established, and the lottery condition is established. It has lottery means that executes a predetermined lottery based on entering information, and execution means that executes a hit game that is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the drawing means is won. There is a gaming machine. And, there is a pre-determination means for discriminating in advance the ball entry information being held by the holding means before the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and there is a hit within the hold at the end of the hit game by the pre-judgment means There is a gaming machine that continuously displays the display mode (the number of rounds) during a hit game when it is determined. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2014-30737).

  In such a conventional game machine, when the player wins the hit again within the holding state, a special effect can be executed during the second hit game, and the player can be satisfied. However, since the winning information held at the end of the big hit is determined, and the effect set at the time of winning is executed during the first winning game, for example, the winning is won during the first winning game. Even when winning prize information is held, there is a problem that the effect for the first game can not be changed, and the effect can not be enhanced.

  Moreover, although it is comprised so that a production | presentation may be made continuous with respect to a several hit game, since the effect which a player can identify easily the break of the 1st hit game and the 2nd hit game is easily performed. There has been a problem that it is easy to predict how much of a hit game will be executed during an effect which is continuously executed during a hit game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, since the effect mode during the bonus game is set based on the determination result of the pre-discrimination means executed during the benefit game, compared with the case where the effect mode during the bonus game is set in advance Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load at the time of setting the effect mode corresponding to the pre-discrimination result can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine K1, the bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means is that a plurality of small bonus games are executed, and the prior discrimination condition is satisfied when the small bonus game is executed. A game machine K2 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1, the pre-discrimination condition is satisfied when the small bonus game is executed, and the effect mode during the bonus game is set. It is possible to set the effect mode of the bonus game in accordance with the above. Therefore, even if the effect mode of the bonus game is set during the bonus game, the bonus game can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine K2, as the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, there is a bonus game selection means for selecting one bonus game among a plurality of the bonus games in which different numbers of small bonus games are executed. A game machine K3 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K2, since one bonus game is selected from a plurality of bonus games in which different numbers of small bonus games are executed as a bonus game, There is an effect that it is possible to have a change and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K3, when the result of the prior discrimination is a predetermined prior discrimination result, the prior discrimination means includes the ball entry information in which the bonus game is executed in the storage means. It is determined in advance, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode during the bonus game corresponding to the number of small bonus games to be executed in the bonus game previously determined by the previous determination means. A game machine K4 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, the effect mode during the bonus game is set according to the number of small bonus games determined by the predetermination means. There is an effect that it is possible to focus on the presentation mode.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, an execution number storage means for storing the number of small bonus games of the bonus game selected by the bonus game selection means, and a number of the small bonus games stored in the execution number storage means Among them, the small bonus game number notification means to report at least a part, the number of the small bonus game stored in the execution number storage means, and the small bonus notified by the small bonus game number notification means Notification to set the number of the small bonus games reported by the small bonus game number notification unit based on the first difference determination unit that determines the difference from the number of games and the determination result of the first difference determination unit A gaming machine K5 comprising: number setting means.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, one benefit is obtained by partially notifying the number of small bonus games (round games) executed during the bonus game (big hit) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small bonus games to be executed during the game, and while the bonus game is being performed, the game is performed while expecting to execute more small bonus games It has the effect of being able to

  A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine K5 includes addition means for adding the number of small bonus games to be executed in the bonus game previously determined by the prior discrimination means to the execution number storage means. Machine K6.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K5, when it is determined in advance that the special game is to be executed by the predetermination means during the special game (large hit), the special game determined in advance. The number of small bonus games to be executed is stored in the execution number storage unit by the addition unit. Thereby, when a plurality of bonus games are executed at short intervals, the number of small bonus games notified while the first bonus game is being executed is a small bonus game to be executed in the later bonus game Can be set in consideration of the number of Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the next bonus game is to be executed by viewing the number of small bonus games notified during the bonus game by the small bonus game number notification means, and one bonus game is ended. There is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after the game.

  In the gaming machine K5 or K6, in the case where the small bonus game is executed, the game system has an update determination means for determining whether to update the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means. A game machine K7 characterized by a certain feature.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5 or K6, it is determined by the update determination means whether the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means is to be updated. Even if the number of small bonus games is set by the setting means, the number of small bonus games may not be updated. Therefore, when a new small bonus game is executed, even if the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means is not updated, when the next small bonus game is executed, It is possible that the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means can be updated, and games can be performed while expecting to execute more small bonus games. effective.

  In the gaming machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition, a forced update means for updating the number of the small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means A game machine K8 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition, the forcible update means is notified by the small bonus game number notification means By forcibly updating the number of small bonus games, it is possible to set a period in which the player can execute the bonus game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine K7 or K8, an executed small bonus game number reporting means for reporting the number of the small bonus games already executed, and a number of the small bonus games reported by the small bonus game count reporting means, The second difference determination means for determining the difference from the number of small bonus games reported by the executed small bonus game number notification means, and the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies the second condition A gaming machine K9 comprising: forced updating means for updating the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notifying means.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the determination result by the second difference determination means satisfies the second condition, notification by the forced bonus means by the small bonus game number notification means In order to forcibly update the number of small bonus games being played, the number of executed small bonus games is prevented from being greater than the number of small bonus games notified by the small bonus game number notification means. It has the effect of being able to

  In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small bonus game number notification means determines the advance determination of the ball entering information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period of the period during which the bonus game is being executed. A game machine K10 characterized by executing a specific small bonus game number notification when the result of is the predetermined prior discrimination result.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the ball entry information acquired within a specific period of the period during which the bonus game is being executed is a result of the prior discrimination result bonus gaming In the case where the player has won, the small bonus game number notification means executes a specific small bonus game number notification. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide fun for acquiring the ball entry information during the bonus game.

  In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of small bonus games stored in the number-of-executions storage means and the number of small bonus games notified by the number-of-performed small bonus games notification means When the determination result of the third difference determination means satisfies the third condition in a state in which the third difference determination means for determining a difference and the one bonus game are finished, the one bonus game is ended. A game machine K11, comprising: an effect continuation means for continuing an effect executed during the bonus game from when the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, when the determination result by the third difference determining means satisfies the third condition, it is executed during the bonus game by the effect continuing means Will continue to be displayed. Thereby, when it is determined that the bonus game is performed by the prior discrimination means, an effect that can be continuously displayed during the bonus game after the end of the first bonus game can be displayed. is there.

  In the gaming machine K11, a gaming machine K12 characterized in that the specific condition is not satisfied at least until the next bonus game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K11, the effect continuation means performs during the bonus game in a period from the end of the first bonus game until the second bonus game is executed. Can be performed reliably Therefore, since a series of effects can be executed for a plurality of bonus games, it is possible that the game can be performed while expecting that more small bonus games will be executed while the effects are being executed. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, a storage number discrimination means for discriminating the number of the ball entry information stored in the storage means; A plurality of effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes to be executed during the bonus game, and stored in the effect mode storage means based on the number of the ball entering means determined by the memory number determination means A game machine K13 having a bonus game effect mode selecting means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

  According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K5 to K12, the presentation mode during the bonus game based on the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means when the predetermined discrimination result is obtained. Is selected, so that various effects can be provided to the player during the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine K13, the effect mode storage means plays, as the plurality of effect modes, the point at which the bonus game is started that the result of the prior discrimination of the prior discrimination means is the predetermined prior discrimination result A game machine K14 storing at least a first effect mode that can be notified to a player and a second effect mode that can be notified to a player after the bonus game is over.

  According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K13, it is informed that the result of the prior discrimination of the prior discrimination means is a predetermined prior discrimination result by the effect mode selected by the bonus game effect mode selection means Can be made different from each other, which can enhance the rendering effect.

<Feature L group> (change the frequency of presentation in the game history)
The determination means performs the determination when the determination condition is satisfied, the effect execution means for performing the effect for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the effect for indicating the specific determination result by the effect execution means It is executed by a benefit giving means for giving a benefit which is advantageous to the player when it is executed, a storage means in which corresponding game information is stored as history information when a specific condition is established, and the effect execution means Game machine L1 having, among the effects, a determination means for determining whether to execute a specific effect based on the history information.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine which executes a variable effect for a predetermined period to suggest to the player whether or not a winning is made. And there is a gaming machine which executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means operable by the player as the fluctuation effect executed for a predetermined period. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-249877).

  In such a conventional game machine, since the effect mode is changed based on the operation content of the player to the operation means, the player can be made to participate in the game with enthusiasm. However, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases if the operation effect is frequently executed to the player who does not operate the operation means with desire.

  According to the gaming machine L1, since the execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, it is possible to vary the execution frequency of the specific effect by the progress of the game or the like, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine L1 includes effect selection table storage means in which a plurality of effect selection tables set such that selection rates of the specific effects are different, and the determination means selects the effect corresponding to the history information. A game machine L2 characterized by determining a table.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1, the selection rate of the specific effect can be switched by selecting the corresponding effect selection table, so the selection rate of the specific effect is varied by easy control. It has the effect of being able to

  The gaming machine L1 or L2 has an operation means operated by the player and an operation judging means capable of judging that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the above-mentioned one of the effects When the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determination means, an operation effect for changing the effect mode is set, and the specific condition is that the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determination means. A gaming machine L3 characterized by being set under the following conditions.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operating means in the operation effect, not only the effect mode is changed, but also the specific condition is easily established. There is an effect that it is possible to make variable and influence the execution ratio of the specific effect.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the storage means capable of storing at least the history information, the setting means capable of setting the storage value with the predetermined value as the upper limit based on the storage result by the storage means, and the setting means Selection means for selecting an accumulation benefit system corresponding to the stored value to be set from among a plurality of accumulation benefit systems, and accumulation privilege giving means for imparting an accumulation privilege corresponding to the accumulation privilege system selected by the selection means And, when the new stored value is set by the setting means, the stored benefit giving means provides a new stored benefit corresponding to the stored value benefit selected by the selection means. And the selecting means selects one of the plurality of accumulation benefit systems based on the history information stored in the storage means. Gaming machine F4, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the accumulation benefit system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and the accumulation privilege corresponding to the accumulation privilege system is provided. As a result, both the setting of the frequency at which the specific effect is performed and the provision of the accumulated benefit are performed based on the history information. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine L4, the storage benefit provided by the storage benefit providing means is different for each of the storage benefit lines selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L4, it is possible to make the accumulated benefit provided by the accumulated benefit system different, so that it is fun to acquire various accumulated benefits while making the operation content of the operation means different. Can be provided to the player. Furthermore, by making the operation content of the operation means different, the effect frequency can be made different, so that it is possible to provide the player with new enjoyment even for the effect to be executed.

  The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that it has history information erasing means capable of erasing the history information stored in the storage means to a state where it is possible to select different accumulation benefit systems by the selection means. Gaming machine L6.

  According to the gaming machine L6, since the history information can be erased to a state in which different accumulation privilege systems can be selected in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L5, the following is compared to the case where all the history information is erased: Accumulated benefit system can be made easy to be selected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the motivation to acquire other accumulated benefits.

  In addition, since the accumulated value set by the setting means is also changed (decreased) based on partial deletion of the history information by the history information deleting means, the upper limit of the accumulated value is determined in advance. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the situation where the value is reached and the rendering effect is reduced.

  One of the gaming machines L4 to L6, the gaming machine L7 having guiding means for guiding a game content for selecting a specific accumulation privilege system by the selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L4 to L6, by playing a game based on the game content guided by the guidance means, a specific accumulation privilege system is selected Therefore, various accumulation privileges can be given to the player, and there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides the game contents for selecting a specific accumulation privilege system by varying the effect mode of the operation effect. A gaming machine L8.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L7, the effect mode of the operation effect is changed by the guide means, so that different stored benefit systems are selected only by operating the operation means according to the effect mode of operation effect. Will be Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L8, any one of a notification effect mode in which the operation means is caused to perform the predetermined operation and a non-informing effect mode not informing the guidance means as the effect mode of the operation effect A game machine L9 for guiding game contents using a game machine L9.

  According to the gaming machine L9, since it is possible to execute the effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easy to be performed on the operation means and the effect mode in which it is difficult to be performed as the operation effect, Only by operation, different accumulation benefit systems are selected. Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the player has a system selecting unit which allows the player to select from among the plurality of accumulation privilege systems the specific accumulation privilege system corresponding to the game content guided by the guidance unit. A game machine L10 characterized by being a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the game contents can be notified so that the accumulation benefit system desired by the player is selected, so the rendering effect is further enhanced. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature M group> (Measure of discrimination at the time of small hitting decision)
A launching means capable of launching a gaming ball based on a player's operation, an entering means capable of entering the gaming ball launched by the launching means, and a gaming ball entering the entering means Determination means capable of executing the determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means And dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means being stopped In the game having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when displayed, a game ball is inserted during a period in which the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means Specific entry which becomes ball possible Means, a specific area where game balls entered into the specific ball entry means can enter, and bonus giving means for providing a player with advantageous benefits when the game balls enter the specific area; The player identifies the type of the benefit determined by the benefit type determining unit when the privilege type determining unit determines the type of the benefit imparted by the benefit applying unit, and the identification information is stopped and displayed. Informing means for informing possible informing information, and in a case where the firing by the emitting means is stopped for a predetermined period or more after the informing information is informed by the informing means, the ball entering the specific ball entering means is A game machine M1 characterized by comprising means for making it difficult.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and the state of the hit game is set according to the type of the hit game, or the state which is advantageous to the player, or the state which is disadvantageous. It is known that the type of the hit game can be notified in a predetermined notification mode to keep the fairness of the game when the lottery result is displayed and notified by a symbol or the like. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball is set to be executed after the game ball is executed by the game ball entering a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the hit game. If the configuration is determined by the type of winning game being executed first, it is determined whether or not it is a winning type to which a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is awarded, and a specific entry or specific area There is a possibility that the disadvantage on the gaming shop side may increase by performing the gaming method of playing a game so that the gaming ball does not enter the game.

  The present gaming machine M1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming machine side.

  According to the gaming machine M1, if the player tries to avoid being given a specific benefit type by confirming notification information indicating the type of benefit determined by the benefit type determination means, another benefit type Even in this case, it is difficult to enter the specific ball entry means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage on the gaming machine side.

  In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode among different dynamic display modes combining the pseudo stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped. A game machine M2 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine M2, by temporarily stopping in the pseudo stop mode, it becomes difficult to understand the final stop timing of the identification information, and when a specific bonus game is executed, the game ball to the specific entering means There is an effect that it can control that the game method which avoids entering a ball is executed.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, a gaming machine M3 having variable control means for varying the pitch of the ball entering the specific area according to the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the ball entering rate to enter the specific area can be varied according to the type of bonus game to be executed, so the probability of entering the specific area Is easily controlled.

<Feature N group> (Direct hit production 2)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means capable of executing the judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and the identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means Dynamic display means for displaying the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means A second bonus game different from the first bonus game and the first bonus game, which are advantageous for the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result specific to the mode determination means and the display means is stopped and displayed. In a game having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, it is possible to enter a game ball during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means Specific ball entry means and its identification When the game ball enters a specific area where the game ball entering the ball means can enter and the first bonus game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, the player is given a first benefit advantageous to the player. In the case where the second bonus game is being executed, a bonus awarding means for awarding a second bonus that is advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area, and a result of the particular determination An effect execution means capable of executing an effect straddling a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entry into the specific ball entry means; N1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and the state of the hit game is set according to the type of the hit game, or the state which is advantageous to the player, or the state which is disadvantageous. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, effects up to the hit game are only performed, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early.

  The present gaming machine N1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing prematurely getting bored with a game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed in a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to entering the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect whether the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter the specific area by the effect, and it is possible to suppress a defect that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine N1, a gaming machine N2 characterized in that the effect executing means executes one effect based on types of bonus games provided by a plurality of effects.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, various effects can be performed.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the game ball does not enter even after the period set in advance in the specific area, the effect execution means switches to a specific effect and executes it. A gaming machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the player does not enter the specific area, the player is switched to the specific effect, so that the player is not effectively entering the specific area. Has the effect of being able to

<Feature P group> (A delay device is provided at the top of V attacker to prevent choro strike)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means capable of executing the judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and the identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means Dynamic display means for displaying the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means An aspect determination means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result specified on the display means is stopped and displayed. In the game, a specific ball entering means that enables the game ball to enter during the bonus game being executed by the bonus game executing means, and a specific ball entering the game ball that enters the specific ball entering means The game ball enters the area and its specific area In the case where there is a benefit giving means for giving a benefit advantageous to the player, a benefit type determining means for determining the type of the benefit given by the benefit giving means, and the identification information is stopped and displayed, Notification means for notifying information on the type of the benefit determined by the benefit type determination means, and predetermined for the game sphere directed to the specific entry means at a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific entry means A game machine P1 comprising: adjustment means for reducing a flow rate with respect to a period.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and the state of the hit game is set according to the type of the hit game, or the state which is advantageous to the player, or the state which is disadvantageous. It is known that the type of the hit game can be notified in a predetermined notification mode to keep the fairness of the game when the lottery result is displayed and notified by a symbol or the like. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball is set to be executed after the game ball is executed by the game ball entering a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the hit game. If the configuration is determined by the type of winning game being executed first, it is determined whether or not it is a winning type to which a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player is awarded, and a specific entry or specific area There is a possibility that the disadvantage on the gaming shop side may increase by performing the gaming method of playing a game so that the gaming ball does not enter the game.

  The game machine P1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the disadvantage on the game shop side.

  According to the gaming machine P1, since the flow-down amount for the predetermined period guided to the specific ball entering means is reduced by the adjusting means, the information notified by the notifying means is discriminated and the gaming ball is inserted into the specific ball entering means There is an effect that it can be difficult to strike out whether or not to make a ball.

  In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball to the playing area, a firing intensity variable means capable of changing the firing intensity fired by the launching means by the player's operation, and The first channel and the second channel in which gaming balls having flowed down the first channel have difficulty in flowing, and the adjusting means is configured to receive the game ball flowing down the second channel as the specific ball entry A gaming machine P2 characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio between a specific flow passage capable of entering the means and a flow passage which is difficult to enter the specific entering means.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P1, of the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path, the amount of gaming balls guided to the specific ball entry means can be easily reduced. effective.

  In the gaming machine P1, a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball to the playing area, a firing intensity variable means capable of changing the firing intensity fired by the launching means by the player's operation, and There is one flow path and a second flow path in which gaming balls flowing down the first flow path are difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls over the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more A game machine P3 characterized in that it has rolling means capable of moving to discharge the game balls into the flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, since the gaming ball having flowed down the second flow path is rolled by the adjustment means for a predetermined period or more, it is assumed that the player has stopped firing the gaming ball. Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be induced to the specific ball entry means by the lapse of a predetermined period.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, during the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entering means can enter the ball, to the second flow path A game machine P4 characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than a period from firing the game ball to reaching the specific ball entering means through the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, in order to enter the specific ball entry means, it is necessary to continuously launch the gaming ball, and thus the identification There is an effect that it is possible to regulate a game method which does not cause a special bonus game to enter a specific entering means.

<Feature Q group> (Chorrow strike measures 2)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means capable of executing the judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and the identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means Dynamic display means for displaying the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means An aspect determination means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result specified on the display means is stopped and displayed. In the game, a specific ball entering means that enables the game ball to enter during the bonus game being executed by the bonus game executing means, and a specific ball entering the game ball that enters the specific ball entering means The game ball enters the area and its specific area In the case of winning, a benefit giving means for giving a benefit advantageous to the player, a benefit type determining means for determining the type of the benefit to be given by the benefit giving means, and guiding the game ball to the specific entering means A game machine Q1 characterized by having adjustment means for reducing the flow-down amount for a predetermined period of the game ball guided to the specific ball entry means at a possible position.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and the state of the hit game is set according to the type of the hit game, or the state which is advantageous to the player, or the state which is disadvantageous. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the disadvantage of the gaming arcade may increase by performing a gaming method of playing a game ball so that the game ball does not enter the specific ball entrance or specific area. was there.

  The present gaming machine Q1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the disadvantage on the gaming shop side.

  According to the gaming machine P1, since the flow-down amount for the predetermined period guided to the specific ball entering means is reduced by the adjusting means, the information notified by the notifying means is discriminated and the gaming ball is inserted into the specific ball entering means There is an effect that it can be difficult to strike out whether or not to make a ball.

  In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball to the playing area, a firing intensity variable means capable of changing the firing intensity fired by the launching means by the operation of the player, and The first channel and the second channel in which gaming balls having flowed down the first channel have difficulty in flowing, and the adjusting means is configured to receive the game ball flowing down the second channel as the specific ball entry A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that it is distributed at a predetermined ratio between a specific flow passage capable of entering the means and a flow passage which is difficult to enter the specific entering means.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, among the gaming balls flowing down the second flow path, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of gaming balls guided to the specific ball entry means effective.

  In the gaming machine Q1, a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball to the playing area, a firing intensity variable means capable of changing the firing intensity fired by the launching means by the operation of the player, and There is one flow path and a second flow path in which gaming balls flowing down the first flow path are difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls over the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more A game machine Q3 characterized by having rolling means capable of moving to discharge the game balls into the flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q1, the gaming ball having flowed down the second flow path is rolled by the adjusting means for a predetermined period or more, so that the player has stopped firing the gaming ball Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be induced to the specific ball entry means by the lapse of a predetermined period.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, during the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until the specific ball entering means can enter the ball, to the second flow path A game machine Q4 characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than a period from firing the game ball to reaching the specific ball entry means through the adjusting means.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, in order to enter the specific ball entry means, it is necessary to continue firing the gaming ball, and thus the identification There is an effect that it is possible to regulate a game method which does not cause a special bonus game to enter a specific entering means.

<Features R group> (representation up to V passage in small hit and direct hit)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means capable of executing the judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and the identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means Dynamic display means for displaying the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means A second bonus game different from the first bonus game and the first bonus game, which are advantageous for the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result specific to the mode determination means and the display means is stopped and displayed. In a game having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, it is possible to enter a game ball during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means Specific ball entry means and its identification When the game ball enters a specific area where the game ball entering the ball means can enter and the first bonus game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, the player is given a first benefit advantageous to the player. In the case where the second bonus game is being executed, a bonus awarding means for awarding a second bonus that is advantageous to the player regardless of entering the specific area, and a result of the particular determination An effect executing means capable of executing an effect straddling a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to the entering of the specific ball entering means, the effect executing means comprising A gaming machine characterized in that it is intended to execute suggestion effects suggesting that the method of firing the gaming ball is switched in stages before the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. R1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and the state of the hit game is set according to the type of the hit game, or the state which is advantageous to the player, or the state which is disadvantageous. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, effects up to the hit game are only performed, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early.

  The present gaming machine N1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing prematurely getting bored with a game.

  According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, the effect is executed in a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information to entering the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to expect whether the identification information not only indicates a specific determination result but also to enter the specific area by the effect, and it is possible to suppress a defect that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine R1, a gaming machine R2 characterized in that the effect executing means executes one effect based on types of bonus games provided by a plurality of effects.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, when the game ball does not enter even after the period set in advance in the specific area passes, the effect execution means switches to a specific effect and executes it. With gaming machine R3.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine R1 or R2, when the player does not enter the specific area, the player is switched to the specific effect, so that the player is not effectively entering the specific area. Has the effect of being able to

<Feature S group> (2 kinds of control switching with small hitting and per pattern)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means capable of executing the judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and the identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means Dynamic display means for displaying the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means A second bonus game different from the first bonus game and the first bonus game, which are advantageous for the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result specific to the mode determination means and the display means is stopped and displayed. In a game having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, it is possible to enter a game ball during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means Specific ball entry means and its identification When the game ball enters a specific area where the game ball entering the ball means can enter and the first bonus game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, the player is given a first benefit advantageous to the player. If the second bonus game is being executed, the player may enter a bonus awarding unit for awarding a second bonus that is advantageous to the player regardless of entering the special area, and entering the special entering unit. Switching means for switching between a first state capable of guiding a game ball to the specific area to the specific area and a second state in which guidance to the specific area is difficult, and the first bonus game When 1 is executed, the first switching information in which the guiding path is switched is set by the switching means, and when the second bonus game is executed, the second switching different from the first switching information And setting means for setting information. That the gaming machine S1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state of the hit game is set depending on the type of the hit game, or the state to be advantageous to the player is set, or the state to be disadvantaged is set. It has been proposed that when a game ball enters the area, a bonus game such as a game is executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-9795).

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the interest of the game has been further improved.

  The present gaming machine P1 is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the induction track is switched between the first bonus game and the second bonus game, it is possible to show the player the guidance mode to a different specific area, and to improve the interest of the game It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine S1, a gaming machine S2 characterized in that switching to the first state is performed by switching the guide path according to the second switching information.

  According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, the guiding path is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so in the second bonus game, it is easy to enter the gaming ball in the specific area, Even in the second benefit game, it is possible to make the player feel as if the second benefit is given by entering the specific area.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, a plurality of different pieces of information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information can be diversified, and the guiding state of the guiding path can be variously switched.

<Feature T group> (2 kinds of switching 2 for small hitting and per pattern)
The ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means capable of executing the judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and the identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means Dynamic display means for displaying the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and dynamic display mode for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means A second bonus game different from the first bonus game and the first bonus game, which are advantageous for the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result specific to the mode determination means and the display means is stopped and displayed. In a game having a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game, it is possible to enter a game ball during a period in which the first bonus game or the second bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means Specific ball entry means and its identification When the game ball enters a specific area where the game ball entering the ball means can enter and the first bonus game is executed and the game ball enters the specific area, the player is given a first benefit advantageous to the player. If the second bonus game is being executed, the player may enter a bonus awarding unit for awarding a second bonus that is advantageous to the player regardless of entering the special area, and entering the special entering unit. Switching means for switching between a first state capable of guiding a game ball to the specific area to the specific area and a second state in which guidance to the specific area is difficult, and the first bonus game When 1 is executed, the switching means sets first switching information for switching the guiding path, and when the second bonus game is executed, the guiding path is switched to the first state. And 2) setting means for setting switching information. Game machine T1 which is characterized in.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. The game is executed, and the state of the hit game is set depending on the type of the hit game, or the state to be advantageous to the player is set, or the state to be disadvantaged is set. It has been proposed that when a game ball enters the area, a bonus game such as a game is executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-9795).

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the interest of the game has been further improved.

  The present gaming machine P1 is made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

  According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the induction track is switched between the first bonus game and the second bonus game, it is possible to show the player the guidance mode to a different specific area, and to improve the interest of the game It has the effect of

  In the gaming machine T1, in the case of being switched to the first state by the second switching information and in the case of being switched to the first state by the first switching information, the gaming ball to the specific area by different induction paths A game machine T2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1, since the user is guided to the specific area by different induction, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being bored early.

  In the gaming machine T1 or T2, a plurality of different pieces of information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information can be diversified, and the guiding state of the guiding path can be variously switched.

  In any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering a starting opening provided in the gaming board, and the lottery result is displayed by a symbol etc. It is known to notify in the notification mode to keep the fairness of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).
In such a gaming machine, it is required to reduce the damage caused by illegal gaming.
The present technical concept is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing damage caused by illegal gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a ball entering means capable of entering game balls and a judgment capable of executing judgment when the game balls enter the ball entering means Means, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and a dynamic display by the dynamic display means Dynamic display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information to be displayed, and the player is advantageously selected when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means. And a special entering means capable of entering the game ball during a period in which the special game is executed by the special game executing means, and the specific entering means The game ball which entered the ball means can enter the special An area, a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area, a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege to be provided by the privilege giving means; And adjusting means for reducing the flow-through amount for a predetermined period of the gaming ball guided to the specific ball entry means at a position where the gaming ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball to the playing area and the firing intensity emitted by the launching means can be varied by the player's operation. And a second flow path where the gaming ball which has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means is configured to The game balls flowing down the second flow path are distributed at a predetermined ratio into a specific flow path capable of entering the specific ball entry means and a flow path in which entry into the specific ball entry means is difficult.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball to the playing area and the firing intensity emitted by the launching means can be varied by the operation of the player And a second flow path where the gaming ball which has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means is configured to It has rolling means capable of rolling the gaming ball having flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or longer and discharging the gaming ball to the flow path guided to the specific ball entry means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the specific entering means enters after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. The period until the ball becomes possible is configured to be shorter than the period from firing the gaming ball into the second flow path to reaching the specific ball entry means through the adjustment means. .
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means capable of executing the judgment when the game ball enters the ball entering means, and Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and the identification dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of information, and a bonus game advantageous for the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. A special ball entering means capable of entering a game ball during a period in which the bonus game is being executed by the bonus game executing means, and a special ball entering means for entering the special ball means. The specific area where the game ball which entered the ball can enter and its When the game ball enters the fixed area, the benefit granting means for granting advantageous benefits to the player, the benefit type deciding means for deciding the type of the benefit granted by the benefit granting means, and the specific entry And adjusting means for reducing the amount of flow for a predetermined period of the gaming ball guided to the specific ball entry means at a position where the gaming ball can be guided to the ball means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the illegal game can be suppressed and the damage due to the illegal game can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, a launcher capable of launching a game ball to the game area, a launch intensity variable unit capable of changing the launch intensity to be launched by the launcher by the operation of the player, and the first channel And the second flow path in which the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means moves the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path to the specific ball entering means It distribute | arranges to the specific channel which can be thrown into a ball, and the channel which becomes difficult to enter into the said specific ball entry means by a predetermined ratio.
Therefore, there is an effect that the illegal game can be suppressed and the damage due to the illegal game can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, a launcher capable of launching a game ball to the game area, a launch intensity variable unit capable of changing the launch intensity to be launched by the launcher by the operation of the player, and the first channel And the second flow path in which the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means rolls the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more It has rolling means capable of discharging the gaming ball into the flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the illegal game can be suppressed and the damage due to the illegal game can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, after a period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed to when the specific ball entry means can enter the ball, the game ball is fired to the second flow path It is comprised shorter than the period until it arrives at a specific ball entering means through the said adjustment means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the illegal game can be suppressed and the damage due to the illegal game can be reduced.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)

Claims (2)

Launching means capable of launching the game ball into the game area;
A variable launch intensity means capable of changing the launch intensity to be launched by the launch means by the operation of the player;
A first flow path through which gaming balls can flow down, and a second flow path through which the gaming balls flowing down the first flow path are difficult to flow down;
Entry means that can enter the game ball,
Determining means capable of executing determination when the game ball enters the ball entering means;
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means;
In a game having bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game which is advantageous to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means in a stop state.
A specific ball entering means capable of entering a game ball having flowed down the second flow path during a period in which the bonus game is being executed by the bonus game executing means;
A specific area where game balls entered into the specific entry means can enter
A bonus giving means for giving a player an advantageous benefit when the game ball enters the specific area;
Privilege type determination means for determining the type of the privilege to be granted by the privilege giving means;
Adjusting means capable of reducing the flow-through amount for a predetermined period of the gaming ball guided to the specific ball entry means at a position where the gaming ball can be guided to the specific ball entry means;
During the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed until when the specific ball entry means becomes capable of entering the ball, the adjustment is performed after the gaming ball is fired to the second flow path. A game machine characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than a period until it reaches a specific ball entry means by means . The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images